HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2002-R0415 - Contract For Construction Of New Fire Station - 10_10_2002Resolution No. 2002—RO415
October 10, 2002
Item No. 37
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and
directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a Contract for
construction of new Lubbock Fire Station #6, by and between the City of Lubbock
and Sandia Construction, Inc. of Lubbock, Texas and related documents. Said Contract
is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall
be included in the minutes of the City Council.
Passed by the City Council this loth day of October
MCDQU!�KL, MAYOR
ATTEST:
Rebecca Garza, City Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
Qtnk&MM�--
Victor Kilmanj Purchasing Manager
APPROVED AS TO FORM:
William de Haas
Contract Manager/Attorney
gs:/ccdocs/Contract-Sandia Construction. res
September 30, 2002
pi, iyj.1
Y�4 Y :11 �-JOSOCK
f`AIKOO FOR
CCOMTRVC nON 00 W9WtU O K F St ATION
S4 11M.
- P..,.ned Progress m
0 A
cvry I" t..UBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
ITB #178-02/RS, Addendum #2
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ADDENDUM #2
own 1625 3 ROOMTSTREET OMUNICIPAL BUILDING ITB #178-02/RS
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 Construction of Lubbock Fire Station #6
PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164
http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
r.
,.. MAILED TO VENDOR: September 19, 2002
CLOSE DATE: September 25, 2002 2:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above. named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
^� addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed the five (5) page addendum #2 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
-•• City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164
or Email to: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
0
1 TB-02Add2.doc
am
ON nuuuuuu/u■
/rouuuuo/u■
nnuuurutru■
uu■ ro
U tl UNN Houut■
rl • 11�r• IL_J■
/I /h \• Irrr/
111!
ADDENDUM NO.2
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: City of Lubbock Fire Station No. 6
am
DATE: September 19, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8602-01
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced
Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and
modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 8/19/02 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 3 page(s), plus 2 attachment(s).
SPECIFICATIONS:
Man Section 01500
1.
Paragraph 1.4, DELETE paragraph A.
Section 08800
1.
Paragraph 2.2, B, 5, REPLACE the value of 0.10 maximum to 0.40 maximum.
2.
Paragraph 2.2, B, 6, REPLACE the value of 0.10 maximum to 0.40 maximum
3.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 3, b, REPLACE "Solar gray" with "Clear w/ low E coating."
4.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 4, REPLACE the value of 60 percent with 37 percent and
REPLACE the value of 75 percent with 27 percent.
�* 5.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 5, REPLACE the value of 0.65 with 0.45.
6.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 6, REPLACE the value of 33 percent with 8 percent and
REPLACE the value of 28 percent with 8 percent.
am 7.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 7. REPLACE the value of 0.19 with 0.35.
8.
Paragraph 2.2, C, 8, REPLACE the value of 0.10 with 0.39.
�• Section 09650
1.
Paragraph 2.2, A, 8, c, REPLACE "(Classic Corlon)" with the following:
"(Medintech Tandem)."
Section 15440
1.
Paragraph 2.7, DELETE Paragraph A and REPLACE with the following: "Provide
.,
Halsey Taylor Models BFMR-Q and BFM fully recessed barrier -free electric water
coolers as fixture EWC-1. Contractor shall field connect BFM model to chilled water
Plan PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers 0 Architects
■ Planners
4222 851h Street
■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200
FAX (806) 473-3500
neeI Lubbock
ElPaso Midland Amarillo
,■ 1 from BFMR-Q as per manufacturers directions. The refrigeration system from the
BFMR-Q unit shall provide chilled water for each unit. Provide stops and P-traps for
each unit as per manufacturers recommendations. Refer to Architectural drawings for
new EWC-1 location and for bubbler mounting heights." Refer to attached drawing
AD1-01 for relocation of EWC-1 and electrical connections.
DRAWINGS:
Sheet S5
1. Under GENERAL NOTES, SECTION VIII, REPLACE paragraph A with the
following: "Roof deck at lower roof and entrance canopy shall be 20 gauge TYPE '1';
high roof shall be 20 Gauge TYPE '2' deck puddle welded to supporting structure at
12" O.C."
Sheet A101
1. In OFFICE 104, DELETE the equipment N.I.C. located east of the built-in counter.
Sheet A201
1. DELETE detail A2.
2. In elevation Bl, change the urinal rim height dimension from 2'-0" to l'-5" MAX.
Sheet A401
1. In enlarged floor plan A2, MEN 120, DELETE the elevation key A2/A201 and
REPLACE with C4/A202.
Sheet P-101
1. DELETE EWC-1 location and provide EWC-1 in location shown on attached drawing
�. AD 1-01.
Sheet MPE-101
�. 1. ADD (1) 1" conduit from existing box on northwest of lot into the station and terminate
adjacent to the control box for the west overhead door for control of traffic preemt
system, cabling by owner. Install cap and pull string. Coordinate with Owner and
Architect for exact location.
Sheet E-101
■_ 1. DELETE fixture L1 from lighting fixture schedule.
Sheet E-102
1. MOVE GFCI receptacle on wall adjacent to Men's 120, near location of new EWC-1.
Move receptacle west of EWC-1. Refer to attached drawing AD2-D2.
CLARIFICATIONS:
1. Sheet A202, Section D4 is a cut through the lockers, not an elevation of an additional locker.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 851'' Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 FAX (806) .473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo
m
AM
ue
2. All millwork shall be AWI Custom Grade Reveal Overlay Red Oak Transparent Finish, unless
noted otherwise on drawings, or where PLAM finish is called out on drawings or scheduled.
3. Sheet E-103 shows a square with a "C" inside of it. This symbol represents a carbon monoxide
detector.
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers a Architects ■ Planners
4222 851" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 ■ FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock ElPaso
Midland
Amarillo
5'-0"
"^ LOW UNIT SHALL BE 2'-2"
CENTERLINE FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE SLOPED
SURFACE
am
P.
A.
PARTIAL PLUMBING PLAN
SCALE: 1/5' = 1'-0". NORTH
Project Name: Fire Station #6 Sheet: AD2-01
Project Address: 3320 35th Street . Issue Date: Sept 19, 2002
Lubbock, Texas Revisions:
ADDENDA #2 PSC Project #:03.8602.01
MM
KEYED NOTES
AS INDICATED BY: a
1 PROVIDE (1) NEW DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AT THIS LOCATION FOR EWC-1.
EXTEND (2) #12 AWG WITH #12 GND IN 3/4" CONDUITTO SPARE 20A-1P
BREAKER IN PANEL "LP" (LP-40).
2 RELOCATED RECEPTACLE
PARTIAL
ELECTRICAL PLAN
SCALE: 1 /8" =
1 '—O"
NORTH
.■.
■■■■■■.■■■■■r■■■■■
■■■■r■■■■■■■■rr■■■
Project Name:
Fire Station #6
Sheet: AD2-02
UUMMUMM
r■■r■■■■■■■■rr■r■■
Project Address:
3320 35th Street
. Issue Date: Sept 19, 2002
Lubbock, Texas
Revisions:.
- ■l .. .■ 1■■■■
.a� n ..-.. . i■• in on
.11 ■■■■• ■. ■■
ADDENDA #2
PSC Project :03.8602.01
■■■■■r■■■■:■■■■:■■
..................
a
ITB #178-02/RS, Addendum #1
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13T" STREET
LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164
http-J/purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us
MAILED TO VENDOR:
OLD CLOSE DATE:
NEW CLOSE DATE:
ADDENDUM # 1
ITB #178-02/RS
Construction of Lubbock Fire Station #6
September 10, 2002
September 19, 2002 a 2:00 p.m.
September 25, 2002 a 2:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation.to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The closing date has been changed from 2:00 p.m., September 19, 2002 to the new closing date of 2:00
p.m., September 25, 2002.
^^ 2. Please find enclosed the five (5) page addendum from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164
or Email to: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
® 178-02Add1.doc
ED ARC
uuuuu■rron■
Z i 11 l_J� 11 1�
Z J■� \/ 1■■■■
■i f / 11 1■
�i
...1 , I.
20:1
iiiiiiiiiRNammai
14746
C
ADDENDUM NO.1
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: City of Lubbock Fire Station No. 6
DATE: September 10, 2002
PSC Job No: 03-8602-01
e11■
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following
modifications to the referenced
Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached
to the Contract Documents, and
am
modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 8/19/02 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 1 attachment(s).
SPECIFICATIONS:
Was
Section 10350 FLAGPOLES
1. Insert the attached specification section 10350 FLAGPOLES.
..,
DRAWINGS:
OWN
None
CLARIFICATIONS:
None
END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
I^
.w
1�1 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
4222 851 Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500
A/. Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
on
0
..
0
o
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flagpoles: .
a. Location of flagpole is shown on drawings.
2. Flagpole fittings and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Earthwork: Division 2.
2. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B. ASTM B 241B 241M-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy
Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube; 1993.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide flagpole and anchorage system to comply with the following requirements:
1. Flagpole with flag flying: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without
permanent deformation, when flying appropriately sized flag.
2. Flagpole without flag: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent
deformation.
3. Safety design factor: 2.5.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of flagpole required. Include data for fittings and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings bearing the stamp of a professional structural
engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. Include the following:
1. Configuration of flagpoles and bases.
2. Details showing jointing, anchorage, and support systems.
3. Substantiation of compliance with performance requirements indicated in contract
documents.
4. Flagpole finishes, fittings, and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products
specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar
service conditions for not less than 5 years.
03860201
08/02
FLAGPOLES
10350 - 1
Addendum No. 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in
this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products.
B. Provide suitable protection for each flagpole before shipment. Spiral=wrap pole with heavy
kraft paper or polyethylene material and place pole in hard protective tube.
C. Deliver flagpoles and accessories properly labeled and in original wrappings.
D. Store and handle materials in a manner which will prevent damage prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those Considered acceptable:
1. Aabec Pole Division/Morgan-Francis Company, Inc.
2. Acme Flagpole Division/Lingo, Inc.
3. American Flagpole Division/Kearney-National, Inc.
4. Baartol Company, Inc.
5. Concord Industries, Inc.
6. EMC Division/Eder Manufacturing Corporation.
7. John Ewing & Company, Inc.
XM
2.2 FLAGPOLES
., A. Description:
1.
Mounting: Ground -set, embedded.
2.
Type: Conventional.
... 3.
Shaft metal: Aluminum.
4.
Shaft form: Cone tapered.
5:
Exposed length of flagpole: 25 feet
6.
Halyard: Internal.
7.
Flag:
a. American flag.
b. 4 by 6.
C. 100 percent nylon.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication - General: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit fabricated by a single
manufacturer, including base, anchorage devices, fittings, and accessories as necessary for
proper installation.
B. Fabricate and ship flagpole as a single unit, unless shipping constraints preclude this
alternative. Where flagpole size dictates shipment in more than one section, provide
self -aligning internal sleeve composed of metal compatible with shaft metal and properly
designed to allow precise, weathertight joining during installation.
03860201 FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2
08/02 Addendum No. 1
0
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
MR
C. Flagpole Diameter and Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of shaft and ratio of top diameter
to butt diameter must be appropriate for metal or alloy used and for length of flagpole.
D. Joints
and Seams: Form joints and seams which are inconspicuous.
1.
Exposed welds: Grind exposed welds smooth. Finish to match flagpole shaft.
E. Aluminum Shaft:
1.
Seamless extruded tube: Comply with ASTM B 241.
2.
Alloy:6063-T6.
3.
Minimum wall thickness: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Minimum tensile strength: 30,000 psi.
5.
Minimum yield point: 25,000 psi.
6.
After flagpole is fabricated, heat-treat and artificially age to alter temper of
aluminum.
7.
Shaft finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M32C22A41 (medium satin directional
textured mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; clear,
architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick).
^°
F. Ground -Set Flagpole - Embedded Type:
1.
Provide flagpole of sufficient overall length to allow setting depth which is not less
than 10 percent of exposed length.
.�
2.
. Flash collar: Fabricate from same metal used for flagpole shaft.
a. Product: Selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards based on
availability for shaft size.
,..,
3.
Foundation sleeve:. Corrugated galvanized steel tube, 16 gage.
4.
Foundation sleeve plate: Square steel plate welded to bottom of foundation sleeve.
a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 4 inches larger than inside
diameter of foundation sleeve.
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
5.
Steel centering wedges: Minimum 1/8-inch-thick wedges, welded to sleeve plate
inside foundation sleeve for the purpose of centering pole.
6.
Electrical grounding spike: 3/4-inch steel spike, welded to bottom side of sleeve
plate.
a. Length of extension below concrete foundation: Not less than thickness of
OWNconcrete
footing below sleeve plate.
7.
Foundation support plate: Square steel plate welded to electrical grounding spike at
base of concrete foundation.
a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 6 inches.
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
G. Fittings:
�.
1.
Truck:
a. Truck designed for internal halyard system.
2.
Halyards:
�-
a. Internal type:
1) Cable: Stainless steel, with vinyl- or neoprene -covered weight.
2) Winch: Direct drive type, internally mounted, with control stop to hold
ow
flag in any position on pole.
3) Winch crank: Removable.
4) Winch access door: Flush -mounted, with cylinder lock.
03860201
FLAGPOLES 10350 - 3
08/02
Addendum No. 1
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Flag snaps:
a. Number required: Two flag snaps per halyard.
b. Material: Bronze, manufacturer's standard.
C. Sheaths: Provide heavy vinyl or neoprene sheath for each flag snap.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Provide materials for concrete flagpole foundations as specified in Division 3, 3,000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents.
B.
Ground -Set Flagpole: Verify that foundation is in suitable condition to receive flagpole.
C.
Do not begin flagpole installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Embedded Ground -Set Pole:
•-,
1. Bituminous coating: Apply protective coating of bituminous paint to section of
flagpole which will be installed below grade, if not factory -applied by flagpole
manufacturer prior to shipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Concrete Flagpole Foundation: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3.-
B.
Flagpole Installation - General: Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings as indicated in
contract documents and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Install flagpole in erect, plumbed position.
D.
Embedded Ground -Set Pole: Erect flagpole in foundation sleeve and plumb as necessary
using hardwood wedges * ' Pour dry, sand into foundation sleeve in Successive layers,
each layer 6 inches thick. Tamp each layer before adding next layer. When last sand layer
is placed, provide moisture seal over sand by applying sealant of proper thickness. Comply
with sealant requirements specified in Division 7.
E.
Electrical. Grounding: Provide positive lightning ground suitable for flagpole and
installation conditions.
F.
Field Joints: Provide snug -fitting, weathertight, hairline joints.
1. Field welding of aluminum flagpole is not acceptable.
--� G.
Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plumb position (90 degrees from horizontal plane): I inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces.
B.
Verify smooth and proper operation of all installed fittings. Adjust as necessary.
on
03860201
08/02
END OF SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
10350 - 4
Addendum No. 1
..
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6
ITB #178-02/RS
"A City Of Planned Progress"
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
LF
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INVITATION TO BID
..�
FOR
TITLE: CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
004
r
ITB NUMBER: 178-02/RS
PROJECT NUMBER: 9266.9211
r-+
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
F'
ymrt
lIP
,.s
INDEX
1.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3.
BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
c�
4.
PAYMENT BOND
..
5.
PERFORMANCE BOND
6.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
7.
CONTRACT
8.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
10.
SPECIFICATIONS
l
ow"
Mot
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
ITB #178-02/RS
Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the
office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00
o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of September, 2002, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders,
to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
"CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6"
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the
Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in
the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written.
Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 19th day of September, 2002, and the City of Lubbock City Council will
consider the bids on the 10th day of October, 2002, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as
soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities.
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government
Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds
should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a
w guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after
;F-
notice of award of the contract to him.
It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local
conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been
thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid
conference on 5th day of September, 2002 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock,
Texas.
.Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13t" Street, Lubbock,
Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00
refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, 4222 85th
r*Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's
expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping
charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included
in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is
specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the
contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to
f, this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in
consideration for an award.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and
bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more
accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-
t 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
?� VICTOR KILMA
PURCHASING MANAGER
I
Oak
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE
1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CONSTRUCTION OF NEW
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6 per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will
be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 19th day of September, 2002 at the office listed below. Any
bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each
bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower
left-hand corner: "ITB #178-02/RS, CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6" and the
bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of
the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to:
Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, Texas 79401
1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a
bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver
bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt.
1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier
service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic
transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS.
1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an
addendum.
2 PRE -BID MEETING
2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda
as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non -mandatory pre -bid meeting
will be held at 10:00 a.m., September 5th. 2002 in Engineering Conference Room 107, Lubbock, Texas.
All persons attending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they
represent.
2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The
City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do
not attend the pre -bid meeting.
3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS
3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda.
3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may
request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the
event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be
made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the
Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will
become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO
VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for
interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of
Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date.
u 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock
shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information
supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in
preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with
any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in
any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in
preparing responses.
3.4 The City does not assume responsibility for the receipt of any addendum sent to bidders.
a� 1
W
l"`
I. "' 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS
a
R
0
4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all
requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications.
4.2
4.3
Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations
that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to
Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to
comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid.
Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents,
shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received,
and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it
shall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided
sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications.
If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions,
then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and
adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must
be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids.
5 BID PREPARATION COSTS
5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the
preparation and submission of abid.
5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or
equipment.
5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder.
6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT
6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision,
including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions.
6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to
release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular
portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from
public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the
event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being
confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal
position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In
the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent
jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the
Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be
made available to the requester.
6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open
Records Act.
7 LICENSES, PERMITS, TAXES
The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may
be required to pay.
8 UTILIZATION OF LOCAL BUSINESS RESOURCES
Prospective bidders are strongly encouraged to explore and implement methods for the utilization of local
resources, and to outline in their bid submittal how they would utilize local resources.
9 CONFLICT OF INTEREST
9.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any
employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock.
2
r
W
9.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered,
conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment,
advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion
concerning this bid.
10 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
10.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the
General Conditions.
10.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for
•-4 the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work
contemplated by said contract documents.
11 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
a It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by
the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without
charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice
a;
to Bidders.
12 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS
12.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the
bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any
combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source.
Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing
Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be
made.
12.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL
P^ INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE
SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID
CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO:
RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER
City of Lubbock
1625 13th Street
Lubbock, Texas 79401
Fax: (806) 775-2164
Email: BMacnair@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us
13 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
13.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within TWO HUNDRED
FORTY (240) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued
l: by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder.
13.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided,
E,. however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work
contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be
submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the
progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems
^* necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified.
_ 14 PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the
contract documents.
15 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute
k an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements
•w 3
19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions
of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the
materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a
way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or
other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the
project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the
location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by
Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by
Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense.
a^' 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and
shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be
necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs,
and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and
replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of
barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of
acceptance of the project.
a 22 EXPLOSIVES
22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the
Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the
Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of
the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use
utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods
as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity.
22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this
contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or
below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such
notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may
deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
i;
` 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the
work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and
telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by
this contract is in progress.
24 INSURANCE
24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as
required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do
business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City
and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of
cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right
to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this
contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also
shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact
business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether
5
r�
performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the
operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be
submitted before contract execution.
24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the
alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on
this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide
to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation
coverage for each subcontractor.
25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages
included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less
than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The
bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil
Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations
thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract
documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable.
Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or
holidays unless the following conditions exist:
r' 25.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary
service to its citizens.
25.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is
approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a
diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time.
25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the
?^ Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the
weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative
to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on
weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done
under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately
commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such
condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life.
26 PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project
under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount,
not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the
work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or
Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his
classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the
copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made,
or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees
according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which
schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on
whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each
calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his
particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents.
27 PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES
Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the
bidder without being considered.
6
p
28 PREPARATION FOR BID
28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be
"^ correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to
do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly
and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written
in figures, the price written in words shall govern.
28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a
bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be
given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If
the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address
must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing
agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid.
+^ The bid shall be executed in ink.
28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and
endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner:
28.3.1 Bidder's name
28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project).
28.4 Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids,
but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been
opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE,
ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR
TO BID OPENING.
29 BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the
following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Submittal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
F Q) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered
,., incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
30 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of
Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein
in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy
the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations
deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall
furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock
reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the
City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the
X,
work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include:
(a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required.
e-+ 7
j<
0
0
31
«"1
P'
M
(b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified,
without delay or interference.
(c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder.
(d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services.
BID AWARD
31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to
waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole
discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount.
31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to
specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may
result in disqualification of the bid.
31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be
cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to
determine possible Anti -Trust violations.
31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than
lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder
would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state.
31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the
State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the
Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all
other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the
same may be applicable.
31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR
FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR
GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
INVITATION TO BID.
p..
M
No Text
Wm
J9BID SUBMITTAL
LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT
DATE: September 25, 2002
PROJECT NUMBER: #178-02/RS - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6
Bid of Sandia Construction Inc (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE
STATION #6 having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other
related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the
construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor,
materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents,
within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the
work required under the contract documents. 1
MATERIALS: " J� tee{ t �(/ ($ �p 6)0 600 a
SERVICES:
TOTAL BID
;$ / M DDD )
(Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written
"Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 240 (TWO HUNDRED FORTY) consecutive
calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to
pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $350.00 (THREE HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive
calendar day in excess of the time set forth herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the
general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with
instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the
bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days
after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the
plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to
commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on
which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents.
y
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or.performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable
without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the
bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all
necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him.
Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for
Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of the largest amount bid Dollars
($ ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the
event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents,
insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of
receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the
undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract
documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a
competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be
changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid
price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID
PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM
PRIOR TO BID OPENING.
This corporation has no seal
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
A EST•
}
retary
Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addenda No. ONE
Date 9/10 02
Addenda No. TWO
Date 9 19 02
Addenda No.
Date
Addenda No.
Date
MAVBE Firm:
Woman
Hispanic America
Date: September 25, 2002
CIA
Authorized EQgnature
Greg M. Durbin
(Printed or Typed Name)
Sandia Construction, Inc.
Company
2723 81st Street
Address
Lubbock Lubbock
City, County
Texas 79423
State Zip Code
Telephone:806 _ 745-9450
Fax: 806 _ 745-9420
i
w
I
r
2.
3.
r 4.
5.
6.
■ 7.
8.
9.
we.
10.
■
3
mm
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
Minority Owned
SVS // Yes No
u n
o a/
p n
u �
3
.,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT
To Be Completed by Bidder
And Attached to Bid Submittal
.R
1, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been
reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of
Lubbock, I will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock,
furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal.
MM
�Ii4. --L, L-,-, Greg M. Durbin
Contracto Signature) Contractor (Print)
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Sandia Construction, Inc-
^^^ (Print or Type )
am
CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: 2723 81 st Street
Lubbock, Texas 79423
Name of Agent/Broker: Gallagher-Inwest
Address of Agent/Broker: 2727 81 st Street
City/State/Zip: Lubbock, Texas 79423
am Agent/Broker Telephone Number: (8 0 6) 785-1988
Date: September 25, 2002
NOTE TO CONTRACTOR
If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City'has the right to reject this bid/proposal and
award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements,
olease-contact the Purchasinq Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165.
0" BID #178-02/RS - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6
r
an
am Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Baltimore, Maryland
A Stock Company
Bid Bond
Bond Number ---------------•------------ ------
Know All Men By These Presents:
That SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
---------------------------------- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
of __LUBBOCK, TEXAS
-------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------
_._._________________________________________________________________________________ as Principal, and the other undersigned, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------
00 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------
as Obligee, in the full and just sum of - -- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FIVE PERCENT OF GREATEST AMOUNT BID-------------------------------------
------------- ------
------------------------------------------ ------------------------ (5 %)---------------- --------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------------------------------- Dollars,
lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs,
executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
Whereas, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal
CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6
PROJECT #178-02/RS
s•w
The Condition Of This Obligation is such that if the aforsaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said
Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the
performance of the terms and conditions of the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will
pay unto the Obligee the difference in money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the
Obligee legally contracts with another parry to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event
shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof.
Signed, sealed and delivered SEPTEMBER 25, 2002
(Date)
SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC. (Seal)
- ------------------------------------- -
�1--. � -----
------------------------------------------------------ --------------- (Seal)
Fid ty and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
--------- - -------------- ------------------------------- (a rsconsin Corporation)
n
---------------------------------------------- ------------------
VIN J. D Attorrey�n-fact
Contract 500 (8-94)
0"
t-
,m
OR
0
r .,
om
meStftl
Power of Attorney No.
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company -
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
21509
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Certificate No. 620567
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized "under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
Kevin J. Dunn, Fred Davis and Cara Hancock
Lubbock Texas
of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and sealed this 18th day of January 2000
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
bf * ��NGUQ �fprc�naif�s, E:�en�Ox�J�°i+' ��� CT,i°wo"'� �4W1F0
N'�92 '1 �SE9L:iej �aSERLp 1896 29 1977 i951
State of Maryland
.... City of Baltimore
0"
I
JOHN F. PHINNEY, Vice President
THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 18ti1 day of January 2000 before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and
Thomas E. Huibregtse. who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company. St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
In Witness Whereof, 1 hereunto set my hand and official seal.
My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002.
�4GA EA
n
NO y
' pVB�CY
'LORE CnM do
REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA. Notary Public
0
86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A.
•W
VVVIIJL IU4 1-444 Y.UIlut r-UbJ
ITS #178-02JRS, Addendum #1
0
mom
0
ON
fflml+
mom
r7
City of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING
1625 13r" STREET
LU 8 ROCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164
httpJlpurchasing.ci.iubbockc.ty-us
ADDENDUM # 1
ITB #178-02/RS
Construction of Lubbock Fire Station #6
MAILED TO VENDOR: September 10, 2002
OLD CLOSE DATE: September 19, 2002 a 2:00 p.m.
NEW CLOSE DATE: September 25, 20 2 0 2:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the 1TB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. The closing date has been changed from 2:00 p.m., September 19, 2002 to the new closing date of 2:00
p.m., September 25, 2002.
2. Please find enclosed the five (5) page addendum from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164
or Email to: rshuffield®mail.c0ubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Ron Shuffield
Senior Buyer
178-02Add1.doc
om
ADDENDUM NO.1
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders
PROJECT: City of Lubbock Fire Station No. 6
DATE: September 10, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8602-01
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced
Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and
modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 8/19/02 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 1 page(s), plus 1 attaehment(s).
SPECIFICATIONS:
Section 10350 FLAGPOLES
1. Insert the attached specification section 10350 FLAGPOLES.
DRAWINGS:
None
CLARIFICATIONS:
None
]END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
PARKHILL, sm TH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers ■ Architects • Planners
4222 85" Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock E! Paso
Midland
Amarillo
WR
LU13BOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 10350
FLAGPOLES
PART 1. - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Flagpoles:
a. Location of flagpole is shown on drawings.
2. Flagpole fittings and accessories.
R. Related Sections: `
I. Earthwork: Division 2.
2. Cast -in -place concrete: Division 3.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF-4S — Designation System for Aluminum.Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B. ASTM B 241/B 241M-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy
Seamless Pipc and Seamless Extruded Tube; 1993.
77 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide flagpole and anchorage system to comply with the following requirements:
^^ 1. Flagpole with flag flying: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without
permanent deformation, when flying appropriately sired flag.
2. Flagpole without flag: Resist minimum wind velocity of 90 mph without permanent
deformation.
3. Safety design factor: 2.5.
I.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of flagpole required. Include data for fittings and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings bearing the stamp of a professional structural
engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. Include the following
1_ Configuration of flagpoles and bases.
.M 2. Details showing jointing, anchorage, and support systems.
3. Substantiation of compliance with performance requirements indicated in contract
documents.
4. Flagpole finishes, fittings, and accessories.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a-. A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in manufacture of products
specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar
service conditions for not less than 5 years.
03860201 FLAGPOLES 10350 - 1
,� 08/02 Addendum No. 1
0
LUBBOCK FM STATION NO.6
B. . installer's Qualifications: Firm regularly engaged in installation of products specified in
this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products.
B. Provide suitable protection for each flagpole before shipment. Spiral=wrap pole with heavy
haft paper or polyethylene material and place pole in hard protective tube.
C_ Deliver flagpoles and accessories properly labeled and in original wrappings.
D. Store and handle materials in a manner which will prevent damage prior to installation.
PART 2 - iPRODUCTS
WWI
2.1 MkNUFACTURERS
A- Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those Considered acceptable:
1. Aabec pole Division/Morgan-Francis Company, Inc.
2. Acme Flagpole Division/Lingo, Inc.
3. American Flagpole Division/Kearney-National, Inc.
4. Baartol Company, Inc.
5. Concord Industries, Inc.
6. EMC Division/Eder Manufacturing Corporation.
7. John Ewing & Company, Inc.
2.2 FLAGPOLES
A. Description:
1.
Mounting: Ground -set, embedded.
2.
Type: Conventional.
3.
Shaft metal: Aluminum.
4.
Shah form: Cone tapered.
5.
Exposed length of flagpole: 25 feet
6.
Halyard: Internal.
7.
Flag:
a. American flag.
b. 4 by 6.
c. 100 percent nylon.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication - General: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit fabricated by a single
manufacturer, including base, anchorage devices, fittings, and accessories as necessary for
proper installation.
B. Fabricate and ship flagpole as a single unit, unless shipping constraints preclude this
PUN alternative. Where flagpole size dictates shipment in more than one section, provide
self -aligning internal sleeve composed of metal compatible with shaft metal and properly
designed to allow precise, weathertight joining during installation.
03860201 FLAGPOLES 10350 - 2
08/02 Addendum No. I
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
C. Flagpole
Diameter and Wall Thickness: Wall thickness of shaft and ratio of top diameter
to butt diameter -must be appropriate for metal or alloy used and.for length of flagpole.
+�
D. Joints and Seams: Form joints and seams which are inconspicuous.
1.
Exposed welds: Grind exposed welds smooth. Finish to match flagpole shaft.
E. Aluminum Shaft:
1.
Seamless extruded tube: Comply with ASTM B 241.
2.
Alloy:6063-T6.
3.
Minimum wall thickness: 3/16 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
Minimum tensile strength: 30,000 psi.
5.
Minimum yield point: 25,000 psi.
6.
After flagpole is fabricated, heat-treat and artificially age to alter temper of
aluminum.
�*
7.
Shaft finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M32C22A41 (medium satin directional
textured mechanical finish; medium matte etched chemical finish; clear,
architectural Class I anodic coating minimum 0.7 mil thick).
F. Ground -Set Flagpole - Embedded Type:
1.
Provide flagpole of sufficient overall Iength to allow setting depth which is not less
than 10 percent of exposed length.
2.
Flash collar: Fabricate from same metal used for flagpole shaft.
a. Product: Selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards based on
availability for shaft size.
3.
Foundation sleeve: Corrugated galvanized steel tube, 16 gage.
.•.
4.
Foundation sleeve plate: Square steel plate welded to bottom of foundation sleeve.
a. Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 4 inches larger than inside
diameter of foundation sleeve.
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
5.
Steel centering wedges: Minimum 1/8-inch-thick wedges, welded to sleeve plate
t
inside foundation sleeve for the purpose of centering pole.
6.
Electrical grounding spike: 3/4-inch steel spike, welded to bottom side of sleeve
plate.
a. Length of extension below concrete foundation: Not less than thickness of
concrete footing below sleeve plate.
„A
7.
Foundation support plate: Square steel plate welded to electrical grounding spike at
base of concrete foundation.
a. -Minimum edge dimension of square plate: 6 inches.
b. Minimum thickness: 3/16 inch.
G. Fittings:
1.
Truck:
a. Truck designed for internal halyard system.
2.
Halyards-
a. Internal type:
1) Cable; Stainless steel, with vinyl- or neoprene -covered weight.
2) Winch: Direct drive type, internally mounted, with control stop to hold
flag in any position on pole_ .
3) Winch crank Removable.
4) Winch access door: Flush -mounted, with cylinder lock.
03860201 FLAGPOLES 103 50 - 3
08/02 Addendum No. 1
I--Vc4 r.YV/YY r`uG0
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
3. Flag snaps:
a. Number required: Two flag snaps per halyard.
b. Material: Bronze, manufacturer's standard.
C. Sheaths: Provide heavy vinyl or neoprene sheath for each flag snap.
., 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Provide materials for concrete flagpole foundations as specified in Division 3, 3,000 psi.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents.
B. Ground -Set Flagpole: Verify that foundation is in suitable condition to receive flagpole.
C. Do not begin flagpole installation until unsuitable conditions have been corrected.
Commencement of installation indicates acceptance of conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Embedded Ground -Set Pole:
1. Bituminous coating: Apply protective coating of bituminous paint to section of
flagpole which will be installed below grade, if not factory -applied by flagpole
manufacturer prior to shipment.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Flagpole Foundation: Comply with requirements specified in Division 3.
B. Flagpole installation - General. Install flagpole, base assembly, and fittings as indicated in
contract documents and in accordatiee with manufactumes instructions.
C. Install flagpole in erect, plumbed position.
D. Embedded Ground -Set Pole: Erect flagpole in foundation sleeve and plumb as necessary
using hardwood wedges '0 ' Pour dry, sand into foundation sleeve in Successive layers,
each layer 6 inches thick. Tamp each layer before adding next layer. When last sand layer
is placed, provide moisture seal over sand by applying sealant of proper thickness. Comply
with sealant requirements specified in Division 7.
E. Electrical Grounding: Provide positive lightning ground suitable for flagpole and
installation conditions.
F. Field Joints: Provide snug -fitting, weatherright, hairline joints.
1. Field welding of aluminum flagpole is not acceptable.
G. Tolerances:
1. Maximum variation from plumb position (90 degrees from horizontal plane): I inch.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces.
B. Verify smooth and proper operation of all installed fittings. Adjust as necessary.
END OF SECTION 10350
03860201 1rLAGrOLES 10350 - 4
�, 08/02 Addendum No. I
ITS 4178.021RS, Addendum #2
r�*
Ciry of Lubbock
PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING,
1625 131h STREET
LU88OCK, TEXAS 79401
PH: (806)775-2167 FAX: (806)775-2164
hap:/tpurchasing.ci.lubbock.[x.,j!,
s!�
ADDENDUM #2
1TB # 178-02/RS
Construction of Lubbock Fire Station #6
MAILED TO VENDOR: September 19, 2002
CLOSE DATE: September 25, 2002 @ 2:00 p.m.
The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named fnvitaelon to Bid (ITB). Where
any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affecred by this
addendum, shall remain in effect.
1. Please find enclosed the five (5) page addendum #2 from Parkhill, Smith and Cooper.
All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to:
Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
Questions may be faxed to : (606)775-2164
or Email to: rshuff ield®mail.ci.Iubbock.tx.us
THANK YOU,
CITY OF LUBBOCK
4RRonShL1ffiA'eldPV
Senior Buyer
17M2Add2A00
,,......- 1 VJJ r.YLf YB r-iLv
A
MR
ADDENDUM NO.2 �'!�• �
TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan holders
PROJECT: City of Lubbock Fire Station No. 6
DATE: September 19, 2002 PSC Job No: 03-8602-01
Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced
Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a pan of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and
modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 8/19/02 as noted below:
This Addendum consists of 3 page(s), plus 2 attachment(s).
SPECIFICATIONS:
Section 01500
1. Paragraph 1.4, DELETE paragraph A.
Section 08800 ,
1. Paragraph 2.2, B, 5, REPLACE the value of 0.10 maximum to 0.40 maximum.
2. Paragraph 2.2, 13, 6, REPLACE the value of 0.10 maximum to 0.40 maximum
3. Paragraph 2.2, C, 9, b, REPLACE "Solar gray" with "CIear w/ low E coating."
4. Paragraph 2.2, C, 4, REPLACE the value of 60 percent with 37 percent and
REPLACE the value of 75 percent with 27 percent.
5. Paragraph 21.2, C, 5, REPLACE the value of 0.65 with 0.45.
6. Paragraph 2.2, C, 6, REPLACE the value of 33 percent with 8 percent and
REPLACE the value of 28 percent with 8 percent.
7. Paragraph 2.2, C, 7, REPLACE the value of 0.19 with 0.35.
8. Paragraph 2.2, C, 8, REPLACE the value of 0.10 with 0.39.
Section 09650
1. Paragraph 2.2, A, 8, c, REPLACE "(Classic Corlon)" with the following:
"(Medintech Tandem)."
Section 15440
1. Paragraph 2.7, DELETE Paragraph A and REPLACE with the following. "Provide
Halsey Taylor Models BFMR-Q and 13FM fully recessed barrier -free electric water
coolers as fixture EWC-1. Contractor shall field connect BFM model to chilled water
PARKMiLL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects • Planners
4222 85°1 Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo
W
from BFMR-Q as per manufacturers directions. The refrigeration system from the
BFMR-Q unit shall provide chilled water for each unit. Provide stops and P-traps for
each unit as per manufacturers recommendations. Refer to Architectural drawings for
new EWC-1 location and for bubbler mounting heights." Refer to attached drawing
ADD-01 for relocation of FWC-1 and electrical connections.
DRAWINGS:
Sheet S5
! _ Under GENERAL NOTES, SECTION VM, REPLACE paragraph A with the
following: "'Roof deck at lower roof and entrance canopy shall be 20 gauge TYPE '1';
high roof shall be 20 Gauge TYPE 7 deck puddle welded to supporting structure at
12" O.C."
Sheet A101
1. In OFr10E 104, DELETE the equipment N.I_C. located east of the built-in counter.
Sheet A201
1. DELL, TE detail A2.
2. In elevation BI, change the urinal rim height dimension from 2'-0" to V-5" MAX.
Sheet A401
1. In enlarged floor plan A2, MEN 120, DELETE the elevation key A2/A201 and
REPLACE with C4/A202.
Sheet P-101
1. DELETE EWC-I location and provide EWC-1 in location shown on attached drawing
ADl-01.
Sheet MPE-101
1. ADD (1) V conduit from existing box on northwest of lot into the station and terminate
adjacent to the control box for the west overhead door for control of traffic preemt
system, cabling by owner. Install cap and pull string. Coordinate with Owner and
Architect for exact location.
Sheet E-101
1. DELETE fixture L1 from lighting fixture schedule.
Sheet E-102
1. MOVE GFC1 receptacle on wall adjacent to Men's 120, near location of new EWC-1.
Move receptacle west of FWC-1. Defer to attached drawing AD2-D2.
CLARIFICATIONS:
Sheet A202, Section D4 is a cut through the lockers, not an elevation of an additional locker.
PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects • Planners
4222 66'•" Street - Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo
9
w I
I__�_ _.. _.._.....�..-. - --- -ter ..- •r•
t
"? 2. All millwork shall be AWI Custom Grade Reveal Overlay lied Oak Transparent Finish, unless
noted otherwise on drawings, or where PLAM finish is called out on drawings or scheduled.
3. Sheet E-103 shows a square with a ''C" inside of it. This symbol represents a carbon monoxide
derectoI.
END OF ADDENDUM NO.2
y
WR
PARKHILL. SMITH & COOPER, INC.
Engineers • Architects v Planners
4222 8511 Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423
(806) 473-2200 • FAX (806) 473-3500
Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo
h""
�r�� Vvr VV
�ILV
LOW UNIT SHALL BE 2'-2" L
CENTERLINF FROM THE
BOTTOM OF THE SLOPED
SURFACE
.�
Y #
wCO
WC-2
FC
SH-1
DRYER ;
f
wC-1 U-1 L-1 L-1
FD-1 MEWS
20
—
—
ELEC
117
LINEN
115
;
r
OFF(CER'S
'
QUARTERS
121
4"
FCO
PARTIAL PLUMBING PLAN
SCALE: 11T V-0"
NORTH
rr■•rrr�■rrrrr•rr
■■v■r• • r..r r�
•••••••3•=••31aD=;0 Project Nome: Fire Stotion #6
Sheet:
AD2-01
Project Address: 3320 351h Street
issue Date:
Sept, 19, 2002
Lubbock, Texas
•r ■. err t•Mf1f
Revisions:
w r
,
ii 299as all I!• is
•sonrrrr. .• r■ ADDENDA #2
PSC Project
#:03.8602.01
rr■•u•rr■�ru■irr
ronrsr■■rrrrr■rr
A"!
r■■
4. fi
OW
r
k -$
......... I I ... I. WWI VW 1 4(.W
KEYED NOTES
AS INDICATED BY:
1 PROVIDE (1) NEW DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AT THIS LOCATION FOR EWC-1.
€ EXTEND (2) #12 AWG WITH #12 GNO IN 31e CONDUITTO SPARE 20A-lP
BREAKER IN PANEL "LP" (LP-40).
e* 2 RELOCATED RECEPTACLE
PARTIAL ELECTRICAL PLAN
SCALE: lAr V-6 NORTH
ee++ aaaayrraMartrrraaa
oa■ra■■■uo■Arra
Project Name: Fire Station #6
Sneet:
A012-02
wr■.a■■rrrr■.■.■■■
:,.n.".:C:w;:::::::
Project Address: 3320 35tt1 Street
Issue Date:
Sept 19, 2002
:. ::.
Lubbock, Texas
Revisions-
r1 �I •. a■ I■Na
►"� r as fv Isar
a
ii D iersi
��'�i
ADDENDA #2
PSC Project
•
#:03.8602.01
PAYMENT BOND
a�
k
.P;
Bond No. SL 5719
.,
STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Sandia Construction, Inc.
r' (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
Obligee), in the amount of Seven hundred ninety nine thousand & 00/100----------------- --------- --------- _--------_------- _--------_--
Dollars ($ 799,000.00---- ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind
themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 10th day of
October , 2002 , to Construction of New Lubbock Fire Station #6
r"
and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
VIM
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall
faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall
p. be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
7' article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 22nd
day of October , 2 0.22—
Fidelity and Guaranty Insur nderw iters, Inc. Sandia Construction, Inc.
Surety Principal
pw a v 'f•- * By: By: "t
evin D nn , Attorney -In -Fact U (Title)
By:
(Title)
By:
(Title)
Pmk
The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby
designates Kevin Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and
on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
--A Surety
* By.
Kevin Dunn Attorney -In -Fact
Approved as to Form
City of Lubbock
,.� By: �C-
City Attorney
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
."
POWER OF ATTORNEY
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
Power of Attorney No. 21509
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Certificate No. 620362
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
Kevin J. Dunn, Fred Davis and Cara Hancock
Lubbock Texas
of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or ,Triitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
,� 18th January 2000
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrumert t signed atfd sealed tb . ` day of
Seaboard Surety Company 4 - Muted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insur cat ompai Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance �pany Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Compay t
'
SLP�fiy� tlr-� ���K..�NSG9 �+'�4 .NSU9ry
�� ,L+OPPMAA)e.m y, COPPOR9JF � � ° 1977 JOHN F. PHINNEY, Vice President
%���4� PivnrU J1t
7927 g"n �` t 1ggs
SBILL,'a • N t i95i
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 18th day of January 200q before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and
Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. POTTY
v UBI/Q
My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. �' CiTt �yo REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public
qE
MR
pia I 86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A.
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul
Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and
effect, reading as follows:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating
to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attomey(s)-in-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the
Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vitae President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary,
under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and
the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attorney(s)-in-Fact for purposes
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any
such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so
executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to
which it is validly attached; and
RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of
Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an
Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force
and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 22nd day of October
`� 19Z7 �EQPONIi iEON-?AT£n ��: QpVORATF�tf-
Srtt � r '�e.SEAL3,
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call I
the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to
,2002
Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary
.'ofAttoMey clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number,
i
Bond No. SL 5719
STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a)
OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE
(CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000)
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that Sandia Construction, Inc. (hereinafter
called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
(hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the
Obligee), in the amount of Seven hundred ninety nine thousand & 00/100—------- --------- --------- -------- ----------- ------- —------- —
,,, Dollars ($ 799,000.00--- )lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind
themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 10th day of
October , 2002 to Construction of New Lubbock Fire Station #6
A
and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond
in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent
as if copied at length herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all
claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said
r contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the
Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said
Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this
22nd day of October 2002
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Surety
*By:
KEVI DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact
Sandia Construction, Inc.
Principal
B k,
Y�
(Title)
By:
(Title)
By:
(Title)
The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby
designates Kevin Dunn an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be
delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship.
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
.* Surety
A
* By:
Kevin D nn , Attorney -In -Fact
Approved as to form:
City of Lub ock
By: --
1ty Attorney
* Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing
that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of
attorney for our files.
0"
mestPaul
POWER OF ATTORNEY
9
Power of Attorney No.
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
21509
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
Certificate No. 620371
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of New York, and that
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota, and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do
hereby make, constitute and appoint
Kevin J. Dunn, Fred Davis and Cara Hancock
Lubbock Texas
of the City of , State , their true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact,
each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings,
contracts and other written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or ermitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
18th January 2000
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument o e tggecT°a �sealed,,tbis day of
Seaboard Surety Company w `� trted States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Com atuy Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance �pittpany ' Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Compy
SIe�Ty� �E o��N •iNSG9 i�.';eY,�xa�ygy Y�' �Y'yy0 '�*a
JW,'ORPOR9>E::�jn.£
7927 g v �i tee•;SEAL: a°' � � 19 7 N j � JOHN F. PHINNEY, Vice President
SEAL%o, : e O
N9jF• lg� ''{4. AN�a>ir....... "aa
State of Maryland
City of Baltimore THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE, Assistant Secretary
On this 18th day of January 2000 before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared John F. Phinney and
Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and that the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers.
aeas�0Adj
In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. Q pO q 11
v VeCIC S
My Commission expires the 13th day of July, 2002. o9f 011 ao REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA, Notary Public
r% 1 86203 Rev. 7-2000 Printed in U.S.A.
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul
Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company,
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. on September 2, 1998, which resolutions are now in full force and
effect, reading as follows:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments relating
to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(s)-in-Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the
Company, either by the Chairman, or the President, or any Vice President, or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary,
under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing officers and
the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes
only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any
such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company, and any such power so
executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to
which it is validly attached; and
RESOLVED FURTHER, that Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations of the Power of
Attorney issued them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings, and other
writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorney(s)-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an
Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company,
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance
Underwriters, Inc. do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force
and effect and has not been revoked.
IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I hereunto set my hand this 22nd day of OCto
927 S �AIE �icoavort�rt:,es+
To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call I-,
the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to
.41 111A"�'
12002 .
— —I /�O� le
Thomas E. Huibregtse, Assistant Secretary
-fof Att6ey clerk. Please refer to the Power of Attorney number,
SrPaul Surety
IMPORTANT NOTICE:
To obtain information or make a complaint:
You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,
coverages, rights or complaints at:
1-800-252-3439
You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at:
P.O. Box 149104
Austin, TX 78714-9104
FAX # 1-512-475-1771
Your notice of claim against the attached bond may be given to the surety company that issued
the bond by sending it to the following address:
Mailing Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
P.O. Box 4689
Federal.Way, WA 98063-4689
Physical Address: St. Paul Surety Claim
31919 First Avenue South
Suite 100
Federal Way, WA 98003
You may also contact the St. Paul Surety Claim office by telephone at:
Telephone Number: 1-253-945-1545
PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES:
If you have a dispute concerning a premium, you should contact the agent first. If you have a
dispute concerning a claim, you should contact the company first. If the dispute is not resolved,
you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance.
ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND:
This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached
document.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
Owl
1W
111111111-3
M
"I
ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE
1DATE (MD
0/22 /
l0/22/2002002
PRODUCER (806) 785-1988 FAX (806) 785-2155
Gallagher Inwest
P. 0. Box 53910
Lubbock, Texas 79453
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION
ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE
HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR
ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW.
INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE
INSURED Sandia Construction, Inc.
2723 81st Street
Lubbock, TX 79423
INSURERA: Bituminous Casualty Corporation
INSURERS: Texas Mutual Insurance Company
INSURERC: Fireman's Fund Insurance Co.(McGee)
INSURER D:
INSURER E:
COVERAGES
THE POLICIE
S OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR
MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH
POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
LTR DATE MM/DD DATE MM1DD
GENERAL LIABILITY CLP3134397 02/17/2002 02/17/2003 EACH OCCURRENCE _ $ 1,000,000
X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY FIRE DAMAGE (Anyone fire) $ 100,000
CLAIMS MADE M OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000
A PERSONAL BADV INJURY $ 1,000,000
GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000
GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000
X POLICY PROECT LOC
J
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CAP3134381 02/17/2002 02/17/2003 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
X ANY AUTO (Ea accident) S 1,000,000
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY S
A SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person)
X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY
X NON -OWNED AUTOS (Per accident) $
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $
ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC $
AUTO ONLY: AGG $
EXCESS LIABILITY UP2531526 02/17/2002 02/17/2003 EACH OCCURRENCE s 2,000,000
X OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $
A $
DEDUCTIBLE $
RETENTION $ 10 , 00 $
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND TSF0001113473 02/17/2002 02/17/2003 X I TORY LIMITS I I ER
B EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000
E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000
E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000
C
ui�lRders Risk Coverage XI97702031 08/16/2002 08/16/2003 $5,000,000 Job Site Limit
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONSNEHICLES/EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT/SPECIAL PROVISIONS
roject # ITB 178-02/RS, Construction of New Lubbock Fire Station #6
dditional insured in favor of the certificate holder on the general liability & automobile
liability policies as required by written contract. Waiver of subrogation in favor of the certificate
older on the workers' compensation, general liability and automobile as required by written
ontract.
l:tK I INt;A I t MULUtK I I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER:
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Attn: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager
1625 13th Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, TX 79401
L,ANL,r_LLA I IUN
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
Kevin Dunn/ASG
lclArnQn rnRPARATInKI
l:tK I INt;A I t MULUtK I I ADDITIONAL INSURED; INSURER LETTER:
CITY OF LUBBOCK
Attn: Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager
1625 13th Street, Room L-04
Lubbock, TX 79401
L,ANL,r_LLA I IUN
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL
30 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,
BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY
OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
Kevin Dunn/ASG
lclArnQn rnRPARATInKI
W
d
IMPORTANT
I If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement
on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may
require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate
holder in lieu of such endorsement(s).
DISCLAIMER
The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between
the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it
affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon.
ACORD 25-S
A
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE:
P.O. BOX 2000
o, LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT:
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at
the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the
typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further
hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon.
TYPE OF INSURANCE
POLICY NUMBER
EFFECTIVE
EFFECTIVE
LIMITS
DATE
DATE
GENERAL LIABILITY
_ Commercial General Liability
General Aggregate $
Claims Made
Products-Comp/Op AGG $
Occurrence
Personal & Adv. Injury $
- Owner's & Contractors Protectivi
Each Occurrence $
❑
Fire Damage (Any one Fire)
Med Exp (Any one Person)
AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY
Any Auto
Combined Single Limit $
All Owned Autos
Bodily Injury (Per Person) $
LJ Scheduled Autos
Bodily Injury (Per Accident)
Hired Autos
Property Damage $
77 Non -Owned Autos
El
GARAGE LIABILITY
Any Auto
Auto Only - Each Accident $
Other than Auto Only:
Each Accident $
Aggregate $
BUILDER'S RISK
_ 100% of the Total Contract Price
$
= INSTALLATION FLOATER
$
EXCESS LIABILITY
Umbrella Form
Each Occurrence $
Aggregate $
Other Than Umbrella Form
$
WORKERS COMPENSATION AND
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
The Proprietor/ _ Included
Statutory Limits
Partners/Executive E Excluded
Each Accident $
Officers are:
Disease Policy Limit $
Disease -Each Employee $
OTHER
The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or
canceled by the insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or
cancellation, or In case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation.
s•
FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK (Name of Insurer)
By:
Title:
1
r
r+a
CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST
A CONTRACTOR SHALL:
r^ (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on
proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements;
(2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity
prior to beginning work on the project;
(3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity:
(A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental
entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing
services on the project; and
(B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing
extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project;
(5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter;
(6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the
contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of
any person providing services on the project;
(7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are
required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide
coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both
English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices
shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words
or changes:
r",
P- 2
I
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
"The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see
reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering
equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the
identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the
legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to.
report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and
(8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to:
(A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing
of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
(B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the
project;
(C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this
rule;
(D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor;
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and
(ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the
coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during
the duration of the project;
(F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year
thereafter;
(G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days
after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of
coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by
paragraphs (A) (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they
are providing services. ❑
P. 3
No Text
0
CONTRACT
Mon STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 10th day of October, 2002 by and between the City of Lubbock,
County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so,
hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC. of the CITY OF LUBBOCK, COUNTY OF
LUBBOCK and the STATE OF TEXAS hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and
performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the
CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements
described as follows:
BID #178-02/RS - CONSTRUCTION OF NEW LUBBOCK FIRE STATION #6 - $799,000.00
r
and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own
proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance
and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract
~" documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have
been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with
the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make
payment on account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement
Texas in the year and day first above written. ✓ /
ATTEST:
City gecretary
""" APP OV D A UCONTENT.-
�
Owner's Representati
ff
APPR VED AS TO FORM:
ity Attorney
r,
ATTEST:
on Cori r a Secretary
CITY OF BC
By:
/&;;
MAYOR
CONTRACTOR:
Lubb,oeVLubbock County,
(OWNER)
SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC.
By: (2�J
PRINTED NAME: 0""',i • �u r10 r`
TITLE: YreSd-eZf—
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
Sandia Construction, Inc.
2723 81 st Street
Lubbock,Texas 79423
No Text
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
1. OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of
Lubbock, Texas.
2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co-
partnership or corporation, to wit SANDIA CONSTRUCTION, INC. who has agreed to perform the work embraced
in this contract, or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
' ^ Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as
referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative HARLAN STAUFFER, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated
who will inspect constructions; or such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors
as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or
inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the
Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the
Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder
for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to
herein as the "contract" or "contract documents".
5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or
words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation
or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable,"
"Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no
responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated
�^*+ by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due
Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of
the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last
business address known to the party who gives the notice.
8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
" Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery,
equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other
facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless
otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality.
The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or
work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such
recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents
has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still
may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall
accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will
check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at
Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all
work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and
Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the
executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents.
Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the
quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the
Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the
Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems
said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract
documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary,
Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but
such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore.
The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades
will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be
replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense.
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's
Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority
to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The
Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work
and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the
execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be
conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15)
t calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection
by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
,-
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from
time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may
deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said
material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall
furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the
proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and
instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and
instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications
provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or
inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's
Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any
and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived.
16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall
keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory
to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions
given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate
f` supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance
of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the
Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and
location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be
encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the
contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or
Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms
or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all
modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's
Representative and Contractor.
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work
to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the
work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense.
.M
18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of
-- work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall
inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion,
incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or
men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's
Representative's written consent.
3
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is
also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of
any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the
Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such
structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public
observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be
approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at
any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any
observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the
time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any
such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its
completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has
previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval
or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination
at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location
where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require
testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish
Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to
perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests
will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other
applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or
consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative,
be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and
approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the
requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such
tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective,
and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by
Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such
inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance
with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES
It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in
the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not
in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written
notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy
such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial --
action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense.
F_.
s.
4 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit,
in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either
before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the
accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a
claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of
work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid
according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract;
otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make
such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in
said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual
expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
loft 24. EXTRA WORK
b
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change,
�* alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered
by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative
when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of
F- the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the
compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following
methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced,
then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the
extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by
a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for
performance of the extra work.
.,+ In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph
shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen,
timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for
the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred,
together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age
Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other
insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by
1.., them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be
kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's
Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the
type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership
Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for
,.., the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent
(15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit,
overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not
embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office
u�+ must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall
be included in the "actual field cost."
5
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case
any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive
compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra
work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should
a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and
the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making
written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as
provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of
any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the
specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that
such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these
contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in
these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a _
clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's
Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands
the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance
with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding
of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and
specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any
request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of --
bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of
work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the
Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall —
comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the
Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give
reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress.
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an
insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the
Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable
precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable
provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment
and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in
Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or
municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages,
expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or
contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection
with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any
manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject
matter of this contract.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an
Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given —
by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses,
I
are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to
supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors.
PM 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the
General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of
Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of
cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change.
All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and
its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance,
rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of
payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in
conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.
The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance
protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such
insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and
shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor,
or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance
specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
The Certificates of Insurance furnished by the Contractor and Subcontractors shall name the City of
Lubbock as an additional insured. If no subcontractors will be used, said insurance certificate shall be
accompanied by a written statement from the Contractor stating to the effect that no work on this
particular project shall be subcontracted.
A. General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00
,. Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
4 a Products & Completed Operations Hazard
Contractual Liability
!*� Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury
b. Advertising Injury
B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance.
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, LQ Combined Single Limit. This
policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and
Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job
and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
a.. 7
D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100%
of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $4,000,000.00 on all contracts
with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile
Liability coverages.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00.
Definitions:
Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority
to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC-
83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's
or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the
Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental
entity.
Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section ❑406.096, Texas Labor
Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with
the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without
limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner -
operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to
provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or
delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a
project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and
payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of
Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on
the project, for the duration of the project.
3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being
awarded the contract.
4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new
certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended.
5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the
governmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the
governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all
persons providing services on the project; and
(b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage
" 4 showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project.
6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and
for one year thereafter.
7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project.
8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by
the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the
project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and
report lack of coverage.
9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services
on the project, to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts
and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas
Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate
of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person
providing services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current
certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project;
and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of
the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of
coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
P" (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects
the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and
(g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by
.y
paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for
whom they are providing services.
10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the
Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will
provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the
^' duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance
carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance
.. 9
Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions.
11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the
Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor
does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the
governmental entity.
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner
for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence
of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the
insurance company setting forth: —
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies.
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by
such certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at
the address shown in the bid specifications.
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or
cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project.
(9) A Contractor shall:
(a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of
any coverage agreements;
(b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the
governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project;
(c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate _
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental
entity:
(i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so
the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing
coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and
(ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of
coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one
year thereafter;
10
e-�
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10
days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially
affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
(g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project
that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current
coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other
posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other
commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type
and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any
other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the
following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional
words or changes:
REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE
'The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services
^!
related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation
insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or
materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the
r,
project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee."
"Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive
information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your
employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to
>,
provide coverage;' and
(h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,
to:
(i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll
amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing
services on the project, for the duration of the project;
(ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning
work on the project;
(iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language:
"By signing this contract or providing or causing to be
provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this
contract is representing to the governmental entity that all
employees of the person signing this contract who will
provide services on the project will be covered by workers'
compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that
the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of
classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate
i
- insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the
commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the
Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties,
civil penalties, or other civil actions.";
PM
(iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate
of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the
current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project;
(v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the
r�
e
Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the
project; and
(2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage
showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown
on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the
project;
(vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project
and for one year thereafter;
(vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,
within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that
materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on
the project; and
(viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as
required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to
the person for whom they are providing services. -`
29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of
1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such
individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee
compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS
OF MACHINERY EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless
against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way,
manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract
and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish
satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or
waived.
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material
or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof.
Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and
save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except
that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or
required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material
or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers,
agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the
contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's
Representative prior to bidding.
32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and
regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form,
12
the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such
laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. if the Contractor
r< observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in
writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the
work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within
said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or
local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors
perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's
Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as
the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may
enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as
though embodied herein.
33. SUBCONTRACTING
The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this
contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required
in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as
provided by the contract documents.
34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of
beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in
this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified,
then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner
..may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $350.00 (THREE HUNDRED FIFTY
DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set
forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially
completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial
completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into
consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages
the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount
agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and
is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach.
IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS
OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT.
rR 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall
be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as
•, shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution
shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this
contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that
when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may
direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the
construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized.
... 13
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the
Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. _
36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE
The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and
has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that
it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been
delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors
employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public
enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all
justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days
of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the
extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial,
and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided
herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such
work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in
securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except
where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in
which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such
stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor.
38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length,
area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the
event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the
specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material
to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated
to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they
are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing
their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are
expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ
somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method,
payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project.
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way
encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under -
this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be
liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without
limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the
Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees,
against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising
from or growing out of the performance of this contract.
14 —
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by
the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the
specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the
bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to
r^ receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all
expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner
and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of
Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the
contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective
work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's
Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection
with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there
are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by
Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's
agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application
for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall
determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial
payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall
prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the
Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by
the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the
Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be
retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by
Owner under the terms of the contract documents.
�. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to
enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work
performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said
partial payment is attributable.
43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31)
° working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been
substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time,
if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's
Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding
the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete
the work within the time provided in this contract.
44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT
The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final
completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final
completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's
Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion,
.., 15
Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final
completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the _
obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or
warranties implied by law or otherwise.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative
on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and _
Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming
to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of
other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any
such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, "^
Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the
contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and
Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which
shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's
Representative.
46. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify
the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of:
(a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the
amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor
shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's
Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception.
Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner
shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right
under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by
Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative,
said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the
Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the
acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and
constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's
Representative, by Contractor.
48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after
written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the
written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety
on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be
delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no
further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required.
16
e-4
After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and
equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the
Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or
credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for
under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice
hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with
diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract
documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or
otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective
manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and
supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor,
machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall
be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time
become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than
the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the
Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the
sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said
Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper
having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of
the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of
any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost
under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain
bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which
would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be
credited therewith.
In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall
have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as
provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract
accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to
Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be,
shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion.
,., In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would
have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract,
or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the
Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over
to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price,
and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated
hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work,
notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and
his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual
- written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such
property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the
Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said
notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived
from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale maybe made at either public
or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery,
equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor
- or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners.
17
The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted
by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this
paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its
exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies
available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in
paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth.
49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY
The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually
performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be
liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the
project which is the subject matter of this contract.
50. BONDS
The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in
the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the
Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the
amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall
be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do
business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions
conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall
control.
52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the
work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the
prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense.
53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to
direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work
covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's
work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and
vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or
effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's
Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation.
54. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at
the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus
materials and shall leave the workroom clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition.
In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS
Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response,
Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same
18 --
;i
r
v�+
may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in
any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the
Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the
City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a
Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in
the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project
!� or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts
and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least
twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and
provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If
the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5)
days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied.
.� In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for
ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper
performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage,
disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or
asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective
gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum
products or byproducts and/or asbestos.
n
r.+
19
4�i
i:2'
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
No Text
RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
11.50
Air Conditioner Installer
12.50
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
6.25
Asbestos Worker
9.00
Asbestos Supervisor
12.50
Bricklayer
12.50
Bricklayer -Helper
7.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
7.00
Cement Finisher
8.00
Drywall Hanger
11.00
Electrician
13.75
Electrician -Helper
7.00
Equipment Operator -Heavy
9.50
Equipment Operator -Light
8.50
Floor Installer
9.50
Glazier
10.50
Insulator-Piping/Boiler
11.50
Insulator -Helper
7.00
Iron Worker
11.00
Laborer -General
6.00
Mortar Mixer
6.00
Painter
9.50
Plumber
12.50
Plumber -Helper
7.00
Roofer
9.00
Roofer -Helper
7.00
Sheet Metal Worker
10.00
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
7.00
Welder -Certified
11.00
1
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Asphalt Heaterman
9.00
Asphalt Shoveler
6.00
Concrete Finisher
8.00
Concrete Finisher -Helper
7.00
Electrician
12.00
Flagger
6.00
Form Setter
7.00
Form Setter -Helper
6.25
Laborer -General
6.00
Laborer -Utility
6.75
Mechanic
8.00
Mechanic -Helper
7.00
Power Equipment Operators
Asphalt Paving Machine
7.75
Bulldozer
8.00
Concrete Paving Machine
7.75
Front End Loader
7.25
Heavy Equipment Operator
8.00
Light Equipment Operator
7.25
Motor Grader Operator
9.50
Roller
6.75
Scraper
7.25
Tractor
7.25
Truck Driver -Light
6.50
Truck Driver -Heavy
7.00
2
EXHIBIT C
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act.
k:«
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Legal Holiday Rate
The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act.
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Project Manual
City of Lubbock
Fire Station No. 6
August 2002
PSC Project #: 03860201
::iauasaaa•sfots
ar--vs--vv--va
ai
:., -
' 64,Parkhill,
Smith & Cooper, Inc.
c:;;
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
ovel9e::c99:
Project Manual
City of Lubbock
Fire Station No. 6
August 2002
PSC Project #: 03860201
s.
KEVEN WILLIS 6
............................... ..�
90355 a
4,t���ClrAA � 1
••_::::::::::Xiang
...--...
:MIMM
::
"' I Vn Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc.
Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners
r�
* _ ....
0 JOSEPH R. RAPIER 11
:...,
61147
t
�i
OF�TF��
-r =
sue, —
MICHAEL CHAD DAVIS
.� ;1964
: �..
6 t'q -0Z-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
d
0"
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND CONTRACT INFORMATION
01010
Summary of Work......................................................................................................................2
01300
Administrative Requirements.....................................................................................................4
01330
. ............................
Submittal Procedures.............................................................................. .......5
01400
Quality Requirements.................................................................................................................4
01410
Testing Laboratory Services.......................................................................................................3
01500
Temporary Facilities and Controls.............................................................................................4
01600
Product Requirements................................................................................................................ 3
01650
Starting of Systems....................................................................................................................2
01700
Execution Requirements............................................................................................................ 3
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Not Used
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
02200
Earthwork...................................................................................................................................7
02280
Soil Treatment............................................................................................................................2
02520
Portland Cement Concrete Paving
...........................................................................................11
02810
Irrigation Systems......................................................................................................................8
02925
Sodding......................................................................................................................................4
02930
Exterior Plants............................................................................................................................5
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete.............................................................................................................14
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04200 Unit Masonry ...........................................................................................................................10
DIVISION 5 - METAL
05120
Structural Steel...........................................................................................................................5
05210
Steel Joists..................................................................................................................................3
05313
Steel Roof Deck.........................................................................................................................4
05315
Steel Form Deck......................................................................................................................... 3
05400
Cold -Formed Metal Framing.....................................................................................................3
05500
Metal Fabrications......................................................................................................................5
03860201 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
06100 Rough Carpentry .............................................................................................. ................4
06410 Custom Cabinetwork..................................................................................................................5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07180
Water Repellents........................................................................................................................ 3
07210
Building Insulation.....................................................................................................................4
07270
Firestopping...............................................................................................................................4
07410
Manufactured Metal Roof Panels...............................................................................................4
07525
Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing.........................................................................................7
07600
. ...........................
Sheet Metal.................................................................................... .................7
07700
Roof Specialties and Accessories...............................................................................................2
07900
Joint Sealers...............................................................................................................................4
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
08000 Door Schedule............................................................................................................................4
08110 Steel Doors and Frames.............................................................................................................4
08211 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors...................................................................................................4
08364 Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.................................................................................................7
08415 Aluminum Storefront................................................................................................................. 6
08520 Aluminum Windows..................................................................................................................6
08710 Hardware..................................................................................................................................11
08800 Glazing.......................................................................................................................................5
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09220
Portland Cement Plaster ..................
09260
Gypsum Board Systems ..................
09300
Tile ..................................................
09511
Acoustical Lay -In Ceilings ..............
09650
Resilient Flooring ............................
09680
Carpet ..............................................
09900
Painting ...........................................
09910
Graffiti Resistant Coating ................
09916
Finish Schedule ...............................
....................................................................................... 5
....................................................................................... 6
......................................................... .........................4
.......................................................................................4
....................................................................................... 4
....................................................................................... 3
....................................................................................... 8
....................................................................................... 4
....................................................................................... 3
03860201 "TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10162 Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments.................................................................................4
10425 Signs..........................................................................................................................................3
10505 Metal Lockers............................................................................................................................4
10521 Fire Extinguishers...................................................................................................................... 2
10810 Toilet Accessories......................................................................................................................4
DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT
Not Used
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds...........................................................................................................3
12621 Marker Boards...........................................................................................................................2
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not Used
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
Not Used
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15000
General Mechanical Requirements..........................................................................................14
15050
Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods..................................................................................9
15170
Motors........................................................................................................................................
3
15190
Mechanical Identification...........................................................................................................4
15260
Piping Insulation........................................................................................................................6
15290
Ductwork Insulation...................................................................................................................4
15310
Fire Protection Piping................................................................................................................4
15325
Sprinkler Systems.......................................................................................................................5
15410
Plumbing Piping......................................................................................................................10
15430
Plumbing Specialties ..................................
15440
Plumbing Fixtures......................................................................................................................5
15625
Low -Intensity Infrared Unit Heaters..........................................................................................
3
15781
Packaged Roof Top Air Conditioning Units..............................................................................5
15870
Power Ventilators and Exhaust Systems....................................................................................9
15890
Ductwork...................................................................................................................................4
15910
Ductwork Accessories................................................................................................................4
15990
Testing, Adjusting and Balancing..............................................................................................6
03860201
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
DIVISION
16 — ELECTRICAL
16000
Basic Electrical Upgrade....................................................................
16111
Conduit ..................................................... :................................................................................
4
16123
Building Wire and Cable............................................................................................................4
16130
Boxes.........................................................................................................................................4
16140
Wiring Devices..........................................................................................................................3
16170
Grounding and Bonding.............................................................................................................2
16180
Equipment Wiring Systems........................................................................................................2
16190
Supporting Devices....................................................................................................................
2
16195
Electrical Identification..............................................................................................................2
16421
Electrical Service Entrance........................................................................................................2
16441
Enclosed Switches......................................................................................................................2
16470
Panelboards................................................................................................................................3
16481
Enclosed Motor Controllers.......................................................................................................3
16510
Interior Luminaries.....................................................................................................................3
16721
Fire Alarm Systems....................................................................................................................5
16670
Lightning Protection Systems....................................................................................................3
03860201 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE - 4
08/02
!-N.
ACK,
s»�
O�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work covered by Contract Documents.
B. Owner furnished products.
C. Contractor use of site.
D. Owner occupancy.
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. Identification: Fire Station 6.
B. Location: Indiana and 35th Street.
C. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief
description of the Project is as follows: A new 2-bay fire station with related sitework, utilities,
equipment, etc.
1.4 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner:
1. Hose dryer equipment — General Contractor to wire and vent dryer.
2. Washing machine/clothes dryer — General Contractor to provide utility hookups.
3. Refrigerators — General Contractor to provide utility hookups.
4. Ice machine and filter — General Contractor to provide utility hookups.
B. Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to
Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient
items.
5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with
Owner.
3. Handle, store, install and finish products.
4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
03860201 SUMMARY OF WORK
08/02
01010 - 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE
A. Limit use of site to allow:
1. Owner occupancy
2. Work by Others and Work by Owner.
1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A. The Owner intends to occupy the entire portion of the Project by the calendar day set from
Notice to Proceed.
B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations.
C. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement.
PART2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
EM
SECTION 01300
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination.
B.
Field engineering.
C.
Preconstruction meeting.
D.
Progress meetings.
E.
Preinstallation meetings.
F.
Cutting and patching.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to
assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit,
as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to
maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the
building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall
be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing
structure is completed.
F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for:
1. Voltage
2. Phase
3. Ampacity
4. No. and size of wires
5. Wiring diagrams
6. Starter size, details and location
7. Control devices and details
G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial
Completion.
03860201 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work
and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's
activities.
1.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Locate and protect survey control and reference points.
B. Control datum for survey is that shown on Drawings.
C. Verify set -backs and easements, confirm drawing dimensions and elevations.
D. Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized
engineering survey practices.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed.
B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors.
C. Agenda:
1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
2. Distribution of Contract Documents.
3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress
schedule.
4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect/Engineer.
5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures.
6. Scheduling.
a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
b. Owner's requirements.
c. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
e. Survey and building layout.
f. Security and housekeeping procedures.
g. Schedules.
h. Procedures for testing.
i. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
j. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction
period.
7. Scheduling activities of geotechnical Engineer. Geotechnical information is on record
at Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A. The Owner shall schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at
minimum bi-monthly intervals.
B. The Owner shall make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants
and preside at meetings.
C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, and
Architect/Engingeer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
03860201 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2
08/02
PO
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
N
D. Agenda:
1. Review minutes of previous meetings._
2. Review of Work progress.
3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress.
5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7. Maintenance of progress schedule.
8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10. Coordination of projected progress.
11. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13. Other business relating to Work.
1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING
A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work
site prior to commencing work of the Section.
B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.
C. Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
D. Meeting:
1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures.
2. Review coordination with related work.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS
A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections.
B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes,
and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box.
C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for
connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual
specification sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
' C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
location.
03860201
08/02
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
01300 - 3
hli::•C4 R • �• .
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior
to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching.
B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects:
1. Structural integrity of element.
2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element.
4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements.
5. Work of Owner or separate contractor.
C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to:
1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work.
2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work.
3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work.
4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing.
5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical
Work.
D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces
to receive patching and finishing.
E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill.
F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.
H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.
I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest
intersection. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for
decision or remedy.
END OF SECTION
_y
L..
03860201 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4
08/02 —,
sl�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
1.3
1.4
A. Submittal procedures.
B. Construction progress schedules.
C. Proposed products list.
D. Shop drawings.
E. Product data.
F. Samples.
G. Design data.
H. Test reports.
I. Certificates.
J. Manufacturers' instructions.
K. Manufacturers' field reports.
L. Erection drawings.
M. Construction photographs.
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Manufacturers' field services and reports; Testing
Laboratory Services.
B. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's
certificates and closeout submittals.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submit to Architect for review for limited purpose of checking for conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
B. Produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article and
for record documents purposes described in Section 01700.
C. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's
name, address and phone number.
D. Sequentially number transmittal forms using Section number or Contractors other sequential
numbering system.
E. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification Section number, appropriate to submittal.
F. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in
accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
03860201 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
G. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect at business address.
Coordinate submission of related items.
H. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the
Contractor.
I. Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be
detrimental to successful performance of completed Work.
J. Allow space on submittals for Contractor and Engineer review stamps.
K. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report
any inability to comply with provisions.
L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
M. Format
1. Submit all submittals using an 8 '/2 x 11 inch format.
2. For submittals larger than 8 '/z x 11 inches, prefold to an 8 % x 11 format. Submittals not
pre -folded will be rejected.
N. At Architect's/Engineer's option, submittals will not be individually marked, but will be
reviewed using Architect's/Engineer's standard submittal review form.
O. Copies Required
1. Structural and Architectural Submittals: Number of copies Contractor requires plus three
copies, one which will be retained by Architect, and two will be retained by the Owner.
2. Mechanical, Plumbing and Electrical Submittals: Number of copies contractor requires
plus three copies, one which will be retained by Architect, and two will be retained by
the Owner.
1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Revise and resubmit submittals, as required, and resubmit to meet requirements as specified and
as noted on submittal reviews.
B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL.
C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical or numeric
suffix for each re -submittal.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect's/Engineer's review within 15 days
after date established in Notice to Proceed.
B. Revise and resubmit as required.
C. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since
previous version.
D. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work
day of each week.
E. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and —'
other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float
dates, and duration.
F. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
G. Submit separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples,
including Owner furnished products and dates reviewed submittals will be required from
Architect/Engineer. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes. �-
H. Indicate delivery dates for Owner furnished products.
03860201 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 2
08/02 �..
V"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
I. Revisions To Schedules:
1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion date of
each activity.
2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other
identifiable changes.
.. 3. Prepare narrative report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on
Schedule. Report corrective action taken, or proposed, and its effect including effect of
changes on schedules of separate contractors.
1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed
for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Indicate special utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and
location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
B.
Drawing Size: Minimum 8 '/2 x 11 inches and maximum 30 x 42 inches — folded to
8 1 /2" x 11 ".
C.
Form
1. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible
G„
transparency and one opaque reproduction.
2. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit opaque reproductions.
D.
Draw details to a minimum size of 1/2 inches equal to 1 foot.
E.
Draw site plans to same scale indicated on contract drawings.
F.
Draw all other plans to a minimum size of 1/8 inch equal to 1 foot.
G.
At Architect's/Engineer's option, depending on extent of review comments, either all opaque
copies will be marked or only the reproducible will be marked and returned to the Contractor
to make copies required.
1.9 PRODUCT DATA
A.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
B.
Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified
_
standards of trade associations and testing agencies.
C.
Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work and
building utilities where applicable.
D.
After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for
Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.10 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral
parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
B. Unless otherwise specified, submit samples of finishes from manufacturers' full range of
standard colors, textures, and patterns, for Architect's/Engineer's selection.
03860201 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit
multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations.
D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style
and color on each sample.
E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections, which will be
retained by Architect.
F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual
specification Sections.
G. Samples will not be used for testing purposes unless specifically stated in individual
specification section.
1.11 DESIGN DATA
A. Submit for Architect's/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.12 TEST REPORTS
A. Submit for Architect's/Engineer's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit test reports for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with
information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
1.13 CERTIFICATES
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by manufacturer,
installation/application subcontractor, or Contractor to Architect/Engineer, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting
reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable
to Architect/Engineer.
1.14 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions
for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing.
B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental
criteria required for application or installation.
1.15 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD REPORTS
A. Submit reports for Architect's/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for information.
C. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
03860201 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 4
08/02 --
A"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.16 ERECTION DRAWINGS
A. Submit drawings for Architect's/Engineer's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.
B. Submit for information for limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given
and design concept expressed in Contract Documents.
C. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by
Architect/Engineer or Owner.
1.17 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Each month submit photographs to Architect with Application for Payment.
B. Photographs
1. Format: Two prints, color, glossy; 4 x 6 inch size; mounted on 8-1/2 x 11 inch soft card
stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch.
2. Subject
a. Take two site photographs from differing directions and five interior photographs
indicating the relative progress of the Work, 5 days maximum prior to submitting
pay request.
b. Take photographs as evidence of existing project conditions as follows:
1) Interior views: 5.
2) Exterior views: 4.
C. Video
1. Take video of exterior and interior work 5 days maximum prior to submitting pay
request.
2. Take video as evidence of existing project conditions.
3. Submit two copies in VHS format.
D. Identify photographs and video with date, time, orientation and project identification.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
08/02
01330 - 5
P
rR
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Quality control and control of installation.
B. Tolerances.
C. References.
D. Mock-up requirements.
E. Testing and Inspection services.
F. Manufacturers' field services.
G. Examination
H. Preparation
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01420 Reference Standards.
B. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and
Certificates.
C. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
D. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Starting of Systems.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer.
G. Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
03860201 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 TOLERANCES
A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing in place.
1.6 REFERENCES
A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards,
comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or
are required by applicable codes.
B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
where a specific date is established by Code.
C. Obtain copy of standards when required by specification section.
D. Neither contractual relationship, duties nor responsibilities of parties in Contract nor those of
the Architect/Engineer shall be altered from Contract Documents by mention or inference
otherwise in any reference document.
1.7 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS
A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the
respective product specification sections.
B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings,
seals, and finishes.
C. Accepted mock-ups shall be comparison standard for quality level for the Work.
D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and is specified in individual
specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area.
1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES
A. Employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency or laboratory acceptable to
Owner and Architect/Engineer to perform specified inspection and testing.
1. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number,
and names of full time registered Engineer specialist and responsible officer.
2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference
Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with
memorandum of remedies of deficiencies reported by inspection.
B. The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in individual _
specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner.
1. Laboratory: Authorized to operate at Project location in State of Texas.
2. Laboratory Staff: Maintain full time registered Engineer specialist on staff to review
services.
3. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy
traceable to National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical
constants.
C. Testing, inspections and source quality control may occur on or off project site. Perform off -site
testing as required by Architect/Engineer or Owner.
03860201 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Submitted independent firm's reports to the Architect, in triplicate, indicating observations and
results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents.
' E. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools,
storage, safe access, and assistance by incidental labor as requested.
1. Notify Owner, Architect and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring services.
2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests
required for Contractor's use.
,.., F. Testing and employment of testing agency or laboratory does not relieve Contractor from
performing Work to contract requirements.
G. Perform re -testing and/or re -inspection required because of non-conformance to specified
requirements using the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer or
E Owner. Payment for retesting will be charged to the Contractor by deducting inspection or
testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.
H. Agency Responsibilities:
1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor
in performance of services.
3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
?� 5. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance
of Work or products.
6. Perform additional tests required by Architect/Engineer.
--; 7. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.
I. Agency Reports: After each test, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to
Contractor. When requested by Architect/Engineer, provide interpretation of test results.
Include the following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name of inspector.
4. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
5. Identification of product and specifications section.
6. Location in Project.
7. Type of inspection or test.
8. Date of test.
9. Results of tests.
10. Conformance with Contract Documents.
J. Limits On Testing Authority:
1. Agency or laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of
9.4 Contract Documents.
2. Agency or laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency or laboratory may not assume duties of Contractor.
4. Agency or laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
03860201 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
.2-
1.9 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
B. Submit qualifications of observer to Architect 30 days in advance of required observations.
Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer.
C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are -�
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D. Refer to Section 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES, MANUFACTURERS' FIELD
REPORTS article. _
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
M�WfflUTOff. KO-1►1
A. Verify existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work.
Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new Work being
applied or attached.
C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D. Verify utility services are available, of correct characteristics, and in correct locations. w
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying new material or substance in contact or bond.
END OF SECTION
03860201 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 4
08/02 1%.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01410
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Selection and payment.
B.
Contractor submittals.
C.
Laboratory responsibilities.
D.
Laboratory reports.
E.
Limits on testing laboratory authority.
F.
Contractor responsibilities.
G.
Schedule of inspections and tests.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01330 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates.
B.
Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
C.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents.
D.
Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSUASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or
Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction.
B.
ANSUASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,
Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction.
1.5
SELECTION
AND PAYMENT
A.
Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform
specified inspection and testing.
B.
Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform
work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with requirements of ANSUASTM E329 and ANSUASTM D3740R.
B.
Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State of Texas.
C.
Laboratory Staff. Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services.
03860201 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to
either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or accepted values of natural physical
constants.
1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and
names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
1.8 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.
B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance
of services.
C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified
standards.
D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of
Work or Products.
F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect.
G. Attend preconstruction conferences and progress meetings.
1.9 LABORATORY REPORTS
A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit three copies of laboratory report to Architect,
and to Contractor.
B. Include:
1.
Date issued,
2.
Project title and number,
3.
Name of inspector,
4.
Date and time of sampling or inspection,
5.
Identification of product and Specifications Section,
6.
Location in the Project,
7.
Type of inspection or test,
8.
Date of test,
9.
Results of tests and
10.
Conformance with Contract Documents.
C. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results.
1.10 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY
A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor.
D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work.
1.11 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used
which require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
03860201 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 2
08/02 it-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B.
Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work.
C.
Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and
handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and 'inspections,
storage and curing of test samples.
D.
Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring
inspection and testing services.
E.
Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory, arrange with laboratory and pay for
additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
1.12 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A.
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry System: Test grout for conformance to ASTM C 1019.
B.
At the time of final inspection and tests of the power and lighting system, all connections at
panels, switches, circuit breakers, etc., and all splices shall be complete.
C.
Each power, lighting and control circuit shall be tested and proven free of breaks, short circuits
or grounds. On all conductors rated at 600 volts, Megger shall be used to test circuits.
D.
As indicated in individual Specification Sections.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and
sanitary facilities.
B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water
control.
C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, Parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and
temporary buildings.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: final cleaning.
1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A. Provide and pay for power service required from utility source.
B. Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed.
C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy.
D. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in
conformance with National Electric Code.
F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch
circuits for power and lighting.
1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every
2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required.
2. Provide flexible power cords as required.
3. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting.
1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level
of 2 watts/sq ft.
B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for
►, security purposes.
a
C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security
purposes.
03860201 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1
P'�, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,
pigtails, and lamps as required.
E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Utilize permanent building heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as
required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations.
B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in
accordance with Article 1.14 — Exterior Enclosures, in this Section and exercise measures to
conserve energy. _
C. Provide separate metering and reimburse Owner for cost of energy used.
D. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that
installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide
and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed
parts.
E. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in
progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
F. Do not use permanent building heating equipment until all dust related operations are
completed.
1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization.
1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A. Connect to existing water source for construction operations.
B. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water.
C. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
B. Permanent building facilities shall not be used during construction operations. Maintain daily
in clean and sanitary condition.
1.11 BARRIERS
A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use
of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction
operations.
03860201 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2
08/02 �a
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
1.12 FENCING
A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence,
painted.
B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates
with locks.
1.13 WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
equipment.
�e
B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
1.14 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate
acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and
maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections,
and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
B. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks.
1.15 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification
Sections.
B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate work area to minimize damage.
C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.16 SECURITY
A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
1.17 PARKING
A. Arrange for temporary surface parking areas to accommodate construction personnel.
B. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off -site parking.
03860201 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as --
required to maintain clean site.
1.19 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION _
A. Provide 8 ft. wide x 6 ft. high project sign of exterior grade plywood and wood frame
construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter, to Architect's design
and colors.
B. List title of project, names of Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major subcontractors.
C. Erect on site at location established by Architect.
D. No other signs are allowed without Owner's permission except those required by law.
1.20 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A. Office: Weather -tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating
equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table.
1.21 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, and materials as soon
as permanent facilities can be utilized.
B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 4
08/02
N
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Products.
B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling.
C. Product options.
D. Substitutions.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.
B. Section 01410 -Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.' Testing' Laboratory
Services. .
1.4 PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems
forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials
or components required for reuse.
B.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery
1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original,
unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and products are undamaged.
.*
3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
4. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to
facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction
process.
B.
Storage
1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and
labels intact and legible.
2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures.
3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
03860201
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1
�.,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide
ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products.
5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured
warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site
storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be included
in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect.
C. Handling
1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or
specified to protect from damage during storage and installation.
1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those
standards or description.
B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named
and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the
following article.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for Substitutions during
the bidding period to requirements specified in this Section.
B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution
with Contract Documents.
D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for
the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse Owner, Architect and Engineer for review or redesign services associated
with re -approval by authorities.
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
F. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to
one proposed Substitution.
03860201 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. The Architect/Engineer will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject
request.
PART2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3
�.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
W
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
`-1 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Starting systems.
B. Demonstration and instructions.
C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
r� 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.
B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Manufacturers field reports.
C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials.
D. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing.
1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS
A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage.
D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors'
personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 and 01410 that equipment or system
has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to
date of final inspection.
,r B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season.
C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual
with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
03860201 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1
08/02
R
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location.
E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Closeout procedures.
B. Final cleaning.
C. Adjusting.
D. Project record documents.
E. Operation and maintenance data.
F. Warranties.
G. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning.
B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect's inspection.
B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities.
C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.5 FINAL CLEANING
A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft
surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D. Replace filters of operating equipment.
E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes.
I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction.
03860201 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
08/02
01700 - 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work:
1. Contract Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
C. Record information concurrent with construction progress.
D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4. Field changes of dimension and detail.
5. Details not on original Contract Drawings.
6. Changes made by addenda and modification.
F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8 '/z x 11 inch text pages, bound in three
D-ring binders with durable plastic covers.
B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of
documents as required prior to final submittal.
C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection.
D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required.
E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description
identified, type on 24 pound white paper.
G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, —.
Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
03860201 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2
08/02 L
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
1. Significant design criteria.
2. List of equipment.
3. Parts list for each component.
4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment
including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC
systems
5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and
materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1. Shop drawings and product data.
2. Air and water balance reports.
3. Certificates.
4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Provide duplicate notarized copies.
B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation
cover.
D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal
within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.
1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification Sections.
B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
03860201 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
08/02
a_
01700 - 3
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Site clearing.
2. Earth moving and excavation.
3. Utilities trenching.
4. Grading.
5. Backfilling.
6. Compacting.
7. Subbase course for walks and pavements.
B.
Related Documents: Geotechnical data.
1. Geotechnical data prepared by: Terra Engineers, Inc.
2. Geotechnical data consists of the following, which is available for the contractor's
inspection at the office of the architect:
a. Geotechnical engineer's report.
k'.
3. Geotechnical data is not a part of the contract documents. The contractor is entitled to
rely upon the factual information contained therein, such as locations and depths of tests
..�
or explorations made at the site and material encountered at each location, all as of the
dates made. The contractor is not entitled to rely upon the nonfactual information
contained therein such as interpretations, opinions, or extrapolations of data; nor is the
contractor entitled to rely upon the completeness of the information for the contractor's
purposes.
C.
Related Sections:
1. Changes in the work: General Conditions.
2. Paving: Elsewhere in Division 2.
3. Concrete: Elsewhere in Division 2.
4. Concrete: Division 3.
5. Installation of underground utilities: Divisions 15 and 16.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D 1556-90 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand -Cone Method; 1990.
—» B.
ASTM D 1557-91 -- Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3); 1991.
C.
ASTM D 2167-94 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil In -Place by
�-,
the Rubber Balloon Method; 1994.
D.
ASTM D 2487-93 -- Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil
Classification System); 1993.
E.
ASTM D 2922-91 -- Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place
-
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1991.
F.
ASTM D 2940-85 -- Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or
Subbases for Highways or Airports.
03860201
EARTHWORK 02200-1
08/02
t:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
G. ASTM D 3017-88(93) -- Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place
by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 1988 (Reapproved 1993.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Reports: Testing laboratory shall submit the following reports directly to the architect and
shall copy the contractor:
1. Analysis of soil materials, whether procured on or off site, and including fill, backfill,
and borrow materials.
2. Verification of each footing subgrade.
3. In -place density test reports.
4. Moisture -density relationship test reports.
5. Gradation test reports for pavement base course aggregates.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Laboratory Services:
1. Secure and pay for the services of a qualified, independent geotechnical engineer to
classify existing soil materials, to recommend and to classify proposed borrow materials
when necessary, to verify compliance of materials with specified requirements, and to
perform required field and laboratory testing. Geotechnical engineer shall be acceptable
to the architect and the owner and shall be licensed to practice in the State of Texas.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Traffic: Do not interfere with or close public ways without permission of governing authorities.
Do not interfere with adjacent private facilities.
B. Site Utilities:
1. If underground utilities are encountered in locations other than indicated, immediately
advise utility owners before proceeding. Amend project record documents to show actual
locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Where sufficient approved materials are not available from required excavations on site, obtain
and pay for materials from approved sources off site without charge to the owner.
B. For each soil material proposed for use as fill or backfill, whether obtained on or off site, testing
laboratory shall classify soil material, develop Proctor curve, and perform any other tests
required.
C. Obtain approval of the architect for each soil material.
D. Satisfactory Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, Ph range of 5.5 to 7, 4 percent organic matoriac
minimum, free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials
harmful to plant growth.
1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site. Verify suitability of surface soil
to provide topsoil -meeting requirements and amend when necessary. Supplement with
imported topsoil when quantities are insufficient. Clean topsoil of roots, plants, suds,
stones, clay lumps and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.
03860201 EARTHWORK 02200-2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
E. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials classified as satisfactory.
F. Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D 2487): Free of stones larger than 2 inches in any
dimension, trash, debris, organic material, other objectionable material and the liquid limit and
plasticity index shall not exceed 35 and 12 respectively.
G. Aggregate Base Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel,
crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand, ASTM D 2940, with at least 95 percent passing a
1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Provide markers indicating limits of work and clear identification of items and areas
requiring protection.
B. Provide barricades, warning signs, and warning lights around open excavations as necessary
to prevent injury to persons.
C. The contractor is solely responsible for determining the potential for injury to persons and
damage to property.
1. Where such potential is present, take appropriate protective measures.
2. Protect persons from injury and protect existing and new improvements from damage
*^� caused directly or indirectly by construction operations.
n D. Do not allow excavation subgrades and soil at foundations to be subjected to freezing
temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Should prepared,
,... compacted subgrades be damaged by freezing, remove soil materials to the depth required by
the architect and replace and recompact in conformance with specified requirements.
3.2 DEWATERING
A. Do not allow surface or ground water to flow into or accumulate in excavations.
B. Do not allow water to flow in an uncontrolled fashion across the project site or to erode slopes
or to undermine foundations. Do not allow water to be diverted onto adjacent properties.
Arrange excavation operations so as to provide continual and effective drainage of excavations.
C. Provide and maintain temporary diversion ditches, dikes, and grading as necessary; do not use
trench excavations for this purpose. When required by surface or subsurface water conditions,
provide sumps, wellpoints, French drains, pumps, and other control measures necessary to keep
excavations free of water. When existence of ground water near or above final excavation level
is indicated or suspected, provide control measures prior to excavating to water level and
maintain water level continuously below working level.
3.3 EXCAVATION
A. General: Excavation includes the removal of any materials necessary to achieve the required
,.R subgrade elevations and includes reuse or disposal of such materials.
B. Unnecessary Excavation: The expense of excavation of materials outside of limits indicated or
ordered in writing by the architect and the correction thereof to the satisfaction of the architect
shall be borne by the contractor.
1. Unnecessary excavation under footings: Either deepen footings to bear on actual
subgrade elevation without changing top elevations or place concrete fill up to required
elevation, as required by the architect.
03 860201 EARTHWORK 02200-3
�,^ 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Unnecessary excavation other than under footings: Either place compacted fill or
otherwise correct conditions, as required by the architect.
C. Approval of Subgrade: Notify the architect when required elevations have been reached.
1. When required by the architect due to the unforeseen presence of unsatisfactory materials
or other factors, perform additional excavation and replace with approved compacted fill
material in accordance with the architect's instructions.
2. Payment for unforeseen additional work will be made in accordance with established unit
prices or, if none, in accordance with provisions for changes in the work. No payment
will be made for correction of subgrades improperly protected against damage from
freeze -thaw or accumulation of water, or for correction of otherwise defective subgrades.
D. Excavation Stabilization: Wherever it is possible to slope faces of excavations to achieve
stabilization, do so in compliance with requirements of governing authorities. Otherwise,
provide shoring and bracing.
1. Design, provide, maintain, and remove shoring and bracing in compliance with
requirements of governing authorities. Remove temporary shoring and bracing when
stabilization is no longer required.
E. Excavation for Structures:
1. Excavate beyond footings and foundations so as to allow proper construction and
inspection of concrete formwork and other materials. Excavate to the required elevation.
a. Tolerance: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
F. Excavation for Footings and Foundations:
1. Delay excavation to final grade and final compaction until just before concrete will be
placed.
2. Remove any loose or sloughed material and adjust excavations to conform to required
lines, grades, and tolerances and to form a suitable bearing surface. Do not disturb
bottom of completed excavations.
G. Excavation for Trenches:
1. Unless otherwise required, begin trenching, utility installation, and backfilling at lowest
portion of utility line, working toward highest portion of line.
2. Required trench width: Excavate accurately to provide not less than 6 nor more than 9
inches of clearance on each side of pipes and conduits, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where indicated trench widths are exceeded, redesign, stronger pipe, or special
installation procedures may be required by the architect at no additional cost to
the owner.
3. Unless otherwise indicated, trench walls for piping shall be vertical from trench bottom
to one foot above top of pipe or to top elevation of initial backfill, whichever is higher.
4. Excavate trenches to the depths necessary to achieve required flow lines and invert
elevations and to prevent freezing of liquids or frost heave during winter.
5. Dig trenches to depths indicated.
6. Trench bottoms: Unless otherwise indicated, excavate and shape trench bottoms as
follows:
a. Support pipes and conduit up to 5 inches diameter on smooth, accurately graded
subgrade. Shape surface by hand to provide continuous support on undisturbed
soil for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit.
b. Support pipes and conduit 6 or more inches diameter on 4 inches of approved
subbase material. Place and carefully compact additional layer of subbase material
of depth required to support pipe haunches. Shape surface to provide continuous
support for bell and body of pipe and joints, fittings, and body of conduit.
H. Excavation for Walks and Pavements: Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to
indicated cross -sections, elevations and grades.
03860201 EARTHWORK 02200-4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.4 STORAGE
A. Stockpile materials to be used for filling and backfilling, including excavated materials
classified as satisfactory soil materials, at locations indicated or as directed. Stockpile in a
manner to freely drain surface water; cover if necessary to prevent wind-blown dust.
1. Store soil materials without intermixing. Protect from contamination with other soils or
debris.
3.5 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. Preparation: Backfill excavations as soon as practicable. Complete the following operations
before backfilling:
I. Inspection and acceptance of below -grade construction.
2. Inspection, testing, and approval of underground utilities.
3. Surveying of underground utilities for record documents.
4. Concrete formwork removal.
5. Removal of loose material, muck, debris, and trash from excavation.
6. Installation of temporary or permanent horizontal bracing for structures to receive
backfill.
B. Remove temporary shoring and bracing as the work progresses and when its use is no longer
necessary.
1. Backfilling near footings, general: Where trenches occur underneath of footings, or
where trench bottoms occur below and within 18 inches horizontally of footing bottoms,
backfill trench with concrete to top of footing and up to 4 feet perpendicularly from each
face of footing.
C. Installation: Place approved soil materials in layers to required elevations.
1. Do not place material on muddy or frozen surfaces or on surfaces containing frost.
D. Installation: Place fill materials to required elevations in lifts of required depth. Provide fill
materials beneath each area as indicated.
1. Planted areas: Satisfactory soil materials with 9 inch depth of topsoil.
2. Building slabs: Satisfactory soil materials.
3. Piping/conduit: Subbase material where indicated; otherwise use satisfactory soil
materials.
4. Walks/pavements: Use base material or satisfactory excavated or borrow soil material.
3.6 BUILDING SLAB AREAS
A. Place fill or backfill lifts such that compaction true to grade and level is accomplished with a
minimum of surface disturbance and segregation or degradation of materials. Maintain grade
control and cross section by means of line and grade stakes. Maintain moisture content within
prescribed limits during placing and compacting.
B. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is less than the maximum lift thickness
permitted, place material in a single lift. When the total thickness of materials to be placed is
greater than the maximum lift thickness permitted, place materials in two or more lifts of
uniform thickness with no lift less than 3 inches in thickness.
03860201 EARTHWORK 02200-5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.7 COMPACTION
A. Place materials used in backfilling and filling in layers not exceeding loose depths as follows:
1. Heavy equipment compaction: 8 inches.
2. Hand -operated tampers: 4 inches.
B. Place material simultaneously on opposite sides of walls, small structures, utility lines, etc. to
avoid displacement or overstressing.
C. In -Place Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the values given below, expressed
as a percentage of maximum density at optimum moisture content.
1. Unpaved areas: Top 6 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts:
a. 85 percent.
2. Building slabs and structures: Top 12 inches of subgrade and subsequent lifts:
a. 95 percent.
3. Utility trenches: Compact backfill and fill materials to in -place density specified for
applicable area of trench, but in no case less than 90 percent.
4. Paved areas: Base course materials:
a. 95 percent.
D. Moisture Control: During compaction, control moisture of subgrades and subsequent lifts to
within tolerances from optimum moisture content as recommended by testing laboratory. Wet
surface with water when additional moisture is required. Aerate soil to aid in drying or replace
soil when excessive moisture is present.
3.8 GRADING
A. General: Smooth grade to a uniform surface that complies with compaction requirements and
required lines, grades, and cross sections and is free from irregular surface changes.
B. Provide smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and changed grades. Cut out soft
spots, fill low spots, and cut down high spots to conform to required surfaces tolerances.
C. Slope grades to direct water away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrade to
required elevations within the following tolerance:
1. Unpaved areas: Plus or minus 0.10 foot.
2. Inside building lines: 1/2 inch as measured with a 10-foot straightedge.
3. Paved areas: Plus or minus 1/4 inch.
D. Areas outside the building lines from which topsoil has been removed shall be topsoiled. The
surface shall be free of materials that would hinder planting or maintenance operations. The
subgrade shall be pulverized to a depth of 2 inches by disking or plowing for the bonding of
topsoil with the subsoil. Top soil shall then be uniformly spread; graded, and compacted to the
thickness, elevations, slopes shown, and left free of surface irregularities. Top soil shall be
compacted by one pass of a cultipacker, roller, or other approved equipment weighing 100 to
160 pounds per linear foot of roller. Topsoil shall not be placed when the subgrade is frozen,
excessively wet, extremely dry, or in a condition otherwise detrimental to seeding, planting, or
proper grading.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Laboratory Services: Provide timely notice to testing laboratory. Do not proceed with
construction until testing of each subgrade and lift of fill or backfill has been performed and
required inspections and approvals have been obtained.
03860201 EARTHWORK 02200-6
08/02
n
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B.
Maximum Density at Optimum Moisture Content: Determine in accordance with ASTM D
1557.
1. For each subgrade, fill, and backfill material, perform one moisture -density relationship
test for each 1500 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, of material used.
C.
In -Place Density Tests: ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon
rt
method), or ASTM D 2922 (nuclear method), as applicable.
1. When ASTM D 2922 is used, check and adjust calibration curves using ASTM D 1556
only. ASTM D 3017 shall be performed to measure water content of soil at the time
in -place density tests are conducted. Calibrate density and moisture gages at the start of
testing on each type of material encountered and at intervals as directed.
D.
Areas under Slabs and Pavements: Conduct not less than one in -place density test of subgrade
,.,
and one in -place density test of each compacted fill or backfill layer for every 2000 square feet
k
of overlying paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests per lift.
E.
Foundation Wall Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift.
F.
Trench Backfill: Conduct not less than 2 in -place density tests per lift per trench.
G.
If testing service reports indicate that subgrade or fills are below specified density, scarify or
remove and replace to the required depth, recompact, and retest at no cost to the owner.
3.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Completed Areas: Protect from damage by pedestrian or vehicular traffic, freezing, erosion, and
contamination with foreign materials.
1. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances in settled, eroded, or rutted areas.
B. Damaged Areas: Where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted,
settled, or lose compaction and whether due to subsequent construction operations or weather
conditions, restore materials to required conditions: Scarify or remove and replace to the
required depth, return to optimum moisture content, and compact materials to the required
density before continuing construction.
C. Correction: Should settling occur within the project correction period, remove finished
surfacing, add additional approved material, compact material, and reconstruct surfacing.
Construct surfacing to match and blend in with adjacent surfacing as nearly as practicable.
3.11 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
A. Properly dispose of any excess or unsatisfactory topsoil off site.
B. Remove any material not required for use on the project (including unsatisfactory soil, excess
satisfactory soil, trash, and debris) and legally dispose of it off the owner's property.
r' C. On -site burning is not permitted.
END OF SECTION
r
.-A
03860201 EARTHWORK 02200-7
,,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 02280
SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of soil areas scheduled to receive new
construction.
2. Subterranean termite prevention treatment of new construction in progress.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Title 7, United States Code 136 through 136y -- Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide
Act as amended; 1947 (Revised 1988).
v-�
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product label or accompanying labeling in accordance with the Federal
Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: Evidence of installer's authorization to apply products under applicable state
and local law.
2. Manufacturer's instructions: Submit manufacturer's directions for use.
C. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Project record documents:
'^ a. Submit a certificate signed by installer and contractor stating that treatment has
been applied in accordance with applicable governing regulations and in
accordance with this specification.
r=K b. Incorporate into the certificate or attach thereto a plan drawing indicating actual
application locations and, for each location, noting methods and rates of
application and including typical sections or details where necessary for clarity.
2. Warranty.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Licensed to install specified products in the state in which the project is located and in
the local jurisdiction.
2. Comply with applicable pesticide regulations of the state in which the project is located.
a. Comply with applicable local pesticide regulations.
03860201 SOIL TREATMENT 02280 - 1
,�. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty:
I . Submit installer's warranty against infestation of treated areas.
2. Warranty shall not reduce or otherwise limit any other rights to correction which the
owner may have under the contract documents.
B. Correction during the warranty period shall include not less that the following:
I . Retreatment of areas in which evidence of infestation is discovered.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TERMITICIDE
A. Registered with the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for use as a
termiticide under conditions of use prevailing at the project site.
B. Registered with the applicable authorities in the state in which the project is located and with
local governing authorities, as applicable for use as a termiticide under conditions of use
prevailing at the project site.
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
A. Apply termiticide in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Apply termiticide at the maximum recommended application rates for the respective areas to
be treated and methods of treatment used.
C. Treat the entire structure. Do not leave any portion untreated.
D. Schedule treatment of new construction to occur when treatment may be applied directly to the
soils and surfaces to be treated, and prior to their concealment with subsequent construction.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Do not allow contamination of surfaces not intended to be treated. Follow manufacturer's
instructions to completely remove chemical from surfaces should contamination occur.
B. Remove from beneath the structure any cellulosic material, wood that is not
pressure -preservative treated, and debris. Do not allow non -pressure -preservative treated wood
to contact with or remain proximate to soil.
END OF SECTION
03860201 SOIL TREATMENT 02280 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 02520
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings, General conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Formwork for pavements.
2.
Formwork accessories.
3.
Form stripping.
., 4.
Reinforcing steel for pavements.
5.
Cast -in -place concrete for pavements.
6.
Concrete curing.
.-. 7.
Striping.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Earthwork: Elsewhere in Division 2.
2.
Cast -in -place concrete for structures: Division 3.
3.
Joint sealers: Division 7.
0-
W."
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 182-91I -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf;
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991.
B. ACI 201.2R-92 -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992.
C. ACI 211.1-91 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
D. ACI 301-89 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete
Institute;1989.
E. ACI 325.9R-91 -- Guide for Construction of Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases
F. ACI 330R-87 B Guide for Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots.
G. ACI 304R-89 -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute; 1989.
H. ACI 305R-91 -- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
I. ACI 306R-88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988.
J. ASTM A 185-90a -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement; 1990.
K. ASTM A 615-92 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1992.
L. ASTM C 31-91 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field; 1991.
M. ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
N. ASTM C 39-93a-- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1993.
O. ASTM C 42-90 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete; 1990.
P. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992.
Q. ASTM C 143-90a -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990.
R. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994.
S. ASTM C 171-92 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992.
T. ASTM C 172-90 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990.
U. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 1978.
V. ASTM C 231-91b -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method; 1991.
W. ASTM C 260-94 -- Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994.
X. ASTM C 309-93 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete; 1993.
Y. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992.
Z. ASTM C 618-94a -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994.
AA. ASTM D 1751-83(91) -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types);
1983 (Reapproved 1991).
BB. ASTM E 329-93b -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993.
CC. CRSI MSP-1-90 -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Concrete admixtures.
2. Curing compound.
B. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance
requirements specified:
1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations
begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been
selected.
a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results,
standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations.
b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results,
and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr).
C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete.
d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required.
2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified.
3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all
materials furnished under this section conform to specifications.
4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that
chloride content complies with specified requirements.
5. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
6. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
0
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Services:
1. Provide testing as specified in Section 01400 - Quality Control Procedures.
B. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size,
lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings.
1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation
of dirt or rust.
B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of
shipment and use.
C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or
other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile.
D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
is protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures,
and insulating blankets.
,.., B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during
mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing,
shading, and windbreaks.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
A. Pavement Forms: Standard steel paving forms in sections not less than 10 feet in length.
1. Single piece; depth equal to slab thickness.
r- 2. Base width at least three -fourths of form depth but not less than 8 inches, unless
otherwise approved.
3. Straightness tolerance: 1/8 inch in 10 feet from true plane surface along top; 1/4 inch in
10 feet along face.
4. Locking provisions at ends of abutting form sections.
5. Wood forms complying with the above provisions, including base and locking, may be
used only where form of less than 10 feet is required.
6. Wet screeds will not be permitted.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 3
�., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise
indicated:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice."
a. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of
concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be
cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted.
C. Load Transfer Devices:
1. Dowels: Plain round or deformed bars, as shown on the drawings. Provide corrosion
inhibitor on unbonded end.
a. Metal expansion caps: Designed to provide not less than 1 inch of bar movement.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows:
1. Type I, except where other type is specifically permitted or required.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or F.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33.
a. Class 2M.
2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: One-third of depth of pavements.
E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride
ions by weight of cement are prohibited.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with
other mix components.
G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.
1. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E.
J. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth.
B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows:
1. Curing paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting.
C. Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Curing compounds: Liquid membrane -forming curing compounds complying with
ASTM C 309, Type 1.
2. Solvents: Provide water -based products.
D. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751.
E. Traffic Paint: Alkyd -Resin ready -mixed, complying with AASHTO M248, Type S, white color.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 4
08/02
.A
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on
the basis of trial mixtures as specified in ACI 211, and proportion mixes accordingly. Employ
an independent testing agency acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed
mix design.
B. Specified compressive strength f(c) at 28 days: 3,500 psi.
C. Slump: Not to exceed 5 inches.
D. Fly Ash:
1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to
a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20.
E. Admixtures:
1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table
1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air
content between 2 percent and 4 percent.
2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability.
3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed
at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F.
4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be
placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
5. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved.
F. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may
submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when
circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur.
Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests.
2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD
A. Slump: A tolerance of up to 1 inch above approved design mix slump will be permitted for 1
batch in 5 consecutive batches tested. Concrete of lower slump than that specified may be used,
provided proper placing and consolidation is obtained.
B. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air
content will be allowed for field measurements.
C. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of
ASTM C 94.
1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
75 minutes.
2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 5
�,., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The
contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its
timely removal.
B. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by
concrete documents, properly located and accurately aligned. Provide for screeds, bulkheads,
anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required.
C. Release Agent: Provide field -applied form coating. Thoroughly clean and recondition formwork
and reapply coating before each use.
3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified.
B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which
adversely affect bond with concrete.
1. Size and Spacing: No. 4 bars at 12 inches o.c. each way.
2. Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required for
protection.
3. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
4. Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated.
5. Do not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved.
6. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with
or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces.
C. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Provide joints of the types and in the locations shown on the drawings.
1. Construct joints in adjacent panels in precise alignment. Do not offset joints, except
joints across expansion joints can be offset as indicated.
2. Tool slab edges and formed joints with 1/8-inch radius jointing tool.
B. Expansion Joints:
1. Provide positive, firm support of filler during placement of concrete to ensure accurate
alignment.
2. Install expansion joint filler to the full concrete depth.
3. Recess top edge of filler to the depth indicated to accommodate joint sealant. Protect top
edge of filler with removable metal channel while concrete is being placed, or provide
filler with removable portion of the required depth.
4. Where dowels are used, punch or drill filler to exact dowel diameter, spacing, and depth.
C. Load Transfer Devices:
1. Apply a thin brush coat of approved lubricant to free end of dowels immediately before
concrete placement.
2. Place at right angles to joints, in precise horizontal and vertical alignment and spacing,
and firmly supported against movement during placing of concrete.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Sawn Contraction Joints:
1. Use only wet saws of an approved type.
2. Time sawing to occur before cracking occurs but after concrete has hardened sufficiently
to avoid rough joint surfaces.
3. Saw to one-fourth of slab depth.
--. 4. Extend saw cut to full width of concrete section, including adjacent curbs and gutters,
if any.
E. Joint Sealing: Seal joints as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during
inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete.
B.
Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items
to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed.
r. C.
Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows:
1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints.
2. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide keyed construction joints with tie
bars of size and spacing as approved by the architect.
3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation.
D.
Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned
'^
construction joints.
R
1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items,
using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable
e--
to Architect.
E.
Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures
are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before
concrete has cured.
1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials.
2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates.
F.
Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient
temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or
when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that
the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per
r
square foot per hour.
1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions.
2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection
of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation.
3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing
concrete.
3.5 FINISHING PAVEMENTS
A. Finishing Operations - General:
1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement.
2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R.
3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify
conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water
appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and
correct surface tolerances.
5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has
disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch
indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness.
6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact concrete,
to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture. Recheck and
correct surface tolerances.
B. Float Finish: As specified above.
C. Slab Surface Tolerances:
1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains.
2. Flatness tolerance: Maximum depression between high spots when measured by placing
a 10-foot straightedge on surface at any orientation: 1/4 inch.
D. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows:
1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days.
2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low
areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect.
3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold
or hot temperatures until concrete has cured.
2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service
conditions and type of applied finish in each case.
B. Curing Period:
1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes.
C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry.
2. Keep continuously moist for not less than 3 days by uninterrupted use of any of the
following:
a. Water ponding.
b. Water -saturated sand.
C. Water -fog spray.
d. Saturated burlap: Provide 4-inch minimum overlap at joints.
3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete
has dried.
a. Moisture -retaining cover: Lap not less than 3 inches at edges and ends, and seal
with waterproof tape or adhesive. Repair holes or tears during curing period with
same tape or adhesive. Maintain covering in intimate contact with concrete
surface. Secure to avoid displacement.
1) Extend covering past slab edges at least twice the thickness of slab.
2) Do not use plastic sheeting on surfaces which will be exposed to view
when in service.
b. Curing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform with
moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate application
at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 8
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Continue final curing to end of curing period.
D. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period.
E. Ensure that joints and slab edges receive adequate curing.
1. Ensure that sawn joints receive adequate curing after sawing.
2. Where joints subsequently will be sealed, do not apply curing compounds unless joint
faces will be sandblasted free of compound.
F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air
in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective
measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface.
3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not be damaged, forms may be
removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 8 hours. Maintain curing and
protection operations after form removal.
3.8 TRAFFIC PAINT
A. Apply traffic paint for striping and other markings with mechanical equipment to produce
uniform straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a 15 mil wet
film thickness.
3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
�., A.
Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and
ASTM C 31.
1. Take samples at point of discharge.
2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein
at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same
frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used
for acceptance of concrete.
B.
Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency
changes.
1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94.
C.
Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength
test performed on air -entrained concrete.
D.
Concrete Temperature:
1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below.
2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above.
3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made.
�^^ E.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.
1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test required.
2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete:
a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis.
b. Minimum frequency:
1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each
concrete class.
2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab area or fraction thereof for each day's
pour of each concrete class.
03860201 'PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 9
,,,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at
architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these
specimens is not waived.)
4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from
not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer than
5.
C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is
required.
d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless
other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens.
If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the
test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such
evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect.
e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required.
f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of
the following criteria are met:
1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified
compressive strength f(c).
3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds
specified compressive strength f(c).
g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action
when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test
values for companion laboratory -cured specimens.
F. Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within
24 hours of test.
1. Test reports shall contain the following data:
a. Project name, number, and other identification.
b. Name of concrete testing agency.
C. Date and time of sampling.
d. Concrete type and class.
e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work.
f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods.
2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at
architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various
locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the
architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete
characteristics have not been attained.
a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or tests as directed.
b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable
concrete has been verified.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 10
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.10 OPENING PAVEMENTS TO TRAFFIC
A. Do not allow traffic, including construction traffic, on pavements until authorized.
B. Pavements may be opened to traffic only after seven (7) days have elapsed after placement and
pavements have developed at least 85 percent of specified final design strength.
END OF SECTION
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING 02520 - 11
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEMS
, PART 1 - GENERAL
..-
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section 02810 includes valves, piping, sprinklers, specialties, accessories, controls, and
wiring for lawn irrigation systems.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Pipe sizes used in this Section are nominal pipe size (NPS) in inches. Tube sizes are Standard
size in inches.
B. Supply Piping: Piping from water source to connection to irrigation system pressure piping.
Piping is under same pressure as water supply. Piping in this category is not included in this
Section.
C. Pressure Piping: Piping downstream from supply piping to and including control valves. Piping
is under irrigation system pressure. Piping in this category includes pressure regulators, water
meters, and backflow preventers.
D. Circuit Piping: Piping downstream from control valves to irrigation system sprinklers, emitters,
devices, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure (less than pressure piping) during flow.
E. Control Valve: Automatic (electrically operated) valve for control water flow to irrigation
system zone.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Location of Sprinklers and Devices: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments
necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.
B. Minimum Water Coverage: Not less than:
1. Turf Areas: 100 percent. Nozzles shall be set to throw a distance approximately equal
to adjacent sprinkler heads.
C. Components and Installation: Capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working pressure ratings except where indicated otherwise.
1. Pressure Piping: 200 psig.
2. Circuit and Drain Piping: 200 psig.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810-1
,..., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
B. Product data including pressure rating, rated capacity, settings, and electrical data of selected
models for the following:
1. Automatic Control Valves.
2. Sprinklers.
3. Wiring.
4. Controller.
5. Valves.
C. Wiring diagrams for electrical valves, and devices.
D. Maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified Section
"Project Closeout" for the following:
1. Automatic control valves.
2. Sprinklers.
3. Controller.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water for prevention of backflow and
backsiphonage.
B. Comply with requirements of authority with jurisdiction for irrigation systems.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed irrigation systems
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in
construction with a five year record of successful local in-service performance. A Licensed
Irrigator shall be on the jobsite daily for direct supervision of employees on design, installation,
maintenance or repair of the irrigation system including the connection of such system to the
water supply.
D. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Marking: On equipment, specialties, and accessories
made to specified standards.
E. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in "National Electrical Code,"
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
F. Product Options: Irrigation system piping, specialties, and accessories are based on specific
types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components with equal performance
characteristics produced by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in
dimensions, operation, and other characteristics do not change design concept or intended
performance as judged by the Landscape Architect. The burden of proof of product equality
is on the Contractor. Any request for substitution of products must be accompanied by all of
the following within seven (7) days prior to the bid date.
1. Actual sample of each type of equipment proposed as a substitute.
2. Original manufacturers catalogue sheet indicating the full specification for that particular
item.
3. A list of installations in the immediate area of Lubbock in satisfactory operation for at
least five (5) years. List must include name and phone number of person directly
responsible for the use and maintenance of the facility.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Perform site survey and verify existing utility locations. Verify that irrigation system piping may be
installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
All equipment is subject to compliance with the requirements of these specifications.
2.2 GUARANTEES
A. Provide a guarantee for all labor and material for a period of one year, from the date of
substantial completion.
B. Provide a manufacturer's guarantee for all sprinkler system components, i.e., controllers, valves
and heads, for a period of five years, from the date of substantial completion.
�^ C. Service calls during the one-year warranty period shall require a qualified technician on site
within 24 hours.
2.3 PIPE MATERIALS
A. PVC Pipe - All PVC Pipe shall be approved by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) and
shall bear the NSF seal of approval.
1. Type: Class 200 PVC, ASTM D2241.
2. Connections:
a. Four inches and larger: Bell -and Spigot type with elastomeric rings, ASTM
C1869.
b. Less than four inches: Socket, solvent -weld, ASTM C1466 and ASTM D2564.
B. Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe, minimum schedule 40.
C. Cleaner/Primer: ASTM F - 656 for PVC pipe and fittings.
D. Solvent Cement: ANSI/ASTM D2564 for PVC pipe and fittings.
E. Sleeve Material: PVC, Schedule 40.
2.4 OUTLETS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Netafim USA
2. Rainbird
3. Hunter
B. Fixed Spray Sprinklers, Fixed Stream Spray Sprinklers::
The overall pop-up height shall be 6 inches for turf grass areas and 12 inches for planting bed
areas.
The sprinkler body, stern, nozzle, and screen shall be constructed of heavy-duty, ultra -violet
resistant plastic. It shall have a heavy-duty stainless steel retract spring for positive pop -down
and a ratcheting system for easy alignment of the pattern.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 3
.- 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
The sprinkler shall have a soft elastomer pressure activated co -molded wiper seal for cleaning
debris from the pop-up stem as it retracts into the case to prevent the sprinkler from sticking up
and to minimize "flow -by".
The sprinkler shall have a matched precipitation rate (MPR) plastic nozzle with an adjusting
screw capable of regulating the radius and flow.
Pop-up Spray Sprinklers shall also include a pressure -regulating device to prevent high pressure
fogging to the nozzle stream. This regulating device shall be an integral part of the pop-up stem,
removable through the top of the case. These units shall be identifiable from the top with
"PRS" markings on the cap.
The device shall regulate the nozzle pressure to 30 PSI for inlet pressures from 35 to 70 PSI.
Below 35 PSI the pressure loss shall not exceed 6 PSI.
Sprinklers shall be Rainbird Model 1806-PRS and 1812-PRS or approved equal.
2.5 VALVES
A. Manufacturers
1. Rainbird PESB Series or approved equal.
2. Mueller.
3. Brooks Products, Inc., Model 1419 or approved equal.
B. Automatic Control Valves: Electric Valves. The remote control valve shall be normally closed
24 VAC 50/60 cycle solenoid actuated globe pattern design. The valve pressure rating shall not
be less than 200 PSI. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy-duty glass -filled
UV resistant nylon and have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon
reinforced nitrile rubber.
The valve shall have both internal and external manual open/close control (internal and external
bleed) for manually opening and closing the valve without electrically energizing the solenoid.
The valve's internal bleed shall prevent flooding of the valve box.
The valve shall house a fully -encapsulated, one-piece solenoid. The solenoid shall have a
captured plunger with a removable retainer for easy servicing, and a leaverage handle for easy
turning. This 24 VAC 50/60 Hz solenoid shall open with 19.6 volt minimum at 200 PSI. At
24 VAC average inrush current shall not exceed .41 amps.
The valve shall have a brass flow control stem for accurate manual regulation and/or shut off
of outlet flow. The valve must open or close in less than 1 minute at 200 PSI, and less than
30 seconds at 20 PSI.
The valve shall have a self-cleaning stainless steel screen designed for use in dirty water
applications.
The valve construction shall be such as to provide for all internal parts to be removable from
the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
All valves shall be installed in an approved type valve box that includes a 3-inch layer of clean
crushed gravel as shown on the plans. Valve shall be Rainbird PESB Series.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Valve Box and Cover: 17 inch x 11 3/4 inch x 18 inch polypropylene with polypropylene, bolt
down covers. Valve Box Extensions shall be used where necessary to obtain proper depth.
D. Gravel: The bottom of each valve box shall be f lled with clean gravel as specified. Gravel shall
be washed clean and graded such that none are less than 3/8 inch and none larger than 3/4 inch.
Gravel sizes shall be equally proportioned and thoroughly mixed.
E. Gate Valves smaller than 4" shall be standard brass gate valves, double disk or wedge type,
designed for a maximum working pressure of 150 psi.
M, 2.6 CONTROLS
A. Manufacturers: Rainbird ESP-6LXi Plus, 6 station Controller.
B. Controllers:
The controller shall have four independent programs (A, B, C, D) with six start times per
program for a total of up to 24 start times per zone and one program (D) that can run
concurrently with the other programs. Watering times shall be available from one minute to two
hours in one -minute increments per station on programs A, B, C, and D. The controller shall
have four weekly schedule options to choose from: 7-day calendar, 31-day calendar, odd day
programming and even day programming. It shall also have a 365-day calendar clock to
accommodate true odd -even watering. Operation shall be available in automatic,
semi -automatic and manual modes. All programming shall be accomplished by use of a
programming dial and selection buttons with user feedback provided by a LCD display. The
controller shall be equipped with a rain sensor on/off switch that allows the user to override a
sensor that has suspended watering.
The controller shall have a seasonal adjust feature that allows for station run times to be
changed from 0% to 300% in 1 % increments to compensate for weather changes.
It shall also have a programmable delay between valve stations.
Transformer input shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz or 230 VAC, 50 Hz depending on requirements.
Transformer output shall be 26.5 VAC, 1.5A. Maximum output per station shall be
24 VAC, 7VA. Program backup shall be provided by a non-volatile memory circuit that will
hold the program, date and time indefinitely. The controller shall have Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOVs) on the power -input portion and the secondary output portion to help protect the
micro -circuitry from power surges. There shall be self -diagnostic, electronic short circuit
protection that detects a faulty circuit, continues watering the remainder of the program, and
reports the faulty station on the display.
The controller shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions.
The controller shall carry a conditional five year exchange warranty. The automatic
controller(s) shall be the ESP-LXi series controller as manufactured by
Rain Bird International, Inc. Glendora, CA.
C. Wire Conductors: Color -coded.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 5
,.. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01040.
B. Verify location of existing utilities.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and
structures.
B. Before installation begins, the Contractor shall place a flag stake where each and every sprinkler
is to be located in accordance with the plans. The staking shall be approved in writing by the
Landscape Architect. Should a discrepancy in the plans become apparent at this time, in regard
to size, shape or coverage of the areas, the discrepancy shall be submitted in writing to the
Landscape Architect.
C. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under
paving to accommodate system. Contractor will be required to gain access under all pavements
irregardless of sleeve location or omission.
3.3 TRENCHING
A. Trench Size:
1. Minimum Width: 4 inches wider than max. o.d. of piping to be installed.
2. Minimum Cover Over Installed Supply Piping: 20 inches total.
3. Minimum Cover Over Installed Branch Piping: 14 inches total.
4. Minimum Cover Over Installed Outlet Piping: 14 inches total.
B. Trench to accommodate grade changes.
C. Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe.
D. If rock is encountered, trenches are to be over excavated by 3 inches to allow for a 3" la ey r of
finely graded sand under all piping. After the piping is installed, finely graded sand shall be
placed around the piping up to a point 3" above the piping_
E. All trenches are to be inspected and approved by Landscape Architect before covering.
F. Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavation except in places where
operation of same would cause damage to existing structures either above or below ground; in
such instances, hand methods shall be employed. The Contractor shall locate all existing
underground lines, of which he has been advised whether or not they are shown on the
drawings, sufficiently in advance of the trenching to make whatever provisions necessary to
prevent damage thereto. Extreme care shall be used to prevent such damage and the Contractor
shall be fully responsible for damage to any such lines.
G. There will be no classification of, or extra payment for excavated materials and all materials
encountered shall be excavated as required. Adjacent structures shall be protected from damage
by construction equipment. All excavated material shall be piled in a manner which will not
endanger the work or existing structures and which will cause the least obstruction to roadways.
H. The Contractor will be required to locate all known utility lines far enough in advance of the
trenching to make proper provisions for protecting the lines and to allow for any deviations that
may be required from the established lines and grades.
I. Excess trench excavation, not used for backfilling, shall be disposed of by the Contractor, and
at the Contractor's expense as directed by the Owner.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
ia
J. All trenches and adjoining areas shall be hand raked to leave the grade in as good or better
condition than before construction.
K. All trench backfill shall be flooded to prevent settling. Tamping is required, at road crossings
the material shall be placed in 8-inch layers, moistened if necessary, and thoroughly compacted
with mechanical tampers from the bottom of the trench to the finish grade to a density of a least
95% of maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D698.
L. All settling and low areas that occur within the first twelve (12) months will be the
responsibility of the Contractor to fill and level.
M. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed in such a
manner to achieve the intent of the plan.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Connect to utilities.
C. Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations.
D. Provide for thermal movement of components in system.
E. Swing Joints
1. Swing joints shall be used on all sprinklers and shall be of the same diameter as the inlet
opening.
2. See drawing details for fixed spray sprinkler swing joints.
F. Wiring
1. All wiring shall be No. 14, Type UF, copper direct bury type made for the irrigation
industry. Wiring shall be color -keyed: white for ground, red for operation of equipment.
2. Wire splices will only be allowed to occur within an accessible control box. In -line direct
burial splices will not be allowed. Wire splices shall be DBY model as manufactured by
3M Company or approved equal.
3. Provide looped slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow for contraction of
wires.
4. All wire passing under paving, sidewalk, etc., shall be encased in plastic conduit
extending at least 12" beyond edges of paving or construction.
5. All electrical control wiring shall be wrapped together on 10-feet increments with plastic
straps. An electrical wiring schematic shall be furnished with the equipment.
G. After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves
and flush system with full head of water.
H. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both
piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure.
I. Concrete Thrust Blocks: Thrust blocks are required at all turns and dead -ends on pipe sizes
4 inches and over. Pipe of smaller sizes may also require thrust blocks if so directed by the
Owner. Concrete shall have a 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi, minimum.
3.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Do not allow any of the work in this section to be covered or enclosed until it has been
inspected tested and approved by the Landscape Architect.
B. Fill the main line with water for a 24-hour period prior to testing.
C. Pressure test main lines with 100 psi for a period of 2 hours. Allowable leakage shall be as
determined by the formula listed in AWWA C600. Landscape Architect will witness and
approve all tests. Notify Landscape Architect at least 24 hours in advance of all testing.
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Provide all testing equipment and personnel required to complete the testing procedure. Repeat
testing as required.
E. Flush, clean, adjust and balance all systems.
F. Adjust heads for proper coverage.
3.6 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices.
B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate of rated operating pressure required for
each sprinkler circuit.
C. Carefully adjust lawn sprinklers so they will be flush with, or not more than 2 inch below finish
grade after completion of landscape work.
D. Adjust settings of controllers and automatic control valves.
E. Contractor will be required to remove all construction debris from the site. Final clean up by
the contractor must be acceptable to the owner.
3.7 COMMISSIONING
A. Starting Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. If no procedures are prescribed
by manufacturers, proceed as follows:
1. Verify that specialty valves and their accessories have been installed correctly and
operate correctly.
2. Verify that specified tests of piping are complete.
3. Check that sprinklers and devices are correct type.
4. Check that damaged sprinklers and devices have been replaced with new materials.
5. Check that potable water supplies have correct type backflow preventers.
6. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
7. Adjust operating controls.
B. Operational Testing: Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill
is in place, and sprinklers are adjusted to final position.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Demonstrate to Owner that system meets coverage requirements and that automatic controls
function properly.
B. Demonstrate to Owner's maintenance personnel operation of equipment, sprinklers, specialties,
and accessories. Review operating and maintenance information.
C. Provide 7 days' written notice in advance of demonstration.
END OF SECTION
03860201 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 02810 - 8
08/02
P"
PP•
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 02925
SODDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparation of subsoil.
2. Placing topsoil.
3. Fertilizing.
4. Sod installation.
5. Maintenance.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM C602 - Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials.
B. Turfgrass Producers International:
1. TPI - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit data for sod grass species and fertilizer.
C. Test Reports: Indicate topsoil nutrient and pH levels with recommended soil supplements
and application rates. Include soil reports for on site soils and any imported topsoils.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, cutting method and
maximum grass height; and types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of
fertilizer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sod: Root development capable of supporting its own weight without tearing, when
suspended vertically by holding upper two corners.
03860201 SODDIN
08/02
02925 - 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section —
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3 years
documented experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.
B. Deliver sod on pallets or in rolls. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.
C. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within a 24-hour period immediately following —
delivery of sod.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Coordinate with installation of underground sprinkler system piping and watering heads.
1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Maintenance service.
B. Maintain sodded areas sodded areas for three months from Date of Substantial Completion.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SOD
A. Sod: Approved grade; cultivated grass sod; type indicated below; with strong fibrous root
system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5 weeds per
1000 sq.ft.
1. Bermuda Tifton 10 Grass Type: 100%.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant
growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay, or impurities, plants, weeds and
roots; pH value of minimum 5.4 and maximum 8.0.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fertilizer: Commercial grade; recommended for grass, with _fifty percent of elements
derived from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil
as recommended in the soil analysis/report.
B. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth
of grass.
03860201 SODDING 02925 - 2
08/02 —
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 HARVESTING SOD
•-+ A. Machine cut sod in accordance with TPI.
B. Cut sod with minimum 1/2 inch and maximum I inch topsoil base.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content,
organic matter content, and pH value.
C. Provide recommendation for fertilizer rates for specified sod grass species as result of
testing.
D. Testing is not required when recent tests are available for imported topsoil. Submit these
test results to testing laboratory. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to
determine suitability.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive the Work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare sub -soil and eliminate uneven areas and low spots.
B. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes
into level areas.
C. Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots. Do not bury foreign
material beneath areas to be sodded.
D. Remove contaminated subsoil.
E. Scarify sub -soil to depth of 6 inches where topsoil is to be placed.
F. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has
compacted subsoil.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to minimum depth of 6 inches over area to be sodded.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non -organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas and to ensure positive drainage.
3.4 FERTILIZING
A. Apply fertilizer at application rate recommended by soil analysis.
,., B. Apply fertilizer after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.
C. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.
D. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer.
03860201 SODDING 02925 - 3
,.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.5 LAYING SOD
A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.
B. Lay sod immediately after delivery to site and no longer than 24 hours after harvesting to
prevent deterioration.
C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches
minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.
D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas.
E. Place top elevation of sod 1 inch below adjoining edging, paving or curbs.
F. Do not place sod when temperature is lower than 32 degrees F.
G. Prior to placing sod, on slopes exceeding 8 inches per foot or where indicated, place wire
mesh over topsoil. Securely anchor wire mesh in place with wood pegs sunk firmly into
ground.
H. Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod and topsoil to a depth of
6 inches. _
I. After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to bond sod to soil and to remove minor
depressions and irregularities.
3.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at maximum height of 2 1/2 inches. Do not cut
more than 1/3 of grass blade at each mowing.
B. Neatly trim edges where necessary.
C. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.
D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. s
E. Control growth of weeds. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides or
weed control chemicals.
F. Immediately replace sod on areas showing deterioration or bare spots.
END OF SECTION
03860201 SODDING 02925 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 02930
EXTERIOR PLANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preparation of subsoil and topsoil.
2. Topsoil bedding.
3. Trees, plants, and ground cover.
4. Mulch.
5. Fertilizer.
6. Pruning.
7. Maintenance.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI A300 - Tree Care Operations - Tree, Shrub and Other Woody Plant
Maintenance - Standard Practices.
2. ANSI Z60.1 - Nursery Stock.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Weeds: Vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area.
B. Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section, and described in
ANSI Z60.1.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.
B. Product Data: Submit list of plant material sources, data for fertilizer and other accessories.
C. Soils analysis for both existing topsoils and imported topsoils.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for submittals.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include pruning objectives, types and methods; types,
application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tree Pruning: ANSI A300 Pruning Standards for Woody Plants.
03860201 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating plants with three years
documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing and planting plants with 5 years documented
experience.
C. Tree Pruner: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5
years documented experience.
D. Maintenance Services: Performed by installer.
1.8 PRE -INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Pre -installation meeting.
B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing,
and protecting products.
B. Deliver fertilizer in waterproof bags showing weight, chemical analysis, and name of
manufacturer.
C. Protect and maintain plant life until planted.
D. Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.
E. Plant material damaged, as a result of delivery, storage or handling will be rejected.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on
site.
B. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 20 degrees F or rise
above 105 degrees F.
C. Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Requirements for coordination.
B. Install plant life after and coordinate with installation of underground irrigation system
piping and watering heads specified in Section 02810.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for warranties.
B. Furnish one year warranty for trees, plants, and ground cover.
1.13 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for maintenance service.
B. Maintain plant life for three months after Date of Substantial Completion.
03860201 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Maintenance includes:
1.
Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits.
^+ 2.
Applying herbicides for weed control. Remedy damage resulting from use of
herbicides.
3.
Remedy damage from use of insecticides.
�. 4.
Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system.
5.
Pruning, including removal of dead or broken branches.
6.
Disease control.
7.
Maintaining wrapping, guys, and stakes. Repair or replace accessories when
required.
8.
Replacement of mulch.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
�. 2.1 TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER
A. Planting Stock:
,., 1.
Species: In accordance with Standardized Plant Names, official code of American
Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature.
2.
Identification: Label individual plants or each bundle of plants when tied in bundles.
3.
Plants: No. 1 Grade conforming to "American Standard for Nursery Stock" of
American Association of Nurserymen (AAN); well -branched, vigorous and balanced
root and top growth; free from disease, injurious insects, mechanical wounds,
broken branches, decay and other defects.
4.
Trees: Furnish with reasonably straight trunks, well-balanced tops, and single leader.
5.
Deciduous plants: Furnish in dormant state, except those specified as container
grown.
B. Trees, Plants and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule.
2.2 SOIL MATERIALS
A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant
growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay or impurities, plants, weeds and roots;
minimum pH value of 5.4 and maximum 8.0; organic matter to exceed 1.5%, magnesium
to exceed 100 units; phosphorus to exceed 150 units; potassium to exceed 120 units;
soluble salts/conductivity not to exceed 900 ppm/0.9 mmhos/cm in soil.
2.3 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A. When soil tests indicate soil amendment, apply soil conditioners or fertilizers to amend soil
to specified conditions.
1. Tree Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of elements derived from organic sources;
of proportion necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis.
B. Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth
of plants.
2.4 MULCH MATERIALS
A. Mulching Material: Shredded cypress mulch.
03860201 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Stakes: Softwood lumber, pointed end
B. Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts: Non -corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind pressure
and resulting movement of plant life.
C. Plant Protectors: Rubber sleeves over cable to protect plant stems, trunks, and branches.
D. Membrane: water permeable polyolefin fabric.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.
B. Test and analyze imported and existing topsoil.
C. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt and organic
matter and pH value.
D. Provide recommendation for fertilizer and soil amendment application rates for specified
planting as result of testing.
E. Testing is not required when recent tests are available for imported topsoil. Submit these
test results to testing laboratory. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to
determine suitability.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work.
C. Verify required underground utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
3.2 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A. Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes
in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B. Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove
contaminated subsoil.
C. Scarify subsoil to depth of 12 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in
areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.
D. Dig pits and beds as specified in drawing details.
3.3 PLACING TOPSOIL
A. Spread topsoil to achieve desired grades of all areas to be planted. Rake smooth.
B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non -organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
E. Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to minimum thickness of
6 inches.
03860201 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.4
FERTILIZING
'
A. Apply starter fertilizer as specified on drawings.
B_ Apply after initial raking of topsoil.
C. Mix thoroughly into upper 12 inches of topsoil.
••.
D. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer.
3.5
PLANTING
A. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Landscape Architect.
B. Set plants vertical.
C. Remove non -biodegradable root containers.
r-a
_
D. Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix as indicated on Drawings.
Remove burlap, ropes and wires from top half of root ball.
E. Saturate soil with water when pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.6
INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Wrap deciduous shade and flowering tree trunks and place tree protectors.
3.7
PLANT SUPPORT
A. Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes as shown on
drawing details.
3.8
TREE PRUNING
A. When pruning trees is permitted, lightly prune trees in accordance with ANSI A300
Maintenance Pruning Type: Crown Cleaning.
3.9
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Plants will be rejected when ball of earth surrounding roots has been disturbed or damaged
..,
prior to or during planting.
P"
END OF SECTION
03860201 EXTERIOR PLANTS 02930 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Formwork for cast -in -place concrete, with shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
2. Formwork accessories.
3. Form stripping.
4. Reinforcing steel for cast -in -place concrete.
5. Cast -in -place concrete, including concrete for the following:
a. Foundations, footings.
b. Slabs on grade.
C. Supported slabs.
6. Concrete curing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Portland cement concrete paving: Division 2.
2. Joint sealers: Division 7.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AASHTO M 182-91I -- Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf;
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials; 1991.
B.
ACI 117-90 -- Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; American
Concrete Institute; 1990.
C.
ACI 201.2R-92 -- Guide to Durable Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1992.
D.
ACI 211.1-91 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and
Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
E.
ACI 301-89 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
F.
ACI 302.IR-89 -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete
Institute; 1989.
G.
ACI 304R-89 -- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
PM
Concrete Institute; 1989.
H.
ACI 305R-91 -- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1991.
I.
ACI 306R-88 -- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute; 1988.
J.
ACI 318-89 -- Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete; American Concrete
�.:
Institute; 1989.
K.
ACI SP-66-88 -- ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute; 1988.
L.
ASTM A 185-90a -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement; 1990.
M.
ASTM A 615-92 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 1992.
N.
ASTM C 31-91 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field; 1991.
O.
ASTM C 33-92 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1992.
03860201
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 1
�,
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
P. ASTM C 39-93a-- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 1993.
Q. ASTM C 42-90 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete; 1990.
R. ASTM C 94-92a -- Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete; 1992.
S. ASTM C 143-90a -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete; 1990.
T. ASTM C 150-94 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1994.
U. ASTM C 171-92 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 1992.
V. ASTM C 172-90 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 1990.
W. ASTM C 173-78 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 1978.
X. ASTM C 231-91b -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method; 1991.
Y. ASTM C 260-94 -- Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 1994.
Z. ASTM C 309-93 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete; 1993.
AA. ASTM C 494-92 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1992.
BB. ASTM C 618-94a -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete; 1994.
CC. ASTM C 881-90 -- Standard Specification for Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete; 1990.
DD. ASTM C 1059-91 -- Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
Concrete; 1991.
EE. ASTM C 1107-91 a -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 1991.
FF. ASTM D 1751-83(91) -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types);
1983 (Reapproved 1991).
GG. ASTM E 154-88 -- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 1988.
HH. ASTM E 329-93b -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or
Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 1993.
II. CRSI MSP-1-90 -- Manual of Standard Practice; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; 1990.
JJ. NBS PS 1-83 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce/National
Bureau of Standards; U.S. Government Printing Office; 1983 (Revised 1984).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Unexposed Finish: A general -use finish, with no appearance criteria, applicable to all formed
concrete concealed from view after completion of construction.
B. Exposed Finish: A general -use finish applicable to all formed concrete exposed to view and
including surfaces which may receive a paint coating (if any).
C. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica
fume.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for the following:
1. Formwork accessories.
2. Concrete admixtures.
3. Grout.
4. Chemical hardener.
5. Curing compound.
6. Bonding compound.
7. Epoxy bonding system.
B. Aggregates: Submit test reports showing compliance with specified quality and gradation.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and placement of the following:
1. Reinforcement: Comply with ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars,
arrangement of concrete reinforcement, and splices.
s� a. Show stirrup spacing.
D. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following information related to quality assurance
t: requirements specified:
1. Design data: Submit proposed mix designs and test data before concrete operations
begin. Identify for each mix submitted the method by which proportions have been
selected.
a. For mix designs based on field experience, include individual strength test results,
standard deviation, and required average compressive strength f(cr) calculations.
b. For mix designs based on trial mixtures, include trial mix proportions, test results,
and graphical analysis and show required average compressive strength f(cr).
C. Indicate quantity of each ingredient per cubic yard of concrete.
d. Indicate type and quantity of admixtures proposed or required.
2. Test reports: Submit laboratory test reports for all testing specified.
3. Certifications: Submit affidavits from an independent testing agency certifying that all
materials furnished under this section conform to specifications.
4. Certifications: Provide certification from manufacturers of concrete admixtures that
chloride content complies with specified requirements.
5. Cold weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
6. Hot weather concreting: Submit description of planned protective measures.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE`
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the following documents, except where requirements of the
71 contract documents or of governing codes and governing authorities are more stringent:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 318.
3. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Testing Agency Services:
1. Employ, at contractor's expense, an independent testing agency acceptable to the
architect to perform specified tests and other services required for quality assurance.
a. Testing agency shall meet ASTM E 329 requirements.
C. Source of Materials: Obtain materials of each type from same source for the entire project.
D. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following, unless more stringent provisions are indicated:
1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete."
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
F. Pre -installation conference for elevated slabs: Conduct conference at project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings".
1. Prior to placing any concrete, hold a pre -installation conference meeting involving the
Superintendent, Architect, applicable subcontractors, and testing lab. The meeting will
include the following subject (minimum):
a. Site Preparation.
b. Grades and drainage
C. Installation of auxiliary materials (vapor retarders, ducts, etc.)
d. Type of floor and thickness
e. Reinforcement and placement
f. Joints.
g. Flatness and levelness. _
h. Concrete materials, production, placement and delivery.
i. Compaction of soil.
j. Finishing tools and finishing.
k. Curing/Sealing hardeners: type and timing/duration of application.
1. Testing and inspection.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver reinforcement to project site bundled and tagged with metal tags indicating bar size,
lengths, and other data corresponding to information shown on placement drawings.
1. Store concrete reinforcement materials at the site to prevent damage and accumulation
of dirt or rust.
B. Store cementitious materials in a dry, weathertight location. Maintain accurate records of
shipment and use.
C. Store aggregates to permit free drainage and to avoid contamination with deleterious matter or
other aggregates. When stockpiled on ground, discard bottom 6 inches of pile.
D. Handle aggregates to avoid segregation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Cold -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 306.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to heating of materials, heated enclosures,
and insulating blankets.
B. Hot -Weather Concreting: Comply fully with the recommendations of ACI 305R.
1. Well in advance of proposed concreting operations, advise the architect of planned
protective measures including but not limited to cooling of materials before or during
mixing, placement during evening to dawn hours, fogging during finishing and curing,
shading, and windbreaks.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 4
08/02
1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK
w:
A. Facing Materials:
1. Unexposed finish concrete: Any standard form materials that produce structurally sound
concrete.
2. Exposed finish concrete: Materials selected to offer optimum smooth, stain -free final
appearance and minimum number of joints. Provide materials with sufficient strength
to resist hydrostatic head without bow or deflection in excess of allowable tolerances,
and as follows:
a. Overlaid plywood: PS-1 "B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay," Class 1.
B. Formwork Accessories:
1. Form coating: Form release agent that will not adversely affect concrete surfaces or
prevent subsequent application of concrete coatings.
2. Metal ties: Commercially manufactured types; cone snap ties, taper removable bolt, or
other type which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches from surface of concrete
when forms are removed, leaving not more than a 1-inch-diameter hole in concrete
surface.
3. Fillets: Wood or plastic fillets for chamfered corners, in maximum lengths possible.
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars complying with the following, except where otherwise
indicated:
1. ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, cold -drawn steel, plain.
C. Reinforcing Accessories:
1. Tie wire: Black annealed type, 16-1/2 gage or heavier.
2. Supports: Bar supports conforming to specifications of CRSI "Manual of Standard
Practice."
a. Class l (plastic protected) at all formed surfaces which will be exposed to
weather.
b. Class 1 (plastic protected) or Class 2 (stainless steel protected) at all formed
surfaces which will be exposed to view but not to weather.
C. Precast concrete blocks of strength equal to or greater than specified strength of
concrete or Class 3 supports equipped with sand plates, where concrete will be
cast against earth. Concrete masonry units will not be accepted.
d. Wood, concrete, or clay blocks are not permissible
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, and as follows:
1. Type 1.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Aggregates:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C 33.
a. Class 2M.
- 03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 5
a'"+ 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Maximum size of coarse aggregates, whichever is least:
a. One -fifth narrowest dimension between sides of forms.
b. One-third of depth of slabs.
C. Three -fourths of minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between
bars and side of form.
d. Columns and piers: Two-thirds of minimum clear distance between bars.
E. Admixtures - General: Admixtures which result in more than 0.1 percent of soluble chloride
ions by weight of cement are prohibited.
F. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 and certified by manufacturer for compatibility with -
other mix components.
G. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.
H. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. _
I. Water -Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type E.
J. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor Retarder: Membrane for installation beneath slabs on grade, resistant to decay when
tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, and as follows:
1. Polyethylene sheet, not less than 8 mils thick.
B. Nonshrink Grout: ASTM C 1107.
1. Type: Provide nonmetallic type only.
C. Chemical Hardener: Colorless, aqueous solution of fluosilicates and wetting agents for
application to cured concrete for surface densification, where scheduled in the drawings.
1. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Lapidolith"; Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
D. Burlap: AASHTO M 182, Class 2 jute or kenaf cloth.
E. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, and as follows:
1. Curing paper.
2. Polyethylene film.
3. White burlap -polyethylene sheeting.
F. Liquid Curing Compounds:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Sonnebom Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
2. Material - curing compounds: Comply with ASTM C 309, Type 1.
a. Non -yellowing formulation where subject to ultraviolet light.
b. Where compounds are proposed for use on surfaces to which finishes, coatings,
or coverings subsequently will be applied, compound shall possess demonstrated
compatibility with finish, coating, or covering, and use shall be subject to
approval of the architect.
C. Curing and sealing compound: Where indicated, provide curing and sealing
formulation with long-lasting finish that is resistant to chemicals, oil, grease,
deicing salts, abrasion, and compatible to chemical hardener to be applied.
3. Solvents: Provide water -based products.
G. Bonding Compound: Non-redispersable acrylic bonding admixture, ASTM C 1059, Type II. '
H. Epoxy Bonding Systems: ASTM C 881; type, grade, and class as required for project
conditions.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
I. Expansion Joint Filler:
1. Nonextruding bituminous type: ASTM D 1751.
2.5 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
r+
A. Review: Do not begin concrete operations until proposed mix has been reviewed by the
architect.
B. Proportioning of Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1.
,a
C. Required Average Strength: Establish the required average strength f(cr) of the design mix on
the basis of either field experience or trial mixtures as specified in ACI 301, and proportion
- mixes accordingly. If trial mixtures method is used, employ an independent testing agency
acceptable to the architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix design.
D. Specified compressive strength f(c) at 28 days: 3000 psi.
1. Slump: 4 inch minimum, 8 inch maximum.
2. Water Count Ratio:.50.
E. Fly Ash:
1. The contractor may elect to replace a portion of the portland cement with fly ash up to
a maximum percentage by weight of cement plus fly ash of 20
F. Admixtures:
1. Air -entraining admixture: Use in mixes for exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise
specifically indicated. Add at rate to achieve total air content in accordance with Table
1.4.3 of ACI 201.2. For concrete not exposed to exterior, add at rate to achieve total air
`
content between 2 percent and 4 percent.
a. Do not use in slabs -on -grade scheduled to receive topping, unless manufacturer
...
of topping recommends use over air -entrained concrete.
2. Water -reducing admixture: Add as required for placement and workability.
3. Water -reducing and retarding admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be placed
.,.
at ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F.
4. Water -reducing and accelerating admixture: Add as required in concrete mixes to be
placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
,M
5. High -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Add as required for placement
and workability.
6. Do not use admixtures not specified or approved.
G. Mix Adjustments: Provided that no additional expense to owner is involved, contractor may
u
submit for architect's approval requests for adjustment to approved concrete mixes when
,!
circumstances such as changed project conditions, weather, or unfavorable test results occur.
Include laboratory test data substantiating specified properties with mix adjustment requests.
H. Moisture Retaining Film: Dayton Superior — Sure Film J-74.
2.6 CONTROL OF MIX IN THE FIELD
A. Total Air Content: A tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent of approved design mix air
content will be allowed for field measurements.
B. Do not use batches that exceed tolerances.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Transit Mixers: Mix concrete materials in transit mixers, complying with requirements of
ASTM C 94.
1. At ambient temperatures of 85 to 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
75 minutes.
2. At ambient temperatures above 90 degrees F, reduce mixing and delivery time to
60 minutes.
2.8 VAPOR RETARDERS -
A. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester -cord -reinforced, laminated, high -density polyethylene sheet; 10
mils thick, minimum
B. Fine -Graded Granular Material: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and
manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a No. 4 sieve
and 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 sieve; meeting deleterious substance limits of ASTM
C 33 for fine aggregates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONCRETE FORM PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 for formwork, and as herein specified. The
contractor is responsible for design, engineering, and construction of formwork, and for its
timely removal.
B. Earth Forms: Hand -trim bottoms and sides of earth forms to profiles indicated on the drawings.
Remove loose dirt before placing concrete.
C. Design: Design and fabricate forms for easy removal, without impact, shock, or damage to
concrete surfaces or other portions of the work. Design to support all applied loads until
concrete is adequately cured, within allowable tolerances and deflection limits.
D. Construction: Construct and brace formwork to accurately achieve end results required by
contract documents, with all elements properly located and free of distortion. Provide for
necessary openings, inserts, anchorages, and other features shown or otherwise required.
1. Joints: Minimize form joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of concrete.
a. Align joints symmetrically at exposed conditions.
2. Chamfers: Provide chamfered edges and corners at exposed locations, unless specifically
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
3. Permanent openings: Provide openings to accommodate work of other trades, sized and
located accurately. Securely support items built into forms; provide additional bracing
at openings and discontinuities in formwork.
4. Temporary openings: Provide temporary openings for cleaning and inspection in most
inconspicuous locations at base of forms, closed with tight -fitting panels designed to
minimize appearance of joints in finished concrete work.
E. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Comply with minimum tolerances established in ACI 117,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the drawings.
F. Release Agent: Provide either form materials with factory -applied nonabsorptive liner or
field -applied form coating. If field -applied coating is employed, thoroughly clean and
recondition formwork and reapply coating before each use. Rust on form surfaces is;
unacceptable.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 8
08/02
f�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 VAPOR RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. General: Place vapor retarder sheet over prepared base material, aligning longer dimension
parallel to direction of pour and lapped 6 inches. Seal joints with appropriate tape. Cover with
sand to depth shown on drawings.
3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT
3.4
3.5
A. General: Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and as herein specified.
B. Preparation: Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, soil, and other materials which
adversely affect bond with concrete.
C. Placement: Place reinforcement to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverages required
for protection. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
Provide Class C tension lap splices complying with ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated. Do
not field -bend partially embedded bars unless otherwise indicated or approved.
1. Use approved bar supports and tie wire, as required. Set wire ties to avoid contact with
or penetration of exposed concrete surfaces. Tack welding of reinforcing is not
permitted.
2. Wire fabric: Install in maximum lengths possible, lapping adjoining pieces not less than
one full mesh. Offset end'laps to prevent continuous laps in either direction, and splice
laps with tie wire.
D. Welding: Welding of reinforcement is not permitted.
E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize
sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of
adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.
F. All reinforcement to be in place prior to placing of concrete. Equipment will not be allowed to
drive over reinforcement.
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on drawings. If
construction joints are not indicated, locate in manner which will not impair strength and will
have least impact on appearance, as acceptable to the architect.
1. Keyways: Provide keyways not less than 1-1/2 inches deep.
2. Reinforcement: Continue reinforcement across and perpendicular to construction joints,
unless details specifically indicate otherwise.
B. Isolation Joints: Construct isolation joints in slabs poured on grade at points of contact with
vertical components, such as foundation walls and column pedestals. Install expansion joint
filler to full concrete depth. Recess top edge of filler 1/8 inch where joints are unsealed.
C. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints where indicated. Install expansion joint filler to
full depth of concrete. Recess edge of filler to depth indicated to receive joint sealant (and
backer rod where necessary) specified in Division 7.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. General: Set anchorage devices and other items required for other work connected to or
supported by cast -in -place concrete, using templates, setting drawings, and instructions from
suppliers of items to be embedded.
1. Edge Forms and Screeds: Set edge forms and intermediate screeds as necessary to
achieve final elevations indicated for finished slab surfaces.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 9
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Preparation: Provide materials necessary to ensure adequate protection of concrete during
inclement weather before beginning installation of concrete.
B. Inspection: Before beginning concrete placement, inspect formwork, reinforcing steel, and items —
to be embedded, verifying that all such work has been completed.
1. Wood forms: Moisten immediately before placing concrete in locations where form
coatings are not used. C. Placement - General: Comply with requirements of ACI 304 and as follows:
1. Schedule continuous placement of concrete to prevent the formation of cold joints.
2. Provide construction joints if concrete for a particular element or component cannot be
placed in a continuous operation.
3. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location, to avoid segregation.
D. Placement in Forms: Limit horizontal layers to depths which can be properly consolidated, but
in no event greater than 24 inches.
1. Consolidate concrete by means of mechanical vibrators, inserted vertically in freshly
placed concrete in a systematic pattern at close intervals. Penetrate previously placed
concrete to ensure that separate concrete layers are knitted together.
2. Vibrate concrete sufficiently to achieve consistent consolidation without segregation of
coarse aggregates.
3. Do not use vibrators to move concrete laterally.
E. Slab Placement: Schedule continuous placement and consolidation of concrete within planned
construction joints.
1. Thoroughly consolidate concrete without displacing reinforcement or embedded items,
using internal vibrators, vibrating screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other means acceptable
to architect.
2. Strike off and level concrete slab surfaces, using highway straightedges, darbies, or bull
floats before bleed water can collect on surface. Do not work concrete further until
finishing operations are commenced.
F. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 306 when air temperatures
are expected to drop below 40 degrees F either during concrete placement operations or before
concrete has cured.
1. Do not use frozen or ice -laden materials.
2. Do not place concrete on frozen substrates.
G. Hot Weather Placement: Comply with recommendations of ACI 305R when ambient
temperature before, during, or after concrete placement is expected to exceed 90 degrees F or
when combinations of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind speed are such that
the rate of evaporation from freshly poured concrete would otherwise exceed 0.2 pounds per
square foot per hour.
1. Do not add water to approved concrete mixes under hot weather conditions.
2. Provide mixing water at lowest feasible temperature, and provide adequate protection
of poured concrete to reduce rate of evaporation.
3. Use fog nozzle to cool formwork and reinforcing steel immediately prior to placing
concrete.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 10
08/02
r�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
I
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Repairs, General: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing
formwork.
1. Remove honeycombed areas and other defective concrete down to sound concrete,
cutting perpendicular to surface or slightly undercutting. Dampen patch location and area
immediately surrounding it prior to applying bonding compound or patching mortar.
2. Before bonding compound has dried, apply patching mixture matching original concrete
in materials and mix except for omission of coarse aggregate, and using a blend of white
and normal portland cement as necessary to achieve color match. Consolidate thoroughly
and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
B. Unexposed Form Finish: Repair tie holes and patch defective areas. Rub down or chip off fins
or other raised areas exceeding 1/4 inch height.
C. Exposed Form Finish: Repair and patch defective areas, with fins or other projections
completely removed and smoothed.
1. Smooth rubbed finish: Apply to surfaces indicated no later than 24 hours after form
removal.
a. Wet concrete surfaces to be finished and rub with Carborundum brick or other
abrasive until uniform color and texture are achieved.
b. Do not apply separate grout mixture.
2. Contiguous unformed surfaces: Strike smooth and float to a similar texture tops of walls,
horizontal offsets, and other unformed surfaces adjacent to or contiguous with formed
surfaces. Continue final finish of formed surfaces across unformed surfaces, unless
otherwise specifically indicated.
D. When weather conditions create a rate of evaporation of .2 lb/sf/hr or greater as determined by
the graph on the next page, Contractor shall apply moisture -retaining film.
E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces
adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent
formed surfaces, Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
FBI
amen
Air temperoture, OF
..�i
..Cc
Effect of concrete and air temperatures, relative
humidity, and wind velocity on rate of evaporation
of surface moisture from concrete.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 11
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.8 FINISHING SLABS
A. Finishing Operations - General:
1. Do not directly apply water to slab surface or dust with cement.
2. Use hand or powered equipment only as recommended in ACI 302.1R.
3. Screeding: Strikeoff to required grade and within surface tolerances indicated. Verify --
conformance to surface tolerances. Correct deficiencies while concrete is still plastic.
4. Bull Floating: Immediately following screeding, bull float or darby before bleed water
appears to eliminate ridges, fill in voids, and embed coarse aggregate. Recheck and
correct surface tolerances.
5. Do not perform subsequent finishing until excess moisture or bleed water has
disappeared and concrete will support either foot pressure with less than 1/4-inch
indentation or weight of power floats without damaging flatness.
6. Final floating: Float to embed coarse aggregate, to eliminate ridges, to compact
concrete, to consolidate mortar at surface, and to achieve uniform, sandy texture.
Recheck and correct surface tolerances.
7. Troweling: Trowel immediately following final floating. Apply first troweling with
power trowel except in confined areas, and apply subsequent trowelings with hand
trowels. Wait between trowelings to allow concrete to harden. Do not overtrowel. Begin
final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over it.
Consolidate concrete surface by final troweling operation. Completed surface shall be
free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and within surface tolerance
specified.
a. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through final floor covering
system. `
B. Coordinate appearance and texture of required final finishes with the architect before
application.
C. Trowel Finish: As specified above.
D. Chemical Hardener Finish:
1. Trowel finish and allow complete curing and drying of concrete surface.
2. Apply chemical hardener finish following manufacturer's printed application
instructions, applying in 3 coats diluted with water. Evenly apply each coat, allowing
24 hours for drying between coats.
3. Remove any surplus hardener according to manufacturer's instructions. f ti
E. Slab Surface Tolerances:
1. Achieve flat, level planes except where grades are indicated. Slope uniformly to drains.
2. Troweled finishes: Achieve level surface plane so that depressions between high spots
do not exceed the following dimension, using a 10-foot straightedge:
a. 1/4 inch.
F. Slab Finish Schedule: Apply finishes in the following typical locations and as otherwise shown
on the drawings:
1. Trowel finish:
a. Exposed interior floors not otherwise scheduled.
b. Surfaces to receive resilient tile.
C. Surfaces to receive carpet.
2. Chemical hardener finish: In locations shown on the drawings.
G. Repair of Slab Surfaces: Test slab surfaces for smoothness and to verify surface plane to
tolerance specified. Repair defects as follows:
1. High areas: Correct by grinding after concrete has cured for not less than 14 days.
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 12
08/02 1--,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Low areas: Immediately after completion of surface finishing operations, cut out low
areas and replace with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend with adjacent
concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used when approved by the architect.
3. Crazed or cracked areas: Cut out defective areas, except random cracks and single holes
not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts. Dampen exposed concrete and apply
bonding compound. Mix, place, compact, and finish patching concrete to match adjacent
concrete.
4. Isolated cracks and holes: Groove top of cracks and cut out holes not over 1 inch in
diameter. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound; place dry
pack or proprietary repair compound acceptable to architect while bonding compound
is still active:
l a. Dry -pack mix: One part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate and enough
water as required for handling and placing.
b. Install patching mixture and consolidate thoroughly, striking off level with and
matching surrounding surface. Do not allow patched areas to dry out prematurely.
3.9 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General:
1. Prevent premature drying of freshly placed concrete, and protect from excessively cold
or hot temperatures until concrete has cured.
2. Provide curing of concrete by one of the methods listed and as appropriate to service
conditions and type of applied finish in each case.
.. B. Curing Period:
1. Not less than 7 days for standard cements and mixes.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full
curing period or until forms are removed.
1. Keep wooden or metal forms moist when exposed to heat of the sun.
2. If forms are removed prior to completion of curing process, continue curing by one of
the applicable methods specified.
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared, but before surface is dry.
a. Curing and sealing compound: Apply at rate stated by manufacturer to conform
with moisture -retention requirements specified, using second, immediate
application at right angles to first, if necessary, and reapply if damaged by rain.
Apply additional coat near substantial completion to act as sealer. Apply to areas
scheduled in the drawings as sealer and hardener.
b. Use curing compounds only in locations permitted or required, and where use will
not interfere with other finishes, coatings, or coverings to be applied.
2. Continue final curing to end of curing period.
E. Avoid rapid drying at end of curing period.
F. During and following curing period, protect concrete from temperature changes of adjacent air
'^ in excess of 5 degrees F per hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours. Progressively adjust protective
ti measures to provide uniform temperature changes over entire concrete surface.
3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS
A. Non -Load -Bearing Formwork: Provided that concrete has hardened sufficiently that it will not
be damaged, forms not actually supporting weight of concrete or weight of soffit forms may be
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 13
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1_,
removed after concrete has cured at not less than 50 degrees F for 24 hours. Maintain curing
and protection operations after form removal.
3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Fill-in: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades
after such work is in place. Place such fill-in concrete to blend with existing construction, using
same mix and curing methods.
3.12 CONCRETE REPAIRS
A. Perform cosmetic repairs of concrete surfaces as specified under concrete application.
B. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of the architect for method and procedure, using
epoxy bonding systems. The architect's approval is required for repair methods using materials
other than those specified.
3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Composite Sampling, and Making and Curing of Specimens: ASTM C 172 and ASTM C 31. `
1. Take samples at point of discharge.
2. For pumped concrete, perform sampling and testing at the frequencies specified herein
at point of delivery to pump, and perform additional sampling and testing at the same
frequency at discharge from line. Results obtained at discharge from line shall be used
for acceptance of concrete.
B. Slump: ASTM C 143. One test per strength test and additional tests if concrete consistency
changes.
1. Modify sampling to comply with ASTM C 94.
C. Air Content of Normal Weight Concrete: ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test per strength --
test performed on air -entrained concrete.
D. Concrete Temperature:
1. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F or below.
2. Test hourly when air temperature is 90 degrees F or above.
3. Test each time a set of strength test specimens is made.
E. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39.
1. Compression test specimens: Mold and cure one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test required. -
2. Testing for acceptance of potential strength of as -delivered concrete:
a. Obtain samples on a statistically sound, random basis. ^`
b. Minimum frequency:
1) One set per 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each day's pour of each
concrete class.
2) One set per 3500 square feet of slab or wall area or fraction thereof for each
days pour of each concrete class.
3) When less than 5 cubic yards is placed in one day, the architect may, at
architect's option, waive laboratory testing of specimens if adequate -
evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. (Molding and curing of these
specimens is not waived.)
4) When the above testing frequency would provide fewer than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete during the project, conduct testing from
not less than 5 randomly selected batches, or from each batch if fewer
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 14
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
W
r,
n.
F
than 5.
C. Test one specimen per set at 7 days for information unless an earlier age is
required.
d. Test 2 specimens per set for acceptance of strength potential; test at 28 days unless
other age is specified. The test result shall be the average of the two specimens.
If one specimen shows evidence of improper sampling, molding, or testing, the
test result shall be the result of the remaining specimen; if both show such
evidence, discard the test result and inform the architect.
e. Retain one specimen from each set for later testing, if required.
f. Strength potential of as -delivered concrete will be considered acceptable if all of
the following criteria are met:
1) No individual test result falls below specified compressive strength by
more than 500 psi.
2) Not more than 10 percent of individual test results fall below specified
compressive strength f(c).
3) Average of any 3 consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds
specified compressive strength f(c).
g. Evaluate construction and curing procedures and implement corrective action
when strength results for field -cured specimens are less than 85 percent of test
values for companion laboratory -cured specimens.
Test Results: Testing agency shall report test results in writing to architect and contractor within
24 hours of test.
1. Test reports shall contain the following data:
a. Project name, number, and other identification.
b. Name of concrete testing agency.
C. Date and time of sampling.
d. Concrete type and class.
e. Location of concrete batch in the completed work.
f. All information required by respective ASTM test methods.
2. Nondestructive testing devices such as impact hammer or sonoscope may be used at
architect's option for assistance in determining probable concrete strength at various
locations or for selecting areas to be cored, but such tests shall not be the sole basis for
acceptance or rejection.
3. The testing agency shall make additional tests of in -place concrete as directed by the
architect when test results indicate that specified strength and other concrete
characteristics have not been attained.
a. Testing agency may conduct tests of cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42,
or tests as directed.
b. Cost of additional testing shall be borne by the contractor when unacceptable
concrete has been verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
03860201 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 - 15
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 04200
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
DiN ision 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete masonry units (CMU).
^'
B.
Decorative Concrete masonry units (CMU).
w ,
C.
Face Brick.
D.
Mortar.
,Pot
E.
Grout for masonry.
K J
F.
Reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories.
G.
Molded insulation inserts.
H.
Admixtures for mortar and grout.
I.
Glass masonry units.
art
1.3 RELATED
SECTIONS
A.
Section 01400 - Testing Laboratory Services: Testing laboratory services.
B.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels, and fabricated steel items.
C.
Section 07600 - Sheet Metal: Cap flashings over masonry work and placement of flashing
receivers.
D.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 530 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.
w;
B.
ACI 530.1 - Specifications For Masonry Structures.
C.
ASTM A82 - Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
4'
D.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
E.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
F.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
G.
ASTM A641 - Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
H.
ASTM C90 - Load -Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
I.
ASTM C94 - Ready -Mixed Concrete.
J.
ASTM C129 - Non -Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units.
'
K.
ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
L.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
M.
ASTM C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
N.
ASTM C216 - Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or Shale).
-
O.
ASTM C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
P.
ASTM C404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
03860201
UNIT MASONRY 04200-1
,,
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
Q. ASTM C476 - Grout for Masonry.
R. ASTM C578, Type I, Molded insulation units.
S. ASTM CIO 19 - Method of Sampling and Testing Grout.
T. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and
Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction.
U. IMIAC - International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council: Recommended Practices and
Guide Specification for Hot Weather Masonry Construction.
V. NCMA - TEK Manual.
W. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Indicate bars sizes, spacings, locations, reinforcement quantities, bending and cutting
schedules, supporting and spacing devices for reinforcement and accessories.
B. Product Data
1. Provide data for facing brick decorative and fire rated masonry units and fabricated wire
reinforcement.
2. Include design mix, using the Property specification of ASTM C270 required f_
environmental conditions, and admixture limitations.
C. Samples
1. Samples
a. Face Brick: Submit two samples of face brick, to illustrate color, texture and
extremes of color range.
b. Decorative CMU: Submit two samples of decorative CMU to illustrate color, -
texture and extremes of color range.
C. Glass Masonry Units: Submit four samples of glass block to illustrate color,
texture and pattern.
2. Submit two samples of mortar, illustrating mortar color and color range.
D. Reports
1. Submit reports on mortar indicating conformance of component mortar materials to r
requirements of ASTM C270 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C780.
2. Submit reports on grout indicating conformance of component grout materials to
requirements of ASTM C476 and test and evaluation reports to ASTM C1019.
3. If equivalent thickness method of determining fire resistance rating of CMU is used,
submit calculations in conformance with NCMA TEK 7 - 1 indicating compliance.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
r-.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 530 and ACI 530.1.
B. Fire Rated CMU: Provide fire rated units complying with UL618 or units having an equivalent
thickness in conformance with NCMA TEK 7 - 1.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL assembly No. U906 requirements for fire rated masonry construction using
masonry thickness indicated on drawings.
1.9 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockup of masonry back-up and veneer under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Construct a masonry wall into a panel sized 4 feet long by 2 feet high, which includes mortar
and accessories, structural backup, wall openings, flashings, wall insulation, and vapor barrier.
C. Locate where directed.
D. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
1.10 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of
Section 01039.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum
40 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum
90 degrees F prior to, during, and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
polls
1.13 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the masonry work with installation of window frames, Owner furnished equipment
and Exterior Installation and Finish System.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Face Brick
1. Acme Brick Co.
2. Boral Brick Co.
3. Henderson Brick Co.
B. Concrete and Decorative Concrete Masonry Units
1. Featherlite Block Co.
C. Portland Cement, Mortar Cement, Masonry Cement, and Lime
1. Essroc Materials, Inc.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY
08/02
04200-3
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Glen-Gery Corporation.
3. Lafarge Corporation.
4. Lehigh Portland Cement Co.
5. Riverton Corporation (The).
D. Mortar Pigments
1. Davis Colors.
2. Lafarge Corporation.
3. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.
E. Joint Reinforcement, Ties, and Anchors
1. Dur-O-Wal, Inc.
2. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
4. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America.
5. National Wire Products Industries. -�
6. Southern Construction Products.
F. Admixtures
1. Integral CMU Water Repellent
a. W.R. Grace & Co.
2. Cold -Weather Admixture
a. Euclid Chemical Co.
b. W.R. Grace & Co.
3. Water -Repellent Admixture
a. W.R. Grace & Co.
G. Insulation Inserts
1. Korfil
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I - Moisture Controlled medium
weight, with integral water repellent admixture.
B. Hollow Non -Load Bearing Block Units (CMU): ASTM C 129, Type I - Moisture Controlled
medium weight, with integral water repellent admixture.
C. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches. Provide special units for 90 degree
comers, bond beams and lintels.
D. Decorative Block Units
1. Conformance: ASTM C129, Type I - Moisture Controlled with integral water repellent
admixture.
2. Size and Shape: Nominal size of 8 x 8 x 16 inches.
3. Surface Finish
a. Type I: Ground face.
b. Type IV: Ground face, Single scored vertically to simulate 8 x 8 inch units.
4. Color
a. Type I: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
b. Type IV: Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
2.3 FACE BRICK UNITS
A. General
1. Conformance Face Brick: ASTM C216, Type FBS, Grade SW.
2. Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 3 x 4 x 8 inches.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Color and Texture.
a. Type II: Velour texture, color as selected by Architect.
b. Type III: Rockface brick, color as selected by Architect.
4. Solid Face Brick: Provide where indicated on drawings
2.4 GLASS BLOCK
A. Hollow Glass Units: Permanently seal hollow unit by heat fusing joint with joint key to assist
mortar bond. Factory coat unit edges to improve bond with mortar:
1. Nominal size: 8 x 8 x 3 7/8 inch.
2. Color: Clear.
3. Pattern and Design: Random wave.
4. Insulation Value: R1.5 min.
5. Light Transmission: 70 percent min.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to
ASTM A641 Class 1 after fabrication, 9 gage side rods with 9 gage cross ties.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 40 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, uncoated finish.
C. Strap Anchors: Bent steel shape, 2 x 10 inch size x 22 gage thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM
A123 B2.
D. Veneer Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, adjustable, eye and pintle type, hot dip galvanized to
ASTM A123 B2.
2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type.
C.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D.
Grout Course Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E.
Water: Clean and potable.
F.
Bonding Agent: Latex type.
G.
Mortar Color: Mineral oxide pigment; Standard gray at interior exposed masonry and color as
selected by architect at all exterior masonry.
2.7 ADMIXTURES
A.
Water Repellent: Liquid type; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture.
2.8 FLASHINGS
A.
Copper/Kraft Paper Flashings: 2 oz/sq ft sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated
Kraft paper.
B.
Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 07900.
C.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyethylene or polyurethane oversized 50 percent to joint width; self
'*
expanding; by maximum lengths.
D.
Building Paper: No. 30 asphalt saturated felt.
E.
Weeps: Preformed plastic tubes, cotton wick filled or cotton rope.
R
F.
Cleaning Solution: Non -acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
03860201
UNIT MASONRY 04200-5
'*
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar For Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property
specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar.
B. Mortar For Non -Load Bearing Walls and Partitions: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property
specification, with water repellent admixture for all exterior mortar.
C. Mortar For Glass Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, Type S using the Property for specification with
water repellant admixture for all exterior mortar.
2.10 GROUT MIXES
A. Bond Beams and Lintels: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; or premixed type
in accordance with ASTM C94. Mix in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout.
B. Engineered Masonry: 3,000 psi strength at 28 days; 8-10 inches slump; premixed type in
accordance with ASTM C94.
2.11 GROUT MIXING
A. Pre -mixed Grout: Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94.
B. Field Mixed Grout: Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use
in accordance with ASTM C476 Course grout.
C. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
D. Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located.
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
D. Request inspection of spaces to be grouted.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
C. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.
D. Plug clean -out holes with brick or block masonry units. Brace masonry for wet grout pressure.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mortar Mixing
1. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C270 in quantities needed
for immediate use.
2. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-6
08/02
s..
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.
Add mortar color and admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide
uniformity of mix and coloration.
4.
Do not use anti -freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
5.
If water is lost by evaporation, re -temper only within two hours of mixing.
6.
Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F or
two -and -one-half hours at temperatures under 40 degrees F.
B. Coursing
1.
General
a. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
b. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal
--
joints of uniform thickness.
,.,
2.
Concrete Masonry Units:
a. Bond: Running.
b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
C. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.
Brick Units:
a. Bond: Running or Stacked as indicated on drawings.
b. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.
C. Mortar Joints: Concave.
4.
Decorative Masonry Units.
a. Bond: Running
b. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint equal to 8 inches.
C. Mortar Joints: Raked.
C. Placing
and Bonding
1.
Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed
with other work.
2.
Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
3.
Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
4.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses.
5.
Interlock intersections and external corners.
6.
Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
7.
Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
8.
Cut mortar joints flush where resilient base is scheduled, or furring chemicals are
applied.
9.
Isolate top joint of masonry partitions from horizontal structural framing members and
slabs or decks with compressible joint filler.
D. Weeps
1.
Install weeps in veneer at 32 inches oc horizontally above through -wall flashing, above
shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
2.
Cavity Wall
3.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps.
E. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Single Wythe Masonry
1.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc vertically.
2.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
3.
Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
4.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
5.
Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches.
t_d
03860201
UNIT MASONRY 04200-7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F. Reinforcement and Anchorage - Masonry Veneer
1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.
2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.
4. Provide eyes in joint reinforcing of masonry back-up to bond veneer at maximum 16
inches oc vertically and 36 inches horizontally. Place at maximum 3 inches oc each way
around perimeter of openings, within 12 inches of openings.
5. Reinforce stack bonded unit joint comers and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches
oc.
G. Masonry Flashings
1. Extend flashings horizontally at foundation walls, above ledge or shelf angles and lintels,
under parapet caps, and at bottom of walls.
2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry or seal to
existing back-up.
3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.
H. Lintels
1. Install loose steel lintels over openings.
2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not
scheduled.
3. Do not splice reinforcing bars. ^~
4. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement. Maintain position within 1/2
inch of dimensioned position.
5. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.
6. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.
7. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening.
I. Mortar and Grout
1. Install mortar in accordance with ASTM C270. Install grout in accordance with ASTM
C476.
2. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
3. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches or two CMU courses without
consolidating grout by rodding.
4. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.,
5. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
6. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches either side
of opening.
7. High Lift Grouting
a. Provide cleanout opening no less than 4 inches high at the bottom of each cell to
be grouted by cutting one face shell of masonry unit.
b. Clean out masonry cells and cavities with high pressure water spray. Permit
complete water drainage.
C. After cleaning seal openings with masonry units.
d. Limit grout lift to 60 inches and rod for grout consolidation. Wait 30 to 60 --
minutes before placing next lift.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-8
08/02
.4
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
�r
J. Control Joints
1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control joints.
2. Form control joint with a sheet building paper bond breaker fitted to one side of the
hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at
exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.
3. Size control joint in accordance with Section 07900 for sealant performance.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and frames, fabricated metal frames, window
frames, anchor bolts, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other
sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb and level.
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation From Alignment of Columns: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Variation From Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/32 inch.
C. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 ft and 1/2 inch in 20 ft or more.
D. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non -cumulative.
E. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and 1/4 inch in 10 ft 1/2 inch in
30 ft.
F. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft.
G. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: 1/4 inch.
H. Variation From Joint Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch and minus 0 inches.
3.6 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit and sleeves. Coordinate with other sections of work to
provide correct size, shape, and location.
B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or
strength of masonry work may be impaired.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 0 14 10.
B. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 01700.
B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
F. Do not scratch or deface units.
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-9
08/02 __
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners
which may be damaged by construction activities.
C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners. Provide protection without damaging
completed work.
3.10 SCHEDULE
A. Provide CMU with integral water repellent admixture at the following locations:
1. All exterior CMU back-up walls including upper walls above roof at Apparatus Bay.
2. All exterior decorative CMU veneer.
B. Provide water repellent mortar admixture at the following locations:
1. All mortar in exterior CMU backup walls including upper walls above roof at Apparatus
Bay.
2. All mortar in exterior decorative CMU veneer.
3. All mortar in exterior face brick veneer.
END OF SECTION
03860201 UNIT MASONRY 04200-10
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fabrication and erection of structural steel framing members, as defined in AISC Code
and as indicated on the drawings.
2. Welding.
3. Shop painting.
B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section:
1. Steel anchorages cast in concrete.
2. Steel anchorages embedded in masonry.
C. Related Sections:
1. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
2. Steel decking: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M-94 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 1994.
B. ASTM A 307-94 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI
Tensile Strength; 1994.
C. ASTM A 325-93 -- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1993.
D. ASTM A 500-93 -- Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 1993.
E. ASTM A 501-93 -- Standard Specification for Hot -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing; 1993.
F. ASTM C 1107-91 a -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 1991.
G. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
H. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of Steel
Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1986.
I. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design;
American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1989.
J. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts; Research Council on
Structural Connections; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. (AISC); 1985.
K. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications; Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC) 1995, 7th Edition.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Items as listed in 2.1 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings
and Bridges," and excluding steel, iron, or other metal items not listed, even if attached to the
structural framing.
03860201 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 1
08/02
L-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Unless otherwise specifically approved in writing, furnish exact sections, weights, and
kinds of material specified, using details and dimensions shown.
1. Not all connections are detailed: similar details apply to similar conditions, unless
otherwise indicated. Contact the architect promptly to verify design of members or
connections in any situation where design requirements are unclear.
2. Substitution of other shapes of equivalent or greater strength and no greater dimension
may be allowed by the architect, but only under normal substitution procedures.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Complete drawings for structural steel, including information on location, type,
and size of all connections, distinguishing between those made in the shop and those made in
the field.
1. Indicate weld lengths and sizes, using standard American Welding Society (AWS)
welding symbols.
2. Include setting drawings and templates for anchorages to be installed by others.
3. The fabricator is specifically responsible for the adequacy of any connections designed
by the fabricator to performance standards established in the contract documents.
Approval by the architect of shop drawings shall not relieve the fabricator of this
responsibility, despite wording to the contrary in paragraph 4.2.1 of the AISC Code.
B. Welder Qualifications: Evidence that welders employed in the work are currently certified
under American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Procedures: Establish that joint welding procedures are prequalified or test in
accordance with American Welding Society (AWS) qualification procedures.
B. Welder Qualifications: Welders must be currently certified under American Welding Society
(AWS) qualification procedures.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Unless other requirements of governing authorities or particular
requirements of this specification are more stringent, comply with provisions of the following:
1. AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -- Allowable Stress Design and
Plastic Design," with Commentary and Supplements.
3. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Shipping: Deliver steel in timely fashion, to permit the most efficient and economical flow of
work. Deliver steel members properly marked for field assembly and erection.
1. Deliver anchor bolts, washers, and other anchorage devices to be built into other work
in time to avoid delays and permit their proper installation.
B. Storage: Protect steel and other materials of this section from damage and corrosion. If
temporary storage at the project site is required, keep steel members off the ground, using
platforms or pallets, in location easily accessible for inspection.
03860201 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 2
08/02
f
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A 36.
B. Structural Tubing, Cold -Formed: ASTM A 500.
C. Structural Tubing, Hot -Formed: ASTM A 501.
D. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A 307, Carbon steel, Grade C; ASTM A 36 steel plate washers.
E. Carbon Steel Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A.
F. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325.
1. Type 1, plain (medium carbon steel).
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: AWS D1.1; types as required by materials being welded.
B. Nonshrink Grout: Prepackaged material requiring only the addition of water and complying
with ASTM C 1107, and as follows:
1. Natural aggregate (nonmetallic) type.
C. Shop Primer: Fabricator's standard primer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly - General: Comply with requirements of AISC Specifications. Shop fabricate
and assemble to maximum degree possible.
B. Thermal Cutting: Perform all thermal cutting by machine.
1. Plane thermally cut edges which are to be welded.
C. Connections:
1. Shop connections: Welded or bolted, as required.
2. Field connections: Bolted, unless welds are specifically indicated.
3. Bolts: High -strength steel bolts, except as otherwise indicated.
a. Bolting: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural Joints
Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
4. Welds: Comply with requirements of AWS Code for welding procedures and quality of
welds, including appearance.
a ` " Built-up sections: Assemble components and weld using procedures which will
maintain proper alignment of finished section.
D. Finishing: Accurately mill ends of columns and other members which must transmit loads in
bearing.
E. Holes in Steel Members: Make all holes by means of cutting, drilling, or punching at right
angles to surface of metal. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning.
1. Provide holes in steel members as required to permit connection of work by others.
2.4 SHOP COATING - PAINT
A. Shop prime all steel members.
1. Do not paint the following surfaces:
a. Machined or milled surfaces.
b. Surfaces adjacent to field welds.
C. Faying surfaces of bolted connections.
03860201 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Preparation: Thoroughly clean steel surfaces to be shop primed, removing loose rust, loose mill
scale, dirt, oil, and grease. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC procedures as follows:
1. SSPC-SP 2: Hand tool cleaning. C. Painting: As soon as possible after cleaning, apply specified primer paint in accordance with
instructions of paint manufacturer, at a rate sufficient to provide a finished thickness of not less
than 1.5 mils and an average thickness of 2.0 mils.
2.5 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection:
I. Shop bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
2. Shop welded connections: Inspect and test shop -fabricated welds as follows:
a. Visually inspect all welds.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions for erection of structural steel and
verify that the work may properly proceed. Do not commence erection of structural steel until -.
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or fabricated steel components have been
adjusted with the architect's agreement.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary guys, braces, falsework, cribbing, or other elements
required to secure the steel framing against loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove
such temporary support only when permanent connections have been made and the steel
framing is fully capable of supporting design loads, including any temporary construction loads.
3.3 ERECTION
A. General: Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC Code and Specifications.
B. Assembly:
1. Set structural members accurately to locations and elevations indicated, within tolerances
established in AISC Code, before making final connections.
2. Do not use thermal cutting to correct fabrication errors on any major structural member.
a. Thermal cutting of secondary members may be permitted by the architect upon
request, but only when members involved are not loaded.
C. Columns and Bearing Surfaces:
1. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. Slightly roughen concrete and
masonry surfaces to improve bond.
2. Set base and bearing plates accurately, using metal wedges, shims, or setting nuts as
required.
3. After tightening anchor bolts and ensuring that structure is plumb, grout solidly between
plates and bearing surfaces.
a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for nonshrink grout.
03860201 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05120 - 4
08/02 ---
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Bolting:
1. Carbon steel bolts: Use only for temporary bracing during erection, unless otherwise
specifically permitted by contract documents.
2. High -strength bolts: Comply with requirements of AISC "Specification for Structural
Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
E. Welding:
1. Do not perform field welding when ambient temperature is at 0 degrees F or below, or
when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain, snow, or high wind.
2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
3. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in field -welded construction.
F. Touch-up Painting: As soon as possible after erection of primed structural steel, clean painted
areas which have been abraded or otherwise damaged by welding, bolting, or other field
operations. Apply touch-up paint matching shop coating by brush or spray to all damaged paint
areas, achieving a minimum final thickness of 1.5 mils.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspection:
1. Field -bolted connections: Comply with testing and verification procedures in AISC
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
2. Field -welded connections: Inspect and test field -fabricated welds as follows:
a. Visually inspect all field welds.
END OF SECTION 05120
03860201 STRUCTURAL STEEL
08/02
05120 - 5
- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05210
STEEL JOISTS
,., PART 1 - GENERAL
r
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. K-series open web steel joists.
2. Bracing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
2. Metal decking: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. SJI Technical Digest No. 9 -- Handling and Erection of Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel Joist
Institute; July 1987.
B. Standard Specifications Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders; Steel
^" Joist Institute (SJI); 1992.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
r,
A. Provide joist system which is designed and fabricated to comply with requirements of the
contract documents and which strictly conforms to material, manufacturing, and erection
requirements of the Steel Joist Institute's (SJI) "Standard Specifications Load Tables and
Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders" (referred to hereinafter as SJI
"Specifications").
1. Wind uplift: Design joists and connections to comply with wind uplift requirements
indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each distinct type of joist required and for accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings for fabrication and erection of joists; include plans, elevations, and
large scale details of typical sections, special connections, joining, and accessories.
1. Show location and spacing of joists; indicate mark number and type.
2. Show bridging.
C. Quality Control Submittals: Submit the following:
1. SJI certification of joist characteristics.
2. Manufacturers' certification of joist characteristics.
e, 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Strictly conform to requirements of SJI Technical Digest No. 9.
03860201 STEEL JOISTS 05210 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordination Data: Prepare and distribute to affected installers, drawings or templates detailing
placement of bearing plates and anchor bolts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel: Conform to requirements of SJI "Specifications."
B. Steel Primer for K-Series Joists: Conform to requirements of SJI "Specifications."
C. Accessories: Provide accessories required for erection of steel joists, complying with SJI
"Specifications" and with contract documents.
2.2 JOIST FABRICATION
A. General: All materials shall be clean and straight.
B. Bridging is schematically shown on drawings. Detail and fabricate bridging in complete
accordance with SJI requirements.
C. Joists:
1. Top chord extensions: Provide extensions where indicated. Extension members shall be
designed as cantilever beams, with their reactions carried back at least to the first panel
point of the joists.
2. Bottom chord extensions: Where indicated, provide extended bottom chords or separate
extension units properly designed to support ceilings attached directly to joist bottom
chords. Maximum clearance between wall finish and end of extension: 1 /2 inch, unless
indicated otherwise.
3. Camber: Comply with recommendations of SJI "Specifications."
4. Surface preparation for shop priming: Hand clean steel in accordance with SSPC-Paint
15 requirements.
5. Shop priming: Provide 1-mil continuous dry paint film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION
A. Do not begin joist erection until structural support components have been installed and are in
suitable condition to receive joists.
B. Do not overload or exceed carrying capacity of any joist during construction period.
C. Accurately position and space joists before permanent attachment to structural supports.
D. Provide safe, stable structure throughout construction period. Do not remove bridging after
construction is completed, unless specifically authorized to do so by the architect.
1. Install bridging in accordance with SJI requirements.
2. Bridging installation shall proceed concurrently with joist erection and shall be
completed before joists are subjected to construction loads.
E. K-Series Joist Anchorage:
1. Bolt joists to structural support members as required by SJI "Specifications."
03860201 STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 2
08/02 �—
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
a•,
F. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, solvent clean and hand- or power -tool clean
(SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3) completed field connections and damaged surfaces of shop -primed
joists and adjoining structural steel. Apply corrosion -resistant touch-up paint compatible with
primer.
END OF SECTION 05210
n
f
03860201 STEEL JOISTS 05210 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05313
STEEL ROOF DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
y 1.1 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Standard roof deck.
2. Formed steel accessories.
3. Framing for openings up to 18 inches.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
^'
2. Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
r
3. Steel form deck: Elsewhere in Division 5.
•- 1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 611-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Structural
..
Quality; 1993.
' B.
ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990.
C.
AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code --Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
D.
AWS D1.3-89 -- Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989.
E.
SDI Publication No. 28 -- Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution;
Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992.
F.
Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and
Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
r A.
Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics.
n
2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics.
3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support
locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and
accessories.
C.
Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and
section properties.
1. Prepare calculations under seal of a professional structural engineer registered in the state
in which the project is located.
03860201 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 - 1
," 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by
the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. AWS 131.3 "Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel."
3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks,
and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution."
B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures
specified in AWS D1.1.
C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented
experience.
D. Testing: Welded decking in place is subject to inspection and testing by an independent agency
paid by the owner. If testing indicates that welds do not comply with requirements, remove
defective work and replace at no additional expense to the owner.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage.
Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark
each unit clearly to identify differences.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel for Painted Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 611, Grade C, D or E.
B. Sheet Metal Accessories: ASTM A 526, galvanized.
C. Primer Paint: Manufacturer's standard primer for baked -on finish.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Roof Deck Units - General: Provide deck complying with SDI specifications for properties
indicated.
B. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 1 : Comply with the following:
1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR).
2. Material: G60 coated steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch. --
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span.
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option.
5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option.
6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces.
C. Standard Roof Deck Unit Type 2: Comply with the following:
1. Profile type: Wide rib (Type WR) Cellular.
2. Material: G60 coated steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch.
03860201 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 -2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span.
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor's option.
r^ 5. Side joints: Lapped or lock seam, at contractor's option.
6. Flute sides: Plain vertical faces.
7. Cellular bottom plate:
r=. a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Factory fabricated.
C. Minimum metal thickness: 0.034 inch.
D. Ridge/Valley Plates: Fabricate of same material and gage as deck units, in slope to match roof
slope, not less than 4-1/2 inches wide.
E. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping.
a
F. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.-a
3.1 EXAMINATION
.tea A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing
conditions are acceptable before commencing installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute
specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section.
Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed
sheets unattached at end of working day.
. 1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings.
2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1 /2 inches at steel supports; align and level
deck units.
3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection.
a. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks.
4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches.
5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure.
B. Fastening:
1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as follows:
a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength.
n 1) Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness.
b. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds.
C. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not
�-• fewer than 2 fasteners at any support.
2. Side laps: At contractor's option, fasten side laps of adjacent deck units using one of the
following methods:
a. Weld laps.
b. Mechanically clinch, or button -punch.
C. Mechanically fasten, using self -tapping machine screws of No. 8 size or larger.
d. Spacing: Not to exceed 18 inches on center.
03860201 STEEL ROOF DECK 05313 3
T., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Openings:
1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks.
2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure
strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity.
D. Metal Accessories: Fasten metal accessories securely to deck units, using welding or
mechanical fasteners as appropriate to conditions.
1. Install other metal accessories as indicated.
E. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and
abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint.
1. On shop primed surfaces, apply matching paint.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site.
END OF SECTION 05313
03860201
08/02
STEEL ROOF DECK
05313 - 4
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05315
STEEL FORM DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.
Noncomposite steel form deck.
2.
Framing for openings up to 18 inches.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Concrete: Division 3.
2.
Structural steel: Elsewhere in Division 5.
3.
Steel joists: Elsewhere in Division 5.
4.
Steel roof deck: Elsewhere in Division 5.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993.
B. ASTM A 525-93 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993.
C. AWS D1.1-92 -- Structural Welding Code --Steel; American Welding Society; 1992.
D. AWS D1.3-89 -- Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 1989.
E. MIL P-21035B(NAVY) -- Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair (Metric); U.S.
Department of Defense; 1991.
F. SDI Publication No. 28 -- Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form
Decks, Roof Decks, Corner Decks and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution;
Steel Deck Institute, Inc.; 1992.
G. Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members; American Iron and
Steel Institute (AISI); 1986 (with 1989 Addendum and 1990 Errata).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit deck manufacturer's specifications and product information, indicating
compliance with specified requirements.
1. Include Steel Deck Institute certification of manufacturer's deck characteristics.
2. Include manufacturer's certification of deck characteristics.
3. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions, including specific installation sequence.
4. Submit manufacturer's data on mechanical fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings indicating deck types and plan layout; support
locations and anchorages; projections; openings and reinforcement; and pertinent details and
accessories.
C. Calculations: Submit manufacturer's documentation of deck design loads, allowable spans, and
section properties.
r
03860201 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - 1
,d 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following, except where exceeded by
the contract documents or requirements of governing authorities:
1. AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members."
2. AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code --Sheet Steel."
3. "Steel Deck Institute Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks,
and Cellular Metal Floor Deck with Electrical Distribution."
B. Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to procedures
specified in AWS D1.1.
C. Installer: A company specializing in this type of work and with 3 years of documented
experience.
1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage: Separate sheets and store units on dry wood sleepers, sloped to promote drainage.
Cover with waterproof material ventilated to avoid condensation.
B. Marking: Unless deck units are all of the same gage and yield strength for the project, mark
each unit clearly to identify differences.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units: ASTM A 446.
B. Galvanizing: ASTM A 525, G60 coating where indicated.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: Comply with requirements of Military Specification MIL, P-21035B,
Type I or II.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Steel Form Deck - General: Provide units complying with SDI specifications for deck type
indicated.
B. Steel Form Deck: Comply with the following:
1. Profile type: Corrugated.
2. Material: Galvanized steel.
a. Minimum yield strength: 33,000 psi.
b. Minimum metal thickness: 0.0358 inch.
C. Maximum profile height: 2.0 inch.
3. Spanning configuration: Multiple span.
4. Sheet coverage width: Contractor=s option.
5. Side joints: Lapped seam.
C. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self -tapping.
D. Weld Washers: Uncoated mild steel, sized as recommended by manufacturer of steel deck units.
03860201 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine field conditions and substrates to receive metal decking, and verify that existing
conditions are acceptable before commencing installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install deck units and accessories in compliance with Steel Deck Institute
specifications, manufacturer's recommendations, and requirements of this specification section.
Fasten deck units to supports promptly after placement and alignment. Do not leave placed
sheets unattached at end of working day.
1. Shop drawings: Comply with final shop drawings.
2. Steel bearing: Allow minimum bearing of 1-1/2 inches at steel supports; align and level
deck units.
3. Placement: Place deck units flat and square, without excessive warp or deflection.
4. End laps: Lap ends of deck units over supports and make laps not less than 2 inches.
5. Precautions: Coordinate location of decking bundles to prevent overloading of structure.
B. Fastening:
1. Fasten form deck units to steel supporting members as follows:
a. Minimum 5/8-inch-diameter fusion welds or elongated welds of equal strength.
b. Use weld washers for metal of less than 0.028 inch in thickness.
C. Mechanical fasteners approved by the architect may be used in lieu of welds.
d. Spacing: 12 inches on center average, but not more than 18 inches apart and not
fewer than 2 fasteners at any support.
2. Side laps: Fasten side laps of adjacent deck units as follows:
a. Weld laps.
b. Spacing: Not to exceed 24 inches on center.
C. Openings:
1. Cut deck units and accessories to fit snugly around other work penetrating decks.
2. At openings up to 18 inches in either dimension, provide reinforcement and closure
strips as shown or as required for strength and rigidity.
D. Touch-up Painting: After installation of deck units and accessories, wire -brush burned and
abraded areas and rust spots and apply touch-up paint.
1. Apply galvanizing repair paint to galvanized surfaces, complying with manufacturer's
instructions.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clear debris from deck before concrete is placed.
B. Upon completion of work, remove all rubbish, debris, and excess materials from project site.
END OF SECTION 05315
03860201 STEEL FORM DECK 05315 - 3
*.. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05400
COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes load bearing formed steel joist and purlin framing and bridging.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry support.
2. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual.
B.
ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products.
C.
ASTM A653, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron
Alloy -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process.
D.
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load -Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal
Plaster Bases.
,.., E.
AWS D1.1 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
F.
AWS D1.3 (American Welding Society) - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
G.
ML/SFA 540 - (Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, Division of National Association of
Architectural Metal Manufacturers; NAAMM) - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
t H.
SSPC-Paint 20 (Steel Structures Painting Council) - Zinc Rich Primers.
1.2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Size components to withstand design loads as indicated on drawings:
B.
Maximum Allowable Deflection: 1:600 of span.
C.
Roof System:
1. Design to AISI - Cold -Formed Steel Design Manual.
2. Design to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals,
undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic
<<
day/night temperature ranges.
3. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural
j.,
members, and clearances of intended openings.
1.3. SUBMITTALS
c A.
Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds, type
and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related Work.
F
2. Indicate ceiling joist, roof joist and roof rafter layout.
03860201 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 1
•.. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Describe method for securing framing to supporting construction.
4. Provide calculations for loadings and stresses of roof framing under the professional
engineer's seal.
B. Product Data: Submit data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product
criteria and limitations.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with AISI Specification for
the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members.
1.5. QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
C. Design structural elements under direct supervision of a professional structural or civil engineer
experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Texas.
D. Form, fabricate, install, and connect components in accordance with ML/SFA
540 - Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Alabama Metals Corporation (AMICO).
2. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
3. Dale/Incor.
4. Unimast Incorporated.
5. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
1.6. FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Joists, Purlins, and Rafters: ASTM A653/A653M Grade sheet steel, formed to channel shape,
solid web; 16 gauge thick. Width, depth and return leg as required for total loads indicated.
B. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; same width as studs, tight fit 16 gauge thick, solid web.
C. Framing Materials: Roll from new sheet steel; cold reduction steels not being acceptable.
1.7. ACCESSORIES
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined by performance
requirements specified. r
B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: [Formed] sheet steel, thickness determined by performance requirements
specified.
C. Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC Paint 20 Type II Organic zinc rich.
03860201 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r�
r °
1.8. FASTENERS
A. Self -drilling, Self -tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Steel, hot dip galvanized to
ASTM A123 1.25 oz/sq ft.
B. Anchorage Devices: Drilled expansion bolts.
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3.
1.9. FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies of formed sections of sizes and profiles required.
B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.
1.10. FINISHES
A. Tracks and Headers: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
B. Joists and Purlins: Galvanize to G90 coating class.
C. Bracing, Furring, and Bridging: Same finish as framing members.
D. Plates, Gussets, and Clips: Same finish as framing members.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1.11. EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate surfaces are ready to receive Work.
B. Verify that rough -in utilities are in proper location.
1.12. ERECTION OF JOISTS, PURLINS AND RAFTERS
A. Install framing components.
B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing.
C. Place joists, purlins and rafters at 16 inches oc; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls.
Connect joists to supports using fastener method.
D. Set ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging.
E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member
to top of stud track.
F. Provide web stiffeners at reaction points as required by calculations.
G. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
H. Complete framing ready to receive decking.
1.13. ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch.
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
03860201 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 - 3
08/02
f'?
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, prime painted and galvanized.
B.
Steel floor grating.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Placement of anchors in concrete.
B.
Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Placement of anchors in masonry.
*^
C.
Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Structural bearing plates, angles and miscellaneous items,
including anchorage.
D.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking for support of accessories.
-.,
E.
Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
a
A.
Gratings
1. General
�.+
a. Size components using single support design.
b. Maximum Allowable Deflection Under Live Load: 1/240.
2. Type I
a. Design Wheel Load (Heavy Vehicle): Wheel load of 15,600 lbs. conforming to
AASHTO Grade 15, with 30 percent impact loading.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Prepare shop drawings for stairs and gratings under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
B.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certificates certifying welders employed on the Work, verifying
AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.
1.6 REFERENCES
A.
AASHTO - Standard Specification for Highway Bridges.
B.
ANSI/NAAMM MBG 532 - Heavy Duty Metal Bar Grating Manual.
`
C.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
D.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless.
E.
ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
03860201
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1
t..
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.
G. ASTM A283 - Carbon Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars.
H. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
I. ASTM A386 - Zinc -Coating (Hot -Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
J. AWS A2.0 - Standard Welding Symbols.
K. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
L. FS-S-325 - Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring,
Masonry).
M. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of
fasteners, and accessories.
2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.
3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net
weld lengths.
4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other sections.
5. Submit manufacturer's standard printed descriptive product literature for manufactured
items.
B. Design Data
1. Submit span and deflection tables for specified grating loads.
C. Certification: Submit Welder's certificate verifying AWS qualification within the previous
12 months.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Gratings
1. IKG Industries, Nashville, TN.
2. United Interlock, Columbus, OH.
3. Alhambra Foundry Co., Alhambra, CA.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General
1. Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
2. Steel Plates: ASTM A283.
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40.
4. Fasteners: FS-S-325, type as required by condition indicated.
03860201 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2
08/02 --
I
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO, 6
5.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized
components.
6.
Welding Materials: AWS D 1. 1; type required for materials being welded.
7.
Shop and Touch -Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.
8.
Touch -Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc rich type.
B. Gratings
1.
ANSI A202.1, Types as specified and/or detailed.
2.
Types I: ASTM A36 steel, rectangular shape.
3.
Fasteners and J-Hooks: Of same material as grating.
4.
Perimeter Closure: Of same material as grating.
C. Pipe Bollards: ASTM A53, Grade B Schedule 40, 8 inch outside diameter, unless otherwise
,.,
indicated on the drawings.
D. Miscellaneous Materials
1.
Grout: Nonmetallic, noncorrodible, nonshrink, factory blended and packaged; complying
with ASTM C 1107; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.
2.
Concrete: Normal weight ready -mix concrete as specified in Division 3.
a. Compressive strength: 2500 pounds per square inch, minimum, at 28 days, unless
otherwise indicated.
3.
Concrete Inserts: Style as required for application.
4.
Fasteners: Use fasteners suitable for the material being fastened and for the type of
connection required.
a. For exterior use or built into exterior walls: Nonferrous stainless steel, zinc coated
or cadmium plated.
b. Use fasteners of same material as items being fastened unless otherwise indicated.
•^
C. Bolts and studs: ASTM A 307.
d. Nuts: ASTM A 563.
e. Lag bolts: FS FF-B-561.
�-
f. Machine screws: FS FF-S-92.
g. Wood screws: FS FF-S-I 11.
h. Plain washers: FS FF-W-92.
...
i. Lock washers: FS FF-W-84.
j. Expansion shields: FS FF-S-325.
k. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588.
5.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: Zinc dust paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL
P-21035B, Type I or II.
6.
Shop Primer: Rust -inhibitive, lead and chromate free, low VOC primer, complying with
FS TT-P-664, or equivalent.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General
1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site.
2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
�^ 3. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds.
4. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints
butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
�.. 5. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively
located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.
i
03860201 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 3
,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
6. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
B. Gratings
1. Fabricate grates to accommodate design loads to sizes indicated and to tolerances
specified in ANSUNAAMM MBG531.
2. Fabricate steel grates with welded cross bars.
3. Top Surface: Smooth.
4. Bearing Bars: 1-3/16 inch on center maximum.
5. Cross Bars: Spaced 4 inches on center maximum.
6. Finishes: Galvanized.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required.
C. Prepare and prime paint items Specified or Scheduled to be field painted with two coats
manufacturer's standard baked on primer.
D. Galvanize items Specified or Scheduled to be galvanized with 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc coating in
accordance with ASTM A386.
E. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.
B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates,
to appropriate sections.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings.
D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
G. Mechanically cut galvanized finish surfaces. Do not flame cut.
H. Anchor grating by bolting through flange blocks.
03860201 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 4
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. General
1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
B. Gratings
1. Conform to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531.
2. Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1/4 inch.
3. Maximum Variation From Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 1/16 inch.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically
scheduled.
1. Overhead Coiling Door Frames: 1/4 inch thick bent plate as detailed: prime paint finish
for field painting.
2. Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
03860201
08/02
END OF SECTION
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500 - 5
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
-_
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
-
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Carpentry work not specified as part of other sections and which generally is not
exposed, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Rough carpentry for:
a. Miscellaneous lumber for attachment and support of other work.
b. Construction panels for miscellaneous uses.
3. Preservative treatment.
4. Wall sheathing.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Finish carpentry: Elsewhere in Division 6.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
APA PRP-108 -- Performance Standards and Policies for Structural -Use Panels; American
Plywood Association; 1988 (Revised 1989).
B.
ASTM A 153-82(87) -- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 1982 (Reapproved 1987).
C.
ASTM C 79 - Gypsum Sheathing Board.
D.
AWP13 LP-2-88 -- American Wood Preservers Bureau Quality Control and Inspection
Procedures for Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treated with Waterborne
"
Preservatives for Above Ground Use; 1988.
E.
NBS PS 1-83 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; U.S. Department of Commerce, National
Bureau of Standards; 1983 (with 1984 Revision).
F.
NIST PS 20-94 -- American Softwood Lumber Standard; U.S. Department of Commerce,
National Institute of Standards and Technology; 1994.
G.
NFPA WCD #1 -- Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper
r^
Association (formerly National Forest Products Association); 1988.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
r
A.
Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing, wood preservative materials and
application instructions.
03860201 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber: Comply with NIST PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
B. Inspection Agency: Any agency whose rules are approved by American Lumber Standards
Committee.
C. Grade Stamps for Concealed Lumber: Each piece of lumber, applied by inspection agency and
showing compliance with each specified requirement.
D. Construction Panels: Comply with NBS PS 1 where veneer plywood is specified; comply with
APA PRP-108 where APA rated panels are specified; bearing APA trademark showing
compliance with each specified requirement.
1.6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood products and sheathing against moisture and dimensional changes. Support stacks
at several uniformly spaced points to prevent deformation. Store stacks raised above ground.
Cover to protect from rain and snow. Select and arrange cover to allow air circulation under and
all around stacks to prevent condensation. Maintain and restore displaced coverings. Remove
from the site any wood products that have been subjected to moisture or that do not comply
with the specified moisture requirements.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Size: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with NIST PS 20 except where actual sizes
are specifically required.
1. Surfacing: Dressed lumber (S4S).
2. Moisture content: S-dry or MC 19 (19 percent maximum moisture content).
a. Any allowed under referenced grading rules.
3. Grade: Construction (Light Framing).
B. Miscellaneous Lumber: Provide dimension lumber and boards necessary for the support of work
specified in other sections, whether or not specifically indicated, and including but not limited
to blocking, nailers, etc.
1. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum (S-dry).
2. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or standard grade.
2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A. Construction Panels/Plywood: Miscellaneous uses.
1. Concealed plywood: C-C Plugged exterior.
2. Electrical/telephone panel backer: C-C plugged, APA rated sheathing, Exposure 1, rated.
2.3 SHEATHING
A. ASTM C79; moisture and fire resistant type; 1/2 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled,
maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut; book tongue and grooved edges; water repellent
paper faces.
03860201 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide as required by applicable codes and as otherwise indicated.
1. Provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating (ASTM A 153) for treated lumber and
where wood is in ground contact, subjected to high relative humidity, or exposed to
weather.
B. Sheathing Joint Tape:
1. Rubberized asphalt with polyethylene film backing, minimum 30 mils thick.
2. Acceptable Product: W.R. Grace "Perm -a -Barrier" wall seam tape.
2.5 WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS
A. Aboveground Lumber: AWPB LP-2 (waterborne preservatives).
1. Kiln dried after treatment to 19 percent maximum moisture content for lumber and 18
percent for plywood.
2. Treat the following:
a. Wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
b. Wood in contact with masonry or concrete.
C. Wood within 18 inches of grade.
d. Other members indicated.
B. Fasteners for Preservative Treated Wood: Hot -dip galvanized steel (ASTM A153).
1. Fire -retardant treated plywood: AWPA C27.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Arrange work to use full length pieces except where lengths would exceed commercially
available lengths. Discard pieces with defects that would lower the required strength or
appearance of the work.
B. Cut and fit members accurately. Install plumb and true to line and level.
C. Fasten carpentry in accordance with applicable codes and recognized standards.
D. Where exposed, countersink nails and fill flush with suitable wood filler.
E. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid
splitting wood.
3.2 MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY
A. Provide miscellaneous blocking, nailers, grounds, and framing as shown and as required for
support of facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Cut and shape to the required
size. Provide in locations required by other work.
B. Use countersunk fasteners appropriate to applied loading.
C. Install permanent grounds for concrete and masonry where required.
3.3 WOOD FRAMING - GENERAL
A. Comply with sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated. Where not specifically indicated,
comply with applicable codes and NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." Splice
members only where specifically indicated or approved.
03860201 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
.-� 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Space fasteners as indicated. Where not specifically indicated, comply with applicable codes
and the "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of NFPA "Manual for Wood Frame Construction"
and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction."
1. Nail or screw miscellaneous plywood panels to supports.
3.4 SHEATHING
A. Install sheathing so that long edges are parallel to studs. Center edges over studs.
B. Provide solid wood blocking or metal framing to support horizontal edges which do not bear
on horizontal framing members.
C. Coordinate installation of flashings, anchors, and similar items necessary to construct and
weatherproof wall systems.
D. Apply rubberized asphalt joint tape to edges and joints of sheathing.
E. Install to a maximum allowable tolerance variation from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8
inch in 10 feet.
END OF SECTION
03860201 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
tow
SECTION 06410
"^ CUSTOM CABINETWORK
., PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED
DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Interior architectural woodwork.
a. Wood cabinets.
b. Cabinet hardware.
?. 7
C. Plastic laminate clad tops.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Hollow Core Doors: Section 08211.
2. Hardware References: Section 08710.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B.
ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard.
C.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
D.
BHMA A156.1 -Butts and Hinges.
E.
BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
F.
BHMA A156.11 -Cabinet Locks.
G.
BHMA A156.16 - Auxiliary Hardware.
H.
BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes.
I.
FS MMM-A-130 - Adhesive, Contact.
J.
HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
K.
NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates.
L.
NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress
M.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
N.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard.
■- 1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings.
1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details,
fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.
2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide
master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork
elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed.
B.
Samples
a;
I. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish.
03860201
CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 1
-* 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Plastic Laminate:
1. Product data.
2. Samples for selection.
3. Maintenance data.
D. Cabinet Hardware:
1. Product data.
2. One sample of each type.
3. Samples showing each finish on each item of hardware exposed to view.
4. Maintenance data. —
5. Operation data for drawer slides.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality of Materials and Workmanship: Provide woodwork that complies with requirements
of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards," published by Architectural Woodwork
Institute (AWI) (hereinafter referred to as "woodworking standard").
B. Where contract documents indicate deviations from the woodworking standard, the contract
documents shall govern.
C. Coordinate installation of woodwork with other work to avoid damage.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETWORK
A. All Cabinetwork:
1. Grades: As indicated on drawings.
2. Species: As indicated on drawings.
3. Finishes: As indicated on drawings.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Lumber: Species and grade as specified in woodworking standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 100.
2. Moisture content at time of fabrication: Not greater than optimum moisture content as
specified in woodworking standard.
3. Provide lumber dressed on all exposed faces, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Do not use twisted, warped, bowed, or otherwise defective lumber.
5. Sizes indicated are nominal, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Do not mark or color lumber, except where such marking will be concealed in finish
work. —
B. Plywood: Types, grades, and cores as specified in the woodworking standard, except as
otherwise specified in this section.
1. Comply with applicable requirements of AWI Section 200. —
2. Medium density overlaid plywood: Exterior Type.
C. Medium Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Product Class MD..
D. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; tempered, with exposed faces smooth.
03860201 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 2
08/02 --
r-'
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. High -Pressure Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3.
1. Grades and thicknesses required by AWI.
B. Transparent Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9.
C. Opaque Finish Materials for Field Finishing: As specified in Division 9.
D. Wood Filler for Transparent Finish Woodwork: Match final finish color.
E. Fasteners: Style, size, material, and finish as required for the purpose.
2.4 CABINET HARDWARE
A. Provide hardware and accessories indicated and as required for a complete installation.
B. Concealed Hinges: Totally concealed style, self -closing, opening 180 degrees.
C. Butt Hinges: BHMA 156.1, A8133.
D. Pulls: Standard wire style, 3 1/2-inch centers by 5/16-inch diameter, no escutcheons.
E. Drawer slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, Side -mounted, 75-pound capacity, full
extension, with nylon ball -bearing rollers; positive pull-out stop, self -closing, lift -out feature.
F. Locks: BHMA A156.11 , E07261, 5-pin tumbler, sized for door thickness.
G. Shelf supports: BHMA A156.9, B04013, brass or nickel plated steel, no plastics allowed.
H. Closet Rod: BHMA A156.16, Type L03131, 7/8" diameter stainless steel.
I. Coat Hooks: BHMA Al56.16, Type L03111, stainless steel or solid brass.
J. Silencers: BHMA Al56.16, Type L03021.
K. Lever Extension Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Type L04091.
L. Finishes on exposed hardware: Comply with BHMA A156.18 as follows:
1. Exposed Hardware: 630, satin stainless steel.
2. Concealed hardware: Manufacturer's standard non -corroding plated finish, complying
with applicable requirements of BHMA A156.9.
M. Magnetic Catches: BHMA A156.16, Type BO 3162.
N. Manufactured Support:
1. Counter Support
a. 6063 `T' shaped extruded aluminum with 5/16 inch diameter mounting/attaching
holes, mill finish and 7/8 inch hole with rubber grommet for wiring.
b. Acceptable Product: RAKKS Model No. EH1824-FM.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in sizes and shapes indicated and using details indicated.
B. Complete fabrication and assembly in shop.
1. For applied fixtures and fittings, cut openings in shop.
2. Ease edges of solid lumber members using:
a. 1/1 6-inch radius for members 1 inch or less nominal thickness.
b. 1/8-inch radius for members more than 1 inch nominal thickness.
C. Drilled holes, at 1 inch spacing, for shelf support clips at each shelf indicated to be adjustable.
'^ D. Make special provisions as required for 1 3/8" doors at dorm lockers. This may require
reinforced jambs for hinges, special cylinders, flush bolts, internal blocking, etc.
E. Prepare for finishing in accordance with woodworking standard.
03860201 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 3
�* 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that blocking and backings have been installed at appropriate locations for anchorage,
and for coat hooks or other required hardware on dorm locker doors.
3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Do not begin installation of interior woodwork until potentially damaging construction
operations are complete in the installation area.
B. Field Joinery: Comply with requirements of the woodworking standard for shop joinery.
C. Make joints neatly, with uniform appearance.
D. Install woodwork in correct location, plumb and level, without rack or warp.
1. Install with no variation in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
E. Touch-up shop finishes at field cuts.
F. Secure woodwork to blocking or use anchors indicated.
1. Where anchorage method is not indicated, conceal all fasteners where possible.
2. Where exposed nailing is required or indicated, use finishing nails, countersink, and fill.
G. Repair damaged and defective woodwork to eliminate visual and functional defects; where
repair is not possible, replace woodwork.
H. Cabinets:
1. Install so doors operate smoothly, with edges aligned.
2. Install so drawers operate smoothly.
3. Install all hardware not installed in shop.
4. Anchor tops securely.
5. Install tops level, within 1/8 inch in 8 feet.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect woodwork from damage and maintain design environmental conditions.
B. Repair and damaged woodwork like new.
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Flush Reveal Cabinets
Each door to have:
2 concealed, self closing hinges.
1 pull.
1 lock where indicated on drawings.
Each drawer to have:
Pair drawer slides.
1 pull.
1 lock where indicated on drawings.
03860201 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Wardrobe Cabinets/Closet
Single door cabinets to have:
1 1/2 pair butts
1 lock
.�
1 pull
3 silencers
1 clothes rod
,.�
2 coat hooks
1 magnetic catch
Double door cabinet to have:
3 pair butts
1 lock
2 pulls
1 set flush bolts
a_.
2 silencers
1 clothes rod
'
4 coat hooks
1 magnetic catch
END OF SECTION
03860201 CUSTOM CABINETWORK 06410 - 5
,..,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07180
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Application of clear water repellent coating to the following exposed surfaces:
a. Exterior:
1) Brick masonry.
2) Concrete unit masonry.
B. Section Does Not Include: Application of water repellents to horizontal traffic surfaces.
C. Coordinate the application of this materials with the application of the Graffiti Resistant coating
called for in Section 09910. Follow each manufacturer's recommendations. Notify architect of
potential conflicts.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data and recommendations for use of each type
of product required.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Detailed application instructions, including weather limitations,
condition of substrates, surface preparation or cleaning, protection of adjacent surfaces,
application of product, and cleaning of accidental over -spray and spills.
C. Samples - Clear Water Repellent: Submit 16-inch-square samples of each material to receive
water repellent. Leave 1/3 of panel untreated, apply 1 coat of water repellent to 1/3 of panel,
and apply 2 coats to remaining 1/3 of panel.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of the pollution control regulatory
agency having jurisdiction in the project locale regarding use of hydrocarbon solvents.
B. Mock-up: Apply water repellent to mock-up constructed as work of other section(s).
1. Do not apply water repellents to project surfaces without the architect's approval of
water-repellent mock-up.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Furnish warranty to provide materials and labor required to repair or replace materials which
fail to perform properly due to defective materials or workmanship. This warranty shall be in
addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the owner may have against the contractor under
the contract documents.
1. Warranty period is 5 years after date of substantial completion.
03860201 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEAR WATER REPELLENTS
A. General: Provide products recommended by the manufacturer for compatibility and proper
performance when applied to the substrates indicated to receive water repellent treatment.
B. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the contract
documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Siloxane -- Mineral spirit based alkyl-alkoxy siloxane solution:
a. "CP-250"; Chemical Products Corporation.
b. "Euco Weather -Guard"; The Euclid Chemical Company.
C. "Hydropel'; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. "Shed Ox"; L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
e. "Rainstopper 100"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc.
f. "Rainstopper 200"; Textured Coatings of America, Inc.
g. "Water -Guard"; Nox-Crete, Inc.
h. "Weather Seal Special Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc.
i. "Weather Seal Siloxane"; ProSoCo, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Do not proceed with application of water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces
to receive water repellent treatment have been installed and cured.
B. Protection:
1. Mask off and cover adjacent surfaces to prevent contamination by water repellents
whether by spray, drift, drip, or spillage.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install water repellants to all exterior masonry surfaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written application instructions.
C. Unless specifically contraindicated by manufacturer's instructions, use low pressure spray
equipment to apply a heavy saturation coat to substrate followed by a second saturation coat
after the manufacturer's recommended drying time has elapsed.
D. Remove protective coverings from adjacent surfaces.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform field test on non -water repellent treated and water repellent treated area for each
substrate scheduled to be treated. Perform separate test for masonry and water joints.
1. Perform test using Rilem 25 PEM method II.4 for a period of one hour.
2. Perform minimum three separate tests for each substrate scheduled to receive water
repellent treatment using specified methods and materials.
3. Acceptable Application: Minimum 80 percent reduction in water absorption between
treated and non -treated areas.
4. Provide additional coatings until required reduction in absorption is achieved.
03860201 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Brick and Prefinished Concrete Masonry Units: Siloxane, minimum two coats.
END OF SECTION
03860201 WATER REPELLENTS 07180-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
«.._
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
�..
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r-�
A.
Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General
Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Rigid insulation in exterior wall construction.
B.
Batt insulation on top of lay -in acoustical and gypsum drywall ceilings.
C.
Acoustical insulation.
r
1.3 RELATED
SECTIONS
-
A.
Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing: Rigid insulation at roof system.
^�
B.
Section 07270 - Firestopping: Sealing fire rated partitions
C.
Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Vapor barrier and acoustical sealant. Supporting
construction
�•-
D.
Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction.
1.4 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C208 - Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.
"
B.
ASTM C240 - Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.
C.
ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
D.
ASTM C578 - Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
-
E.
ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation Board.
F.
ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and
Manufactured Housing.
G.
ASTM C1289 - Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.
H.
ASTM D2842 - Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
1.
ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J.
ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building
Partitions.
r-
K.
ASTM E96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
L.
ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
M.
ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
,-.
N.
NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O.
UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
r
03860201 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Insulation k Values
1. k values indicated are based on 75 deg. F.
2. Where scheduled, provide insulations with conditioned k values complying with
RIC/TIMA 281-1 Conditioning Procedure.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to Uniform Building Code - 1997 for combustibility and smoke development
requirements for materials as follows:
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data
1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate
1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful
installation.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with
manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Flexible Insulation -
1.
Owens/Corning Corporation
2.
CertainTeed
3.
Manville Corp. -�
4.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600
B. Board Insulation
1.
Polystyrene Insulation —
a. AFM - Molded Polystyrene Insulation.
b. EPS - Molded Polystyrene Insulation.
C. W.R. Grace Construction Products
d. DivsersiFoam Products.
e. Dow Chemical.
f. Tenneco Foam Products. _
03860201 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
08/02
r"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Polyisocyanurate
Insulation
a.
Celotex.
r+ b.
NRG Barriers/Johns Manville.
C.
Rmax - Polyisocyanurate Insulation.
3. Cellular
Glass Insulation
r^- a.
Pittsburgh Corning.
4. Cellular
Glass Insulation
a.
Certain Teed.
-, b.
Johns Manville, Insulation Group.
C.
Knauf Fiber Glass.
d.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas.
C. Accessories
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass fiber batt.
2. Thermal Resistance: R19.
3. Size: To fit framing spacing
4. Facing: Kraft faced.
B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass or mineral fiber batt.
2. Thermal Resistance: R8.
3. Size: To fit framing spacing
4. Facing: Unfaced.
C. Thermal Board Insulation
1. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation: ASTM C578 Type VI; cellular type, conforming to the
following:
a. Board Density: 1.6 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size: 16 inch x maximum length available.
C. Board Thickness: 2 inches.
d. Thermal Resistance: R of 10.
e. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D2842 0.05 percent by volume
maximum.
f. Compressive Strength: Minimum 60 psi.
g. Board Edges: Square edges.
h. Flame/Smoke Properties: In accordance with ASTM E84.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Bright aluminum self -adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide.
B. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.
C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
D. Adhesive Type 2: Vapor retarder type, trowel consistency; compatible with insulation and
substrate, conforming to the following:
E. Impaling Clips: Galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be mechanically fastened
to surface to receive board insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable
of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
03860201 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
.� 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify insulation is dry.
C. Verify substrate surface is flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, materials or substances
that may impede adhesive bond.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around
electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing
through partitions.
4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
B. Flexible Thermal Insulation
1. Place between and tight to framing members.
2. Staple or nail facing flanges in place at maximum 6 inches oc.
C. Flexible Acoustical Insulation
1. Place between and tight to framing members.
2. Tape in place.
D. Cavity Walls —'
1. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency of 6 per insulation board.
2. Adhere a 2 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over control joint with double beads of
Type 1 adhesive each side of joint between sheets. Extend sheet full height of joint.
3. Apply Type 1 adhesive in three continuous beads per board length to full bed 1/8 inch
thick on substrate. Daub adhesive tight to protrusions to ensure continuity of vapor
retarder and air seal. -
4. Install boards horizontally between wall reinforcement.
5. Place membrane surface facing out, butter with adhesive tape seal board joints.
6. Place boards in a method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger side joints. Butt edges
and ends tight to adjacent board and no protrusions. Place impale fastener locking discs.
END OF SECTION
03860201 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
08/02 —
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
,., PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply
to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories.
,.3 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry partitions.
B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum wallboard partitions.
C. Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical work requiring firestopping.
D. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical work requiring firestopping.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. ASTM El 19 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
�. C. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
D. UL-05 - Fire Resistance Directory.
E. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
F. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
G. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops.
H. WHI - Certification Listings.
1.5 DEFINITION
A. Firestopping (Firesafing): A certified sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces
between building materials to arrest the movement of smoke, heat, gases, or fire through wall
or floor openings and to maintain the integrity of fire resistance rated walls, partitions and
roof -ceiling assemblies and construction joints. Through -penetrations include the annular space
+^ around pipes, tubes, conduit, wires, cables and vents.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Surface Burning: ASTM E84 or UL 723 with a flame spread / smoke developed rating of
0-25/0-450.
p., B. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
03860201 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide detail drawing of each type firestop and location drawing referencing each type
application.
B. Product Data: Provide descriptive data on product characteristics, performance and limitation
criteria and fire test data.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate
1. Submit certificates attesting that firestopping material complies with specified
requirements.
2. Label or listing of Underwriters Laboratories will be acceptable evidence.
3. In lieu of label or listing, a written certificate may be submitted from an approved,
nationally recognized testing agency equipped to perform such services, stating that
items submitted have been tested and conform to specified requirements and testing
methods.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to UL or WH for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
B. Provide certificate of compliance from Texas Department of Health indicating approval of
materials used.
1.10 MOCKUP
A. Provide mockups of applied firestopping assemblies under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Apply 1 sq ft to a representative substrate surface.
C. Apply firestop material to a representative penetrated masonry, concrete, and stud wall.
D. If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work.
E. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery, store and handle products to project site in accordance with requirements of
Section 01600.
1.12 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below
60 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.
C. Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
03860201 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
.A
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Commercially manufactured, non -toxic products as listed in UL 05.
B. Use of fireproofing materials specified in Sections 07255 and 07265 as firestopping is strictly
prohibited.
C. Provide "F" and "T" fire resistance ratings for through -penetrations, as described in paragraph
1.4 DEFINITIONS in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, except that T Ratings are not
required for penetrations smaller than or equal to a 4-inch nominal pipe or 16 square inches in
overall cross sectional area.
E-*
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces.
B. Dam Material: Permanent:
1. Mineral fiberboard or sheet metal.
C. Installation Accessories: Clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices
required to position and retain materials in place.
2.3 FINISHES
n
A. Color: As selected by Architect to match adjacent wall surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may
affect bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.
C.
Install backing and/or damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3 APPLICATION
A.
Install material at walls or partition openings which contain penetrating sleeves, piping,
ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
.,., B.
Completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric configuration, subject to tolerance
established by manufacturer.
C.
Design firestopping for filling floor voids 4 inches or more in any direction to support the same
load as floor is designed to support, or protect by permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic
in firestopped area.
D.
Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
03860201
FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 3
.•• 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
E. Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to uniform density and
texture.
F. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncompressed density. _
G. Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
H. Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK —
A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION _
03960201 FIRESTOPPING 07270 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r
SECTION 07410
MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS
,., PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
r
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured metal roofing system:
a. Manufactured metal roof panels.
b. Installation accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Sheet metal flashing: Elsewhere in Division 7.
MR 1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 792-93a -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy -Coated
,.., by the Hot -Dip Process, General Requirements; 1993.
B. ASTM D 226-89 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing
and Waterproofing; 1989.
C. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.(UL); 1993.
D. UL 580 -- Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;
1994.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Provide for expansion and contraction of system components due to ambient temperature
and solar heat gain. Accommodate movement due to temperature change without
buckling, undue stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other
' damaging effects.
a. Anticipated ambient temperature range: 0 to 110 degrees F.
B. Wind Uplift: Provide metal roof panel systems which have been tested in accordance with
!^ UL 580 and listed in the UL "Roofing Materials and Systems Directory" for the following
rating:
1. Class 60.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data, details,
and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that metal panel assembly components
comply with contract documents.
03860201 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 1
•* 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings which show arrangement and orientation of panels and details of
panel joints, corners, custom profiles, supporting devices, and closure trim and flashing. Show
panel system in relation to adjacent construction.
C. Samples for Selection of Coated Finish Colors: 2 x 3 inch square pieces of actual panel
materials. Submit full range of samples.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A company with a minimum of 5 years' successful experience in
the design, fabrication, and installation of metal panel systems comparable in size and nature
to those required for this project.
B. Field Measurements: Measure in -place construction on which panel system will be installed if
possible, before fabrication of panels. If not feasible, fabricate material to allow in -field
trimming of panels to assure proper fit.
1. Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with shop fabrication to minimize
field adjustments, splicing, and mechanical joints.
C. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this contract.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant coated finish against cracking, peeling, blistering, chalk in excess of 8 units, and fade
in excess of 5 NBS points, for a period of 20 years, without reducing or otherwise limiting any
other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufactured Metal Panel Systems: Furnish basic materials, including panels, accessories, and
fasteners, from a single source manufacturer. Furnish other products integral with panel system
from the same manufacturer as basic materials, or from a manufacturer approved or
recommended by the basic materials manufacturer.
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. AEP-Span Division/United Dominion Co.
b. Fabral-Alcan Building Products.
C. Architectural Panels, Inc.
d. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
e. Flexospan, Inc.
f. Robertson, a United Dominion Company.
g. Metal Building Components, Inc.
h. Steelite, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. "Galvalume" Sheet: ASTM A 792; steel sheet, coated with zinc -aluminum alloy, manufactured
under licensing requirements of BIEC International Inc.
03860201 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 2
08/02
ii
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.3 ROOF SYSTEM
A.
System Type: Uninsulated system consisting of roof panels with concealed attachment clips in
panel; clips secured directly to rigid substrate.
1. Seam type: Panel joint covered and locked by applied cap or strip (batten cover).
2. Fabricate panels from "Galvalume" sheet steel, minimum 24 gage (0.034 inch thick).
3. Exterior finish: Fluoropolymer.
4. Interior (underside) finish: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -inhibiting wash coat.
.�
5. Panel width (nominal coverage): 16 inches.
6. Panel profile: Match MBCI Craftsman Series HB16-1/2. Color to be selected from
standard colors.
B.
Rigid Insulation under the panels: The term "Uninsulated" is used to indicate the roof panel
itself is not insulated. Insulation is required, however, under the panel as shown in the drawing
details. This insulation should be the same type as used on the flat roof areas and may be either
one or two layers totaling a minimum of R-20 complying with the International Energy Code,
2000.
C.
Underlayment: Unperforated asphalt -saturated felt; ASTM D 226, Type II, No. 30.
D.
Concealed Panel Clips:
1. Fabricate from galvanized steel.
2. Provide roof system manufacturer's standard type clips to suit project requirements,
including but not limited to the following:
a. Live loads.
b. Thermal movement; accommodate expansion and contraction without introducing
stress into roof system.
'^
C. Slope of roof.
d. Special conditions at transitions, penetrations, and terminations.
E.
Fasteners:
1. Threaded fasteners - general: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant
fasteners of size and type required for intended application.
a. Use of cadmium -plated fasteners is not allowed.
,..,
2. Rivets: Noncorrosive metal, compatible with metals to be fastened.
F.
Accessories:
1. Flexible closures: Closed -cell neoprene rubber, formed to fit panel profile with 5 to 10
percent compression when secured in place.
2. Sheet metal closures, flashing, and trim: Fabricate from same type of sheet metal, and
with same finish, as adjacent roof panel.
3. Flexible sheet flashing: Neoprene or EPDM sheet, minimum 0.060 inch thickness.
4. Concealed sealants and gaskets: Manufacturer's standard.
5. Exposed joint sealant: As specified elsewhere in Division 7.
G.
Classification: Class B minimum.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Fluoropolymer Finish:
1. Pretreatment: Caustic etch and conversion coating, each followed by water rinse.
2. Primer: Modified epoxy primer, minimum 0.2 mil thick; bake to cure.
3. Finish coat: 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000" resin finish coat, minimum 0.8 mil
thick; bake to cure. Match MBCI standard colors.
4. Protective film: Provide strippable plastic film, applied to finish of coil stock before
... forming.
03860201 MANUFACTURED METAL ROOF PANELS 07410 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Mill Finish: As -fabricated, welds cleaned and dressed, exposed welds ground smooth. Remove
oil, grease, dirt, and weld spatter from finished units.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate or structural system to receive work of this section is complete, properly
sized, and is laid out correctly in plan and elevations.
B. Correct unacceptable substrate installations before start of metal panel erection.
C. Coordinate work with other adjacent elements of building envelope to ensure watertight
construction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install manufactured metal panels in accordance with panel manufacturer's
recommended practices.
1. Fasten panels to structure as necessary to comply with performance criteria, allowing for
expansion and contraction due to temperature variations and building movement.
2. Install gaskets, sealants, closures, and trim as the work progresses to ensure airtight and
watertight performance of the completed installation.
B. Roof System Installation:
1. Underlayment: Install one layer of underlayment, starting at low point of roof. Lap seams
a minimum of 2 inches. Conceal or arrange fasteners to prevent contact between fastener
head and underside of metal roofing.
2. Install roof panels in single, continuous piece from eaves to ridge.
3. Roof panel installation: Install roof panels using concealed clips in panel joints.
a. Use of exposed fasteners is not permitted unless specifically approved by the
architect.
4. Do not penetrate finish ceiling in Apparatus Bay with screws.
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Roof Systems:
1. Alignment: 1/4 inch in 20 feet for conformity to lines of roof slope and seam locations.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove protective coverings from prefinished metal surfaces after each panel is installed.
B. Touch up or refinish marred or abraded surfaces. Replace damaged units and units which
cannot be refinished to the architect's satisfaction.
C. Clean finished surfaces using techniques and materials recommended by panel manufacturer.
Protect cleaned surfaces until project completion.
END OF SECTION
03860201 MANUFACTURED`METAL,ROOF PANELS 07410 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07525
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
""'
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
rya
1.
Substrate preparation.
2.
Insulation.
3.
Roof membrane.
4.
Base flashings.
F
5.
Roof accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1.
Carpentry - wood blocking and nailers: Division 6.
2.
Flashing and sheet metal (weather protection for base flashings): Elsewhere in
Division 7.
3.
Roof specialties and accessories: Elsewhere in Division 7.
r9
4.
Roof drains, curbs for equipment: Division 15.
5.
Metal roof panels: Elsewhere in Division 7.
"r
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 208-94 -- Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 1994.
B.
ASTM C 518-91 -- Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and
Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 1991.
C.
ASTM C 728-91 -- Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board; 1991.
D.
ASTM E 84-91a -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials; 1991.
E.
FM P7825 -- Approval Guide 1992; Factory Mutual System; 1992 (with Supplement I).
F.
The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association;
1989.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Factory Mutual System Classification: Provide roofing materials and a roofing system assembly
which have been listed in the Factory Mutual System "Approval Guide" as being acceptable
for Class I roof assembly construction.
1. Provide roof system, including insulation and fasteners, rated by FM for Class I-60 wind
uplift.
B. Roof covering classification: Class B minimum.
PM
03860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-1
�, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical product information, installation instructions, and
recommendations for each type of roofing material. Furnish additional information as necessary
to demonstrate products comply with project criteria.
B. Color samples for selection.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company that has produced roofing materials and accessories
of the type included in this section for at least three years.
B. Installer Qualifications: A company approved or licensed by the roofing materials manufacturer
and which has completed at least 10 previous installations of roofing material similar to the type
included in this section.
1. Certification: Furnish to the architect, before roofing contract award, written
documentation that installer is manufacturer certified to install roofing systems of the
type included in this section.
2. Installer supervision: Have installer identify a supervisor with at least 5 years experience
in the application of the type of modified bituminous sheet roofing system included in
this section, to provide full-time review of built-up roofing installation work.
3. The same roofer must install both flat or membrane roof and metal roofs under this
contract.
C. FM Label: Roofing material packaging shall bear FM Classification marking.
D. Pre -Roofing Meeting: Organize and conduct a meeting at the construction site 2 weeks before
scheduled start of roof system installation with roofing installer; installer of each component
of related work, including deck or substrate construction, roof equipment, penetrations of roof
deck, and other work integral with or adjacent to roofing; the architect; the owner; roofing
manufacturer's representative; and other parties involved with roofing system performance,
including owner's insurance representative, independent testing agencies, and governing
authorities.
1. Walk roof areas to review and discuss substrate preparation including repair of
unacceptable surfaces, roof drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and work
performed by other trades which requires coordination with roofing system.
2. Examine steel deck for proper flatness and slope, review structural capability for
supporting roofing system and methods of fastening.
3. Review contract document requirements and submittals for roofing system, including
roofing schedule, inspection and testing, and environmental conditions. Identify what
are considered unacceptable weather conditions for roofing, and which governing
regulations or insurance requirements will affect roofing system installation.
4. Document discussions in writing, including actions required, and distribute copy of
report to each meeting participant.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Begin roofing installation when weather conditions are within acceptable limits according to
manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
03860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-2
08/02
' LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
I
1.8 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's unopened, sealed containers or packages, with
manufacturer's labels intact.
B. Store materials in weather -protected environment, clear of ground and moisture.
1.9 WARRANTIES
A. Project Installation Guarantee: Submit written agreement signed by the installer and the
contractor, guaranteeing to correct failures in product and workmanship for a 2-year period
from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting other rights to
correction which the owner may have under the contract documents. Failure is defined to
include product failure which leads to interruption of a water -tight installation. Guarantee shall
cover work of this section, including:
1. Roof membrane.
2. Base flashings.
3. Insulation.
4. Roof accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard limited product warranty
signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in product
which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other
rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents, for the following
period of time:
1. 15 years after date of substantial completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Roof System:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Celotex Corporation.
b. Firestone Building Products Company.
C. GAF Building Materials Corporation.
d. Tamko Asphalt Products, Inc.
e. Intec/Permaglas, Div. of U.S. Intec, Inc.
2. Specification: Tamko System 107 FR is used as a standard. Other systems must equal
or exceed this product installation and other provisions in this section.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Base Sheet: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced
with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics:
1. Thickness: 100 mils minimum.
2. Minimum Weight: .59 lb/sq ft minimum.
3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches
4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523.
a. Longitudinal:69%
03860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
b. Transverse:65%
5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523
a. Longitudinal: 130 lbs/in.
b. Transverse: 129 lbs/in.
6. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08
7. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04.
8. Surfacing: Uncoated.
B. Insulation
1. Type A Insulation: HH-I-1972/2, Polysiocyanurate rigid board, both faces finished with
non -asphaltic glass mat, with the following characteristics:
a. Board Density 2.0 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177.
e. Board Edges square
2. Type B Insulation: ASTM C208, Cellulose fiber roof insulating board, with the
following characteristics:
a. Board Density 1.0 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness 1/2 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.38 as determined by ASTM C 177.
e. Board Edges square
3. Type C Insulation: ASTM C728, expanded perlite mineral aggregate board with the
following characteristics:
a. Board Density 1.5 lb/cu ft. -
b. Board Size 48x96 inch.
C. Board Thickness 3/4 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177. —
e. Board Edges square
4. Type D Insulation: ASTM C578, Type II or VIII (as required by roofing system
manufacturer) expanded polystyrene board with the following characteristics:
a. Board Desity minimum 1.15 lb/cu ft.
b. Board Size 48x96 inch
C. Board Thickness minimum 1 inch.
d. Thermal Conductivity K factor of 0.36 as determined by ASTM C 177.
e. Board Edges square
C. Membrane: Asphalt and polymer modifiers of styrene butadiene styrene (SBS) type, reinforced
with non -woven polyester fabric with the following characteristics:
1. Thickness: 150 mils minimum.
2. Average Weight: 1.0 lb/sq ft minimum.
3. Sheet Width: 39.4 inches '
4. Tensile Strength per ASTM 2523.
a. Machine Direction: 181 lbf/in
b. Cross Direction: 135 lbf/in —
5. Elongation to Break: per ASTM 2523
a. Machine Direction: 53%
b. Cross Direction: 59%
6. Tear Strength:
a. Machine Direction: 185 lbs.
b. Cross Direction: 139 lbs.
03860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
7. Aging: None when test to ARMA MB-08
8. Elasticity: 57 percent with full recovery without set when tested to ARMA MB-04.
9. Surfacing: Manufacturer's standard white ceramic granular coating.
D. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312, Type III.
E. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41.
F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D2822 Type I, cutback asphalt type.
G. Flashings
1. Flexible Base Flashings: Manufacturer's standard SBS type conforming to the same
requirements at the membrane.
2. Counter Flashings: Metal, as specified in Section 07600.
H. Accessories
1. Wood Cant: Treated wood, preformed to 45 degree angle.
2. Tapered Edge Strip. Asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite, 1 1/2 inches
high x 18 inches wide x manufacturer's standard length.
3. Insulation Joint Tape: Asphalt treated glass fiber reinforced; 6 inches wide; self adhering.
4. Roofing Nails: Galvanized, hot dipped or non-ferrous type, size as required to suit
application.
5. Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by system manufacturer;
length required for thickness of material with metal washers.
6. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify deck is supported and secured.
C.
Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections.
D.
Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. Verify flutes of metal deck are clean and
dry.
E.
Verify pull-out force of existing gypsum deck to comply with manufacturer's requirement for
proposed fasteners.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Insulation
•-
y.,
1. Install Type A or D (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval)
-;
insulation, in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install insulation units in continuous application of roofing bitumen or insulation
adhesive or mechanically attach per manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Mechanically fasten insulation units at roof perimeter to meet wind uplift requirements,
but using not less than one fastener per 4 square feet and at least 2 fasteners per board.
4. Tape joints of Type D insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's
.:'
instructions.
h
5. In full mopping of hot bitumen, install top constant thickness layer of either Type B or
Type C (at Contractor's option with membrane manufacturer's approval) insulation with
all joints staggered from joints in first layer of insulation by a minimum of 6 inches.
6. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.
7. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing.
03860201
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
8. Apply no more insulation that can be covered with membrane in same day.
9. Total insulation thickness to provide a minimum aged R-value of 20, complying with the
International Energy Code, 2000.
B. Membrane Application
1. Over Type B or C insulation, install base sheet in full mopping of hot bitumen.
2. Over base sheet, install membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Apply membrane; lap and seal edges and ends permanently waterproof.
4. Apply membrane smooth, free from air pockets, wrinkles, or tears. Ensure full bond of
membrane to substrate.
5. Extend membrane up cant strips and minimum of 8 inches onto vertical surfaces or as
otherwise detailed.
6. Mop and seal membrane around roof protrusions and penetrations.
7. Provide waterproof cut-off to membrane at end of day's operation. Remove cut-off
before resuming roofing.
C. Flashings and Accessories
1. Apply flexible sheet base flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements.
2. Secure to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer.
3. Seal flashings and flanges of items penetrating or protruding through the membrane.
4. Stripping: Do not strip metal items heavier than 24 gage sheet steel, 16-oz copper or
0.040-inch aluminum. Do not strip metal items greater than 10 feet in length.
a. Set metal flange in a full bed of roofing cement. Prime metal surface to receive
stripping.
b. Install stripping as specified for flashings above, except for nailing requirements.
1) Extend modified bituminous stripping a minimum of 6 inches onto roof
membrane.
D. Surfacing
1. Apply granular surfacing, matching membrane surfacing, as recommended by
manufacturer to completely cover all lap joints in membrane.
E. Roof Walkway Pads
1. At locations indicated on the drawings, install second layer of membrane for walkway
pads.
2. Apply granular membrane surfacing as recommended by manufacturer to completely
cover all edges at walkway pads.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Correct identified defects or irregularities.
3.4 CLEANING
A. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and comply with their documented instructions.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section.
6860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-6
08/02 —
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect building surfaces against damage from roofing work.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces.
END OF SECTION
03860201 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING 07525-7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07600
SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Coping flashings.
B. Fascias and sealant pockets.
C. Sill and lintel flashings.
D. Thru-wall scupper and conductor head.
E. Flashing receiver and cap flashing over bituminous, base flashings.
F. Counterflashings for roof hatches.
G. Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.
H. Gutters and downspouts.
I. Sheet metal splash pans.
J. Concrete splash blocks.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry: Masonry flashing, placement of flashing receivers and substrate
construction.
B. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood nailers and substrate construction.
C. Section 07410 - Manufactured Metal Roof Panels: Related flashings, gutters and downspouts.
D. Section 07525 - Modified Bituminous Sheet Roofing: Roofing system.
E. Section 07710 - Roof Specialties and Accessories: Metal Curbs.
F. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
G. Section 08415 - Aluminum Storefront: Sill flashings associated with doors and storefronts.
H. Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Sill flashings associated with windows.
I. Section 10200 - Louvers and Vents: Sill flashings associated with louvers.
J. Division 15 Section: Roof curbs for mechanical equipment.
K. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for mechanical items protruding through
roofing membrane.
L. Division 15 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for plumbing items protruding through
roofing membrane.
M. Division 16 Section: Roof curbs for electrical equipment.
N. Division 16 Section: Flashing sleeves and collars for electrical items protruding through roofing
membrane.
03860201
08/02
SHEET METAL
07600 - 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF - 45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic
Coatings on Extruded Aluminum.
C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural
Extrusions and Panels. -
D. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
E. ASTM A653/A653M - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated by
the Hot -Dip Process.
F. ATM A755/A755M - Steel Sheet, Metallic coated by the Hot -Dip Process and Prepainted by
the Coil -Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products.
G. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
H. ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
I. ASTM B749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products.
J. ASTM C728 - Perlite Thermal Insulation Board
K. ASTM D226 - Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
L. ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
M. NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual.
N. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profiles, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
B. Product Data: Submit data on manufactured components metal types, finishes, and
characteristics.
C. Samples: Submit one full size sample illustrating typical external coping corner, fabrication,
material and finish.
D. Submit two samples 2 x 3 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with AISI, SMACNA and NRCA standard details and
requirements.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with five years
documented experience.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.
03860201 SHEET METAL 07600 - 2
08/02 -�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PA
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate with the work of Section 04200 for installing flashing receivers.
C. Coordinate the work with downspout discharge pipe inlet.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Preformed Metal and Accessories
1. Cheney Flashing Co.;
2. Keystone Flashing Co;.
3. Metal -Era Inc; Waukesha, WI.
B. Prefinished Metal
1. MBCI - Grand Prairie, Texas
2. AEP/Span Metals Corp., Dallas, Texas
3. Alumax Corp., Mesquite, Texas
C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.2 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, G90 (Z275) zinc coating; thickness as indicated in
schedule at end of this section.
B. Pre -Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A755/A755M using ASTM A653/A653M, G90
(Z275) zinc coated sheet; thickness as indicated in schedule at end of this section, pre -coated
with PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride) coating.
C. Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft, 0.039 inch thick.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, No. 15 or No. 30 asphalt saturated roofing felt as indicated.
C. Protective Backing Paint: Bituminous type as specified in Section 09900.
D. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
E. Bedding Compound: Rubber -asphalt type.
F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type II.
G. Gutter Supports: Brackets and straps.
H. Downspout Supports: Brackets of same material as gutter and downspout.
I. Solder: ASTM B32; type suitable for application and material being soldered.
J. Touch-up Paint: To match factory finish.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28
days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment complying with requirements of Section
03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE.
B. Tapered Edge Strip: ASTM C728; minimum 2 inch thick, tapered to match coping flashing
profile, same width as parapet.
03860201 SHEET METAL 07600 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.5 FABRICATION
A.
General
1.
Fabricate sheet metal items in accordance with SMACNA details indicated in paragraph
SCHEDULE at the end of this section unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
2.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
3.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, minimum 2 inches wide, interlockable with
sheet.
4.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
5.
Fabricate with required connection pieces.
6.
Hem exposed edges on underside 2 inch; miter and seam corners.
7.
Form material with flat lock seams.
8.
Solder shop formed galvanized steel metal joints. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and
wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
9.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity,
seal with sealant.
10.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 2 inch and hemmed to form
drip.
B.
Fabricate all exposed sheet metal from pre -finished galvanized steel sheet.
C.
Fabricate all concealed sheet metal and sheet metal hidden from normal view from galvanized
steel.
D.
Splash Pans
1.
ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed to 12 x 18 inches size; rolled sides of 2 inch high
for inverted pan placement.
E.
Sealant Pans
1.
ASTM A653, galvanized steel, formed with minimum 2 inch horizontal distance from
penetrating item, with 3 inch upstand, and 4 inch flanges.
2.
Form top edge with continuous 45 degree backbend, minimum 1/4 inch long, facing
toward inside of pan.
F.
Gutters
1.
Fabricate gutter to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section.
2.
Provide expansion joint at maximum 40 feet on center unless otherwise indicate on
drawings. �-
3.
Form metal and seal watertight.
4.
Size: 4 inch width x 4 inch front height.
5.
Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts.
G.
Downspouts
1.
Fabricate downspouts to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section.
2.
Fabricate bottom or downspout with 45 degree turn -out with 3 inch long top face.
3.
Form metal and seal watertight.
4.
Downspout Size: 4 inch wide x 4 inch deep.
5.
Accessories: Profile to suit gutters and downspouts.
H.
Coping
Flashings _
1.
Fabricate cap flashing to profile indicated in schedule at end of this section.
2.
Provide minimum 4 inch vertical leg on front side with continuous cleat.
3.
Provide minimum 3 inch vertical leg on back side.
4.
Fabricate inside and outside corners with continuously factory mechanically seamed and
sealed joints. Provide finish to match remainder of cap flashing.
03860201 SHEET METAL
08/02
07600 - 4
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
i 2.6 FINISH
A. Field painting of expose metal: As specified in section 09900 - PAINTING.
B. Prefinished Metal: Fluoropolymer coating produced with Kynar-500 resin complying with the
following:
1. Salt Spray Test
a. Withstand salt spray test for a minimum of 1000 hours in accordance with
ASTM B 117, including scribe requirement in test.
b. Receive a rating of 10, no blistering, as determined by ASTM D 714 immediately
upon removal of panel from test, and rating of 7, 1/16-inch failure at scribe, as
determined by ASTM D 1654.
2. Formability Test: No evidence of fracturing to naked eye when subjected to a
180-degree bend over a 3/8-inch diameter mandrel in accordance with ASTM D 522.
3. 2000 Hour Accelerated Weathering Requirements
a. Test Conformance: ASTM G 23 using a Type D apparatus.
b. No cracking, peeling, blistering, loss of adhesion of protective coating, or
corrosion of base metal.
C. Loss of Adhesion: Protective coating that can be readily removed from base metal
with tape in accordance with ASTM D 3359, Test Method B.
d. Chalking: Not greater than No. 8 rating in accordance with ASTM D 4214 test
procedures.
e. Color Change: Maximum 2 NBS units in accordance with ASTM D 4214 and
ASTM D 2244 test procedures.
4. Humidity Test: No signs of blistering, cracking, creepage or corrosion when scored panel
subjected to a humidity cabinet test in accordance with ASTM D 2247 for 1000 hours.
5. Impact Resistance: Withstand direct and reverse impact in accordance with ASTM D
2794 equal to 1.5 times metal thickness in mils, expressed in inch -pounds, with no loss
of adhesion.
6. Abrasion Resistance Test: Withstand a minimum of 80 liters of sand before appearance
of base metal when subjected to falling sand test in accordance with ASTM D 968.
7. Pollution Resistance: No visual effects when immersion tested in a 10 percent
hydrochloric acid solution for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM D 1308.
8. Color
a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line.
C. Exposed Fasteners: Factory finished to match color of item being fastened.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
03860201 SHEET METAL 07600 - 5
,•, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to details on drawings and details included in the AISI, CDA, SMACNA and NRCA
manual.
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15.
C. Fill back of cap flashing with plastic roofing cement.
D. Backbed lap joints of flashings in horizontal position.
E. Insert cap flashing into flashing receiver to form tight fit. Bend top of flashing receiver down
over cap flashing without hammer marks, dents or other visual distractions.
F. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
G. Coping Flashing
1. Install with front edge engaged in continuous cleat.
2. Fasten back edge to parapet substrate with hex head washered fasteners.
H. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
I. Fit flashings tight in place.
J. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
K. Seal metal joints watertight.
L. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
M. Set splash pans under downspouts draining from a higher to lower roof area. Set in place with
plastic cement.
N. Set concrete splash blocks under downspouts where indicated on drawings.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
3.5 SCHEDULE
A. Metal Fabrications
ITEM
SMACNA FIGURE
GAGE
1.
Gutter
a. Gutter Profile
1-2 A
24
b. Expansion Joint
1-7
24
C. Straps
1-18A
24
d. Screens
1-24 D
e. Outlet Tube
1-24 C
24
2.
Conductor Head
1-25 B
24
3.
Scupper
1-26
24
4.
Downspouts
a. Downspout
1-32 B Smooth surface
26
b. Connections
1-33 B Detail 1
26
5.
Splash Pan
1-36
24
6.
Counter Flashing
a. In Face Brick
4-3 A
24
03860201 SHEET METAL 07600 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
7. Cap Flashing
a. In Face Brick/CMU
4-3 A
8. Vent Pipe Flashing
4-14 B
9. Coping Flashing
a. Form
3-4 A
b. Anchorage
3-7 A
C. Joint
Table 3-1, Type J2
END OF SECTION
24
2.5# lead
24
24
03860201 SHEET METAL 07600 - 7
08/02
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07700
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured curbs.
2. Pre -manufactured pipe flashings.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Shop Drawings.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 or A 527, minimum G90 coating.
B.
Hot -Dip Galvanizing (fabricated products and hardware): ASTM A 123.
C.
Fasteners:
1. For attachment of roof accessories to supporting structure: Hot -dip galvanized zinc
plated or cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel.
2. For steel and galvanized steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel.
D.
Steel for Structural Supports and Reinforcements: ASTM A 36, hot -dip galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
E.
Sealant: Single- or multi -component urethane as specified in Division 7 section on sealants.
2.2 MANUFACTURED CURBS
A.
Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a
1. Custom Curb, Inc.
2. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.
3, The Pate Company.
4. Penn Ventilator Company, Inc.
5. S & L Manufacturing Company.
6. ThyCurb Fabricating Division/Thybar Corporation.
7. Uni-Curb, Inc.
8. Vent Products Company, Inc.
Toll
03860201 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 1
s., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Manufactured Curbs: Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, minimum 18 gage, with seams fully
welded, ground smooth, and painted with zinc -rich primer. Engineer units to support
superimposed loads. --
1. Style: Vertical sides (no cant).
2. Insulation: Provide noncombustible rigid insulation, minimum 1-1/2 inches thick,
secured to inside face of curbs. --
3. Slope bottom edges to match slope of roof deck so that top is level when installed.
4. Nailers: Provide on top of curb units, fabricated from softwood lumber
preservative -treated by the pressure process in accordance with AWPB LP-2.
5. Provide units of heights indicated; where height is not indicated, provide units of
manufacturer's standard height.
6. Curbs for mechanical units: Provide minimum 20 gage galvanized steel cap over areas
not weatherproofed by mechanical units. Where unsupported cap dimension exceeds 8
inches, provide minimum 3/4 inch exterior grade plywood support or formed metal
framing capable of supporting 200 pound concentrated load at any point.
7. Vibration isolating curb units: Provide units with spring isolation dampers supporting
channel frame equipment support, acoustically isolated from curb base. Minimum
effective vibration isolation coefficient 90 percent.
8. Pipe supports: Provide formed galvanized steel (strut) channel attached to top of flashing
cap, fully threaded galvanized steel support rods, pipe roller chair of size to
accommodate piping, stainless steel top bracket (retainer), and galvanized steel nuts for
securement and adjustment.
C. Pipe Portals: Top exit type of construction similar to manufactured curbs specified above, with
split components for installation around in -place piping.
l . Pipe boots: Molded EPDM or neoprene rubber, with stainless steel geared band clamps
top and bottom; sized to fit pipe or conduit at top, portal opening at bottom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra
precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
END OF SECTION
ra
03860201 ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 07700 - 2
08/02
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. The sealing of joints indicated on schedule at the end of this section.
2. The sealing of other joints indicated on drawings.
B. Joints of a nature similar to that of joints indicated on the schedule shall be sealed with same
sealer, whether indicated on drawings to be sealed or not.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substrates:
1. M-type substrates: Concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, mortar, natural stone. The
term "masonry" means brick, stone, and concrete masonry work.
2. G-type substrates: Glass and transparent plastic glazing sheets.
3. A -type substrates: Metals, porcelain, glazed tile, and smooth plastics.
4. O-type substrates: Wood, unglazed tile; substrates not included under other categories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Samples for Color Selection. (Products exposed to view only.)
C. Certified Product Test Reports.
D. Manufacturers' certificates.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install sealers if any of the following conditions exist:
1. Air or substrate temperature exceeds the range recommended by sealer manufacturers.
2. Substrate is wet, damp, or covered with snow, ice, or frost.
B. Dimensional Limitations: Do not install sealers if joint dimensions are less than or greater than
that recommended by sealer manufacturer; notify the architect and get sealer manufacturer's
recommendations for alternative procedures.
1.5 WARRANTY
I - A. Submit written wa rranty signed by contractor and installer guaranteeing to correct failures in
sealer work that occur within 5 years after substantial completion, without reducing or
otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract
' documents. Failure is defined as failure to remain weathertight due to faulty materials or
workmanship. Correction is limited to replacement of sealers.
03860201 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. General: Provide only products which are recommended and approved by their manufacturer
for the specific use to which they are put and which comply with all requirements of the --
contract documents.
1. Provide only materials which are compatible with each other and with joint substrates.
2. Colors of exposed sealers: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard
colors.
B. Manufacturers: Products of the manufacturers listed, provided they comply with requirements -
of the contract documents will be among those considered acceptable.
1. Urethane sealants:
a. Bostik Inc.
b. Mameco International, Inc.
C. Pecora Corporation.
d. Products Research & Chemical Corporation.
e. Sika Corporation.
f. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
g. Tremco, Inc.
h. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
2. Acrylic solvent -release sealants:
a. Pecora Corporation.
b. Koch Protective Treatments, Inc.
C. Tremco, Inc. -M
3. Acrylic -latex emulsion sealant:
a. Bostik Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
C. Sonneborn Building Products Division/ChemRex, Inc.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealants - General: Chemically curing elastomeric sealants of types indicated,
complying with ASTM C 920, including specific Type, Grade, Class, and Uses indicated, as
well as all other requirements specified.
1. Where movement capability exceeding that measured by ASTM C 920 is specified,
sealant shall withstand the total movement indicated while remaining in compliance with
the other requirements specified, when tested in accord with ASTM C 719, with base
joint width measured at the time of application.
2. For M-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M.
3. For G-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use G.
4. For A -type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use A.
5. For O-type substrates: Comply with requirements for Use M (minimum) and Use O for
the particular substrate.
B. Two -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus
movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression.
C. Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.
D. One -Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
E. One -Part Nonsag Low -Modulus Urethane Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, plus
movement capability of 50 percent in both extension and compression.
03860201 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2
08/02
r:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F. Urethane Sealant for Water Immersion: One- or two-part urethane, Grade NS, Class 25, Use
NT, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for sealing joints immersed continuously
in water.
2.3 PAVING JOINT SEALANTS
A. Two -Part Urethane Paving Sealant: Pourable, chemically curing (cold -applied) complying with
FS SS-S-200:
1. Composition: Urethane, with minimum movement capability of plus or minus
12 '/2 percent.
2. Composition: Bitumen modified polymer; also complying with ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade P, Class 25, Use T.
3. Composition: Bitumen modified urethane.
2.4 SOLVENT -RELEASE -CURING SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Sealant: Nonsag, one -part, solvent -release -curing; complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Use NT, with the following exceptions:
1. Weight loss: 15 percent, maximum.
2. Movement capability: 7-1/2 percent in both extension and compression, minimum.
2.5 LATEX SEALANTS
A. Acrylic -Latex Emulsion Sealant: One part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable; complying with
ASTM C 834.
2.6 SEALANT BACKERS
A. Backers - General: Nonstaining; recommended or approved by sealant manufacturer for specific
use.
PART 3-EXECUTION
A. Do not begin joint sealer work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to keep primers and sealers off of adjacent surfaces which
would be damaged by contact or by cleanup. Remove tape as soon as practical.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with sealer manufacturers' installation instructions and recommendations, except where
more restrictive requirements are specified.
le
s;
w ,
03860201 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3
e. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.4 SCHEDULE OF JOINT SEALERS
A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant.
b. One -part nonsag urethane sealant.
C. One -part nonsag low -modulus urethane sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration.
B. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealer Is Indicated:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Acrylic -emulsion latex sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Concave joint configuration.
C. Exterior Joints Well Protected from Weather and Not Subject to Movement:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Acrylic sealant.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
D. Vehicular Paving Joints, Not Over 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part cold -applied urethane paving sealant.
2. Use bond -breaker tape.
3. Backer: Joint filler specified elsewhere.
E. Interior Floor Joints and Pedestrian Paving Joints, Less than 1-1/2 Percent Slope:
1. Use one of the following sealants:
a. Two-part nonsag urethane sealant for Use T.
2. Backer: Backer rod.
3. Joint shape: Flush joint configuration.
END OF SECTION
03860201 JOINT SEALERS 079004
08/02 r
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
r,
SECTION 08000
DOOR SCHEDULE
PART 1- GENERAL
t
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Door Schedule.
r; 1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames.
B. Section 08211 Solid Core Flush Wood Doors.
C. Section 08364 Steel Sectional Overhead Doors.
D. Section 08415 Aluminum Storefront.
E. Section 08710 Hardware.
1.4 GENERAL
A. This section covers only the doors, frames and hardware as they relate to this project.
Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate
sections of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations
required.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR SCHEDULE
A. The DOOR SCHEDULE lists door sizes, types, construction, frame sizes, types, detail
locations on drawings, hardware sets and other remarks.
2.2 DOORS
t
-� A. Door types, references by letter designation in the DOOR SCHEDULE, are located in the
drawing set.
W
03860201 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.3 REMARKS
A. General Remarks
1. Hardware by aluminum manufacturer.
B. Fire Resistive Ratings
1. L1 = 20 min.
2. L2 = 45 min.
3. L3 = 90 min.
03860201 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Door Schedule
Door Door Frame Frame Frame Details
Flr Mark PR Size Type Const Glaz Type Const Size Head Jamb Sill Remarks
1
01
24-0 x 14-0
4
OH
Al
-
-
-
A2/301
C5/A502
DI/A501
1
01A
24-0x 14-0
4
OH
Al
-
-
-
A2/A301
C5/A502
D1/A501
1
01B
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
Al/A501
D2/A501
A3/A501
1
02
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
1
HM
S1
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
B1/A501
Sim
C2/A502
Ll
1
04
1
1 3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
SCTF
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
C1/A501
C1/A501
D2/A502
1
05
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
3
AL
12
AL-1
AL
4 1/2
D5/A503
SIM
D5/A503
A5/A503
1
1
06
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
1
SCTF
Ll
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
C1/A501
C1/A501
D2/A502
1
07
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
SCTF
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
C1/A501
C1/A501
D2/A502
1
07A
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
1
HM
S1
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
BI/A501
SIM
C2/A502
LI
1
07B
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
AI/A501
D2/A501
A3/A501
1
08
2-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
SCTF
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
C1/A501
C1/A501
-
1
09
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
SCTF
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
C1/A501
C1/A501
-
1
11
•
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
Al/A501
D2/A501
A3/A501
1
12
•
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
B1/A501
SIM
C2/A502
Ll
1
14
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
B1/A501
Sim
C2/A502
Ll
1
17
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
HM
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
B1/A501
Sim
C2/A502
Ll
1
20
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
2
SCTF
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
Cl/A501
C1/A501
-
1
22
3-0 x 7-0 x 1 3/4
1
HM
S1
HM-1
HM
5 7/8
B1/A501
B1/A501
SIM
C2/A502
Ll
1
1
03860201 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION
03860201 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 4
08/02
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART
1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Standard steel doors and frames.
2. Assemblies for fire -rated openings.
3. Insulated doors.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. SDI 100-1991 -- Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Steel Door
Institute, 1991.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product information indicating compliance with
specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings for fabrication and installation of specified items, coordinated
with opening schedule included in contract documents.
'-
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standard: Comply with SDI 100.
B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: In compliance with NFPA 80 and labeled per ASTM E 152 by
agency acceptable to governing authorities.
C. Coordination: Transmit copy of final shop drawings to wood door manufacturer to allow
prefitting of wood doors to steel frames.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in crates or cartons suitable for storage at the site.
t
03860201 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Allied Steel Products, Inc.
2. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
3. Benchmark Commercial Door Products. r .
4. Ceco Door Products, a Division of United Dominion.
5. Copco Door Company.
6. Curries Company/Essex Industries, Inc.
7. Kewanee Corporation.
8. Mesker Door, Inc.
9. Pioneer Industries Division/CORE Industries, Inc.
10. Premier Products.
11. Republic Builders Products Division/DESCO.
12. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company/Masco Industries.
13. Trussbilt, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Regardless of whether or not the DOOR SCHEDULE has every door opening and
component scheduled for each opening, provide all necessary components required to
make every opening functional based on scheduled doors and frames for similar
openings and the referenced codes.
B. Steel Sheets, Hot -Rolled: ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, pickled and
oiled.
C. Steel Sheets, Cold -Rolled: ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568, commercial quality, matte finish
exposed, oiled.
D. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 526 and ASTM A 525, commercial quality, A60 zinc -iron
or G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
E. Steel Sheets, Galvanized: ASTM A 591, electrolytic zinc -coated, Class A, mill phosphatized.
F. Anchorages: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gage.
G. Fasteners and Inserts: Units standard with manufacturer.
1. Exterior walls: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized, Class C or D.
H. Paint:
1. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust -inhibitive coating, suitable to receive finish
coatings specified.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Exposed Door Faces: Fabricate from cold -rolled steel.
B. Frames: Fabricate from cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel.
C. Exterior Doors: Fabricate from galvanized steel.
D. Seal top and bottom edges integrally with door construction, or use minimum 16 gage steel
channels to form flush closure.
E. Exterior Frames: Fabricate from galvanized steel.
03860201 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F.
Exposed Screws and Bolts: Where required, provide only countersunk, flat Phillips -head
fasteners.
-,
G.
Insulated Assemblies: At locations scheduled, provide insulating door and frame assemblies
which have been tested in accordance with ASTM C 236 for thermal resistance.
1. R-value: RI l minimum complying with the International Energy Code, 2000.
H.
Hardware Preparation: Comply with DHI A115 series specifications.
t
I. Locations: Comply with final shop drawings.
-'
I.
Shop Painting:
ow,
1. Primer: Apply primer evenly to achieve full protection of all exposed surfaces.
2.4 STEEL DOORS
A.
General: Fabricate steel doors in accordance with requirements of SDI 100.
B.
Interior Doors:
1. Grade II - Heavy -Duty, Model 2. - Full Flush.
C.
Exterior Doors:
I. , Grade III - Extra Heavy -Duty; Model 2. - Full Flush.
2.5 STEEL FRAMES
A.
General: Fabricate steel frames for scheduled openings, in styles and profiles as shown, using
concealed fasteners.
1. Minimum thickness: 16 gage interior; 14 gage exterior.
2. Construction: Mitered and welded corners.
�--:
B.
Guards: Weld protective covers to back of hardware openings at locations where grout, plaster,
or other materials might interfere with hardware operation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
r,
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories to comply with manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Comply with detailed installation requirements of final shop drawings.
B. Frame Installation:
1. General: Adhere to provisions of SDI 105.
2. Anchors: Provide 3 wall anchors per jamb at hinge and strike levels and minimum
18 gage base anchors.
3. Fire -rated openings: Comply with requirements of NFPA 80.
C. Door Installation:
I. General: Comply with requirements and clearances specified in SDI 100.
2. Fire -rated doors: Comply with NFPA 80 requirements and clearances.
3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Touch -Up: At locations where primer has been abraded or minor rusting has occurred, sand
smooth and spray -apply compatible primer.
03860201 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Final Operating Adjustments: Check hardware at all openings for proper operation of doors,
making final corrections as required to assure that work of this section is complete and
undamaged.
END OF SECTION
03860201 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4
08/02
-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 08211
--
SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish.
B.
Cut outs for glass panels.
u
-
C.
Metal door lite surround frames.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork: Wood door frames.
i.�
B.
Section 08110 -Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames.
C.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
D.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
E.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard.
B.
ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
C.
ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
E.
NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
F.
NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association.
G.
Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required,
special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing.
2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics
and factory machining criteria.
B.
Samples
1. Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x 12 inch in size cut from top corner of
door.
C
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
1. Indicate special installation instructions.
03860201 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Manufacturer's Certificates
1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA
standards referenced.
2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152 or NFPA 252.
B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging.
C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves.
D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where
sunlight might bleach veneer.
E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit
ventilation.
1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation. r
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term:
1. Interior Doors:
a. Solid Core Doors: Life of installation.
b. Hollow Core Doors: 2 years.
B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances;
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
03860201 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 2
08/02 ',
c
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
. ;., PART 2 - PRODUCTS
^� 2.1 SOLID CORE WOOD -FACED DOORS
A. Manufacturers
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
b. Buell Door Company.
C. Benton Doors, Inc.
d. Eggers Industries.
e. Fenestra Corporation.
f. G1enMar Door Manufacturing Company.
g. Graham Manufacturing Corporation.
Pei h. Haley Brothers, Inc.
i. Ipik Door Company, Inc.
j. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
k. Vancouver Door, Inc.
1. VT Industries, Inc.
M. Weyerhaeuser Company.
B. Materials
1. Lumber:
a. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Red Oak, plain sawn, kiln dried to
maximum 10 percent moisture content.
2. Cores
a. Solid Core
1) Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-OD2 particleboard, minimum
40 pounds per cubic foot density.
., 2) Fire Rated
(a) 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated
particleboard, minimum 40 punds per cubic foot density.
(b) 3/4 and 12 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core.
b. Hollow Core: Manufacturer's standard phenolic impregnated honeycomb
corrugated fiberboard.
r-�
3. Veneers
a. Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA, Custom, A grade, Red Oak
species wood, plain sliced.
4. Glazing Stops
a.` Rolled steel channel shape as detailed, butted corners; prepared for countersink
style screws.
r 5. Adhesives
a. ` Interior Doors: Type II - water resistant.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Regardless of whether or not the DOOR SCHEDULE has every door at every opening
scheduled, provide all components required to make every door opening functional
based on scheduled doors for similar openings and the referenced codes.
03860201 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Doors: Fabricate to provide consistent clearances as indicated.
1.
Hinge and lock edges: Provide standard (1/8-inch in 2 inches) bevel at edges, unless
standard bevel would not precisely match hardware bevel; provide proper bevel for
hardware.
2.
Prefitting: Fabricate and trim the following types of doors to size at factory to coordinate
with frame shop drawings and floor finishes as indicated in the finish schedule:
a. Prefinished doors.
C. Openings:
Cut, trim, and seal openings in doors at the factory.
D. Veneer Match
1.
Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip match
2.
Assembly on Door Face: Running match
3.
On Pair of Doors: Pair match
2.3 FINISHING
A. Transparent Finish as Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
1.
Type: AWI System TR-2 - Catalyzed Lacquer.
2.
Staining: Color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range.
3.
Grain effect: Open.
4.
Sheen: Satin (low luster).
5.
Grade: Custom.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and requirements of
referenced standard.
B. Fitting of Doors:
1. Accurately align and fit doors for trouble free operation throughout range of door swing.
C. Clearances:
1. Clearance between door edge and head: 1/8 inch.
2. Clearance between door edge and jamb: 1/8 inch.
3. Clearance between door bottom edge and top surface of threshold: 1/4 inch.
4. Clearance between door bottom edge and floor covering surface or finish (where
threshold is not indicated): 1/8 inch.
5. Clearance between meeting edges at pairs of doors: 1/8 inch.
D. Finish: Before installing doors, restore finish at door edges cut during field fitting.
E. Touch up finishes as required at end of job.
END OF SECTION
03860201 SOLID CORE FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4
08/02 --
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
.er
SECTION 08364
STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel sectional overhead doors.
2. Locations for sectional overhead doors are indicated on the drawings and schedules.
B. Products Furnished but Not Installed under This Section:
1. Anchors installed in masonry for support of overhead door units.
2. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and manufacturer's instructions for anchor
installation to trades executing the work.
C. Related Sections:
1. Installation of anchors in concrete: Division 3.
2. Installation of anchors in masonry: Division 4.
3. Electric service characteristics for motor operators: Division 16.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 446/A 446M-93_-- Standard_ Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Structural (Physical) Quality; 1993.
B. ASTM A 525-93 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet,
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process; 1993.
C. ASTM A 526/A 526M-90 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality; 1990.
D. ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990.
E. NAGDM 102-1988 -- Specifications for Sectional Overhead Type Doors; National Association
of Garage Door Manufacturers; 1988.
F. NEMA ICS 6-1993 -- Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1993.
G. NEMA MG 1-1993 -- Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
1993.
H. UL 325 -- Standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1986 (Revised 1988).
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Sectional overhead doors standard: Comply with NAGDM 102.
2. Wind loading: Sectional overhead doors shall comply with NAGDM 102 wind loading
criteria unless otherwise indicated.
a. Design and construct sectional overhead doors to withstand indicated wind loads
as tested in accordance with ASTM E 330.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information and installation directions demonstrate that
products comply with contract documents.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings only for components which are not described completely in
manufacturer's technical information.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates: For information only, manufacturer's written certification, indicating doors
comply with specified design criteria for the following:
a. General requirements of NAGDM 102.
b. Wind loading.
C. Thermal performance.
2. Manufacturer's directions: Submit directions for installation and operation of door units;
distribute a copy to installer before start of work.
3. Installer qualification: For information only, submit installer's written statement of
compliance with installation experience requirement.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Door operation instructions and maintenance data for
each door type.
E. Warranty: For information only, submit specimen copy of manufacturer's written warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE -_
A. Furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire project.
B. Qualifications: _
1. Installer qualifications: Door manufacturer's authorized installer.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Automatic reversing: Doors with motor operators shall comply with requirements of
UL 325.
D. Certifications:
1. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with wind resistance design criteria.
2. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with thermal performance design criteria.
3. Submit door manufacturer's written certification that sectional overhead doors comply
with NAGDM 102.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule the building in of masonry anchors for support of overhead sectional doors with
masonry work.
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.8 WARRANTY
c-, A. Manufacturer's Product Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard 10-year limited product
warranty signed by the manufacturer's authorized official, guaranteeing to correct failures in
product which may occur during the warranty period, without reducing or otherwise limiting
any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Sectional Overhead Doors:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Overhead Door Corporation.
b. Raynor Garage Door Company.
C. Wayne -Dalton Corp.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel:
1. Structural quality carbon steel, ASTM A 446, Class A, or commercial quality steel
sheets, ASTM A 526; minimum yield point, 33,000 pounds per square inch; gage as
indicated.
2. Galvanized coating: ASTM A 525; minimum G90 zinc coating where indicated.
B. Paint:
1. Metal primer: Manufacturer's standard epoxy primer.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Steel Sectional Overhead Door Extra Heavy Duty:
1. Wind resistance:
a. Load acting inward: 24 pounds per square foot of door surface area.
b. Load acting outward: 20 pounds per square foot of door surface area.
2. Insulation: Polyurethane foam.
a. Thermal resistance, R-value: 17
3. Interior surface: Painted galvanized steel.
4. Door section material: 16 gage galvanized steel.
5. Galvanized coating: G90, minimum.
6. Door section design: Ribbed profile.
7. Door Finish: Field paint as specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
8. Counterbalancing mechanism: Torsion spring type.
9. Rollers: Case-hardened steel double rollers.
10. Installation: High lift vertical and follow roof slope tracks.
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r.,
11. Electric operator: Hoist type with worm and gear reduction primary drive.
a. Provide auxiliary manual chain hoist.
b. Installation: Side -mounted.
C. Electric motor: Totally enclosed nonventilated type.
1) Horsepower rating: 3/4 horsepower minimum, or as required to move the
door to the fully open position in 13 seconds or less. This requirement will
be tested and must conform.
2) Control enclosure: NEMA Type 1.
d. Control station: 3-button push-button type.
1) Control station enclosure: Also, provide remote control operation for each
door. Supply 6 dual frequency remote controls, with each door set to a
unique frequency.
e. Automatic reversing device: Pneumatic bottom bar switch.
12. Vision panels: Double -strength glass.
13. Accessories:
a. Head and jamb weatherstripping.
b. Infra -red motion stop sensor on each side of each door.
14. Roll -up drum - heavy duty, high performance.
2.4 COMPONENTS
A. Tracks:
1. Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel tracks and accessories designed to
accommodate door size, weight, and clearances indicated from adjacent construction.
2. Accessories: Provide brackets and reinforcing for rigid support of roller guides, for door
type and size.
3. Fabricate vertical track sections with slots for door drop safety device at 2 inches on
center.
4. Tilt tracks from vertical to achieve closure at jambs when sectional door is closed. Weld
or bolt to track supports.
B. Track Support:
1. Support tracks with manufacturer's standard anchors and brackets for size and weight of
door, to provide strength and rigidity, and smooth and continuous operation.
2. Wall support: Provide continuous steel plate and angle anchored to wall and welded to
track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3. Overhead support: Provide continuous angle welded to inclined tracks and braced
laterally to overhead structural members at each end of tracks.
C. Counterbalancing Mechanisms:
1. Torsion spring:
a. Tempered steel torsion springs mounted on and secured to a hardened tubular
steel shaft, with cable drums attached at each end of shaft.
b. Cable drums: Grooved cast aluminum or gray iron castings, wrapped with cable
attached to door, heavy duty, high performance.
C. Counterbalance supports: One ball -bearing bracket at each end of shaft and at --.
midpoint, for shafts up to 16 feet long. Provide two additional brackets at third
points to support shafts over 16 feet long.
d. Emergency door stop: Spring -loaded steel or bronze cam secured to bottom door
rollers at each track.
e. Cushion door stop: Spring bumper attached at end of each horizontal track.
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
t
D. Electric Door Operators:
1.
Manufacturer's standard electric operator size as indicated, complete with gear reduction
r-
mechanism and control devices.
2.
Emergency disconnect: Provide mechanism to allow transfer to manual hand chain
operation, with safety device to lock out use of motor when chain is in use.
�.
3.
Door operator type:
a. Hoist type, with worm and gear reduction drive, clutch disconnect and auxiliary
chain hoist.
4.
Electric motors:
a. Reversible, constant duty, Class A insulated motor protected against overload;
with capacity to move door at rate of 2/3 foot to 1 foot per second.
b. Totally enclosed, nonventilated type motor, complying with NEMA MG 1;
r
controller with enclosure of type indicated, complying with NEMA ICS 6.
5.
Control station:
a. Provide control stations of type indicated complete with enclosure complying with
NEMA ICS 6.
6.
Remote Control Station: 2-1020 digital eye receiver with 6-two channel transmitters.
E. Automatic Reversing Control:
1.
Automatic safety switch: Complying with UL 325, installed within neoprene or rubber
astragal located along full width of door bottom.
2.
Safety switch type: Pneumatic; where indicated.
F. Weather Seals:
1.
Continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at head and
jambs of overhead door, for weathertight installation.
,-,
G. Vision
Panels:
1.
Provide manufacturer's standard insulated, tinted vision panels of materials indicated,
located where shown on the drawings.
2.
Metal framed doors: Install vision panels with manufacturer's standard dry glazing
gasket.
3.
Glazing stops: Removable; made from door section frame material.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware:
1. Extra heavy duty hardware, made from noncorrosive metal and provided with
noncorrosive fasteners, as required for door type.
2. Hinges:
a. Heavy steel hinges at each end and intermediate stile, of type recommended by
manufacturer for size of overhead door.
b. Thru-bolt hinges to door sections at stiles and rails using lock washers and nuts,
or rivets where access to nuts is not available.
C. Provide manufacturer's recommended double hinges for doors exceeding 16 feet
in width.
ri 3. Rollers:
F a. Heavy duty ball -bearing rollers, in steel races. Mount rollers with projections
from door surface as required to suit slope of track.
0 , b. Double hinges: Install roller shaft through both hinges.
C. Roller tires: Type indicated; 3-inch diameter tires for 3-inch track, 2-inch diameter
tires for 2-inch track; track size as recommended by door manufacturer for
�-. required door size.
i.
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 5
�.,; 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Steel Door Sections:
1. Fabricate from galvanized steel sheet, maximum 24-inch-high section, nominal 2 inches
deep, and in profile indicated on the drawings.
2. Section end closures and reinforcing: Provide 16 gage galvanized steel channel end
closures, and intermediate 16 gage channel reinforcing at 48 inches on center, maximum
along interior surface of section.
3. Bottom section reinforcements: Continuous channel or angle matching section profile. _
4. Section reinforcing: Continuous horizontal and diagonal steel reinforcing, as necessary
to comply with wind loading performance criteria.
B. Insulation:
1. Type: Manufacturer's standard polyurethane foam insulation.
2. Conceal insulation with manufacturer's standard interior steel facing sheet.
C. Factory Finishing:
1. Steel door sections:
a. Pretreatment: Clean zinc -coated steel and apply zinc phosphate conversion coat.
b. Factory paint system: Apply prime coats to interior and exterior surfaces of door
faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Examine openings to receive sectional overhead doors for conditions that will prohibit
proper installation. Correct unacceptable conditions before start of installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces at openings where sectional overhead doors will be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install complete overhead door assembly in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Anchor vertical tracks to rough opening perimeter at minimum 24 inches on center.
C. Horizontal Tracks: Support from overhead framing with welded or bolted steel angles or
channels, including diagonal bracing as necessary for secure installation.
D. Install digital eye receivers at push button control stations.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. After door installation is complete, examine door performance, test operation, and adjust
installation to provide smooth and quiet operation.
B. Adjust door operators for proper performance in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
` 3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean all door surfaces, tracks, springs, and operators, before final acceptance.
i,
3.6 PROTECTION
A. After installation and until final acceptance, protect door, equipment, and accessories from
damage, and maintain in clean condition and operating properly.
e.•
END OF SECTION
r,
r�
i`
03860201 STEEL SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08364 - 7
..., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 08415
ALUMINUM STOREFRONT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Aluminum door frames.
2. Aluminum framing system.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Joint sealants: Division 7.
2. Glass: Elsewhere in Division 8.
3. Aluminum windows: Elsewhere in Division 8.
t 1.3 REFERENCES
A.
AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 1992.
B.
AAMA 1503.1-88 -- Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation
Resistance of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural
-'
Manufacturers Association; 1988.
C.
ASCE 7-95 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society
of Civil Engineers; 1995.
D.
ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 1989.
^` E.
ASTM B 209-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and
Plate; 1993.
F.
ASTM B 221-93 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes; 1993.
G.
ASTM C 864-93 -- Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 1993.
�., H.
ASTM E 283-91 -- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through
Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 1991.
I.
ASTM E 330-90 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1990.
J.
ASTM E 331-93 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1993.
03860201 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 1
�., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
—,
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Assemblies: Design to comply with the performance criteria listed below.
B. Thermal Movement: Design to accommodate expansion and contraction resulting from air
temperature range of 120 degrees F, solar heat gain, and nighttime re -radiation.
C. Structural Performance: Design to withstand all live and dead loads without deformation and
without deflection greater than 1/175 of span.
1. Deflection in plane of wall: Not greater than that which would reduce glass edge
clearance to 25 percent of design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, or that
which would reduce glass bite to 75 percent of design dimension.
2. Design system to withstand 150 percent of design wind load with no failure or permanent
deformation greater than 0.2 percent of span.
D. Wind Loads: Determine in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7.
E. Air Infiltration:
1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area.
a. Measure at 6.24 psf.
F. Water Penetration:
1. Fixed framing (excluding operable door edges): No penetration at 6.24 psf.
G. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value):
1. Fixed framing: Not more than 0.65.
2. Door frames: Not more than 0.93.
H. Color: Must match storefront system colors.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's material specifications, drawings of standard components, and
installation recommendations.
B. Certification by Manufacturer that Aluminum Framing System Complies with Performance
Requirements.
C. Shop Drawings: Show elevations, field measurements, composite members, reinforcement,
anchorages, expansion provisions, hardware mounting, and glazing.
D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data.
E. Warranty on Fabricated Products.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard for Wind Load Testing: ASTM E 330.
B. Standard for Air Infiltration Testing: ASTM E 283; report result as cubic feet per minute per
unit of measurement indicated, at pressure differential indicated.
C. Standard for Water Penetration Testing: ASTM E 331; report result at pressure differential
indicated.
D. Standard for Thermal Transmission Testing: AAMA 1503.1; report result as U-value (Btu per
hour per square foot per degree F).
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Take field measurements before starting fabrication.
03860201 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 2
08/02
Fe
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Fabricated Products: Submit a written warranty, guaranteeing to correct failures in work which
occur within 5 years from date of substantial completion, without reducing or otherwise
limiting any other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
1. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship, failure to meet the specified
performance requirements, faulty operation, and deterioration other than normal
weathering. Correction may include repair or replacement.
2. Warranty to be signed by manufacturer, installer, and contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Packaged Entrances:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Arch Amarlite.
b. CMI Archtectural Products, Inc.
C. Kawneer Company, Inc.
d. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
e. United States Aluminum Corporation.
f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/Butler Manufacturing Company.
g. Besam, Inc.
h. Dor-O-Matic Division/Republic Industries, Inc.
i. Gyro Tech Inc.
j. Horton Automatics/a division of the Overhead Door Corp.
k. Keane Monroe Corporation.
1. Stanley Magic Door, Division of The Stanley Works.
B. Aluminum Framing Systems:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Arch Amarlite.
b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc.
C. Kawneer Company, Inc.
d. Tubelite Architectural Systems.
e. United States Aluminum Corporation.
f. Vistawall Architectural Products Division/ButlerManufacturing Company.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Aluminum Framing System: Extruded aluminum.
1. Style: Flush glazed (without projecting stops), with glazing centered in frame members;
see drawings for profiles, dimensions, and arrangement of members.
2. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the judgment of the
architect, such differences do not detract from design concept or performance.
3. Framing members: Thermal break design with concealed, low thermal conductance
material completely separating exterior metal members from interior metal members.
Use only a standard construction which has been in use for at least 3 years.
03860201 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Glazing method: Resilient gasket glazed, with provision for replacement of glazing
without disassembly of framing.
5. Finish: �..
a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat.
1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of
coating manufacturer.
B. Aluminum Door Frames: Extruded tube or channel frames with either mechanical or welded
j oints.
1. Finish:
a. Fluoropolymer finish, 2-coat.
1) Color and sheen: As selected by the Architect from standard products of
coating manufacturer.
2.3 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Aluminum Members: ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for sheet/plate; alloy and
temper recommended by the manufacturer for the strength required, for corrosion resistance,
and for the finish required.
B. Fluoropolymer Finish: Multiple coats of thermally cured primer and topcoats, resin minimum
70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with AAMA 605.2 and AA-C 12C42R 1 X
(inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical coating; organic
coating).
1. Clean with inhibited chemicals and conversion -coat with acid
chromate -fluoride -phosphate treatment, in accordance with coating manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Products: The following products, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. "Fluoroceram"; Morton International.
b. "Fluropon"; The Valspar Corporation.
C. "Nubelar" or "Nubelar S"; Lilly Industries, Inc.
d. "Trinar"; Akzo Coatings, Inc. _
e. "Duranar"; PPG Industries, Inc.
C. Fasteners: Compatible with aluminum; aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other
noncorrosive, noncorrodible material.
1. Do not use exposed fasteners.
D. Concealed Flashing: Fully annealed, soft stainless steel, 26 gage minimum; or extruded
aluminum, 0.040 inch minimum.
E. Miscellaneous Concealed Metal Members: High -strength aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless
steel; hot -dip galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 123 may be used for members which
are not exposed to weather or abrasion.
F. Concrete Inserts: Cast iron, malleable iron, or steel hot -dip galvanized in accordance with -
ASTM A 123.
G. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive
material.
H. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with ASTM C 864; style as recommended by manufacturer.
I. Joint Sealers: Provide products specified in Division 7.
J. Door Hardware:
1. Refer to Section 08710 for hardware specification and quality requirements.
2. See hardware schedule in 3.4 of this section
03860201 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 4
08/02
r
F,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 FABRICATION
r- A. Any dimensions which may vary are indicated on drawings, with amount of dimensional
variation allowed.
B. Framing System: Pre-cut and perform all finishing in factory or shop.
�. 1. Fit joints tightly with adjacent members in correct relationship.
C. Welding: Perform welding before finishing; use methods which do not discolor metal; grind
exposed welds flush; match original finish.
D. Reinforcing: Provide as required to comply with performance requirements for rigidity and to
support hardware; isolate dissimilar metals as specified in "Installation."
E. Avoid damage to finishes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine structures; report conditions in writing which will adversely affect installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
..t A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
g B. Install plumb and level, square and true, in correct location; support adequately and securely
anchor.
C. Separate aluminum exposed to weather from dissimilar metals; coat dissimilar metals that are
in drainage cavities using one of the materials specified. Aluminum, stainless steel, zinc,
` cadmium, and small areas of white bronze are not considered dissimilar from each other.
D. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of
the materials specified.
E. Install joint sealers between exterior sill members and the surface below as indicated, to provide
weathertight construction. Comply with Division 7 requirements for installation of joint sealers.
r
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Clean exterior and interior soon after installation of glass, taking care to avoid damage to
finishes.
3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. Aluminum door supplier to provide all hardware for aluminum doors except as noted.
SET # 1
Door no. 05
Each door to have:
1 2 pr. Hinges A8112 NRP. Same finish as door/frame.
a 1 ea. E0231 x lever.
1 ea. Cylinder as specified in Section - 08710 Hardware.
1 ea. Closer CO2021 Same finish as door/frame.
03860201 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT 08415 - 5
,..� 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1 ea. Pull J401, 1" round bent bar, 15" long and projecting 3-1/4" from door face.
Equal to CS-15 by Kawneer.
1 ea. Stop L02131.
1 ea. Threshold J36170
END OF SECTION
Y.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 08520
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreements, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Applications:
a. Individual window units.
b. Projected windows.
2. Other work included:
a. Sealants around perimeters of windows.
B. Related Sections:
1. Glazing: Elsewhere in Division 8.
2. Sealants: Division 7.
3. Aluminum storefronts: Elsewhere in Division 8.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AA DAF-45 -- Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; Aluminum Association; 1980.
B. AAMA 101-93 -- Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Prime Windows and Glass Doors; 1993.
C. AAMA 605.2-92 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on
Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 1992.
D. AAMA 803.3-92 -- Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Narrow Joint Seam Sealer;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1992.
E. AAMA 904.1-87 -- Voluntary Specification for Friction Hinges in Window Applications;
American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1987.
F. ASTM A 123-89a -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products; 1989.
G. ASTM B 633-85 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel; 1985.
H. ASTM B 766-86 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Cadmium; 1986.
I. ASTM E 405-89 Standard Test Methods for Wear Testing Rotary Operators for Windows;
1989.
J. FS L-S-12513 -- Screening, Insect, Nonmetallic; 1972 (Notice 1, 1987).
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide window assemblies which will perform as indicated without failure or
deterioration. Failure includes the following:
1. Exterior assemblies:
a. Excessive deflection.
b. Excessive water leakage.
C. Excessive air infiltration.
d. Failure of perimeter sealant.
e. Failure of glazing.
B. Performance Requirements: As specified in AAMA 101, for window type, grade, and class
indicated.
C. Thermal Performance Required: Thermally broken construction.
D. Color must match aluminum windows.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and data on fabrication methods, finishing,
hardware, and accessories, and installation and handling recommendations.
B. Certification by manufacturer that products comply with requirements of contract documents.
C. Shop Drawings: Show information not conveyed by product data, and the following:
1. Elevations.
2. Cross -sections of all typical members.
3. Anchors.
4. Hardware.
5. Operators.
6. Accessories.
7. Glazing methods.
8. Sealants.
D. Samples for Color Selection of Coated Finishes: Coating manufacturer's color selection data.
E. Samples of Hardware Items.
F. Warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide windows bearing AAMA Certification labels showing compliance with testing
specified.
B. Test Methods - General:
1. Test sequence is optional, except that air infiltration test shall precede water resistance
test.
2. Concentrated load tests may be performed on separate ventilators/sash of identical size
and design as used for air, water, and uniform load tests.
3. Test each size of each type of window.
C. Test Units: Fabricated in accordance with requirements of contract documents, fully assembled,
and glazed.
1. Minimum size: As specified in AAMA 101.
D. Air, Water, and Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101.
E. Component Structural Test Methods: As specified in AAMA 101.
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements of window openings prior to fabrication.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the contractor, installer, and manufacturer,
guaranteeing to correct failures in window units which occur within 5 years after substantial
completion, without reducing or otherwise limiting any other rights to correction which owner
may have under the contract documents. Failures are defined to include faulty workmanship,
failure to perform as specified, and failure and deterioration of materials and finishes in excess
of that which would be expected under normal weather and wear.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOWS - GENERAL
A. Windows - General: Frame and ventilator/sash members of extruded aluminum, complete with
all hardware, accessories, sub -frames, mullions, sills, and other components indicated or
required; complying with AAMA 101.
1. See drawings for sizes, profiles, and arrangement of members.
B. Window Design:
1. Design so water entering from outside is drained to exterior.
2. Where insulating glass or laminated glass is used, provide positive drainage to eliminate
water standing in glazing channels.
3. Provide weatherstripping on all operable ventilator/sash in exterior wall.
C. Window Components: Designed or selected by manufacturer for strength required and
compatibility with other materials.
D. Weatherstripping: Continuous weatherstripping at all points where frame of operable
ventilator/sash or ventilator contacts frame of window.
1. Use compression gaskets where other types are not indicated.
E. Thermally Broken Construction: Provide frame and ventilator/sash members with concealed,
structural, load -bearing, low thermal conductance material separating exterior metal members
from interior metal members. Use only a standard construction which has been in use at least
3 years. Do not bridge thermal gap with any fasteners or hardware.
2.2 PROJECTED WINDOWS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Acorn Window Systems, Inc.
b. Alenco Division/Redman Building Products, Inc.
c. EFCO Corporation.
d. Graham Architectural Products Corporation.
e. Modu-Line Windows, Inc.
f. TRACO.
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 3
,.. 08/02
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
g. Winco Window Company.
h. Windows, Inc. ("DeSCo").
i. Kawneer, Inc.
B. Projected Windows:
1. Style: As indicated on drawings.
a. Top- and bottom -hinged.
b. In -swinging and out -swinging.
C. Products which have minor differences will be accepted when, in the architect's
judgment, such differences do not detract from design concept or intended
performance.
2. Glazing method: Channel gasket.
3. Grade: P-HC40.
4. Hardware:
a. Operator: Rotary type.
1) Provide at out swinging windows.
b. Hinges: Two 4-bar hinges.
C. Locks: Lever handle, cam type.
5. Finish: Fluoropolymer coating.
6. Insect screens.
a. Provide at project -in ventilators.
b. Provide at project -out ventilators.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper appropriate for the use and finish, providing corrosion
resistance, and as required for strength.
1. Minimum wall thickness of any member: 3/16 inch. inch.
2. Fluoropolymer coating: Multiple coats of thermally cured fluoropolymer primer and
top coats, resin minimum 70 percent "Kynar 500" or "Hylar 5000"; comply with
AAMA 605.2 and AA-C12C42R1X (inhibited chemical -cleaned; acid
chromate -fluoride -phosphate chemical conversion coating; organic coating). Provide the
number and type of coats as recommended by coating manufacturer for color and sheen
required.
3. Colors: Where not indicated, colors are to be selected by the architect from
manufacturer's standard range.
B. Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware.
1. Hardware fasteners: Match finish of members to which they are fastened.
2. Anchor fasteners: Same as anchors.
3. Other fasteners: Noncorrosive and corrosion -resistant material that is compatible with
materials being fastened.
C. Concealed Anchors (one of the following):
1. Steel, cadmium plated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 766, Class 8.
2. Steel, zinc electroplated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B 633.
3. Steel, hot -dip zinc coated after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A 123.
4. Stainless steel.
D. Glass: Provide products specified elsewhere in Division 8. See window elevations for glass
types used.
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r,
E. Sealants: Use only nonhardening, nonshrinking, and nonmigrating materials.
1. For nonworking, metal -to -metal joints within window units: Small joint sealant
^� conforming to 803.3, as described in AAMA 800.
2. For joints between other window components: Suitable for application.
3. For joints between window units and other building components: Provide products
-- specified in Division 7.
4. For glazing: Provide products specified elsewhere.
F. Dissimilar Metal Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, or other nonconductive, nonabsorptive
coating.
2.4 HARDWARE
A. General: Corrosion -resistant material.
B. Hinges:
1. For use without operators: Friction type; complying with AAMA 904.1; adjustable
friction pivots/slides; nylon or other nonabrasive material.
2. For use with operators: Nonfriction type.
3. 4- and 6-bar hinges: Concealed.
C. Rotary Operators: Gear -type; complying with ASTM E 405, after 500 cycles with operating
force of 120 pounds -force -inches, and after 7500 cycles with operating moment of
80 pounds -force -inches and closing torque of 60 pounds -force -inches.
D. Locks: Complete with strikes and fasteners.
1. Lever handle: Cam -action sweep type.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Insect Screens: Formed or extruded aluminum frames with screen fabric.
1. Design to fit tightly, but be removable, using as few exposed fasteners or latches as
possible.
2. Do not use wickets for access to window -operating hardware, unless absolutely
necessary; make wickets hinged or sliding, with the same type of frames as screens, and
tight -fitting.
3. Frame construction: Minimum wall thickness of 0.040-inch, with joints mitered or coped
and fastened with concealed fasteners.
4. Anchor screen fabric with removable plastic or rubber splines.
5. Finish: To match window.
6. Screen fabric: Glass fiber mesh; complying with FS L-S-125.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
k 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings before installation. Do not install windows if any detrimental conditions
exist.
r, 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WINDOWS
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
B. Install windows plumb and level, true and square.
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Support properly and securely anchor.
D. Separate aluminum from dissimilar metals and coat dissimilar metals that are in drainage
cavities, using one of the materials specified. Stainless steel, zinc, cadmium, and small areas
of white bronze are not considered dissimilar metals.
E. Coat all metals that come into contact with masonry, concrete, and treated wood, using one of
the materials specified.
F. Install joint sealers between sill members and the surface below, as indicated.
G. Install joint sealers between frame perimeter and adjacent work, as indicated.
H. Coordinate with wall -flashing installation.
I. Comply with requirements specified in Division 7 for installation of joint sealers.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING
A. Install as specified elsewhere in Division 8.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operable ventilators/sash and hardware to operate smoothly and close tightly.
END OF SECTION
03860201 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08520 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r�
SECTION 08710
HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED
DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A.
All finish hardware necessary for completion of project.
1.3 RELATED
WORK
A.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames
B.
Section 08211 -Flush Wood Doors
C.
Section 08360 - Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware for same.
r> D.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturers Qualifications
1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years
experience.
B.
Regulatory Requirements
1. Fire Door Hardware
a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or
specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label.
b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide
type required by NFPA.
r^
1.5 REFERENCES
r^ A.
ANSI A156.1 Butts and Hinges.
B.
ANSI A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches.
C.
ANSI A156.3 Exit Devices.
r, D.
ANSI A156.4 Door Controls - Closers.
E.
ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products.
F.
ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim.
.. G.
ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions.
H.
ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders.
I.
ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware.
J.
ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes.
K.
ANSI A156.21 Thresholds
L.
BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches.
M.
BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers.
03860201
HARDWARE 08710 - 1
�.. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
N. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices.
O. 36CFR Part 1191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA)
P. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. Q. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature.
R. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
S. DHI Al 15 Wood Door Preparation Standards
T. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
U. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. V. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.
W. SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application).
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data —
1. Provide product data on specified hardware.
2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions.
3. Submit operation and maintenance data including data on operating hardware,
lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
B. Hardware Schedule
1. Include for each item: quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail
information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and
hardware set identification cross-referenced to drawings; lock trim material thicknesses;
lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI or BHMA standard type
number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI or --
BHMA; and list of abbreviations.
2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. —
4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and
associated hardware set.
C. Keying Schedule
1. Develop in accordance with DHI-03 and Owners requirements.
2. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project.
3. Master key all doors to one key.
D. Certificates of Compliance
1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA,
CFR and ANSI or BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement _
that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products.
2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are
indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware
(i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates.
E. Spare Parts Data
1. Not later than 1 month prior to date of substantial completion, furnish spare parts data
for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer
holder release devices.
2. Include a complete list of parts and supplies, with current unit prices and source of —
supply.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 2
08/02 --
r-a
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
F. Maintenance Instructions
1. Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance
^-� procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
t
a A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or
container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware
schedule.
C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between
hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement
required, size of holes, and similar details.
1.9 WARRANTY
A.
Provide five year warranty for door closers.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
General
1. Regardless of whether or not the HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section
has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all
components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for
similar openings and the referenced codes.
B.
Hinges
1. Hager Hinge Co.
2. McKinney.
3. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works.
C.
Lock and Latches
+^
1. Best Lock Corporation.
2. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black &Decker Industries.
3. Sargent Division, Emhart Hardware Group.
4. Schlage Lock Company.
D.
Push/Pulls
1. H.B. Sues, a Harrow Company.
,.,
2. Rockwood Manufacturing Company.
3. Trego Industries, Inc.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
E.
Exit Devices
1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries.
2. Norton Industries, Inc.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 3
r• 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
4. Von Duprin, Inc.
F. Closers
1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware Division, Black & Decker Industries.
2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.
3. Norton Door Controls, Scovill Security Products.
4. Sargent Manufacturing Company.
G. Overhead Holders
1. Glynn -Johnson.
2. Door Components International.
H. Manual Bolts
1. Door Components International.
2. Glynn -Johnson.
3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
I. Gasketing/Threshholds
1.. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
2. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
3. Zero International, Inc.
J. Protection Plates
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW).
2. Trego Industries, Inc.
3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
K. Door Stops/Bumpers
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW). —
2. Trego Industries, Inc.
3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
L. Door Silencers
1. Builders Brass Works (BBW).
2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.
3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.
M. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hinges
1. General
a. Conformance: ANSI A156.1 and ANSI 156.7 on metal doors and frames.
b. Size: Except as otherwise specified, conform to hinge manufacturer's printed
recommendations.
C. Provide non -removable pins on hinges for reverse bevel doors with locks. Make
non -removable by means such as a set screw in the barrel, or safety stud, when the
door is in closed position.
B. Locks and Latches
1. General
a. To maximum extent possible, provide locksets and latchsets from single
manufacturer.
b. Furnish wrought strike boxes for wood frames and pairs of wood doors.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Design:
1) Levers, roses, and escutcheons: 0.050 inch thick if unreinforced;
P-
0.035 inch thick if reinforced; combined thickness 0.070 inch. Provide
°
levers with radiused return to doors.
2) Bored locksets and latchsets: Conform to ANSI A156.5.
--,
3) Lock Cylinders: Removable type, six pin, conforming to ANSI A156.6.
d. Provide all locks with core removal not requiring disassembly of knob or lockset.
e. Series: 4000, conforming to ANSI A156.2, Grade 1.
f. Strikes: conform to ANSI A115.2.
g. Provide adjustable bevel fronts or otherwise conform to door shape for doors
1-3/8 inches thick and over.
h. Furnish strike boxes with latch strikes for Grade 1.
i. Install cylinders with cams that will freely operate all functions of the locksets
specified.
j. Fit cylinders to locksets without adapters.
C. Push/Pull Plates
1.
Combination push-pull plates: Category J300, 1/8 inch minimum stainless steel, beveled
four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches, with countersunk screw holes.
2.
Push and pull bars: Category J500, stainless steel with edges of mounting plates beveled.
3.
Push plates: stainless steel, beveled four edges, minimum size 4 x 16 inches.
D. Exit
Devices and Exit Device Accessories
1.
General
a. Conform to ANSI A156.3.
b. Trim: wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled,
r-^
or smoothly rounded sides, corners, and edges.
C. Provide adjustable strikes for rim type devices.
d. Provide touch bars in lieu of conventional crossbars and arms.
a--;
e. Provide escutcheons not less than 7 by 2-1/4 inches and cut escutcheons to suit
cylinders and operating trim.
2.
Removable Mullions
a. Type 22, box type furnished with mullion stabilizers of same manufacturer.
b.
Use only with exit devices for which mullions were manufactured.
E. Closers
1. General
a.
Conform to ANSI A156.4, Grade 1.
b.
Surface type closers: Size 1 or 2 through size 6.
C.
Closers for outswinging exterior doors: size one size larger than manufacturer's
published recommendations, but not less than size 5.
d.
Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published
recommendations, except as specified otherwise.
- e.
Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jamb mount
closers for outswinging exterior doors.
f.
Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall
at 90-degree open position.
g.
Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull
of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle for interior doors; for exterior doors, set to
minimum required to relatch door.
2. Surface Type Closers
a.
Series CO2000 Full Cover with options PT-4C and PT-4D.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 5
t^ 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F. Overhead Holders
1. Conform to ANSI A156.8
G. Auxiliary Hardware --
1. Conform to ANSI A156-16 for auxiliary hardware, consisting of flush bolts and door
stops.
2. Lever extension flush bolts: Type L04081.
3. Dust -proof strikes:
a. Type L04011 for non -fire rated doors.
b. Type L04021 for fire rated doors.
H. Protection Plates
1. Conformance
a. Kick plates: ANSI A156.6, category J102, stainless steel.
2. Fabrication: Bevel all edges, with countersunk screw holes.
3. Size
a. 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs _
of doors and height as follows:
1) Kick Plates: 10 inches, except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches,
extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead.
4. Automatic Door Bottoms
a. Surface type with aluminum housing cover, anodized clear finish.
b. Provide with rubber, vinyl, or neoprene seal.
C. Fabricate for actuation by opening and closing of door.
5. Metal Thresholds
a. Conformance: ANSI A156.21
b. Exterior doors: Extruded aluminum type as scheduled.
C. Where required, modify thresholds to receive projecting bolts of flush bolt exit
devices.
d. Thresholds for doors accessible to handicapped: Raised thresholds, corrugated,
beveled with slopes not exceeding 1:2, and with height not exceeding 1/2-inch.
Bevel not required where height is less than 1/2-inch.
6. Rain Drips
a. Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.07 inch thick, clear anodized.
b. Door sill rain drips: 1-1/2 inches to 1-3/4 inches high by 5/8-inch projection.
C. Overhead rain drips: approximately 1-1/2 inches high by 2-1/2 inches projection;
extend 2 inches on door opening width.
7. Aluminum Housed Type Weatherseals
a. Extruded aluminum retainers not less than 0.07 inch wall thickness with vinyl,
neoprene, silicone rubber, polyurethane or vinyl brush inserts.
b. Finish: Clear anodized.
8. Smoke Gasketing
a. Compression -type seal, silicon based, self-adhesive product for use on steel door
frames with wood or steel doors for 20-minute label.
b. Color: Bronze
I. Accessories
1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging
keys, required to adjust hardware items.
J. Fastenings
1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware.
2. Concrete or Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields.
3. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 6
08/02
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r^
_
K. Fire
Door Hardware
1.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.
�--� L. Finishes
1.
Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting.
2.
Conform to ANSI A156.18 as follows:
,.,
a. Hinges: BHMA 626 or 630
b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626 or 630.
C. Door closers: BHMA 630 or BHMA 689 painted.
r,
d. Miscellaneous hardware: BHMA 630
e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: BHMA 673
f. Thresholds: 673
3.
Door Protection Plates: BHMA 630.
M. Keying
1.
Provide a master keying system.
2.
Key locks in sets or subsets.
3.
Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other
approved means.
4.
Supply keys in following quantities:
a. 3 keys for each lock
b. 2 master keys
C. 2 control keys and 5 extra cylinder cores
5.
Furnish keys to Owner arranged in sets or subsets as scheduled.
6.
Provide a key cabinet conforming to BMHA.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders'
Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for
Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames.
2. Install in accordance with DHI-02.
3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted.
4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with
thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts.
5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 for positioning requirements for handicapped.
B. Door -Closing Device
1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by
manufacturer.
2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from
halls and corridors.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 7
�, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Key Control Storage System
1. Install where directed by Architect.
D. Kick Plates —
1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors.
E. Auxiliary Hardware
1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt
F. Thresholds
1. Install in a bed of sealant with stainless steel screws and expansion shields. _
2. Provide proper clearance and an effective seal with specified weather stripping.
3. Minimum screw size: #10, length dependent on job conditions.
G. Weatherseals —
1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal
screws after door and frames have been finish painted.
2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position.
3. Provide astragal seals at pairs of doors.
4. Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer.
H. Gasketing
l . Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame.
I. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors
l . Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105.
3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
SET #1
All hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier except as noted below.
Door no. 05
Each door to have:
1 ea. Cylinder E09211
Balance of hardware by door supplier. —
SET #2
Door no. 06
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8112
1 ea.
Pull J401 --
1 ea.
Push Bar J501
1 ea.
Stop L02101
1 ea.
Kickplate —
3 ea.
Silencers
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 8
08/02 . _
Door no's. 02, 7A, and 22
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8111
1 ea.
Panic Device Type 01, Function 08 with lever, (lock cylinder not required).
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
1 ea.
Stop L02101
1 ea.
Kickplate
1 set
Smokeseals
1 ea.
Automatic Door Bottom
3 ea.
Silencers
SET #4
Door no. 09
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8112
1 ea.
Closer CO2021 at door No .07, CO2011 at door no. 17.
1 ea.
Privacy Set, F77
1 ea.
Stop L02251
1 ea.
Kickplate Plate
3 ea.
Silencers
SET #5
Door no's. 14, 17, 04, and 08
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8112
1 ea.
Lockset F81
1 ea.
Closer CO2011; CO2021 at door no's. 08, 18, 19 and 28
1 ea.
Stop L02251
1 ea.
Kickplate Plate
3 ea.
Silencers
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 9
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SET #6
Door no. 11
Pair to have:
3 pr.
Hinges A8111 NRP
1 ea.
Lockset F86
1 pr.
Flushbolts L04081
2 ea.
Overhead Holders C08511
2 ea.
Kickplates
2 ea.
Stops L02131
1 ea.
Head and Sill Raindrip
1 ea.
Threshold J32100
1 set
Weatherstrip
SET #7
Door no. 12
Pair to have:
3 pr.
Hinges A8112
1 ea.
Lockset F81
1 ea.
Flushbolts
2 ea.
Holders
2 ea.
Armor Plates, mount on inside
2 ea.
Kickplates, mount on outside
2 ea.
Automatic Door Bottoms
2 ea.
Silencers
1 set
Weatherstripping
SET #8
Door no's. 01 B and 07B
Each door to have:
1 1/2 pr.
Hinges A8111 NRP
1 ea.
Lockset F81
1 ea.
Closer CO2021
1 ea.
Kickplate
1 ea.
Head and Sill Raindrip
1 ea.
Stop L02131
1 ea.
Threshold J36190 with Vinyl Bubble
1 set
Weatherstrip
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 10
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SET #9
Door no's. 20 and 07
Each door to have:
�• 1 1/2 pr. Hinges A8111
,A 1 ea. Push Plate
1 ea. Pull J401 and plate
1 ea. Closer CO2021
1 ea. Kickplate
3 ea. Silencers
1 ea. Stop L02101
SET #11
Door no's. 01 and 0 1 A - Overhead Doors
All hardware by door supplier.
r*. END OF SECTION
w,
r�
r+
t.
r.
03860201 HARDWARE 08710 - 11
r� 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
r*,
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Monolithic glass.
2. Insulating glass.
3. Mirror glass.
4. Glazing accessories.
B. Types of work in this section include work for:
1. Exterior windows.
2. Interior windows.
3. Exterior storefront.
4. Aluminum entrances.
5. Exterior doors.
6. Mirrors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Exterior Glazing: Provide glazing assemblies which will withstand normal conditions without
failure, loss of weathertightness, or deterioration.
1. Design to withstand wind loading as specified by applicable code for parts/portions of
buildings.
a. Statistical probability of breakage: 8 per 1000, maximum, at 60-second wind load.
B. Deterioration includes:
1. For insulating glass:
a. Moisture or dirt between panes.
b. Development of condensation between panes.
C. Damage to internal coating, if any.
d. Development of other visible indication of seal failure.
2. For coated glass: Development of visible defects in coating.
C. All glass shall conform to the International Energy Code, 2000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Samples of Glass.
C. Certification by contractor, installer, glass fabricator, or manufacturer that glass thickness and
heat treatment have been selected to provide the strength required to meet specified structural
performance requirements.
03860201 GLAZING 08800 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
D. Insulating Unit Warranty.
E. Weathertight Warranty.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Insulating Glass: Fabricator's standard warranty for 5 years.
1. Weathertight warranty: 5 years.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Where product names are indicated, comparable products of the manufacturers listed will be
considered for substitution.
A. Manufacturers:
1. Insulating
glass units: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply
with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a.
AFG Industries, Inc.
b.
Cardinal IG Company.
C.
Falconer -Lewistown, Inc.
d.
Guardian Industries Corporation.
e.
HGP Industries, Inc.
f.
Inde-Pane, Inc.
g.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
h.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i.
Viracon, Inc.
2. Miscellaneous
glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply
with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a.
Cardinal IG Company.
b.
Ford Glass Division/Ford Motor Company.
C.
Guardian Industries Corporation.
d.
HGP Industries, Inc.
e.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company.
f.
Saint Gobain.
g.
Spectrum Glass Products, Inc.
h.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
i.
Viracon, Inc.
3. Spandrel glass, ceramic coated: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they
comply with requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered
acceptable:
a.
Guardian - Jamestown.
b.
HGP Industries, Inc.
C.
Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
d.
Viracon, Inc.
03860201 GLAZING 08800 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
4. Laminated glass: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Falconer -Lewistown, Inc.
b. Globe Amerada Glass Company.
C. Guardian Industries Corporation.
d. Tempglass Division/Indal Ltd.
e. Viracon, Inc.
2.2 GLASS TYPES
A.
Glass Types - General: Provide glass types fabricated of the glass products indicated.
r
1.
Exterior glass thickness: 6 mm (1/4 inch nominal), minimum.
2.
Interior glass thickness: 6 mm (1 /4 inch nominal), unless otherwise indicated.
3.
Heat treatment for exterior glass: As recommended by glass manufacturer to provide
strength necessary to resist specified loads.
a. Exception: Safety glazing requirements supersede this strength requirement.
4.
Cut tempered glass to size and shape and drill holes prior to tempering.
5.
Cut or drill holes in laminated units.
6.
Grind exposed edges smooth, using methods recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Glass Type I - 1 : Sealed insulating units.
1.
Product: Opaque Insulating Spandrel Glass.
2.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
3.
Exterior pane: Opaque tempered glass
a. Fully tempered glass
A^
b. Color: Solar gray
1) Fret and opacifier on 2nd surface.
4.
Interior pane: Opaque tempered glass.
..,
a. Fully tempered.
b. Color: Solar gray.
C. Fret on 3rd surface.
5.
Winter U-value: 0.10, maximum.
6.
Summer U-value:.10, maximum.
C.
Glass Type I - 2 : Sealed insulating units.
1.
Total thickness: 1 inch, nominal.
2.
Exterior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Solar gray.
~"
3.
Interior pane: Low -emissivity coated glass.
a. Fully tempered float glass.
b. Color: Solar gray.
4.
Light transmittance: 60 Percent daylight, 75 percent solar.
5.
Shading coefficient: 0.65.
6.
Reflectance: 33 percent daylight, 28 percent solar.
�^^
7.
Winter U-value: 0.19 maximum.
8.
Summer U-value: 0.10 maximum.
D.
Glass Type I-3: Sealed insulating, non -tempered units (same as Type I-2, except not tempered).
E.
Glass Type S - 1 : Wired glass.
-
1.
Fire -resistance rated.
2.
Product: Pattern -diamond.
03860201 GLAZING 08800 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
F. Glass Type M - 1 : Mirror glass.
1. Two-ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch-thick interlayer.
a. Silvered on second surface.
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch.
3. Color: Clear.
4. Edge treatment: Ground.
G. Glass Type L-1: Clear laminated.
1. Two or three ply laminated glass with 0.030-inch thick interlayer.
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Color: Clear.
H. Glass Type A-1: Overhead Door
1. Acrylic Insulated.
2. Color: Tinted gray.
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch minimum.
4. Per overhead door manufacturer's standard.
2.3 BASIC GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Units: Factory -assembled multiple panes separated by and sealed to spacers
forming air -tight, dehydrated air space(s).
1. ASTM E 774, Class A.
2. Spacer seals: Manufacturer's standard.
B. Float Glass: Quality q3, unless otherwise indicated.
1. For mirrors: Quality ql or q2.
2. Annealed: ASTM C 1036, Type I.
3. Heat -strengthened: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS, Type I.
4. Fully tempered: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Type I.
a. Tong marks are permitted if they will be concealed in glazing channel.
C. Laminated Units: Multiple plies laminated together with interlayer, using heat and pressure,
without air pockets or contaminants between plies.
1. Interlayer for all -glass units: Polyvinyl butyral sheet, specifically designed for lamination
and with demonstrated long-term ability to maintain physical and visual properties under
installed conditions.
D. Reflective Glass: Float glass, coated as indicated.
E. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II, Class 1, Quality q8.
1. Fire -resistance rated where indicated.
F. Mirror Glass: Float glass, with minimum 4-layer coating consisting of silver, copper, and 2
heat -cured protective coats; tested in accordance with FS DD-M-411.
1. Fabrication: Always use gloves when handling mirror glass.
a. Fabricate in the shop; avoid mechanical and chemical damage to backing.
b. Seal edges immediately after fabrication with coating recommended by backing
coating manufacturer.
C. Wash fronts, backs, and edges with clean water immediately after fabrication.
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Installation Materials - General: Select products which have appropriate performance
characteristics as recommended by glass and glazing materials manufacturers and which are
compatible with all materials with which they will come into contact.
03860201 GLAZING 08800 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
B. Heel and Toe Bead Sealant: Noncuring, nonskinning, minimum 75 percent solids, butyl or
polyisobutylene rubber, complying with 802.3, Type II ductile back bedding compound, as
described in AAMA 800.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Comply with recommendations for installation contained in the FGMA "Glazing Manual" and
"Sealant Manual" except when specifically not recommended or prohibited by the glass or
glazing material manufacturer; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Protect glazing from edge damage during handling and installation.
C. Do not install glass that has edge damage or defects that reduce glass strength or performance
or diminish appearance.
3.2 GLAZING IN FRAMES
A. Use the following glazing methods in the locations indicated in other specification sections:
1. Compression gaskets, both sides.
B. Use continuous heel or toe bead at all exterior glazing.
C. Do not block weep holes.
D. Compression Gaskets: Secure gaskets so they will not work out under normal movement.
1. Install so they fit tightly at corners, allowing for stretch during installation.
3.3 MIRROR INSTALLATION
A. Install mirrors in accordance with the recommendations of the mirror manufacturer and with
FGMA "Glazing Manual."
1. Do not install mirrors having any damage to backing coating.
2. Do not install until all other work in the area is complete.
3. Do not install until permanent HVAC systems are in operation.
4. Do not install in areas where airborne solvents or heavy duty cleaners are being used;
ventilate areas thoroughly after use before installing mirrors.
5. Do not install over recently installed plaster, masonry, concrete, or paint.
6. Install with at least 3/16-inch space between back surface of mirror and substrate.
7. Mount plumb; provide shims or spacers if required.
8. Mount adjacent pieces in the same plane.
END OF SECTION
r-
03860201 GLAZING 08800 - 5
,•. 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
.e,
SECTION 09220
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
.�
1.2 SECTION
INCLUDES
r
A.
Metal furring and lathing.
B.
Portland cement plaster system.
C.
Smooth surface finish.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Structural metal studding and framing behind
•-R.
plaster base.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
C.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Metal Studding and Framing.
,,.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Applied surface finish.
1.4 REFERENCES
r-,
A.
ASTM B 221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wires, Shapes and
Tubes.
B.
ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement.
.-�
C.
ASTM C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime.
D.
ASTM C847 - Metal Lath.
E.
ASTM C897 - Aggregate for Job -Mixed Portland Cement -Based Plasters.
P-.
F.
ASTM C926 - Application of Portland Cement -Based Plaster.
G.
ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.33 inches to 0.112 inches in thickness.
+^
H.
ASTM C 1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases.
I.
ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement -Based Plaster.
J.
PCA (Portland Cement Association) -Plaster (Stucco) Manual.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Fabricate vertical elements to limit finish surface to 1/240 deflection under lateral point load of
100 lbs.
B.
Fabricate horizontal elements to limit finish surface to 1/360 deflection under superimposed
dead load and wind uplift loads.
r"
03860201
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1
�+
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data
1. Provide product data on furring, lathing components, structural characteristics, plaster
materials, characteristics and limitations of products specified.
2. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Certificates
1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
D. Samples
1. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating finish color and texture.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lather
1. Company specializing in metal furring and lathing work with 3 years documented
experience.
2. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C 1063.
B. Plasterer
1. Company specializing in cement plaster work with 3 years documented experience.
2. Apply cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.
C. Mock-up
1. Construct mockup, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide, which includes furring, lathing, plaster
finish, color, substrate, incidental flashings, sealants, and other components. Coordinate
with installation of associated work of Sections 05400 and 09260.
2. Locate where directed.
3. Accepted sample shall be kept at project site until completion of all work of this section.
4. Mockup may not remain as part of the Work.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply plaster when substrate or ambient air temperature is less than 50 degrees F nor
more than 80 degrees F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of plaster and until
cured.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Finish Stucco
1. El Rey Stucco Co., Inc.; Albuquerque, NM.
2. La Habra Products, Inc.; Anaheim, CA.
3. United States Gypsum; Chicago, IL.
B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
08/02
09220 - 2
ii
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
"
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Studs, and Tracks: As specified in Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing and
09260 - Gypsum Board Systems.
B. Furring Channels: ASTM C 1063, hot or cold rolled steel; rust inhibitive paint finish, 3/8 inch
deep x 3/4 inch high; length as required.
C. Lateral Bracing: Formed steel, rust inhibitive paint finish; minimum 16 gage thick; size and
length as required.
D. Metal Lath: ASTM C847; Rust inhibitive primer, self furring mesh 2.5 lb/sq yd backed with
treated paper at horizontal surfaces only.
E. Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 2 x 2 inch galvanized steel 24 gage wire, woven mesh, self -furring
type.
F. Casing Bead: Formed sheet steel zinc coated, minimum 26 gage; depth governed by plaster
thickness; maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with square edges.
G. Corner Bead: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness;
maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with radiused edge.
H. Base Screed: Formed zinc; minimum 26 gage thick; depth governed by plaster thickness;
maximum possible lengths; expanded metal flanges, with beveled edge.
I. Corner Mesh: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit
complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide.
J. Control Joint: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick; accordion profile, 2 inch expanded metal
flanges each side; zinc finish.
K. Reveal Molding: Formed zinc„ minimum 26 gage thick; of profile indicated on drawings,
expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inches wide;
galvanized finish.
L. Vent Screed: Formed zinc, minimum 26 gage thick, solid keying flanges, depth governed by
plaster thickness; maximum possible lengths; with integral vent slots; acceptable Product: Delta
Star Inc. model #SVV.
M. Anchorage Methods: Nails, staples, or other approved metal supports, of type and size to suit
application, galvanized to rigidly secure lath and associated metal accessories in place.
N. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I Portland.
O. Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
P. Aggregate: In accordance with ASTM C897.
Q. Color Pigment: Mineral oxide type.
R. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter which can affect plaster.
2.3 PLASTER MIXES
A. Mix and proportion base -coat cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C926, Type P, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Finish Coat
1. Premix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Add color pigments to finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Ensure
uniformity of mix and coloration.
C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
D. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
E. Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and evaporation.
F. Do not retemper finish coat mixes after initial set has occurred.
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces and site conditions.
B. Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this Section. Verify
no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Dampen masonry surfaces to reduce excessive suction.
B. Clean concrete surfaces of foreign matter. Clean surfaces using acid solutions, solvents, or
detergents. Wash surfaces with clean water.
C. Roughen smooth concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Apply in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General —'
1. Install lathing and furring for Portland cement plaster work-in accordance with
ASTM C1063 and the following:
B. Wall and Furred Space Framing
1. Specified in Sections 05400 and 09260.
2. Erect wall furring by directly attaching to concrete masonry.
3. Establish control joints with specified joint device. -
C. Ceiling and Soffit Framing
I . Install furring to height indicated after above ceiling work is complete.
2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above ceiling work.
3. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying studs, not more than 2 inches from
perimeter walls, and rigidly secure.
4. Reinforce openings in suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or —
furring channels with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches past
each opening.
5. Laterally brace suspension system. ^
6. Establish contraction and control joints with specified joint device.
7. Splice laps in main and furring in conformance with ASTM C 1063.
D. Lathing
1. Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
2. Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between
supports.
3. Lap sides of diamond mesh lath minimum 1-1/2 inches.
4. Attach metal lath to metal soffit framing in accordance with ASTM C1063. Space
attachments at maximum 6 inches on center.
5. Attach metal lath to metal studs with Type S, corrosion resistant, pancake head screws
complying with ASTM C954. Space screws at maximum 8 inches on center.
E. Accessories
1. Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, return metal lath 3 inches from
corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.
2. Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.
3. PIace strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place. —
03860201 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing
materials. Secure rigidly in place.
r^
5. Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly
in place.
F.
Control Joints
1. Locate exterior control joints as indicated on reflected ceiling plan and elevations.
2. Establish control joints with specified joint device.
3. Coordinate joint placement with other related work.
m•.
3.4 PLASTERING
A.
Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926 and manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply scratch coat to a nominal thickness of 3/8 inch, brown coat to a nominal thickness of
-
3/8 inch, and a finish coat to a nominal thickness of 1/8 inch over metal lathed surfaces.
C.
Moist cure brown coats. Apply brown coat immediately following initial set of scratch coat.
D.
After curing, dampen base coat prior to applying finish coat.
E.
Apply finish coat and wood float to a smooth and consistent finish.
F.
Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing
excess fines to surface.
G.
Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.
H.
Tempering of finish -coat plaster is prohibited.
3.5 TOLERANCES
�-*
A.
Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
03860201
,a 08/02
END OF SECTION
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
09220 - 5
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
N
PW
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreements, Supplementary Conditions and
Division l - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Metal support systems.
2. Acoustic insulation.
3. Gypsum wallboard.
4. Drywall finishing.
5. Cementitious Backer Units.
B. Related Sections:
1. Cold -formed metal framing: Division 5.
2. Painting: Elsewhere in Division 9.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 36-93 -- Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 1993.
B. ASTM C 475-93 -- Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
Gypsum Board; 1993.
C. ASTM C 645-94 -- Standard Specification for Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners
(Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board; 1994.
D. ASTM C 754-88 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to
Receive Screw -Attached Gypsum; 1988.
E. ASTM C 840-94 -- Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board;
1994.
F. ASTM C 919-84(88) — Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 1984
(Reapproved 1988).
G. ASTM C 1002-93 -- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of
Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases; 1993.
H. ASTM E 119-88 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials; 1988.
I. Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1994.
J. GA-214-90 Recommended Specification: Level of Gypsum Board Finish; Gypsum Association;
1990.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for systems required, including installation
instructions and data sufficient to show compliance with requirements.
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Provide installation by a company specializing in work similar to that
required on this project and with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
B. Regulatory Requirements: At locations indicated on drawings, provide fire -rated assemblies
tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 and acceptable to authorities for ratings required.
Provide assemblies as listed in the following:
1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.'s (UL) "Fire Resistance Directory."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original and unopened packages, containers, or bundles, with brand names
and manufacturer's labels intact and legible.
B. Store materials in dry location, fully protected from weather and direct exposure to sunlight.
C. Stack gypsum board products flat and level, properly supported to prevent sagging or damage
to ends and edges.
D. Store corner bead and other metal and plastic accessories to prevent bending, sagging,
distortion, or other mechanical damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and
finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's recommendations, whichever are more stringent. For nonadhesive attachment
of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive
attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for
48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F
(35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry
joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials
from drying too rapidly.
B. Ventilation: Provide controlled ventilation during joint finishing operations, to eliminate
excessive moisture. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from
drying too quickly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. General: Select size and gage of framing members and establish spacing to comply with
requirements of ASTM C 754 unless otherwise specifically indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating.
1. Nominal depths: As indicated on drawings.
C. Ceiling Channels: ASTM C 754, cold -rolled or hot -rolled steel, with rust -inhibitive finish.
D. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped with minimum 3 inch legs,
offset 5/8 inch at midpoint. Track equal to "Shadow Line" design by Fire Track.
E. Grid Suspension System: Manufactured steel direct -hung grid ceiling suspension system with
interlocking main beam and cross -furring components, complying with requirements of
ASTM C 645.
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F.
Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized.
1. Furring channel ties: Minimum 0.048 inch diameter (18 gage) wire.
r�
G.
Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel, galvanized or coated with a rust -inhibitive paint.
H.
Furring Members: ASTM C 645, steel with protective coating.
1. Hat -shaped except as otherwise indicated.
�.�
2. C-shaped studs, in locations indicated.
I.
Furring Fasteners/Connectors: Manufacturer's recommended system for specific application
indicated, complying with ASTM C 754.
J.
Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Dale/Incor.
2. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
3. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
4. Marino/Ware
5. Unimast, Inc. (formerly a part of USG).
6. USG Corporation.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36; maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt
joints in each area receiving finished gypsum board.
1. Regular, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Edges: Tapered.
B. Thicknesses: As indicated on drawings for each application.
C. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Centex American Gypsum Company.
2. Domtar Gypsum.
3. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
4. Gold Bond Building Products, a National Gypsum Division.
5. USG Corporation.
2.3 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide trim and accessories by
manufacturer of gypsum board materials, made of galvanized steel or zinc alloy and configured
for concealment in joint compound.
1. Include corner beads, edge trim, and other trim units necessary for project conditions.
Provide accessories as required in order to achieve details indicated, whether or not
specific accessories are shown on the drawings.
B. Exposed Trim: At locations indicated, provide manufacturer's standard metal trim units
designed to be left exposed or semi -exposed.
2.4 JOINT TREATMENT
A. General: Provide products by manufacturer of gypsum boards. Comply with ASTM C 475 and
with manufacturer's recommendations for specific project conditions.
B. Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard paper reinforcing tape
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 3
,�,,,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Drying Type Joint Compound: Vinyl -based type for interior use, and as follows:
1. Taping compound: Type specifically formulated for embedding tape and accessories and
for prefilling.
2. Topping compound: Type specifically formulated for finishing drywall over taping
compound.
2.5 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS (GLASS MESH MORTAR UNITS)
A. Proprietary backing units with glass fiber mesh reinforcing and water-resistant coating on both
faces, complying with the following requirements:
1. Cement -Coated Portland Cement Panels: High -density portland cement surface coating
on both faces and lightweight concrete core composed of portland cement and expanded
ceramic aggregate; fabricated in panels 7/16-inch thick by36 inches wide by 36, 48, 60,
64, or 72 inches long and weighing 3.2 to 3.8 psf.
2. Vinyl -Coated Portland Cement Panels: Core formed in a continuous process from
aggregated portland cement slurry and reinforced with vinyl -coated woven glass fiber
mesh embedded in both surfaces, with one face smooth and other textured; fabricated
in panels 1/2-inch thick and by 36 inches wide by 48, 60, and 72 inches long; and
weighing 3 lbs psf.
B. Mortar Unit Finishing Materials: Tape and joint compounds as recommended by manufacturer
of cementitious backer units.
C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cementitious backer units which
may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Wonder -Board; Modulars Inc.
2. Durock Tile Backer Board; Durabond Div., USG Industries, Inc.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials as produced or recommended by manufacturer of
gypsum products.
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type 1; unfaced semirigid mineral fiber mat; --
thickness 2 1 /2".
C. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self -drilling type; lengths as recommended by gypsum board
manufacturer for project conditions.
D. Acoustical Sealants: ASTM C 919; nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning type for concealed
locations; nonoxidizing, skinning type for exposed locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are appropriate to begin installation
of work of this section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage devices for suspended ceilings/soffits, verifying that
spacing and rated strength are correct for anticipated load conditions.
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 4
08/02
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.3 INSTALLATION OF METAL FRAMING
A. General: Comply with provisions of ASTM C 754 and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply
to framing installation except where exceeded by other requirements.
B. Steel Studs:
1. General: Install tracks and studs in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
as follows:
a. Stud spacing: As indicated on drawings.
2. Door openings: Comply with GA-214; reinforce openings as required for size and weight
of doors, using a minimum of two side -by -side studs on each side of opening.
a. At openings in fire -rated partitions, comply with requirements of governing
authorities for framing.
3. Partition heights: Extend studs above of suspended ceiling.
4. Blocking and bracing: Install blocking and bracing as recommended by manufacturer for
adequate support of wall -mounted items installed as work of other sections.
C. Deflection Track: Provide deflection track at, top of all full height partitions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other
requirements.
1. Wherever possible, install gypsum board to minimize butt end joints.
2. Apply ceiling boards prior to installation of wallboards. Arrange to minimize butt end
joints near center of ceiling area.
3. Install wallboards in a manner which will minimize butt end joints in center of wall area.
Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of walls.
4. Butt all joints loosely, with maximum of 1/16 inch between boards.
5. Place wrapped edges adjacent to one another; do not place cut edges or butt ends
adjacent to wrapped edges.
6. Support all edges and ends of each board on framing or by solid substrate, except that
long edges at right angles to framing members in non -fire -rated construction may be left
unsupported.
7. In double -layer ceiling work, apply base layer with long edges perpendicular to framing
members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset.
8. In double -layer wall applications, apply base layer with long edges parallel to framing
members, with face layer in opposite direction, and with all joints offset.
B. Isolation Joints: Where gypsum board construction intersects structural components, provide
isolation by stopping board a minimum of 1/4 inch from structure, for finishing by means of
exposed or semi -exposed trim.
C. Installation on Metal Framing and Furring:
1. Single -layer application: Install gypsum board by means of screw attachment.
a. On walls and partitions, plan installation so that leading edge or end of gypsum
board is attached to open end of stud flange first.
2. Double -layer application:
a. Install base layer by means of 1-inch screws, spaced at 24 inches on center.
b. Install face layer by means of screws at least 3/8 inch longer than total thickness
of gypsum board layers, spaced at 12 inches on center.
3. For fire -rated construction, install gypsum board by means of screws as specified for the
tested assembly.
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09260 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation of trim items. Except
for items intended by manufacturer to be left exposed or semiexposed, install trim units for
concealment in joint finishing compound. Wherever possible, fasten metal trim items to
substrate with same fasteners used to install gypsum board products.
B. Comer Bead: Install metal corner bead at all external comers unless details clearly indicate its
omission at specific locations.
C. Edge Trim: Install edge trim at locations indicated and wherever edge of gypsum board
otherwise would be exposed.
3.6 FINISHING
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216 except where exceeded by other
requirements.
1. Do not mix joint compounds except as specifically recommended by manufacturer.
B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following level of finish per GA-214, except where
indicated otherwise on the drawings:
1. Level 3: Embed tape in joint compound at all joints and interior angles. Provide two
separate coats of compound at all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Provide
smooth surfaces free of tool marks and ridges.
C. Joint Treatment: Tape and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for
compounds used, using proper hand tools designed for the purpose.
1. Avoid raising nap of face paper when sanding; carefully sponge down any areas
roughened by sanding process.
D. Penetrations: Fill cutouts and openings around fixtures and penetrations with joint compound.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove any residual gypsum drywall materials from adjacent or adjoining surfaces,
leaving spaces ready for subsequent finishing operations and decorating.
END OF SECTION
03860201 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
08/02
09260 - 6
r:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 09300
�^ TILE
r
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
±, 1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire -Rated Construction: At locations indicated, provide fire -rated assemblies tested per
ASTM E 119 and acceptable to governing authorities for designated fire ratings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data.
B. Samples - Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color selection boards of actual tile materials
including a complete selection of available tile colors and finishes for each tile type indicated.
Include samples of accessory materials requiring color selection.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Furnish not less than 2 percent of total product installed maintenance stock for
each type, color, pattern, and size of tile product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS - GENERAL
A. Ceramic Tile Standard: ANSI A137.1.
1. Tile grade: "Standard Grade," unless noted otherwise.
2. Tile trim and accessories: Match color and finish of adjoining flat tile.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, Factory -Mounted Flat Tile:
1. Tile body: Porcelain.
2. Surface finish: Slip -resistant with abrasive contact.
3. Nominal facial dimensions: 1 inch by 1 inch.
4 03860201 TILE 09300 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Thickness: 1/4 inch nominal.
5. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edge.
6. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors.
7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Dal -Tile Corporation.
C. Mannington Ceramic Tile.
d. Winbum Tile Manufacturing Company.
B. Glazed Wall Tile; Flat Tile:
1. Nominal facial dimensions: 4-1/4 inches by 4-1/4 inches
2. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal.
3. Surface configuration: Plain with cushion edges.
4. Mounting: Prefabricated back -mounted.
5. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard colors.
6. Trim units: Match color and finish of adjacent flat tile:
a. Shapes and sizes: Manufacturer's standard, as indicated; coordinated with
indicated size and coursing of adjacent tile, where applicable:
1) Corner bead.
2) Bullnose.
3) Surface bullnose.
4) Cove.
5) Base.
7. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Olean Tile Company.
b. Buchtal Corporation USA.
C. Dal -Tile Corporation.
d. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.
e. International American Ceramics. _
f. Mannington Ceramic Tile.
g. Porcelanosa USA.
h. Quamagra Tile, Inc.
i. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
j. United States Ceramic Tile Company.
C. Tile Accessories: Vitreous china accessories in color and finish selected by architect after
contract award.
1. Soap holder for each shower.
2.3 STONE THRESHOLDS
A
A. General: Fabricate to size to provide transition between tile floor and adjacent floor surface.
B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503.
1. White, honed marble; Marble Institute of America Group "A."
03860201 TILE 09300 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A 108. 1 A.
1. Setting bed reinforcing: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches by 2 inches,
ASTM A 185; with W0.3 by W0.3, 0.0625 inch diameter, wire, ASTM A 82 except for
minimum wire size.
B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1.
2.5 WATERPROOFING MATERIALS
A. Waterproof Membrane/Adhesive: One -part trowel -applied urethane waterproofing and
tile -setting adhesive.
2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Commercial Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A 118.6.
1. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards.
B. Chemical -Resistant Epoxy Grout: ANSI A 118.3.
1. Service temperature: Product recommended and certified by manufacturer to resist
anticipated ambient temperature range, but not less than 140 F degrees on a continuous
basis.
2. Colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standards.
2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. Compatibility: Provide sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates for project performance conditions.
B. Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, and A.
1. Color: Match tile grout color in adjacent tile joints.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Filler for Tile: Proprietary compound designed for filling unglazed tile to prevent staining.
B. Tile Cleaner: Product specifically acceptable to tile manufacturer and grout manufacturer for
application indicated and as recommended by National Tile Promotion Federation or Ceramic
Tile Institute.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Tile Installation Standard: ANSI A 108 series, for setting and grouting materials listed.
B. Installation Methods: Comply with TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for type of
applications indicated.
C. Install waterproofing to comply with waterproofing manufacturer's instructions as necessary to
result in a watertight installation.
D. Stone Thresholds: Install at locations indicated, with same setting material as adjacent field tile.
1. Install with thinset mortar where thick mortar bed would be exposed above adjacent floor
finish.
03860201 TILE 09300-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 TILE APPLICATIONS
A. Interior Floor, Thick -Bed:
1. Tile: Unglazed ceramic mosaic.
2. Installation method:
a. Concrete subfloor: TCA F112,
b. Install fluid-applied/adhesive type waterproof membrane in accordance with
TCA F121.
C. Mortar bed: Portland cement mortar, ANSI A108.1A.
d. Install tile with specified grout in accordance with TCA F114.
e. Bond coat: Latex portland cement bed ANSI 118.4.
3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement, ANSI 118.6.
B. Interior Masonry Wall, Thin -Bed:
1. Tile: Glazed wall.
2. Installation method:
a. Masonry: TCA W202.
b. Bond coat: Latex portland cement mortar, ANSI A118.4.
3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement, ANSI A118.6.
C. Interior Gypsum Board Wall
1. Tile: Glazed wall.
2. Installation Method:
a. Water Resistant Gypsum Board Units: TCA W242.
b. Bond Coat: Organic Adhesive, ANSI A136.1.
3. Grout: Commercial Latex Portland Cement - ANSI A118.6.
D. Shower Ceilings, Thin Bed:
1. Tile: Glazed Wall
2. Installation Method
a. Cementitious Backer Units: TCA W244
b. Bond Coat: Latex portland cement mortar, ANSI A 118.4.
3. Grout: Commercial latex portland cement
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean tile surfaces after installation is complete.
1. Tile filler: Clean and dry tile before applying filler. Apply filler at rate and by method
recommended by filler manufacturer to achieve complete coverage and a uniform color
over entire tile area.
B. Protection: Apply neutral protective cleaner to tile after installation if recommended by tile
manufacturer. Overlay completed tile installation with kraft paper for protection from
subsequent construction activities.
END OF SECTION
03860201 TILE 09300 - 4
O8/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 09511
** ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exposed suspension system.
r 2. Acoustical lay -in panels.
B. Products Furnished But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Metal deck hanger clips.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data.
B. Samples: Submit the following:
1. Selection samples:
L a. Acoustical units: Minimum 6-inch-square samples of acoustical units meeting the
requirements of the specification for each type specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. In a timely manner, furnish to affected installers, attachment devices for incorporation into other
work.
B. Do not begin installation of ceiling system until building's normal operating temperature and
humidity levels have been reached and will be maintained.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
ab,
A. Extra Materials: After ceiling installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement
materials for materials installed. Furnish products which precisely match installed products.
Protect with appropriate packaging and provide clear, legible labels.
1. Acoustical lay -in panels: Furnish full-sized panels in quantities not less than 2 percent
of quantity of panels installed.
2. Elements of exposed suspension members: For each distinct type of exposed element,
furnish quantities not less than 2 percent of quantity installed.
03860201 ACOUSTICAL LAY-lN CEILINGS
08/02
09511 - 1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS - GENERAL
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide units conforming to applicable requirements of
ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
B. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Mineral fiber acoustical units:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Celotex Corporation.
C. USG Corporation.
2.2 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS -GENERAL
A. Attachment Devices for Suspension System:
1. Anchors and intermediate support members: Provide sizes capable of sustaining 5 times
the load -carrying capabilities shown in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung" column.
2. Deck inserts and hanger clips: Fabricate from hot -dip galvanized steel.
3. Hanger wire: Zinc -coated (galvanized) carbon steel wire, ASTM A 641, soft temper,
with Class 1 coating, minimum 12 gage (0.106 inch diameter).
B. Edge Moldings and Trim:
C. Manufacturer: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Exposed steel suspension system:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
C. WAVE Worthington Armstrong Venture (formerly National Rolling Mills).
d. USG Corporation.
2.3 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 1
A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Ceiling attenuation class: 35-39.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.65 — 0.75.
4. Edge profile: Square.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard washable latex paint.
6. Color: White.
7. Face texture/pattern: Random Fissured (ASTM E 1264 Pattern D).
S. Acceptable products: USG Acoustone Medium Texture.
B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel with special corrosion -resistant painted finish.
1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide.
2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System.
3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture.
03860201 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 -2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 2
?"+ A. Ceiling Panels: Gypsum board with sealed edges, formulated especially for ceiling application
in humid environments; 5/8 inch thick.
1. 'Size: 24 by 24 inches.
..,, 2. Finish: Unperforated vinyl film.
3. Color: White.
B. Exposed Grid: Same as specified for the preceding lay -in acoustical ceiling system.
2.5 LAY -IN ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM 3
A. Acoustical Panels: Water felted, rigid mineral fiber boards:
1. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
2. Ceiling sound transmission class: Minimum CSTC 40.
3. Noise reduction coefficient: Minimum NRC 0.55.
4. Finish: Perforated vinyl film.
4 5. Color: White.
6. Acceptable product: USG Orion.
B. Exposed Grid: Formed, hot -dip galvanized steel for concealed portion of grid; painted, formed
aluminum for exposed portion.
1. Profile: Single -web tee, 15/16 inch wide.
2. Structural classification (ASTM C 635): Intermediate -Duty System.
3. Color and texture: White color to match ceiling panels; standard smooth texture.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
i A. Verify that products furnished as work of this section, but not installed under this section, have
been properly installed by the entity performing the installation.
3.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General:
= 1. Conform to the requirements of ASTM C 636, manufacturer's installation instructions,
and governing regulations.
.�+. 2. Install hangers plumb and supported solely by building structure or carrying channels.
Do not allow hangers to contact any objects or materials in ceiling plenum which are not
actual components of ceiling system.
k •, a. Do not attach hangers to piping, conduit, or duct. Provide carrying channel
trapeze support where obstruction cannot be avoided by splaying hanger
45 degrees from vertical or less.
L; 3. Level ceiling suspension system to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet, with cumulative
tolerance not to exceed 1/4 inch. Bending or kinking of hangers is not allowed.
03860201 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 -3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.3 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install edge moldings and trim units at acoustical ceiling borders, at locations indicated, and
where required to cover acoustical unit edges.
1. Face -riveting of trim and moldings is not allowed.
3.4 LAY -IN PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Panel Installation: Install acoustical panels for accurate fit with suspension system and trim J
members. Scribe and cut panels at ceiling perimeter and at obstructions to provide neat, precise
fit.
1. Square -edge panel installation: Provide installation with panel edges which are hidden
from view, by suspension members or trim.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type of acoustic units installed to the Owner's
Representative at location designated
END OF SECTION
03860201 ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN CEILINGS 09511 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Resilient tile flooring.
2. Resilient sheet flooring.
3. Resilient base.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data from each manufacturer of resilient products required.
B. Verification Samples: Submit samples of each type, color, and pattern of resilient product
required, as follows:
1. Actual tiles.
2. Cut sections of sheet flooring, not less than six inches square.
3. Cut sections of resilient flooring accessories, not less than six inches in length.
4. Other materials requested by architect.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: At least 48 hours prior to beginning work, move resilient flooring
materials to areas of installation and maintain at minimum 70 degrees F until 48 hours after
completing installation and at minimum 55 degrees F thereafter.
B. Sequencing: Do not begin installation of resilient flooring products until painting has been
completed for each area.
C. Existing Conditions: Do not install resilient flooring on concrete substrates until testing has
been conducted to assure that moisture levels are acceptable.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: At time of completing installation, deliver stock of maintenance materials to
the owner. Furnish products matching those actually installed, packaged for storage and clearly
labeled.
1. Resilient tile: 2 percent of each variety installed.
2. Resilient sheet: 2 percent of each variety installed, in full roll width.
3. Resilient base: 2 percent of each variety installed.
�s
0
03860201 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 1
08/02
i
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Solid Vinyl Tile: FS SS-T-31213, Type III.
1. Size: 12 inches by 12 inches.
2. Gage: 1/8 inch.
3. Static Load Limit: 125 pounds per square inch.
4. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc.
b. TOLI
B. Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS-T-312, Type IV; 12 inches by 12 inches.
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Amtico Flooring Division/American Biltrite, Inc.
b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
C. Azrock Industries Inc.
d. Kentile Floors Inc.
e. Tarkett, Inc.
2. Composition 1: Free of asbestos.
3. Gage: 1/8 inch.
2.2 SHEET FLOORING MATERIALS
A. Resilient Sheet Flooring: Inlaid vinyl sheet; filled vinyl surface layer with plastic foam backing,
and other requirements as follows:
1. Total thickness:.85 inch minimum.
2. Wearlayer thickness: 0.050 inch minimum.
3. Sheet width: 72 inches minimum.
4. Static load limit: 125 pounds per square inch minimum.
5. Durability = Superior
6. Heat welded with welding rod factory cut from flooring material with color and matrix
to match flooring.
7. Random Chip Blend.
8. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Lonseal, Inc.
b. Tarkett, Inc.
C. Armstrong Commercial Flooring (Classic Corlon)
2.3 RESILIENT BASE MATERIALS
A. Rubber Wall Base: FS SS-W-40, Type I, and as follows:
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Burke Industries, Inc.
b. Flexco Company.
C. Johnsonite, Inc.
03860201 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
d. The R. C. Musson Rubber Company.
e. Roppe Corporation.
2. Height: 4 inches.
3. Style: Standard toe base.
4. Comers: Preformed or molded units matching base in color and finish.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Edge Strips: Solid rubber or vinyl edging, in tapered or rounded profile, nominally
1 inch in width and 1/8 inch in thickness.
1. Color: Matching flooring.
B. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer of resilient product for specific substrate
conditions.
2.5 COLORS AND PATTERNS
,1
A. Provide colors and patterns of resilient flooring materials as selected by the architect from
manufacturer's standard product line.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
r A. Comply with manufacturer's published recommendations for installation in each area, extending
resilient flooring into spaces which are partially concealed. Cut and fit tightly to fixtures, pipes,
and other obstructions, as well as to walls and partitions.
B. Tightly adhere resilient flooring to substrate with no open joints or cracks, and without raised
or blistered areas. Spread adhesive evenly, so that final installation will be without telegraphed
markings from adhesive or substrate.
3.2 TILE INSTALLATION
A. Layout: Establish center of each space and lay tile from center point, so tiles at each edge will
be not less than 1/2 the and equal in width.
B. Matching: In each space, use tiles from same production run, and lay tiles in same sequence as
removed from cartons. Discard broken, chipped, or otherwise damaged tiles.
1. Lay tile square to room axis, unless indicated otherwise.
2. Lay tile with pattern in adjacent tiles oriented in opposite directions.
3.3 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION
A. Layout and Matching: Establish optimum use of material with minimum number of seams in
each space. Match patterns carefully at seams, following manufacturer's directions.
d
4 M 3.4 INSTALLATION OF RESILIENT BASE
A. Apply resilient base securely in locations indicated, using maximum lengths available.
03860201 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 3
�,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.5 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
A. Resilient Edge Strips: At locations shown on drawings, or where otherwise required to protect
edge of resilient flooring, install resilient edge strips securely with recommended adhesive, to
achieve tightly butted joint.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Initial Cleaning: Remove excess and waste materials promptly, and sweep or vacuum clean
resilient flooring as soon as installation has been completed in each area. After adhesive has had
adequate time to set, mop each area with damp mop and mild detergent.
B. Final Cleaning: Remove scuff marks, excess adhesive, and other foreign substances, using only
cleaning products and techniques recommended by manufacturer of resilient products.
1. Polish: Apply protective polish to clean resilient flooring surfaces, unless manufacturer
of resilient product recommends otherwise.
3.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one box of each color of tile installed and 50 lineal feet of base installed to the Owner's
Representative at location designated.
END OF SECTION
03860201 RESILIENT FLOORING 09650 - 4
08/02
A
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 09680
CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit technical data for each distinct type of carpeting material and accessory
y indicated.
B. Initial Selection Samples: For each carpet type indicated, submit manufacturer's standard
samples showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
1.2 PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
A. Fire Performance: Provide carpet materials capable of meeting the following requirements when
tested in accordance with methods indicated, by UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) or other
*. independent testing agency acceptable to governing authorities.
1. Methenamine pill test (ASTM D 2859): Passes.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Take measures as required to ensure materials are not damaged or deformed. Store products in
flat position in properly ventilated, dry space. Use suitable means to prevent materials from
lying in direct contact with the ground.
r_l
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: After carpet installation has been completed, deliver to the owner replacement
carpeting in quantities not less than 2 percent for each distinct carpet color, pattern, and type
installed. Extra materials furnished must precisely match materials installed, must be wrapped
in suitable packaging, and must be clearly labeled.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
m g A. Tufted Carpet: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. The Blacknall Company.
2. Collins & Aikman Corporation.
3. The Harbinger Company.
4. J & J Industries, Inc.
W .a 5. Interface Flooring Systems, Inc.
6. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/Burlington Industries, Inc.
7. Milliken Contract Carpets.
8. Mohawk Carpet Corporation.
9. Stevens Carpet
03860201 CARPET 09680 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Carpet:
1.
Location: Per Room Finish Schedule and Floor Plan.
2.
Color/texture/pattern: To be selected from full range of samples. 4
3.
Carpet construction: Tufted broadloom.
4.
Pile fiber: Nylon.
5.
Style: Level loop.<,
6.
Pile face weight: Minimum 32 ounces per square yard.
7.
Installation method: Direct glue -down.
8.
Edge guard: Vinyl or rubber.
9.
Performance characteristics:
a. Fire hazard classification (ASTM E 84/UL 723/NFPA 255):
1) Class B: Flame spread 26-75, smoke developed 0-450.
b. Average critical radiant flux (ASTM E 648/NFPA 253): Minimum 0.22 watt per
square centimeter.
C. Smoke density with flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450.
d. Smoke density without flame (ASTM E 662): Less than 450.
e. Static electricity generation (AATCC 134): 3.5 kilovolts when tested at
20 percent relative humidity and 70 degrees F.
f. Colorfastness to light (AATCC 16): Slight fade from 5 to 4 on Gray Scale after
60 hours exposure.
g. Density: 5,000 minimum.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide accessories recommended by carpet manufacturer.
B. Rubber Edge Guard: Minimum width of anchorage flange 2 inches, size and shape indicated,
colors selected by the architect from manufacturer's standards.
C. Rubber Threshold: Edge strip type threshold at carpet termination at doors. Color as selected.
D. Carpet Installation Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended water-resistant adhesive
manufactured for use with type of carpet and substrates indicated, and complying with fire
performance requirements indicated for carpet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
1. Maximize consistency of carpet appearance, particularly in terms of lay of pile and its
direction. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for placement of seams.
2. Continue carpet into recessed spaces such as closets, and underneath obstacles with open
bases.
B. At door openings, orient carpet seam perpendicular to traffic direction; doorway seam must be
located directly underneath door in closed position.
03860201 CARPET 09680 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 INSTALLATION - GLUE -DOWN CARPET
r. A. Before applying adhesive to substrate, prefit carpet in areas where it is to be installed. Where
cutting is necessary, provide properly prepared, straight, and unfrayed edges.
B. Install prefitted carpet; butt edges snugly at seams and against vertical obstructions.
1. Stretch carpet tightly over substrate, so that it lies flat, is uniformly smooth, and free of
bulges.
C. Install edge guards at exposed carpet edges unless indicated otherwise; provide secure
attachment to substrate.
D. Immediately remove adhesive from surface of carpet by method which will not damage carpet.
3.3 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide 120 square feet of each type of carpeting installed to Owner's Representative at
location designated.
END OF SECTION
03860201 CARPET 09680 - 3
�„ 08/02
- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section.
1.2 WORK INCLUDED
A. Surface preparation.
B. Surface finish schedule.
C. Color selection schedule.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 09910 - Graffiti Resistant Coating.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSUASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
C. SSPC - SP1 - Solvent Cleaning.
D. SSPC - SP2 - Hand Tool Cleaning.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
e"
A. Conform to ANSUASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products
with five years experience.
B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years
documented experience.
1.7
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data
1. Provide product data on all finishing products.
2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions.
B. Samples
1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available
for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.
03860201 PAINTING 09900 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Certificates
1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following:
a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide.
b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide.
C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead.
d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution
District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is
located.
D. Field Samples
1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating
color, and finish.
2. Locate where directed.
3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
C. ' Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
D. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. and a maximum of
90 degrees F., in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application
of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above
50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F. for interiors;
50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F. for
interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid -height at substrate surface.
1.10 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated.
B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label.
03860201 PAINTING 09900 - 2
08/02
04
r-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Glidden Coatings and Resins Co., Cleveland, OH.
B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA.
C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA.
D. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Coatings
1.
Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process
pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
2.
Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing
free of streaks or sags.
3.
Compatible with existing coatings in renovation areas.
B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule.
B. The schedule is based on the products of Glidden Coatings and Resins Co. follows:
No. Product Name (ICI Paint)
Type
1.
1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer
Latex
2.
1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish
Alkyd
3.
1370 Spraymaster DTG
Alkyd -Flat
4.
1416 Ultra -Hide Enamel
Latex -Semi Gloss
5.
1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel
Alkyd, Semi -Gloss
6.
1582 Spray Master Dryfall
Alkyd -Eggshell
7.
1600 Woodpride Stain
Alkyd - Oil
8.
1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish
Aquacrylic-Satin
9.
2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer
Acrylic -Latex
10.
2406 Decra-Shield
Acrylic -Semi -Gloss
11.
2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel
Alkyd -Semi -Gloss
3010 Ultra -Hide Block Filler
Vinyl Acrylic
12.
4000 Bloxfil Block Filler
Acrylic
13.
4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer
Alkyd
14.
4206 Devflex Acrylic
Waterborne Acrylic,
Semi -Gloss
15.
63245 Traffic Paint
Acrylic
-
No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore)
Type
1.
70 Kel-Guard
Synthetic Rubber
C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable.
03860201 PAINTING 09900 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes
unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums:
1. Plaster: 12 percent.
2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.
3. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
4. Exterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces
or finishing.
B. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and
bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign
particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply latex based compatible sealer or
primer.
F. Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.
G. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify
required acid -alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.
H. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply
coat of etching primer.
I. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose
mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a
solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by
weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting
with water. Allow to dry.
J. Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster.
Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.
K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings
of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent.
Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are
similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges
to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.
M. Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal
knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has
dried; sand between coats.
N. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
03 860201 PAINTING
08/02
09900 - 4
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
O. Previously Painted Surfaces
1. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter.
2. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating.
3. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces.
4. Repair damaged areas such as but not limited to nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with
suitable materials to match adjacent areas.
5. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth.
6. Prepare surfaces using methods SP l or SP 2.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
disfiguring other surfaces.
D. Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Paint, Stain and Varnish
1. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
3. Apply each coat to uniform finish.
4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
8. Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish
with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.
3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Paint shop primed equipment.
p_ B. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
C. In finished spaces, prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and
exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, except where items are prefinished.
Al D. Pre -finished Grilles and Registers: Where directed paint pre -finished grilles and registers to
match wall surface in which they occur.
E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted
accidentally.
F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of
flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to
match face panels.
G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas, whether or not pre -
finished.
H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
.� before installing equipment.
03860201 PAINTING 09900 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements
indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering.
J. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.6 CLEANING
A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed
metal containers and remove daily from site.
ti
3.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one gallon container of each color installed to the Owner's Representative at location
designated.
3.8 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Surfaces
Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF)
Traffic Striping 63245 (5.0)
Metal Protection
Dissimilar 61744 (2.5) 61774 (2.5)
Metals; Metal
to Concrete,/Mortar
Ferrous Metals 4160 (2.0) 2516 2516
Bollards,
Exposed Lintels,
Misc. Metal
Doors, Frames 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0)
and Equipment
Galvanized Metals 4160 (2.0) 2516 (2.0) 2516 (2.0)
Louvers &
Ducts `
Misc. Wood 2000 (2.1) 2406 (1.4) 2406 (l.4)
03 860201 PAINTING
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Interior Surfaces
Surface 1 st Coat DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF)
Concrete
Concrete Floors 70 (1.0) 70 (1.0)
Concrete Masonry
(CMU) 3010 Varies 1416 (1.4) 1416 (1.4)
Room No's 12, 18 and 29 4000 4206 (2.5) 4206 (2.5)
Plaster
Metal Decking
`
Primed
1582
1582
Ferrous Metals
Bar Joists
4160 (2.0)
1582
1582
& Beams
(Exposed)
Doors and Frames,
4160(2.0)
1516 (2.0)
1516 (2.0)
Railings,
.:
Equipment
Galvanized Metal
�,.
Ducts,
1370
1516(2.0)
1516(2.0)
Louvers,
**or**
Piping,
4160 (2.0)
Vents
Gypsum Drywall
All spaces.
1030 (1.1)
1416 (1.5)
1416 (1.5)
Wood Drawer
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
& Cabinet
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
r
Interiors .
Transp. Finish
Trim, Transp.
1600 Varies
1802 (l.0)
1802 (1.0)
Finish (Stained)
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
Cabinets, Ext.
1600 Varies
1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
& Interiors
Thin 50%
Thin 25%
Transp. Finish
(Stained)
Cabinets, Ext.
1310 (1.5)
1516 (1.4)
1516 (1.4)
& Interiors
Opaque Finish.
03860201
PAINTING
09900 - 7
,..
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
Surface
1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT)
3rd Coat (DMF)
Wood Doors
--
Stained &
Transp. Finish
1600 Varies 1802 (1.0)
1802 (1.0)
Thin 50%
Thin 50%
-A
END OF SECTION
03860201
PAINTING
09900 - 8
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 09910
GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement, Supplemental Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
i
Graffiti resistant coatings.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
w A.
Section Includes: Surface Preparation, Barrier or Primer Coat, and 2-Part GSS-10 Polymer
Based Finish Coat to all exterior masonry vertical surfaces outside the fence line, and
fi
doors/frames unless specifically indicated otherwise.
B.
Applicator must contact the manufacturer directly for instructions regarding the specific
combination of GSS products appropriate for the substrate.
v; C.
Refer to surface, finish schedule in this section or on the drawings.
on
D.
Coordinate with Section 07180. Follow each recommendations. Notify
architect of any potential conflicts.
E.
Related Work Described Elsewhere.
1. Section 04200 - Unit Masonry
2. Section 07180 - Water Repellents
3. Section 09900 - Painting
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's written technical information, including performance data,
y
and installation recommendations, which demonstrate that comply with contract
documents.
B.
Sample
1. Submit full size sample of the actual brick and CMU with product applied to
two-thirds of the surface area. Provide a "flat" and a "semi -gloss" area over
one-third of the surface for each type with the remaining third uncoated. Identify the
3 different areas. Obtain approval from architect before proceeding.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards
1. Current City of Los Angeles Approval. Must submit research report number.
2. American Society for Testing Materials.
03860201 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 69910 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
B. The manufacturer will designate one person who has been specifically trained and
certified to oversee all phases of the project's application. The person will direct the
application of the coatings and all work outlined in this section.
C. Applicator will provide the specifier verification from the manufacturer that the project
has been certified.
D. Unless otherwise instructed, conform exactly to he manufacturer's written —
recommendations regarding the product's preparation, mixing, application and finish.
E. All field coating is subject to verification or millimeter thickness.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to local or state Code or Regulations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant the application to perform as intended for a period of 10 years.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Freight Class is 55, Flammable UNI1263.
B. Deliver products to the site in sealed and labeled containers. Inspect products before
accepting.
C. Container labels must include the manufacturer's name and type of coating as well as
directions for surface preparation, application and cleanup.
D. Store at a minimum of 40 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F in a well ventilated
area. Prevent Barrier Coat from freezing.
E. Take precautions to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply products during rain or when the relative humidity is such that condensation
forms on the surface during application.
B. Do not leave the GSS-10 containers in direct sunlight. Avoid applying coating in direct
sunlight or when the temperature remains above 90 degrees F for more than four hours.
C. Do not apply products outside when wind is over 10 mph.
D. During application, the surface must be kept dry until coating is also completely dry.
E. Mix materials in well ventilated areas. Remove all empty containers, waste and
contaminated rags from the premises at the end of each working day.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Approved manufacturer is American Polymer Corporation.
B. Approved product is The Graffiti Solution System consisting of the GSS Barrier Coat, the
GSS-10 Graffiti Finish (Coating - Parts A and B) and the Erasol Spray Remover.
C. For product information and application certification, contact the manufacturer: American
Polymer Corporation at (801) 255-9505. (Refer to section 1.01, A-1 of this document).
03860201 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Bids will not be accepted from applicators who have not contacted the manufacturer for
bidding, application and certification procedures.
" E. For each submitted bid, the applicator must attach a letter of qualification issued by the
manufacturer stating that the applicator is in compliance with this specification.
F. Substitutions must be essentially identical products in order to be approved, and submitted
for approval prior to the bid opening. All substitutions submitted after the bid opening will
be rejected without consideration.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Only use the product as produced by the manufacturer.
B. For succeeding coats, use primers produced by the manufacturer.
C. No thinning, reducing or changing of the product is permitted unless specifically
authorized by the manufacturer.
D. Provide and use Methyl Ethyl Ketone (MEK) for frequent cleaning of equipment.
r 2.3 FINISHES
A. Finishes will be either flat, semi -gloss or one of the natural color spectrum. Finish
schedule should be determined before any work begins.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
t• 3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready for application as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Report any condition that may jeopardize a proper application. Do not start work until any
and all concerns are resolved.
C. Start of application means the contractor has accepted the existing substrate conditions.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Surfaces should be completely dry and clean with no dust, dirt, oil, grease and other
contaminants to prevent the coating from adhering to the surface.
B. New concrete should be thoroughly cured before application.
C. Glossy, glazed or slick troweled surfaces should be lightly etched or abraded before
applying the coatings.
D. Before work begins, painted surfaces must be approved for application by the
manufacturer or its representative.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not allow the products to come in contact with building occupants, pedestrians,
surrounding property, other surfaces or vehicles.
B. Avoid applying the products during winds over 10 mph which may cause the materials to
drift.
C. While applying the products to occupied buildings, all windows, exterior air intakes and
air conditioning vents must be covered.
03860201 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Air Handling equipment must be covered and shut down during the application until
surfaces are visibly dry or the odor has dissipated.
3.4 APPLICATION
A. Applicator must follow the manufacturer's instructions for application of the recommended
products and comply with the specification.
B. Apply over water repellant specified in Section 07180.
3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP
A. Clean application equipment with MEK immediately after each use.
B. If the coating has begun to set and cannot be cleaned with MEK, use the GSS Erasol for
cleaning.
C. Clean all drips, runs and over spray while still wet.
D. If the surface is clipped or damaged after the application is complete, a touch up coating of
the GSS-10 should be applied immediately.
3.6 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide on full case of anti -graffiti resistant coating installed to Owner's Representative at
location designated.
END OF SECTION
03860201 GRAFFITI RESISTANT COATING 09910 - 4
08/02
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Finish Schedule.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04200 — Unit Masonry.
B. Section 09220 — Portland Cement Plaster.
C. Section 09260 — Gypsum Board Systems.
D. Section 09300 — Tile.
E. Section 09511 —Acoustical Lay -in Ceilings.
F. Section 09650 — Resilient. Flooring.
G. Section 09680 — Carpet.
H. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.4 GENERAL
A. This section covers only the finishes of interior surfaces of floors, base, walls and ceilings as
they relate to this project. Requirements for quality control and method of installation are
covered in other appropriate sections of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the
drawings for locations required.
B. Color selections are indicated in other appropriate sections of the specifications or on the
drawings.
PART2-PRODUCTS
A,.,
2.1 FINISH SCHEDULE
A
A. Walls
1. The Finish Schedule lists finishes for floors, base, walls, ceilings, ceiling heights and
other remarks.
B. Ceilings
A, 1. System types noted in schedule are located in the appropriate section of the
specifications.
03860201 FINISH SCHEDULE 09916 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 FINISH SCHEDULE
Room Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors
No Description Floor Base N E S W Type Ht (ft-in) Remarks Door Frame Millwork
101
APPARATUS BAY
F3
-
I W3
W3
W3
W3
Cl
VARIES
I, 2
102
MULIT-PURPOSE
F1/F2
131
W4
WI
-
W4
C3-3
9-0
103
KITCHEN
F2
131
-
W1
W4
W4
C3-3
9-0
104
OFFICE
F2
B1
W1
W1
W4
W1
C3-I
9-0
105
VESTIBULE
F5
B1
WI
W4
W4
W1
C3-1
9-0
106
HALL
F2
B1
W1
W1
WI
W1
C3-1
9-0
107
DORMITORY
F2 I
B l
WI I
WI
W4/WI
WI
C3-1
9-0
108
WATER HEATER
F3
-
W4
W4
WI/W4
WI
C3-1
9-0
109
WOMENS
F2
B2
W6
W6
W7/W8
W8
C3-2
9-0
110
SHOWER
F4
B2
-
W7
W7
W7
C2
7-4
3
III
YARD STORAGE
F3
-
W4
W4
W4
W4
C1
2
112
HOSE STOR/MUD RM
F3
-
W4
W4
W4
W4
C1
9-8
113
RINSE
F3
-
W4
W4
W4
W4
C1
114
RISER
F3
-
W4
I W4
W4
W4
C1
2
115
LINEN
F2
131
W4
-
W1
W1
C3-1
9-0
116
HOSE DRYER
F3
-
W3
W3
W3
W3
C3-1
9-4
117
ELECTRICAL
F3
-
W4
W4
W4
W4
C3-1
9-0
3
118
SHOWER
F4
132
W7
W7
W7
-
C2
7-4
3
119
SHOWER
F4
132
W7
W7
W7
W7
C2
7-4
120
MENS
F2
132
W6/W8
W6
W8/W6
W8
C3-2
9-0
121
OFFICERS QUARTERS
F2
131
WI
W1
W1
WI
C3- l
9-0
122
EXERCISE
F1
B1
W4
Wl
W1
W1
C3-1
9-0
123
HALL
F2
131
W4/W1
W4/
W1
W4
W1/
W4
C3-1
9-0
03860201
08/02
FINISH SCHEDULE
09916 -2
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1. FLOOR
4.
CEILINGS
F 1 =
CARPET
Cl
= PAINTED STRUCTURE
F2 =
RESILENT SHEET FLOORING
C2
= CER TILE ON CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARD
F3 =
SEALED CONC W/ HARDENER
C3
= ACOUSTICAL LAY -IN; REFER SECTION 09511 IN SPECS
F4 =
UNGLAZED CERAMIC MOSAIC TILE
1 = SYSTEM 1
F5 =
SOLID VINYL TILE
2 = SYSTEM 2
3 = SYSTEM 3
2. BASE
B 1 =
4" RESILIENT 5.
REMARKS
B2 =
CERAMIC TILE (COVED)
1
CLG VARIES FROM 20'-4" TO 25'-8"
2
PNT ALL DUCT WORK, CONDUIT, J-BOXES, UNISTRUT BRACING
3. WALLS
& PIPING, UNO
W 1 =
GWB, PNT (LATEX, SG ENAMEL)
3
MARBLE THRESHOLD @ TRANSITION FROM CER TILE TO SHT VINYL
W2 =
NOT USED
W3 =
CMU, BLK FILLER, EPDXY PNT (SG)
W4 =
CMU, BLK FILLER, LATEX SG ENAMEL
W5 =
NOT USED
W6 =
CER TILE WAINSCOT TO NOM 4'-8';
CMU W/ BLK FILLER & EPDXY PNT
FROM 4'-8" TO CLG
W7 =
CER TILE ON CMU
W8 =
CER TILE WAINSCOT ON MOISTURE
RESISTANT GWB TO NOM 4'-8";
GWB, PNT, EPDXY FROM 4'-8" TO CLG
END OF SECTION
03860201 FINISH SCHEDULE 09916 - 3
08/02
No Text
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 10162
r. BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Compartments.
2. Screens.
B. Related Sections:
1. Grouting of masonry for compartment anchorage: Division 4.
2. Toilet accessories: Elsewhere in Division 10.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 167-94 -- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1994.
B. ASTM A 5 91 /A 5 91 M-89 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc -Coated,
for Light Coating Mass Applications; 1989.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit written technical information for each distinct panel system indicated.
Include data on hardware, accessories, leveling -and -anchorage devices, and fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings detailing construction of compartments.
1. Show layout of panels and associated hardware and accessories.
2. Include details showing panel connections, anchorage, and support systems.
C. Panel Color Verification Samples: Submit 6-inch-square samples of each panel finish type and
color to be installed.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for each product specified in this section. Include
instructions for examination, preparation, and protection of adjacent work.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit for each product specified in this section. Include instructions for
cleaning and preventive maintenance.
?11" 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
t
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products
specified in this section, and whose products have been in satisfactory use under similar service
conditions for not less than. 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in installation of products specified in
this section, with a minimum of 5 years of experience.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: If possible, determine field measurements before beginning shop
fabrication. Wherever field measurements have not been made before fabrication, provide
components capable of adjustment during installation.
03860201 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panel
systems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those system
components and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation into other
work.
B. Refer to Division 1 for coordination drawing requirements.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SYSTEMS
A. Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the following
panel systems at locations indicated on the drawings:
1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, floor -anchored and
overhead -braced.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard panels fabricated for installations indicated. Provide
internal reinforcement as required for hardware and accessories. Premachine panels for field
installation.
B. Steel over Honeycomb Core - Baked Enamel Finish:
1. Steel sheets: ASTM A 591, Coating Class C, galvanized - bonderized:
a. Minimum sheet thickness for panels: 20 gage.
b. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 20 gage (overhead -braced application).
C. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 16 gage.
d. Minimum sheet thickness for doors: 22 gage.
2. Core material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb.
3. Panel fabrication: Use single steel sheet for each face plate and laminate both face plates
under pressure to core material. At full length of panel perimeter, form edges of each
face plate to interlock directly with opposing face plate, or form edges to receive
additional molding strip. If molding strip is used, provide one continuous molding strip
for each panel edge. Provide manufacturer's standard neatly -made and finished corners.
a. Minimum finished thickness:
1) Panels: 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2) Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch.
3) Doors: 1 inch.
b. Internal anchorage reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 12 gage.
C. Internal tapping reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 14 gage.
d. Finish:
1) Provide baked, rust -inhibiting prime coat and a minimum of 2
electrostatically -applied coats of thermosetting baked enamel.
4. Panel colors: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's complete
set of standard colors.
5. Hardware, accessories, and mounting brackets: Manufacturer's standard styles. The
following materials will be acceptable:
a. Chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac").
03860201 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
6. Manufacturers: -Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements
of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a.
Accurate Partitions Corporation.
b.
All American Metal Corporation.
C.
American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
d.
Flush -Metal Partition Corporation.
e.
General Partitions Manufacturing Corporation.
f.
Global Steel Products Corporation.
g.
Knickerbocker Partition Corporation.
h.
Metpar Corp.
i.
Monarch Toilet Partition, Inc.
j.
The Sanymetal Products Company, Inc.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to properly install panel systems
indicated.
1. Hinge: Self -closing, pivot type hinge, recess -mounted within door; adjustable to permit
door to rest at any angle.
2. Leveling -and -anchorage devices: Rust -resistant steel devices as recommended by panel
manufacturer for installation of panels in conditions indicated.
3. Pilaster shoes: ASTM A 167 (Type 302/304) minimum 20 gage stainless steel, finish to
match compartment hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches.
4. Fasteners: Tamper -resistant rust -proof, exposed fasteners as recommended by panel
manufacturer for installation of panels and hardware in conditions indicated. Finish to
match hardware.
5. Overhead bracing: 'Antigrip headrail bracing fabricated from continuous extruded
aluminum, clear anodized finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions conform to requirements of contract documents.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
C. Verify locations of plumbing fixtures to determine placement of panel assemblies.
D. Verify that anchorage devices, provided by panel manufacturer to installers of related work,
have been properly installed and aligned.
E. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of panel system installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more
restrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions.
B. Secure panels using number and type of brackets recommended by manufacturer for conditions
indicated. Clearances exceeding 1 inch between panels and walls are not acceptable.
1. Panels attached to unit masonry walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage
fasteners penetrate joints, not masonry units.
F
03860201 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2. Panels attached to tile -faced walls: Where possible, place brackets so that anchorage
1. fasteners penetrate joints, not tiles.
C. Compartments: --
1. Securely attach panels to pilasters using manufacturer's recommended number and type
of brackets. Align brackets with corresponding brackets at wall connections. Clearances
exceeding 1/2 inch between panels and pilasters are not acceptable. Provide level, plumb
installation.
2. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced compartments: Anchor pilasters to floor using
manufacturer's recommended leveling -and -anchorage devices. Conceal attachment by
installing pilaster shoe at each pilaster. Install overhead bracing using a minimum of 2
fasteners per pilaster. Install panels.
a. Compartments with doors: Properly align door. Top edge of closed compartment _
door must be parallel with overhead bracing member.
D. Screens:
1. Form solid connection between panel system and building structure using manufacturer's
recommended devices for conditions indicated. Anchorage must be designed to support ._
weight of panels without damaging building finishes. Provide level, plumb installation.
Provide screens capable of resisting impacts and stresses imposed during anticipated use
and maintenance.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Mount items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operating Hardware:
1. In -swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle
approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched.
2. Out -swinging door: Adjust hinges to automatically bring door to rest at an angle
approximately 30 degrees from fully closed position when door is not latched.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean panel system components using manufacturer's recommended procedures and cleaning
agents.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed components from damage until project completion.
END OF SECTION
03860201 BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10162-4
08/02 ._
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 10425
SIGNS
PART 1-GENERAL
6. 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dimensional letters and numbers.
B. Provide signage as indicated on the drawings.
C. Related Sections:
1. Temporary project signs: Division 1.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM B 584-91 -- Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General
Applications; 1991.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of sign specified, including details of construction relative
to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
B. Shop drawings:
1. Show fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections
of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout,
reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.
2. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and
lettering layout.
3. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed
as a unit of Work in other Sections.
4. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional
letters and numbers.
C. Samples:
1. Submit manufacturer's full range of samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and
texture.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication where necessary to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings.
{
r
03860201 SIGNS 10425 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated
for size, style, spacing, content, position, material, finishes, and colors of letters, numbers, and
other graphic devices.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Coatings: Alloy and temper as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of use
indicated and finish specified. _
B. Metal Fasteners: Use metals that are not corrosive to the sign material or mounting surface.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot -dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or
lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work.
2.3 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with
integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide "-
color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the architect from the manufacturer's
standards.
2.4 DIMENSIONAL, LETTERS AND NUMBERS
A. Cast Letters and Numbers: _
1. Form individual letters and numbers by casting.
2. Produce characters with smooth, flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and
profiles, free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other defects. v
3. Cast lugs into the back of characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Comply
with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.
4. Metal:
a. Aluminum.
B. Finish:
1. Catalized Polyurethane, color as selected.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: —
1. Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type
described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from
distortion or other defects in appearance.
03860201 SIGNS 10425 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Dimensional Letters and Numbers:
1. Mount letters and numbers using standard fastening methods recommended by the
manufacturer for letter form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of
exposure indicated.
2. Provide heavy paper template to establish letter spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.
3. Mount letters with back projected from wall surface 1/2".
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
n
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect
units from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION
r.
r-
ram.
03860201 SIGNS 10425 - 3
08/02
E
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 10505
---
METAL LOCKERS
PART
1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Heavy duty metal lockers.
B. Work Not Included:
1. Padlocks: Provided by the owner.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
A. Heavy Duty: This term is used to designate a particular type of locker specified in this section,
regardless of individual manufacturer designations.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
,.
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts, dimensions, trim, fillers, and accessories.
1. Indicate installation and anchoring methods.
^,
2. Show verified field measurements.
3. Show locker numbering scheme.
C. Samples for Color Selection: Locker manufacturer's full range of colors.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Fit lockers neatly to actual construction; take field measurements before fabrication.
r�
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive lockers are clean and dry.
B. Protect lockers from damage.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1
LOCKER CONFIGURATIONS AND COMPONENTS
A. Lockers:
1. Location: Apparatus Bay
2. Fully welded construction.
3. Heavy duty.
4. Single -tier.
5. Height: 72 inches, plus legs.
6. Width: 18 inches
7. Depth: 24 inches
03860201 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1
.,
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
8. Legs: 6 inches high.
9. Doors: Expanded metal mesh.
10. Sides, bottoms and vertical dividers: Expanded metal mesh.
11. Shelves: Expanded metal mesh.
12. Top: Flat.
13. Door handles.
14. Shelf.
15. Two wall hooks.
2.2 HEAVY DUTY LOCKERS
A. Provide all heavy duty lockers and accessories by one manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. American Locker Security Systems, Inc.
b. Art Metal Products Division/Fort Knox Storage.
C. List Industries Inc.
d. Penco products, Inc.
e. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc.
B. Components:
1. Frames: 16 gage steel sheet channels or 13 gage steel angles, minimum.
2. Legs: Extend vertical frame members or attach gusset -type legs of not less than 14 gage
steel sheet.
3. Tops: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum.
4. Bottoms: 13 gage, 3/4 inch, flattened diamond steel mesh.
5. Horizontal dividers: 16 gage steel sheet, minimum.
6. Expanded metal sides and vertical dividers: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel
mesh.
7. Backs: 13 gage, 3/4-inch, flattened diamond steel mesh.
8. Expanded metal doors: 13 gage, 3/4-inch flattened diamond steel mesh.
9. Door handles: Standard type.
10. Latching mechanism: Concealed in door, designed so that door can be closed while
locked, with spring -loaded latches engaging beveled strikes on frame.
a. Doors over 36 inches high: Three-point latching, minimum.
C. Miscellaneous Components and Trim: 18 gage steel sheet, minimum.
D. Fabrication: Weld all joints between frame members and weld sheet members to frame; weld
latching mechanism and hinges to doors and frames; use no bolts or rivets.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Cold -rolled, leveled mild steel.
B. Expanded Metal Mesh: Steel, with 3/4-inch flattened mesh gages as indicated.
C. Fasteners: Zinc-, cadmium-, or nickel -plated steel or stainless steel.
1. Exposed bolt heads: Tamperproof type.
2. For fastening moving components: Use lock washers or self-locking nuts.
D. Hinges: 5-knuckle, nonremovable-pin hinges, of loop style with 2 full thicknesses in each leaf;
minimum 2 inches high.
1. Minimum of 2 hinges per door.
2. Doors over 42 inches high: Three hinges.
03860201 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2
08/02
C"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r7
E. Standard Door Handles: Die-cast zinc alloy or chrome -plated steel latch lifter and padlock hasp,
designed so that door can be closed while locked; pry -resistant.
�-- F. Interior Fittings: Cadmium- or zinc -plated steel or cast aluminum, except shelves.
G. Number Plates: Aluminum, zinc alloy, or stainless steel; raised or recessed numerals at least 3/8
inch high.
., 1. Number lockers as directed by the architect.
2. Fasten to doors, centered near the top, using 2 fasteners.
2.4 FABRICATION - ALL LOCKERS
A. Factory -fabricate and fully assemble lockers; do not knock down for shipping.
B. Make lockers square with rigid joints, without dents or warped surfaces.
1. Exposed metal edges: Smooth off sharp edges and corners.
2. Exposed welds: Grind flush.
3. Door and frame fronts: No exposed bolts or rivet heads.
4. Where exposed holes for built-in locks are not used, cover holes neatly using permanent
materials.
C. Doors: Fabricate with flanged edges, reinforced if required for stiffness, and designed to open
and close without springing.
1. Provide extra stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide.
D. Legs: Provide means of fastening to curb.
E. Expanded Metal Components: Weld edges to steel frames at not less than 6 inches on center;
enclose sharp edges with frame.
F. Miscellaneous Components: Provide all parts, filler panels, closures, clips, and fasteners
required for a complete installation.
G. Finishing: Pretreat and finish all surfaces, both exposed and concealed, except stainless steel,
chrome, and aluminum.
1. Factory -finish all accessory components to match.
2. Pretreatment: Remove scale, rust, and contaminants; chemically degrease and
phosphatize.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked -on enamel.
4. Color: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean debris from under and behind lockers before installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install lockers plumb and level.
B. Anchor lockers securely to substrates in manner recommended by manufacturer.
1. Use reinforcing plates and spacers as required to prevent metal distortion.
2. Provide anchors at not more than 48 inches on center.
3. Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
C. Install accessory components with flush, tight joints using concealed fasteners.
d
03860201 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 3
„0 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors and latches for smooth operation. --
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean and touch up finishes; if finish cannot be restored to original appearance, replace locker.
B. Use only cleaning and touch-up materials recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03860201 METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 4
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 10521
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Included:
1. Portable fire extinguishers.
2. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL); 1993.
B. NFPA 10 - Standard For Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association;
1994.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data showing compliance with contract documents.
B. Certification: Installer shall submit written certification that the fire extinguishers installed
comply with the contract documents and are fully and correctly charged.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide only fire extinguishers which comply with NFPA 10.
B. Labels: Provide only fire extinguishers which are listed and labeled by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install extinguishers until just before substantial completion.
B. Do not use permanent fire extinguishers for construction period fire protection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Fire extinguishers:
a. Amerex Corporation.
b. Ansul Fire Protection/A Grinnell Company.
C. American Specialties, Inc.
d. J.L. Industries
e. Larsen's Mfg. Co.
' 03860599 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Rating:4A:60B:C
2. Type: Multipurpose dry chemical (ammonium phosphate).
a. Stored pressure type.
3. Wall mounted.
C. Identification of Wall -Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl decal -
on wall above extinguisher.
D. Brackets: Provide wall bracket for each wall -mounted extinguisher.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Install extinguishers in locations indicated.
C. Install brackets for wall mounted extinguishers at height indicated.
3.2 SCHEDULE
Room # Extinguisher
101 Wall mtd.
102 Wall mtd.
107 Wall mtd.
END OF SECTION
03860599 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10521 - 2
08/02 -_
a
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r-R
SECTION 10810
r-a
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Toilet paper dispensers.
2. Grab bars.
3. Robe hooks.
4. Mop and broom holders.
5. Minors.
6. Coat hooks.
7. Shower doors.
B. Related Sections:
-
1. Shower Doors: Division 10.
2. Metal anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6.
3. Wood anchor reinforcement in walls: Division 6.
.,
4. Toilet compartments: Division 10.
5. Rough carpentry: Division 6.
1.2
REFERENCES
-
A. ASTM C 1036-91 -- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 1991.
B. FS DD-M-411 C -- Mirrors, Glass; 1990.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Written technical information for each accessory specified.
B. Certificates: Submit certification that work complies with requirements of contract documents.
C.
"^
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A company regularly engaged in manufacture of products
c`^
specified in this section, whose products have been in satisfactory use, under similar service
'
conditions, for not less than 5 years.
.,
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Execute product manufacturer's special instructions to prevent damage to products. Store
products in manufacturer's original shipping containers.
03860201 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Use manufacturer's instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for products --
specified. In a timely manner, distribute the following to affected installers of related work:
1. Components and anchorage devices provided by toilet accessory manufacturer for
incorporation into other work.
2. Coordination data including setting drawings, templates, instructions, etc., for cutouts
and installations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with
requirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. A & J Washroom Accessories.
2. American Specialties, Inc.
3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
4. Bradley Corporation.
5. Franklin Brass Manufacturing Company.
6. McKinney/Parker, Inc., a Subsidiary of Essex Industries, Inc.
7. American Shower Door.
2.2 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. Regardless of whether or not the SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every toilet
accessory scheduled for each room or shower, provide all components required to make each
toilet or shower room functional based on accessories scheduled for similar spaces and the
referenced codes.
B. Toilet Paper Dispenser (TPD): _
1. Description:
a. Type: Double -roll.
b. Spindleless unit, tension spring delivery, chrome -plated zinc alloy.
C. Tissue roll size: 5 inches diameter. -`
C. Grab Bar (GB):
1. Description:
a. Stainless steel.
b. Outside diameter: 1-1/2 inches.
C. Wall thickness: Minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch).
d. Grasping surface finish: Smooth, satin.
e. Mounting: Exposed.
f. Clearance between wall and inside of grab bar: 1-1/2 inches.
D. Robe Hook (RH):
1. Double -prong type.
E. Mop and Broom Holder (MBH):
1. Description:
a. 18 gage (0.050-inch) stainless steel ASTM A 167, Type 304, hat -shaped channel.
b. Holders: 4 spring -loaded rubber cam holders.
C. Length: 36 inches.
03860201 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
F. Mirror (MM):
1. Description:
a. Type: Stainless steel -framed mirror.
b. Mirror material: Float glass 1/4 inch thick, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1,
Quality ql. Apply silvering, copper coating, and suitable protective organic
coating to copper backing, and test mirror glass, in accordance with FS
DD-M-411 C.
C. Frame: Form frame using minimum 18 gage (0.050 inch) angle shapes. Provide
welded, precisely -mitered corners. Grind welds smooth.
d. Protection for mirror edges: Design frame to accept protective mirror -edging
materials such as plastic, wood, etc.
e. Backing system: Provide tamperproof backing system capable of preventing
moisture buildup and providing rigid support for mirror material. Fabricate from
full -mirror sized, minimum 22 gage (0.034 inch) galvanized steel sheet and
nonabsorptive filler material. Do not use corrugated cardboard for filler.
f Hanger System: Provide tamperproof hanging system for rigid mirror installation:
k , 1) One-piece spring -action locking device fabricated from galvanized steel
and designed to support mirror of size indicated, without use of exposed
fasteners.
g. Frame finish: Number 4 satin polish.
G. Towel Bars: Heavy duty, chrome plated (TB).
r- H. Coat Hooks (CH):
1. Back plate with three hooks, heavy duty.
I. Shower Dock (SHD):
.., 1. 1/4" tempered glass meeting or exceeding ANSI 297.1 and 16 DFR 1201 category I and
II.
2. Aluminum Frame:
.., a. 6063 — T5 alloy.
b. Silver color.
3. Hardware shall be aluminum with brite silver finish.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Mounting Devices and Fasteners: Provide toilet accessory manufacturer's recommended items
for substrates and conditions indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer's Trademarks and Model Numbers: Neither name nor trademark of manufacturer
is acceptable on exposed surfaces of accessories, unless approved by the architect. Permanently
affix manufacturer's name and model number to unexposed surface of accessory.
B. Surface Mounted Accessories: Where possible, design accessory to provide concealed
anchorage when installed. Precisely -fit seams and joints. Roll exposed edges unless indicated
otherwise. Use full-length stainless steel piano -type hinges for access doors and panels.
C. Recess Mounted Accessories: Design accessories to provide concealed anchorage when closed.
Weld all joints. Precisely miter corners where indicated. Use full-length stainless steel
piano -type hinges for access doors and panels.
03860201 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 3
,, , 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other work to avoid interference and
to ensure proper operation and servicing of accessories. Notify the architect in writing of any -`
conflicts concerning product placement, for resolution. Do not proceed without resolution.
B. Correct unsatisfactory substrate conditions before start of accessory installation.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces to receive accessories. Protect surrounding elements from damage during
accessory installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, except where more
stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require
extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work.
B. Provide plumb, level accessory installations.
C. Securely attach accessories to substrate.
D. Accessories Installed for Use by Handicapped Persons: Install as indicated on drawings.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust accessories as required to provide smooth operation and trouble free servicing.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean and polish exposed surfaces of accessories using accessory manufacturer's recommended
procedures and cleaning agents. -_
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide coverings as required to protect installed accessories.
3.7 SCHEDULE
Rm # TPD GB RH MBH MM TB CH SHD
109 1 3 1 1 1
112 1 3
118 1 1 1
119 1 1 1 ,
120 ; 2 2; 2 1 2
END OF SECTION
03860201 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10810 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 12511
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Horizontal louver blinds.
2. The locations of window treatment are indicated on the drawings.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications describing features, colors, options, accessories,
for each type of unit.
1. Include installation instructions and show how installation methods may differ for
different openings and mounting substrates.
B. Samples:
1. For color selection: Color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available.
C. Certificates: For information only, submit manufacturer's written certification stating
compliance with requirements for the following:
1. Physical properties indicated.
D. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Operation and maintenance data: Include manufacturer's written operation and
maintenance instructions.
E. Warranty: For information, include specimen of manufacturer's written warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer qualifications: A company manufacturing all components of products
specified in this section which have performed in a satisfactory manner for at least 3
years.
2. Installer qualifications: Company specializing in fabrication and installation of specified
products, with at least 2 years of experience fabricating and installing similar products.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name and location
of installation.
B. Store materials in dry area maintained at building's operating temperature and humidity.
C. Follow manufacturer's instructions to prevent damage.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Do not install window treatment until wet and dirty work is complete.
03860201 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit manufacturer's standard 2 year warranty, which shall not reduce or otherwise limit any
other rights to correction which the owner may have under the contract documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
A. Head Rail: Formed steel channel section, enclosing tilt and lift mechanisms; minimum 24 gage
sheet; long edges returned or rolled; with reinforcing as required for rigidity.
1. Enclose all hardware required for blind operation in headrail.
2. Finish rails the same color as louvers.
B. Bottom Rail: Finish to match louvers.
1. Formed steel rail, designed not to twist or sag.
2. Curve top of rail to match louver radius.
3. Cap ends with plastic or metal caps; color to match rail.
C. Louvers: Aluminum minimum 0.006 inch thick, curved cross-section with smooth round
corners.
1. Width: As indicated; size other parts to fit.
a. 1 /2 inch (15 mm) nominal.
2. Design and space louvers to minimize light penetration when closed.
D. Ladders: Hold louvers at correct spacing and angle in all tilt positions.
1. Braided polyester cord ladder; verticals of 0.04 to 0.07 inch diameter; horizontals of not
less than 2 threads braided into verticals; spaced to prevent long-term louver sag, but not
over 24 inches apart and not over 7 inches from ends of louvers.
E. Tilt Mechanism: Hold louvers at any tilt angle despite normal building vibration; worm gear
that disengages at limits of tilt with low friction tilter; provide drum at each ladder, linkage rod,
and grommets for ladder and operating cords.
1. Tilt wand: Clear plastic, detachable; length as necessary to make operation convenient
from floor level.
F. Lift Mechanism: Lift cords of nylon or polyester with pulls; cord lock that holds bottom rail
securely at any level; cord separators.
G. Brackets: Design for easy removal and re -installation of blind.
1. Design to withstand dead weight and operating stresses.
2. Provide brackets at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer.
3. Include fasteners appropriate for substrate.
H. Accessories:
1. Hold-downs: Provide two brackets at lowest position of bottom rail, engaging hook or
pin on bottom rail end caps. —
I. Finish: All components factory -finished.
I . Steel: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by galvanizing, and phosphatizing or priming.
2. Aluminum: Baked -on enamel finish; prepared by chemical conversion coating.
3. Concealed components: Corrosion -resistant finish.
4. Pattern/color: Selected by architect, after contract award, from manufacturer's standard
pattems/colors.
5. Exposed items other than louvers: Match color of rails.
03860201 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12511 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r',
2.2
J. Manufacturers:
1. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
a. Hunter Douglas, Inc./Window Covering Division.
b. Kirsch Company.
C. Levelor Corporation.
d. Springs Window Fashions (Bali/Graber).
FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to fit actual construction; take field measurements of openings before starting
fabrication.
B. Use materials that are compatible, will not need to be lubricated, and which will not adversely
affect adjacent materials.
C. Make blinds fill each opening completely, from jamb to jamb and from head to sill, with a
single blind unit, unless multiple units are specifically indicated.
D. Horizontal Louver Blinds:
1. Space ladders in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Space louvers to positively overlap when closed.
3. Provide fully tilting louvers, approximately 180 degrees of rotation.
4. Install tilt control on left side when facing interior side of blind.
5. Install lift cords on right side when facing interior side of blind.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates at locations in which window blinds will be installed. Do not begin
installation until conditions are correct.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Set units in correct location, plumb, and level; allow clearance for window operating hardware.
C. Fasten securely to substrates.
D. Separate metal components from concrete and masonry using plastic tape or other suitable
material.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust each blind for proper operation.
B. Replace defective and damaged units.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed work.
03860201
08/02
END OF SECTION
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
12511 - 3
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 12621
•-y MARKER BOARDS
., PART 1 - GENERAL
- 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fixed units.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's technical data.
2. Manufacturer's installation and breaking -in instructions.
3. Color charts showing full range of standard colors.
4. Test reports demonstrating compliance with specified requirements.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide dimensioned elevations of each configuration of board.
2. Show sections of trim members. Key to elevations.
3. Show anchorage and any necessary grounds.
4. Show layout and installation details.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications:
1. Not less than 5 years of experience in manufacturing products of the type specified.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Deliver boards only when interior air and substrates have reached equilibrium moisture
and temperature approximating that of normal occupied conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply with requirements of the
contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:
1. Fixed units:
a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
b. Greensteel Division/Information Display Technology, Inc.
C. Lemco, Inc.
d. Peninsular Slate Company.
03860201 MARKER BOARDS 12621-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain -Enamel Marker Boards: High -pressure -laminated composite construction.
1. Facing sheet:
a. Manufacturer's option of enameling processes listed:
1) Steel: Special quality enameling iron or steel, low metalloid and copper
content for temperature over 1,400 degrees suitable for coating porcelain
on steel for architectural purposes; chemically bathed and rinsed before
enameling. Porcelain writing surface: Nickel Cobalt primer 0.002 inches -
minimum thickness, writing surface 0.0025 inches minimum thickness.
Opposite surface: Nickel cobalt ground coat 0.002 inches minimum
thickness for silica spray coat for lamination adhesion. Total finish
thickness 0.004 inches minimum thickness. Panel edges at butt joints
porcelain coated.
2) Proprietary process using Type 1 stretcher -leveled aluminized steel sheet
with enamel fired at approximately 1000 degrees F.
b. Minimum thickness: 24 gage.
C. Marker board cover coat:
1) Manufacturer's standard gloss finish.
B. Colors of boards and trim: As selected by the architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Construct units as follows:
1. Fixed unit. --
2. Writing surface: Porcelain -enamel marker board.
3. Board size: 4 feet by 6 feet
4. Unit frames: --
a. Anodized, satin finish aluminum tubing.
b. Full-length chalk tray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ASSEMBLY
A. Assemble units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Joints shall be neat and tight -fitting.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect boards from damage until substantial completion.
END OF SECTION
03860201 MARKER BOARDS 12621-2
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
W
SECTION 15000
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions, and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and
materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of complete and
operating mechanical systems as required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings,
subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the completion
of such mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the
successful operation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these
specifications; this includes the furnishing all materials for the filling the systems to make them
operable, including water, refrigerant, oil and grease. Prove satisfactory operation of all
equipment and controls to the Engineer on request.
B. Work not included — Certain labor, material and equipment may be furnished and/or installed
under other divisions of these specifications. This Contractor shall coordinate with other trades
and arrange his work to make the part fit together. The following items are to be accomplished
under other divisions of these specifications:
1. Temporary Heat: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
2. Temporary Water and Toilet: Refer to General Conditions.
3. Roof Curbs: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
4. Electrical Equipment and Wiring: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
5. Concrete: Refer to paragraph in this Section.
C. Equipment Furnished by Owner — Rough -in services pipes to locations as required by
architectural and mechanical drawings and equipment shop drawings. Provide service valves
on all pipes except waste and vent pipes. Plug and cap all waste and vent pipes. Final
Connection to equipment will be made by this Contractor.
1.3 BIDDING
A. All mechanical equipment shall be new unless specified otherwise in the specifications or on
the drawings.
B. All bids must be based only on the equipment and materials as scheduled on the drawings and
as specified or on equivalent equipment and materials from a preapproved alternative
manufacturer. No bid may be based on a substituted or other alternative without specific
written prior approval from the Engineer. Any Contractor who assumes equivalence of
products and who bases his bid on that assumption does so at his own risk.
C. A listing of approved alternative manufacturers does not mean that all products of a particular
alternative manufacturer are acceptable alternative to the scheduled items; it merely means that
for bidding prior approval is not required. All fixtures and devices must still be submitted
according to the prescribed procedures. In addition, some items that have an important visual
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 1
'1: 17
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
affect, e.g. electric water coolers, may be required to receive Owner's or Architectural approval
also.
1.4 EXISTING UTILITIES
A. The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities within the site where
known. These utilities are indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any
utilities during construction which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written
instructions from the Architect. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be directed by
a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for protection of all utilities,
shown or not, and for repair required by this construction.
B. Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any other pertinent data of the
existing utilities. Additional costs incurred due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate
associated work with respective utility providers shall not be the Owner's responsibility but
shall be borne by the Contractor.
C. All costs associated with providing utilities including, but not limited to, connection fees,
boring under roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractor's bid price whether such costs are
incurred by Contractor or charged by the utility company.
D. Submission of a bid by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by the contractor
of his compliance with this section.
1.5 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
A. Contractor shall comply with all local, state and national codes and shall pay for all applicable
costs, fees, permits, licenses and inspections for this division.
1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT
A. Temporary heat will be furnished by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent heating
system will not be allowed without written authorization from the Engineer, Architect, and
Owner. In case the permanent heating system is used for temporary heat, the General Contractor
shall pay all the costs until acceptance by the Owner. Warranty of equipment shall not start until
acceptance by the Owner.
1.7 DRAWINGS
A. Contract drawings are diagrammatic only and are not intended to be scaled for dimensions. All
dimensions shall be taken from Architectural drawings, certified equipment drawings and from
the structure itself before fabricating and work. All space requirements shall be verified,
coordinated with other trades, as it is the various Contractor's responsibility to install the
systems complete in the space provided without extra charges to the Owner.
B. It is intended that anything, whether labor and materials, which is usually furnished as part of
any equipment specified and which is necessary for operation shall be furnished as part of the
Contract without additional cost, whether or not shown or described.
C. All piping in finished areas of the building shall be concealed except where otherwise noted
on the drawings.
D. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, unless
approval is given in writing by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for deviation.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
.•,
1.8 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
A. The mechanical work shall be performed in strict accordance with the local and state codes,
ordinances, and regulations governing the particular work involved. Furnish, without extra
charge, any additional material, and labor when and where required to comply with these Rules
and Regulations, though the work is not mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the
Drawings. When the Specifications or Drawings call for or describe materials or construction
of a better quality or larger sizes than required by the above mentioned Rules and Regulations,
the provisions of these Specifications and accompanying Drawings shall take precedence.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them with licensing
required by the inspecting authority. All welders must have been certified within the past three
years to perform the work, which they are doing.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. All materials and equipment shall be new unless otherwise specified.
B. Guarantee all workmanship, material, and equipment and replace any found defective without
cost to the Owner, for ONE year after final acceptance, as defined in General Conditions.
C. Each warranty for longer than one year as described above (that comes with equipment used
on the job) shall be passed into the Owner in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, along
with the dates of start and end of warranty.
D. Refer to General Conditions for additional information regarding specific warranty
requirements.
1.11 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Before final payment, provide the Architect with one clean set of drawings and specifications
corrected up-to-date as job progress. These documents shall reflect the As -Built conditions.
Refer to General Conditions for additional information.
1.12 SUBMITTALS
A.
The intent of this section is to give general submittal information, refer to specific submittal
information in the subsequent mechanical sections.
B.
Within 10 days after award of the contract, and before orders are placed, Contractor shall
submit specific information on list of equipment and principal materials specified. Contractor
shall indicate and/or provide names of manufacturers, catalog, and model numbers, cut sheets,
and such other supplementary information as necessary for evaluation. Minimum of six (6)
copies, or as directed by the Engineer, of each shall be submitted and shall include all items
mentioned by model number and/or manufacturer's name in the specifications or in schedules
on the drawings.
C.
Requirements for each submittal:
1. Bear a dated stamp or specific written indication that the Contractor has reviewed and
approved all submittal prior to submission to Engineer,
2. Have all information deleted by Contractor that pertains to the means and methods of
construction or to fabrication, assembly, installation, or erection (approval by Engineer
shall not extend to these areas unless specifically noted by Engineer),
03860201
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Be CLEARLY and SPECIFICALLY marked as to which specific piece of equipment
is being submitted, bye use of a permanent marker, stamp, etc., so as to distinguish it
from other pieces of equipment that may occur on the same page,
4. Be CLEARLY marked as to which available options are being submitted that are
associated with a piece of equipment, and
5. Be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specific performance, materials, and
similar data to enable the Engineer to review the proposed equipment.
Omission by Contractor of any of the above requirements or submittals will subject submittal
to automatic rejection without review.
Any submittals received by Engineer that were not requested shall be returned without review
of any kind.
D. Installation Instructions - For certain products or systems as identified in subsequent
specifications sections or on the drawings, the Contractor shall be required to provide copies
of manufacturer's installation instructions with the submittal. When required as such, the
installation instructions are considered part of the submittal and their omission may result in
automatic rejection of the submittal. Where more than one identical device are scheduled, only
one set of installation instructions needs to be submitted, e.g. if seven five -ton split systems air
conditions are scheduled, only one five -ton unit installation instruction needs to be submitted.
Similarly, if one set of installation instructions is identified by the manufacturer and on the
instructions to be applicable to more than one type or size of devices, e.g. if one set of air
conditioner instructions is good for three, four, five -ton units, then only one instruction set is
required for these devices.
1.13 SUBSTITUTED PRODUCTS
A. Material or equipment specified by Manufacturer's name is being used as a basis of standard.
No substitution is allowable without Engineer's written approval ten (10) days prior to bid due
date unless the manufacturer is listed on the drawings or in the specification as being a
preapproved alternative manufacturer. Any submittal received without such written approval _
or prior approval is subject to unqualified rejection.
B. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify that submitted substitute equipment will fit
in space available. The contractor's submittal for acceptance of the substitute shall include a
written statement of whether or not such acceptance would require any subsequent or associated
changes to the drawings or specifications. Any such changes shall be described in writing,
briefly but complete.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any such modifications due to substitution
of materials or equipment for that which was specified or scheduled. The cost shall be
complete, that is, it shall include the cost affect of any and all other trades.
D. The Engineer may request detailed shop drawing or plan layouts of mechanical rooms or
systems of the substituted equipment.
1.14 SAFETY
A. General — Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work, and Contractor shall comply with all
laws governing safety, specifically the "Occupational Safety and Health Standards" and the
"Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", state and federal.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. According to OSHA, a hazardous chemical is any chemical, which is a physical hazard or a
health hazard. This may include items such as paints, solvents, adhesives, sealants, cleaners,
etc. If a contractor produces, uses, or stores hazardous chemicals at the workplace, them
contractor shall develop, implement, and maintain a hazard communication program in
compliance with the latest OSHA requirements. In projects with multiple tenants in which the
building is partially occupied during all or part of the project, Contractor shall inform the
building manager or Owner, according to OSHA guidelines, of any hazardous chemicals being
produced, stored, or used in the building so that other tenants may be notified. Contractor shall
employ required methods of training, information, handling, ventilation, labeling, storing,
disposal, and removal of hazardous chemicals.
1.15 LABELING
A. Each device for which an independent testing authority has established a standard shall have
affixed a label indicating its compliance and listing. Refer to General Conditions for list of such
independent testing authorities.
1.16 SITE VISIT REPORTS
A. During the course of the job, the Engineer will make site visits to observe work in progress and
will subsequently prepare a written site visit report, which will be sent to the Contractor and
to whomever else the Engineer desires. The Contractor shall prepare a written and typed
response within seven (7) calendar days of his receiving the site visit report. The General
Contractor shall include in his response the following information.
l . Date of site visit by the Engineer,
2. Date of receipt of the site visit report,
3. Name and title of the preparer of the response,
4. An item number referenced to the site report,
5. A brief three or four word description of the item,
6. The Contractor or Subcontractor affected,
7. The proposed course of action, and
8. An expected time of completion of the action.
1.17 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. No joists, beams, girders, columns, slabs, or other structural elements shall be cut, drilled, or
altered in any way by the Contractor without first obtaining written permission and instructions
from the Engineer and Architect.
' B. Where it is necessary to cut through any non-structural elements of walls, floors, or ceilings to
permit the installation of any work under this contract, or to repair any defects that may appear
.-. up to expiration of the guarantee, such cutting shall be done by the Contractor with as little
damage as reasonably possible to the element being cut or to adjacent elements.
C. After the necessary work has been completed, the damage shall be repaired by the respective
Contractor, who shall pay all costs of such cutting, repairs, and patching. All patching or
sealing of cuts, penetrations, etc., including final appearance of same, shall be done to the
approval of the Engineer and Architect.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and of specified quality, unless specifically noted otherwise.
Materials shall be free from defects. Where manufacturer names are mentioned in the
specifications or on the drawings, it has been done in order to establish a standard of quality
and construction.
B. Contractor will be responsible for transportation of his material to and from the job site, and
will be responsible for the storage and protection of his materials and work until the final
acceptance of the job. At the end of each day of work, each Contractor is responsible for
covering or protecting his work and/or materials that may be susceptible to damage even if such
damage is the result of unforeseen causes, e.g. an overnight thunderstorm. Failure to do so will
be sufficient cause for rejection of any item in question, and any such item shall be replaced by
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
C. Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment will fit through available openings in the
building and that all equipment can be installed without modification of building structure.
2.2 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A. All equipment major items are specified in the equipment schedules on the drawings and shall
be new and furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with the catalog item
listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
B. Equipment items so noted will require start-up by factory trained personnel. Equipment items
so noted will require factory approved service personnel who shall provide all service,
including all parts and all labor, as requested by the Owner, during the full period of equipment
warranty.
2.3 EQUIPMENT RATINGS
A. Equipment capacities as scheduled on the drawings are at project site altitude. Capacities of
submitted equipment must be corrected for project site altitude unless otherwise noted.
2.4 WORKMANSHIP
A. The workmanship shall, in all respects, be of the highest grade, and all construction shall be
done according to the best practices of the trade. Piping, ducting and conduit shall be concealed
unless otherwise noted, and installed square to the building lines. Any work not meeting this
requirement shall be replaced or rebuilt without extra expense to the Owner.
2.5 V-BELT DRIVES
A. V-belt drives shall be of fabric and rubber construction of approved manufacture. Multiple belts
shall be matched and all belts shall be adjusted to drive the apparatus properly and to prevent
slippage and undue wear in starting motor nameplate rating.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 6
08/02
rr+
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
7
2.6 BELTGUARDS
A. The Contractor shall provide for each V-belt drive a painted steel belt guard, which shall be
constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. The guard
shall completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety
requirements. Hinged access doors not less than 6" x 6" shall be provided for access to motors
and fan shaft for test purposes.
2.7 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
A. All disconnects, motor starters, relays, wiring, conduits, etc. shall be provided by and comply
with all requirements of 16000 Sections of the electrical specifications.
B. The Mechanical Contractor must refer to the electrical control equipment and wiring shown on
the Electrical Drawings. Any changes or additions required by specified equipment furnished
shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment.
C. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the Contractor prior
to ordering. It is imperative that voltage and phase characteristics are checked with the electrical
drawings.
D. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA and NEMA
standards. All general-purpose motors shall be open drip -proof machines for installation
indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used
in all areas of exposure to weather or other environmental contamination. Motors shall be rated
explosion -proof when located in hazardous atmospheres. Type II weather -protected motors may
be used in lieu of TEFC motors on roof fan units and similar equipment. Motors mounted in
direct sun shall be provided with a shield to forbid direct radiation from the sun when the sun
is 45 degrees or greater above the horizon.
E. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service factor of 1.15 with
40°C rise and total temperature rise of 65°C ambient and when powered from the system
voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall have a service factor of 1.00 with total
temperature rise of 65°C in the above conditions. Single-phase motors shall be NEMA Type
N split phase induction motors with built-in thermal protectors. Single-phase motors connected
on loads requiring high starting torque shall be capacitor -start induction motors.
F. All motors shall be all copper wound, high power factor, high efficiency motors. Electric motors
shall be an energy efficient type as defined in the latest edition of NEMA document no. MG1.
Motor efficiency shall be made available to the Engineer as required.
2.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND WIRING FOR MECHANICAL DIVISION
A. Responsibility
1. Unless otherwise indicated, all motors, conduit, wiring, and controls (including
temperature) shall be furnished, set in place, and wired in accordance with the following
schedule. (MD is Mechanical Division and ED is Electrical Division)
03860201
08/02
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15000 - 7
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SET IN
WIRED AND
FURNISHED
PLACE
CONNECTED
ITEM
UNDER
OR
UNDER
MOUNTED
UNDER
Equipment Motors with Integral Thermal
MD
MD
ED
Overloads
Motor Controllers: magnetic starters, reduced
MD(1)
ED(1)
ED
voltage starters and overload relays
Disconnect switches, fused or unfused, H. P.
ED(1)
ED(1)
ED
rated switches, thermal overload switches and
fuses, manual operating switches
Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, multi -speed
MD
MD(2)
MD(2)
switches, variable speed switches, float switches,
thermostats, control relays, time clocks, control
transformer, control panels, motor valves, damper
motors, solenoid valves, EP and PE switches and
interlocks
Contactors, 120V control circuit outlets for
ED
ED
ED
control panels and for boiler controls and fire
protection control and fire/smoke detectors
Notes:
(1) If furnished as part of factory wired equipment, wiring, conduit, and connection only by ED.
(2) If float switches, line voltage thermostats, PE switches, time switches etc., carry the FULL
LOAD CURRENT of any motor, they shall be furnished by the Mechanical Division, but shall
be set in place, wired and connected by the Electrical Division, except that where such items
are and integral part of the mechanical equipment, or directly attached to ducts, piping, etc.,
they shall be set in place under the Mechanical Division and wired and connected by the
Electrical Division. If they do not carry the FULL LOAD CURRENT to any motor they shall
be furnished, set in place and wired under the Mechanical Division.
B. Connections
1. Connection to all control directly attached to ducts, piping and mechanical equipment
shall be made with flexible connections.
2.9 EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SUPPORTS
A. All supporting systems for piping, equipment, and materials supported by the building structure
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to purchase and installation.
B. Roof Supports
1. Contractor shall provide and install roof supports for all uninsulated piping routed on the
roof.
a. For single pipes through 4-inches in size, such as gas pipes, etc., the roof support
shall be a MIRO Model 24-R which consists of a one piece combination roof
deck base, pipe supports, and roller housing of rigid PVC; a self-lubricating roller
seat made from Teflon sheet; and roller made of nylon which rests upon the
Teflon seat within the roller housing.
b. Roof support units shall have pins and matching holes so that units may be
stacked securely to accommodate elevation differences.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 8
08/02
s■,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
ki
Manufacturer's installation recommendations vary depending on roof types, but
the Contractor is responsible for verifying the roof type and adhering strictly to
the appropriate set of manufacturer's installation instructions.
2.10 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Piping
1. Penetration shall be accomplished with factory -made assemblies designed specifically
for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed. Contractor shall
provide a factory -made penetration assembly as follows:
a. For pipes, conduits, etc. up to 3-inches in diameter that can or are intended to be
turned to horizontal after passing through the roof (e.g. small electrical conduit,
gas piping, refrigerant lines, water pipes, etc.) the device shall consist of a curb
assembly with a welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base, 1-1/2 inches
thick 3 pcf rigid insulation, 0.50 inch aluminum or 20 gauge galvanized cap with
minimum 3 inch over hang and 1-inch rigid insulation, and 2" x 6" wood nailer.
Product shall be Custom Curb Model CPC, ThyCurb Model RP-2 with TC-1, 2,
or 3 curb, or approved equivalent.
B. Ductwork without Equipment
1. Penetration shall be accomplished with a factory -made insulated roof curb. Curb shall
be made of welded 18 gauge galvanized steel shell and base plate, shall be lined with 1-
1/2 inch 3 pcf rigid insulation, shall have minimum 2" x 2" wood nailer, and shall be
reinforced with 1"x 1"x 1'8" steel angle on sides24 inches and larger. Product(s) shall
be manufactured by Custom Curb, Inc., ThyCurb, Roof Products and Systems, Pate, or
approved equivalent.
C. General
1. All roof flashing assemblies and roof curbs shall be closely coordinated with other work
through the Roofing Contractor to insure that the flashing, canting, insulation type and
location, etc., is correct and appropriate for the particular roof construction type.
2. Each roof curb shall be selected and provided so that the top of the curb shall be level
after installation. The curb shall provide a minimum clearance of 10 inches between the
top of the finished roof surface and the top of the wood nailer, continuous around the
curb perimeter.
3. Each roof penetration location shown on the drawing is approximate. Refer to the
Architectural and Structural drawing for the structural openings. Refer to CUTTING
AND PATCHING section of this specification for more information.
4. Provide each roof curb with other options as scheduled on the drawings.
2.11 ACCESSIBILITY
r� A. Access Panels
1. Access panels shall be provided wherever necessary for possible future replacement,
adjustment, or maintenance of operating devices such as machinery, valves, dampers,
switches, relays, etc., or to other critical non -operating devices such as pull boxes,
inspection parts, gauges, etc. Such access panels shall be provided and install by
Contractor, whether or not shown on the drawings, and shall be brought to the attention
of the Engineer for approval of type, color, etc. Where access is provided in rated
members„ the access panels shall be of a type that maintains the integrity of the member
penetrated
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 9
08/02
r�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. Access to Equipment
1. All pipes, tubing, conduit, etc. including, but not limited to, draining piping of any type,
electrical conduit, wiring not in conduit, and pneumatic control tubing shall be installed
in such a way so as not to prevent and/or not to make necessary difficult the removal,
operation, use, or maintenance of equipment, access panels or doors, pathways
(especially in attics or crawlspaces), observation ports, measurement or balancing
devices, junction boxes.
2. If access for these purposes is prevented or made unreasonably difficult in the opinion
of the Engineer, then the Contractor shall make modifications or repairs at no cost to
anyone except the Contractor. Such modifications or repairs shall be considered neither
complete nor adequate until the Engineer is satisfied that access for the above purpose
is achieved.
2.12 PROTECTION OF PENETRATION
A. All penetrations of fire or smoke barriers shall be sealed, sleeves (if any), insulation (if any),
and vibration isolation (if any) that maintain the fire or smoke resistance of the barrier in
accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.
B. Contractor shall verify locations and type of all partitions penetrations from the drawings.
Sealing material and methods shall be per UL recommendations.
PART 3 - EXEUTION
3.1 STORAGE
A. Provide for proper storage of all materials and equipment and assume responsibility for losses
due to any cause. All storage shall be within the contract limits of the building site or in a
bonded warehouse. All equipment and materials must be covered and stored out of the
elements; any item, which has become rusted, will not be permitted to be used.
B. Each Contractor shall provide temporary storage facilities suitable for equipment stored at the
job site. Storage facilities shall be rainproof and lockable as required. Materials or equipment
stored on site but not in a lockable rainproof storage facility shall be stored above ground or
above slab. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to prevent entry of and/or damage from
dirt, trash, water, or vermin. Equipment not properly stored and protected shall be, at the
discretion of the Engineer, replaces at no cost to the Owner. Roofs are not acceptable storage
areas unless specifically allowed in writing by the Engineer.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND ARRANGEMENT
A. Install all work to permit removal (without damage to other parts) of coils, heat exchanger
bundles, boiler tubes, fan shafts and wheels, filters, belt guards, sheaves and drives and all other
parts which might require periodic replacement or maintenance. Arrange pipes, ducts and
equipment to permit ready access to valves, traps, starters, motors, control components and to _.
clear opens of doors and of access panels.
B. Offsets, transitions and changes in direction in pipes and ducts shall be made as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping pipes whether or not indicated on the drawings. _
Furnish and install all traps, air vents, sanitary vents, etc., as required to effect these offsets,
transitions and changes in direction.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 10
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
is-
3.3 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A. Where there are existing facilities, be responsible for protection thereof, whether or not such
facility is to be removed or relocated or remain as installed. Moving or removing any facility
must be done so as not to cause interruption the work or Owner's Operation.
B. All pipe and duct openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. All fixtures
shall be covered and protected against injury. At final completion, all work shall be cleaned and
delivered in an unblemished condition, or refinished and repainted at the desecration of the
Architect.
3.4 CONCEALED AND EXPOSED WORK
A. "Concealed" is intended to mean within such spaces as pipe chases, pipe trenches, above plaster
ceilings, in walls and buried pipe is inaccessible when building is completed. "Exposed" is
intended to be within equipment rooms, unfinished spaces, above "pushup" ceilings, accessible
pipe tunnels, etc., where pipe is accessible.
3.5 CONCRETE
A. This Contractor shall coordinate all requirements for concrete. All concrete shall be furnished
under the Architectural Divisions of these specifications.
3.6 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions and conditions governing work at the project site.
He shall examine adjoining work on which his work is dependent, for perfect efficiency, and
shall report any work, which must be corrected.
3.7 LUBRICATION
A. The Contractor shall provide all oil and grease for the operating of all equipment until
acceptance. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to bearings while the
equipment is being operated by him up to the date of acceptance of the equipment. The
Contractor shall protect all bearings and shafts during installation and shall thoroughly grease
the steel shafts to prevent corrosion.
3.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTION
A. The Contractor shall install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and
recommendations furnished by the manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the
plans and specifications, the Contractor shall report such conflicts to the Engineer who shall
make changes deemed necessary and desirable.
3.9 FLUSHING, CLEANING & STERILIZING
A. Before final connections are made in the piping systems, all piping shall be blown out with air
and then completely washed out with cleaning compounds. The systems shall be flushed for
complete removal of all foreign materials. Furnish all temporary connections, valves, etc.,
required for this purpose.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 11
�- 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
B. After flushing, sterilize the domestic water systems with an approved chlorinating agent to
provide a dosage on not less than 50 ppm. After minimum contact period of eight (8) hours, the
system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual chlorine is no greater than the city
water.
3.10 TESTS:
A. Test all storm drain, vent and waste lines with standing water test of 12 feet of head. Test to be
held for a minimum of six (6) hours.
B. Test all domestic cold, hot and recirculating hot water service lines at 200 psig. Test to be held
for a minimum of six (6) hours.
C. Test fire protection at 200 psig. Test to be held for a minimum of six (6) hours.
D. Test all gas lines under 60 psig air pressure. Test to be held for a minimum of six (6) hours.
E. All tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer and the local authority having
jurisdiction before covering or insulating. The satisfactory operation of blowers, pumps and
other equipment with moving parts shall be demonstrated to the Engineer. Equipment without
movable parts shall have pressure or other tests performed by the Contractor to demonstrate
satisfactory operation.
F. Furnish all instruments, pumps, blowers and equipment required for the testing.
G. Provide written copies of these test reports for inclusion on the Operations and Maintenance
Manuals. --
3.11 PAINTING
A. Surfaces of all equipment and material not provided with a factory finish coat shall be
thoroughly cleaned, primed (if not factory primed) and finish coated with a high quality alkyd
industrial enamel of a color chosen by the Owner.
3.12 SPECIAL OPENINGS
A. The contractor shall attempt to schedule delivery of all large equipment requiring special
openings for installation prior to enclosing of area. Where this is not possible written notice of
required openings which must be provided shall be listed by size and location and submitted
to the General Contractor prior to enclosing of areas involved. Work required to construct
openings and the associated cost of enclosing them shall be done at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.13 PLACING IN OPERATION
A. All ducts, pipes, equipment, controls, etc., shall be cleaned of plaster and other foreign debris
B. Before final acceptance, all strainers shall be thoroughly cleaned or replaced, all bearings shall
be oiled or greased and all drains shall be cleaned out and primed. All permanent filters shall
be cleaned; throwaway type filters shall be replaced with new filters.
C. The systems shall be placed in operation.
D. The contractor shall verify that all controls are set to meet operating conditions specified.
1. Example: Boiler operating control set at 200°F. Limit control set at 220°F.
E. The Contractor shall verify that all pieces of equipment are operable and that all sequence of
controls are being met.
F. Contractor to adjust seating through the first (1st) year as required by Engineer.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 12
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.14 BALANCING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING THE MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
-+ A. Balancing the mechanical systems shall be part of this contract, refer to subsequent mechanical
specification section for details. This Contractor is to include in their bid the cost of balancing,
testing and adjusting.
3.15 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. Contractor shall prepare and provide four (4) copies of operating and maintenance manuals.
Contractor shall deliver four bound sets to the Engineer for approval. Each manual shall be in
a ring binder and shall be indexed with dividers for each section. Delivery of required
documents is a condition of final acceptance.
B. Each manual shall contain, but not limited to, the following general sections:
1. Certificates of acceptance from the inspecting authorities including approval of backflow
preventer installation,
2. Waiver of all liens,
3. Warranties with starting dates and end dates for each pieces of equipment and/or for each
system (warranties shall begin on date of substantial completion and acceptance by the
Owner),
4. Names, telephone and fax numbers and addresses of all subcontractors, vendors,
manufacturer's representatives, and warranties providers,
5. Certification letters from each Contractor that each system furnished and installed by that
contractor and/or subcontractors is started -up, balanced, adjusted and checked for proper
operation in accordance with the intent of the contract documents,
6. Spare parts lists for each piece of equipment,
7. Lubrication charts showing type of lubrication and application methods and frequencies,
8. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule (On Contractor's letterhead stationary),
9. Preventative maintenance schedule for checking all items such as belt drives, safety
controls, oil and refrigerant charges, and seasonal changer over recommendations.
Cleaning of all strainers, traps, coils, tower pans, tubes, sprays, etc. (on Contractor's
letterhead stationary),
10. Water treatment recommendations and instructions for boiler, towers, etc.,
11. Normal operating instructions including a sequence of operations (on Contractor's
letterhead stationary),
12. Instructions as to procedures to be followed for emergency situations, such as alarms or
safety items being tripped (on Contractor's letterhead stationary),
13. Instruction on who to call for service during guarantee period, (on Contractor's letterhead
stationary),
14. Approved copy of the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Reports,
15. Copies of As -Built drawings on reproducible vellum as produced by a Xerox or
photographic process and,
16. Copies of all approved shop drawing submittals including nameplate date, design
parameters, name, telephone and fax numbers, address of vendor, manufacturer's
representative and warrantee provider.
C. Approval will not be given for final payment until the tests, balancing and operating instruction
portions have been completed.
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 - 13
�,,, 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.16 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE OWNER
A. Contractor shall instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operations and maintenance
of all mechanical systems and equipment. There shall be a minimum of four (4) hours of
training. Contractor shall furnish any special servicing tools required for maintenance.
B. Contractor shall conduct a demonstration of `the installation upon completion and final
acceptance of the work. There shall be a minimum four (4) hour demonstration. Prior to this
all work shall have been completed, tested, balanced and placed in operation. Qualified
personnel must be present at the demonstration to operate all the systems and prove the
performance of the equipment. The schedule for this demonstration shall be coordinated with
the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 15000
03860201 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15000 14
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15050
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and the Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement
other Division 15 Sections.
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
2. Concrete equipment base construction requirements.
3. Equipment nameplate data requirements.
4. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in Division
15 Section "Mechanical Identification."
5. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations.
6. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections.
7. Cutting and patching.
8. Touchup painting and finishing.
B.
Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.
Pipe; pipe fittings, and piping include tube, tube fittings, and tubing.
B.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below the roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
C.
Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
D.
Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
E.
Concealed Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
F.
Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
�*a
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
-o B.
Product data for following piping specialties:
1. Mechanical sleeve seals.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 1
e•
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Samples of color, lettering style, and other graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
D. Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME 'Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 Series "Code for Pressure Piping."
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for the welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
B. ASME A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of
identification devices.
C. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power, dimensions, capacities, and
ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and
connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and
equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases, if
larger equipment is approved. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of the equipment are
specified, the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end -caps. Maintain end -caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. When stored
inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction _
to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in -place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.
F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces.
H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where
devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical
ceilings and similar concealment.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipe and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B 1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2 JOINING MATERIALS
-� - A.
Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining
materials not listed below.
" B.
Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping
system contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, except
where thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges.
b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. ASME B 16.20 for grooved, ring joint, steel flanges.
"
3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, except where other thickness is
indicated; and full -face or ring type, except where type is indicated.
rg C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated.
D.
Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated.
r* E.
Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent) and silver (approximately
5 percent), having 0.10 percent lead content.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper -phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Flanged, Ductile -iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon steel
bolts and nuts.
I.
Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of plain end
pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A 126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M), Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep -pattern type where required
to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation.
2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with setscrew.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. -
4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and setscrew.
a. Finish: Rough brass.
b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.
5. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with setscrew and chrome -plated finish.
6. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with spring clips and chrome -plated finish.
7. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, setscrew, and chrome -plated finish.
8. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and chrome -plated finish.
9. Cast -Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar
metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld
neck end types and matching piping system materials.
2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
3. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at a 180°F temperature.
4. Dielectic Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly for 150- or 300-psig
minimum pressure to suit system pressures.
5. Dielectric -Flange Insulation Kits: Field -assembled, companion -flange assembly, full -
face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.
6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive,
thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig minimum working pressure at
225 F temperature.
7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive
thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and
300-psig working pressure at 225 F temperature.
C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular, watertight mechanical type. Components include
interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and
sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber -sealing elements to expand when _
tightened.
D. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 24-gage or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast -Iron: Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, having
plain ends and integral water stop, except where other features are specified.
4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly, consisting of housing, gaskets, and
pipe sleeve, with 1 mechanical joint end conforming to AWWA C110 and 1 plain pipe -
sleeve end.
a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage.
b. Housing: Ductile -iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring, with ductile -
iron gland, steel studs and nuts, and rubber gasket conforming to AWWA C111,
of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe.
C. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA C151, ductile -iron pipe.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 4
08/02
rr,
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
d. Housing -to -Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push -on type of manufacturer's
design.
„ 5. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping
flange, with clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.
Wq
2.4 GROUT
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, dry, hydraulic -cement grout,
a nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
. 1 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory -packaged.
r•"
2.5 ACCESS DOORS
A. Flush mounted steel access doors with 16 Ga. frame and 14 Ga. Panel. Prime coat finish.
Concealed spring hinges, screwdriver cam -lock. Doors in fire rated surfaces shall be U.L.
listed and labeled for application. Doors to be Milcor or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS --COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, except where system Sections specify otherwise.
Individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation
requirements unique to the piping system.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, except where deviations to layout are approved on
coordination drawings.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
- service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends. Route piping with as few elbows as possible and clean
all cut pipes (inside and out) of burrs.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, except where indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome -Plated Piping: Cast -brass, one-piece, with setscrew, and polished chrome -
plated finish. Use split -casting escutcheons, where required, for existing piping.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with setscrew.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with concealed hinge, spring clips, and
chrome -plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast -brass or stamped -steel, with setscrew or spring clips.
N. Sleeves are required for core drilled holes.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, concrete floor and roof
slabs, and where indicated.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions,
concrete floor and roof slabs, and where indicated.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 4 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve
fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified.
2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches.
b. Steel Sheet -Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches and larger that penetrate gypsum -
board partitions.
C. Cast -Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend
sleeve to 4 inches above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division
7 Section "Flashing and Sheet Metal."
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
4. Except for below -grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
Q. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for l-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installation of mechanical seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches.
2. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
R. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves.
Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installation of mechanical seals.
1. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, and Pipe Penetrations: Install ductile -iron wall penetration
system sleeves according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
S. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestopping sealant material.
Firestopping materials are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing -in requirements.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 6
08/02
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
p
V. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping system Sections.
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to AWS "Soldering Manual," Chapter 22
"The Soldering of Pipe and Tube."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS 'Brazing Manual' in the "Pipe and
Tube" chapter.
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B 1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full inside diameter. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of
internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads (except
where dry seal threading is specified).
C. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
thre ded
a
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings having threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12 "Recommended Practices
and Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe" using qualified processes and
welding operators according to the "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,
type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten
bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
W. Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated, make piping connections as specified
below.
1. Install unions in piping 2 inches and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch or smaller threaded pipe
connection.
2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection.
3. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION --COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A
B.
C.
03860201
08/02
Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not
indicated.
Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only
in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to the Architect.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, except where otherwise indicated.
BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 -
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of
interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. - E. Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.3 ACCESS DOORS
A. Furnish access doors in all non -removable ceiling and in partitions and walls where necessary
access to plumbing cleanouts, shock absorbers, fire dampers, manual dampers, valves and r
other mechanical devices requiring access. Size as required for access with minimum size of
12" x 12".
B. Any access doors furnished for installation in fire rated surfaces or assembly shall carry an
approved fire rating for that use.
C. Any access doors furnished for installation in glued on acoustical surfaces or assembly shall
have recessed door to allow installation of tiles. _
D. Provide all access doors to the General Contractor for them to construct into the building.
3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING
A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting" for field painting requirements.
B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials
and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.5 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete equipment bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger
than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting
templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength .
concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete."
3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code --Steel."
3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor
mechanical materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050 - 8
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
As
3.8 DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove work specified under Division 15 and as indicated.
B. Where pipe, ductwork, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged or disturbed, remove
damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity and quality.
C. Accessible Work: Remove indicated exposed pipe and ductwork in its entirety.
D. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried pipe abandoned in place, 2 inches beyond the face
of adjacent construction. Cap and patch surface to match existing finish.
E. Removal: Remove indicated equipment from the Project site.
F. Temporary Disconnection: Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational
equipment indicated for relocation.
3.9 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of the trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.10 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed
instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.
D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout.
E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
END OF SECTION
03860201 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-9
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15170
MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Common requirements for electric motors furnished on equipment specified in other Sections,
including single phase and three phase electric motors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Requirements for references and standards.
B.
AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
C.
AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
D.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
E.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
F.
UL 674 - UL Standard for Safety Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
G.
UL 1836 - UL Standard for Safety for Electric Motors for Use in Class I, Division 2 and Class
11, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to UL Component Recognition for appropriate sizes.
B.
Conform to NFPA 70 and local energy code.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B.
Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers and
suitable weather-proof covering. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from
equipment and store separately.
1.5 WARRANTY
'
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements
B.
Provide three year manufacturer warranty for motors larger than 1 horsepower.
`;..i
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
General Electric
B.
Baldor
C.
Magnetek
D.
Reliance
03860201 MOTORS 15170 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000 General
Mechanical Requirements.
2.2 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Motors Less Than 250 Watts, for Intermittent Service: Equipment manufacturer's standard and
need not conform to these specifications.
B. Single Phase Motors: PSC where available.
C. Electrical Service:
1. Refer to Section 16180 for required electrical characteristics.
D. Open drip -proof type except where specifically noted otherwise.
E. Design for continuous operation in 40 degrees C environment.
F. Design for temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class,
service factor, and motor enclosure type.
G. Explosion -Proof Motors: UL approved for hazard classification.
H. Visible Nameplate: Indicating manufacturer's name and model number, motor horsepower,
RPM, frame size, voltage, phase, cycles, full load amps, insulation system class, service
factor, maximum ambient temperature, temperature rise at rated horsepower, minimum
efficiency.
I. Wiring Terminations:
1. Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials
indicated. Enclose terminal lugs in terminal box sized to NFPA 70, threaded for
conduit.
2. For fractional horsepower motors where connection is made directly, provide threaded
conduit connection in end frame.
2.3 SINGLE PHASE POWER - SPLIT PHASE MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Less than 150 percent of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to seven times full load current.
C. Breakdown Torque: Approximately 200 percent of full load torque.
D. Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor,
prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
E. Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated
ball bearings.
2.4 SINGLE PHASE POWER - PERMANENT -SPLIT CAPACITOR MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Exceeding one fourth of full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Up to six times full load current.
C. Multiple Speed: Through tapped windings.
D. Open Drip -proof or Enclosed Air Over Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation,
minimum 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings, automatic reset overload
protector.
2.5 SINGLE PHASE POWER - CAPACITOR START MOTORS
A. Starting Torque: Three times full load torque.
B. Starting Current: Less than five times full load current.
03860201 MOTORS 15170 - 2
08/02
71
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C.
Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque.
D.
Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque.
E.
Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors
with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds.
F.
Drip -proof Enclosure: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, NEMA Service Factor,
prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings.
G.
Enclosed Motors: Class A (50°C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated
ball bearings.
A+
2.6 THREE PHASE POWER - SQUIRREL -CAGE MOTORS
A.
Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque.
B.
Starting Current: Six times full load current.
+ C.
Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B
characteristics.
D.
Design, Construction, Testing, and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B
energy efficient motors.
E.
Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better.
F.
Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Frames of steel, aluminum, or cast iron with end brackets
...,..
of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts.
G.
Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors embedded
r
in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay with wiring to terminal
box.
H.
Bearings: Grease lubricated anti -friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged
provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours.
Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of
NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate.
►; I.
Sound Power Levels: To NEMA MG 1.
J.
Nominal Efficiency: To NEMA MG 1, energy efficient for motor sizes 1 HP and larger.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install securely on firm foundation. Mount ball bearing motors with shaft in any position.
C. Check line voltage and phase and ensure agreement with nameplate.
END OF SECTION
03860201 MOTORS 15170 - 3
08/02
g:
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15190
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates.
4.
B. Tags.
C. Pipe Markers.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
P
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 15000 —General Mechanical Requirements for submittals.
B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.
C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve
.'
manufacturer's name and model number.
D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and
installation.
1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag
numbers.
C. Valve Tag Chart.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping
systems and accessories.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Sections 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
!ti
03 860201 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Manufacturer:
1. Seaton.
2. Brady USA.
3. Panduit
4. Almetek.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Description: Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color.
2.2 TAGS
A. Plastic Tags:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Seaton.
b. Brady USA.
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Laminated three -layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting
background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter.
B. Metal Tags:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Seaton.
b. Brady USA.
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges.
C. Information Tags:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Seaton.
b. Brady USA.
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical
Requirements.
2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger", "Caution", or "Warning" and message; size 3-1/4
x 5-5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.
D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in plastic laminated cover.
03860201 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 2
08/02
'
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.3 PIPE MARKERS
A.
Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Seaton.
b. Brady USA.
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi -rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe
covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.
C.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturer:
a. Seaton.
ook
b. Brady USA.
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.
D.
Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:
1. Manufacturer:
_.
a. Seaton.
b. Brady USA.
-�
C. Panduit
d. Almetek.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical
Requirements.
2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4
mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.
3. Coordinate requirements with Section 2300 Earthwork requirements.
2.4 CEILING TACKS
A.
Manufacturer:
1. Seaton.
2. Brady USA.
1
3. Panduit
4. Almetek.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B.
Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head.
C.
Color code as follows:
1. HVAC equipment: Yellow.
*WI
2. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red.
3. Plumbing valves: Green.
4. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.
A
03860201 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 - 3
F.
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.5 LABELS
A. Manufacturer:
1. Seaton.
2. Brady USA.
3. Panduit
4. Almetek.
5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Description: Laminated mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed
identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations for stencil painting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.
B. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive -resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
C. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear
lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.
D. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.
E. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above
buried pipe.
F. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices
with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in -line pumps, may be identified with tags.
G. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.
H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.
J. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.
K. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic tape pipe markers.
Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and
pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate identification not to
exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to each valve and tee, at
each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
L. Identify ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification
number and area served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration ,
of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.
M. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate in
corner of panel closest to equipment.
END OF SECTION
03860201 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15190 -4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15260
PIPING INSULATION
PARTI-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Piping insulation.
B.
Jackets and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel
Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
B
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate
C
ASTM C 177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.
D.
ASTM C 195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.
E.
ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.
F.
ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic -Setting Thermal
Insulating and Finishing Cement.
G.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
H.
ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
I.
ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic
Stainless Steel.
J.
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation.
K.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
L.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
j
M.
NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
N.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
03860201 PIPING INSULATION 15260-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with
ASTM E84, NFPA 25, and UL 723.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and
thickness.
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.
C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER
�e
A. Manufacturer:
1. Owen Corning.
2. Certainteed.
3. Knuaf.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.
1. 'K' value: ASTM C 177, 0.24 at 750 F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 8500 F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
C. Insulation: ASTM C795; semi -rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.
1. `K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees.
2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. R
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. ASTM C921, White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm -inches.
E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.
F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
03860201 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
r
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Compatible with insulation.
G.
Insulating
Cement/Mastic:
1.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
}
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.
H.
Fibrous Glass Fabric:
1.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd weight.
3.
Blanket: 1.0 lb./cu ft density.
4.
Weave:l0xl0.
I.
Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1.
Manufacturers:
,.
a. Owen Coming.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
. ;
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq. yd weight.
3.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
J.
Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:
1.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
.
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
-
K.
Outdoor Breather Mastic:
"a
1.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Coming.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
e,
03860201 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
L. Insulating Cement:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. ASTM C449/C449M.
2.2 JACKETS
A. PVC Plastic.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Jacket: ASTM D1784, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white
color.
a. Minimum service temperature: 0° F.
b. Maximum service temperature: 150' F.
C. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.002 perm -inches.
d. Thickness: 15 mil.
e. Connections: Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
3. Covering Adhesive Mastic:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Owen Corning.
2) Certainteed.
3) Knuaf
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
b. Compatible with insulation.
B. ABS Plastic:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.
a. Minimum service temperature: -40' F.
b. Maximum service temperature of 180' F.
C. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.012 perm -inches.
d. Thickness: 30 mil.
e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.
C. Canvas Jacket: UL listed.
1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq. yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant
lagging adhesive.
2. Lagging Adhesive:
03860201
08/02
G INSULATION 15260 - 4
F�
L—
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
e. Compatible with insulation.
D. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.
1.
Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.
2.
Finish: Smooth.
3.
Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.
a
4.
Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.
5.
Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.010 inch thick stainless steel.
6.
Jacket shall be primed to allow painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting
work.
F B. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.
- C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
* C.
Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including
fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion
joints.
E.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:
�.•+
1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory -applied or field -applied. Secure with self-sealing
longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward
clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness
as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting
covers.
IPA F.
For hot piping conveying fluids 140' F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,
but bevel and seal ends of insulation.
G.
Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:
1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory -applied or field -applied.
Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive
adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.
2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as
adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.
03860201 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 5
08/02
J
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
H. Inserts and Shields:
1. Application: Piping 1 inches diameter or larger.
2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.
3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.
4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining
insulation; may be factory fabricated.
5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating
material suitable for the planned temperature range.
I. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish
at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07270.
J. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms, Apparatus Bay, or Finished Spaces: Finish
with aluminum jacket. Paint to color selected by Architect.
K. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with
insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh
reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom
side of horizontal piping.
L. Buried Piping: Provide factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with
self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with one mil thick aluminum
foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with a
polyester film.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Plumbing Systems:
1. Domestic Cold Water Supply:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Domestic Hot Water and Recirculation:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
2) Thickness: 1 inch.
3. Condensate Drain Lines:
a. Glass Fiber Insulation:
1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.
2) Thickness: '/2 inch.
4. Fire Protection Piping:
a. As per NFPA and manufacturer recommendations.
END OF SECTION
I.
03860201 PIPING INSULATION 15260 - 6
08/02
K.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15290
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Ductwork insulation.
B.
Insulation jackets.
Oak
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Requirements
for references and standards.
'
B.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate
C.
ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
r
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
D.
ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications.
E.
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
F.
ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation.
G.
ASTM C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber,
Duct Lining Material).
H.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
I.
ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
J.
ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a Radiant
Heat Energy Source.
K.
ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials
to Fungi.
L.
NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
M.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
`
Materials.
N.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
O.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and
thickness for each service, and locations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
OW
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures, which ensure acceptable
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.
03860201
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified --�
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84,
NFPA 255, and UL 723.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's
identification, including product density and thickness.
C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical
damage, by storing in original wrapping. a
1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.
B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,
mastics, and insulation cements.
C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE
A. Manufacturer:
1. Owen Corning
2. Certainteed.
3. Knuaf.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000
General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombusitble blanket.
1. 'K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.31 at 75' F.
2. Maximum service temperature: 250' F.
3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.
4. Minimum "R" value: 6.0 (h 9 ft2)Btu.
5. Density:1.016/cu.ft.
6. Thickness: 2 inches, minimum.
C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:
1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl.
2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.
3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.
03860201 DUCTWORK INSULATION
08/02
15290 - 2
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Vapor Barrier Tape:
1. Manufacturer:
�,.., a. Owen Corning
b. Certainteed.
C. Knuaf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation, black color.
E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.
2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID
A.
Manufacturer:
1.
Owen Corning.
2.
Certainteed.
3.
Knauf.
4.
Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section 15000
General Mechanical Requirements.
B.
Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.
1.
1. 'K' (`Ksi') value: ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75° F.
2.
Maximum service temperature: 250' F.
3.
Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.
4.
Minimum "R" value: 6.0 (h . ft2)Btu.
5.
Density: 3.0 lb./cu ft.
6.
Thickness: 2 inches, minimum.
C.
Vapor
Barrier Jacket:
1.
Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch vinyl.
2.
Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm.
3.
Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape.
D.
Vapor Barrier Tape:
1.
Manufacturer:
a. Owen Corning.
b. Certainteed.
C. Knauf.
d. Substitution: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with
pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.
E.
Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:
1.
Manufacturers:
a. Owen Corning
f
b. Certainteed.
C. Knauf.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment and Section
15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
2.
Cloth: Untreated; 9pz/sq.yd weight, glass fabric.
3.
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.
03860201 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting
work. -�
B. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.
C. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.
C. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:
1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.
2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.
3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.
4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible
connections, and expansion joints.
D. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:
1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.
2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends of
insulation.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. Supply Fresh Air Duct:
1. Flexible Glass Fiber Ductwork Insulation: 2 inches thick.
B. Exhaust Ducts:
1. None
END OF SECTION
03860201 DUCTWORK INSULATION 15290 - 4
08/02 f
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15310
FIRE PROTECTION PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, fittings, valves, and connections for sprinkler systems.
B. This section is to install new fire sprinkler system.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and
�-
800.
B.
ANSI/ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.
C.
ANSFASME B 16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.
D.
ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
E.
ANSFASME B16.9 - Factory -made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
F.
ANSI/ASME B 16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket -welding and Threaded.
G.
ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings.
s
H.
ANSFASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
I.
ANSFASME B 16.25 - Buttwelding Ends.
J.
ANSFASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
K.
ANSFASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
L.
ANSFASTM A135 - Electric -Resistance -Welded Steel Pipe.
M.
ANSI/ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.
N.
ANSFASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
O.
ANSFAWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
P.
ANSFAWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.
Q.
ANSFAWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
R.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated Welded and Seamless.
S.
ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -coated (Galvanized) Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
T.
ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
U.
ASTM A795 - Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel
Pipe for Fire Protection Use.
V.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
W.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
k
X.
ASTM B251 - General Requirements for Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube.
Y.
AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping
.
and Tubing.
p
Z.
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
03860201 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pipe materials used, jointing methods, supports, floor, and wall
penetration seals. Indicate installation, layout, weights, mounting and support details, piping
sizes, and piping connections.
C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.
D. Manufacturer's Field Report: Submit under provisions of Section 01400 and 15000.
E. Manufacturer's Field Report: Indicate time of start-up of treatment systems and include
analysis of system water after cleaning and treatment.
1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Maintenance Instructions: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, procedures, and
treatment programs.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work to NFPA 13.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform to ASME Code.
C. Valves: Bear UL and FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure rating
marked on valve body.
D. Maintain one copy of each relevant document on site.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers, with labeling in place.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 SPRINKLER PIPING, BURIED
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Schedule 40 black; ANSI/ASME C105 polyethylene jacket, or double
layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
1. Steel Fittings: ANSFASME B 16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; or ANSFASME B 16.25,
buttweld ends; with double layer, half -lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSFASME B16.1, flanges and fittings.
3. Joints: ANSFAWS D1.1, welded.
B. Cast Iron Pipe: ANSFAWWA C151.
1. Fittings: ANSFAWWA C110, standard thickness.
2. Joints: ANSFAWWA C111, rubber gasket.
3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock,
"C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for
galvanized pipe.
03860201 FIRE PROTECTIONPIPING 15310 - 2
08/02 ��
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 SPRINKLER PIPING, ABOVE GROUND
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Schedule 40 black.
1. Steel Fittings: ANSFASME B 16.9, wrought steel, buttwelded; ANSFASME B 16.25,
buttweld ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSFASME B16.5,
steel flanges and fittings; ANSFASME B16.11, forged steel socket welded and
threaded.
2. Cast Iron Fittings: ANSFASME B 16.1, flanges and fittings; ANSFASME B 16.4,
screwed fittings.
3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSFASME B 16.3.
2.3 GATE VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw,
single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged
ends.
2.4 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES
A. Up to 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and handwheel, inside screw, renewable
composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity repackable under
pressure.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug -type disc, flanged
+-s ends, renewable seat and disc.
2.5 BALL VALVES
,;r*
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze one piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever handle, and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union.
B. Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals,
lever handle, flanged.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
A. Bronze body, stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded ends, extended neck,
handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built-in tamper proof switch
rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
B. Cast or ductile iron body, chrome plated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat,
wafer or lug ends, extended neck, handwheel and gear drive and integral indicating device,
and built-in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
2.7 CHECK VALVES
A. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
B. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
C. Over 4 inch: Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc,
screwed, wafer or flanged ends.
03860201 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.8 DRAIN VALVES
A. Bronze compression stop with hose thread nipple and cap.
B. Brass ball valve with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
t • : 0MIRTAHISM61
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient.
C. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
D. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
F. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to maintain
top of pipe level.
G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support
members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat
of zinc rich primer to welding.
H. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. _
I. Provide sleeves when penetrating footings, floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations
to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Refer to Section 15140.
J. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with red lead and linseed oil or ...
other non -toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings after
installation.
L. Provide gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. _
M. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
END OF SECTION
03860201 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING 15310 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 15325
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
ah
A. Wet -pipe sprinkler system.
B. System design, installation, and certification.
C. Fire department connections.
1.2 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A. Section 15310 - Fire Protection Piping: Piping and valves.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System to provide coverage for entire building.
B. Provide system to NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems requirements as determined by
Fire Protection Contractor and Code Enforcement authorities.
C. Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply with a water flow test. The fire
protection contractor shall verify the information with the Local Water Utility. Contractor
shall provide this data to Engineer with the submittals.
D. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system.
E. Provide fire department connections as indicated.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Preliminary Shop Drawings: Prior to detailed submission, submit preliminary layout of
finished ceiling areas indicating only head locations coordinated with ceiling installation.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate hydraulic calculations detailed pipe layout, hangers and supports,
components and accessories. Indicate system controls.
D. Product Data: Provide data on sprinkler heads, valves, and specialties, including
manufacturers catalogue information. Submit performance ratings rough -in details, weights,
support requirements, and piping connections.
E. Submit shop drawings, product data, hydraulic calculations to authority having jurisdiction
for approval. Submit proof of approval to Architect/Engineer.
F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system has been tested and meets or exceeds code
requirements.
03860201 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 1
�., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Record actual locations of sprinkler heads and deviations of piping from drawings. Indicate
drain and test locations.
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Maintenance Data: Include components of system, servicing requirements, Record Drawings,
inspection data, replacement part numbers and availability, and location and numbers of
service depot.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13.
B. Equipment and Components: Bear UL and FM label or marking.
C. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with minimum three
documented years experience.
B. Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in
design of this work and licensed in the State of Texas.
1.10 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data, and Shop Drawings: Bear stamp of approval of
authority having jurisdiction.
1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide
temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Provide extra sprinkler head under provisions of NFPA 13.
C. Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
D. Provide metal storage cabinet in location designated.
03860201 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 2
08/02 .�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
i
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Viking
B. Grinnell
C. Central Sprinkler
D. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler
E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 15000.
2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
A. Suspended Ceiling:
1. Type: Standard pendant type with matching push on or clamp on escutcheon plate.
2. Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected by architect.
4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
B. Exposed Area Type:
1. Type: Standard upright type with guard.
2. Head Finish: Brass.
3. Fusible Link: Fusible solder link type or Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific
area hazard.
C. Sidewall Type:
1. Type: Recessed horizontal sidewall type with matching push on escutcheon plate.
2. Head Finish: Chrome plated.
3. Escutcheon Plate Finish: Enamel, color as selected by architect.
4. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard.
D. Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head.
2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Wet Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced
clapper to automatically actuate electrically or hydraulically operated alarms, with pressure
retard chamber and variable pressure trim.
B. Water Motor Alarm: Hydraulically operated impeller type alarm with aluminum alloy silver
enameled gong and motor housing, nylon bearings, and inlet strainer.
C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts
rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC.
D. Fire Department Connection:
1. Type: Flush mounted wall type with chrome finish.
2. Outlets: Two-way with thread size to suit fire department hardware; threaded dust cap
and chain of matching material and finish.
3. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip, outside.
4. Label: "Sprinkler - Fire Department Connection".
03860201 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES
A. Double Check Value Assemblies
1. Manufacturers:
a. Wilkins/Zurn.
b. Watts.
C. Febco.
d. Beeco.
e. Ames Model 2000.
f. Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options .
and substitutions.
2. AWWA C506; Bronze body with corrosion resistant internal parts and stainless steel
springs; two independently operating check valves with intermediate atmospheric vent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B. Install buried shut-off valves in valve box. Provide post indicator.
C. Provide sprinkler system water source connection downstream of the buildings backflow
preventer assembly.
D. Locate fire department connection with sufficient clearance from walls, obstructions, or
adjacent siamese connectors to allow full swing of fire department wrench handle.
E. Locate outside alarm gong on building wall as indicated.
F. Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
G. Place piping in concealed spaces above finished ceilings.
H. Center heads in two directions in ceiling tile and provide piping offsets as required.
I. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover plates do not
receive field paint finish.
J. Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
K. Hydrostatically test entire system.
L. Require test be witnessed by authority having jurisdiction. Notify Architect/Engineer prior
to testing.
3.3 SPRINKLER HEAD TYPES
A. The sprinkler head shall conform to the following initial type classifications:
Location Sprinkler Head Type
Apparatus Bay, Yard/Stor Exposed Pendent
Rest of Building Concealed Pendent
3.4 SYSTEM SCHEDULE
03860201 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15325 - 4
08/02-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
A. The locations shall conform to the following initial hazard classifications:
Location System Type/Hazard
Apparatus Bay, Yard/Stor. Ordinary Hazard, Group I
Rest of Building Light Hazard
END OF SECTION
03860201 SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
08/02
15325-5
0
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15410
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and pipe fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Sanitary sewer piping system.
D. Domestic water piping system.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI B31.9 - Building Service Piping.
"
B.
ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
C.
ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.
D.
ASME B 16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
E.
ASME B 16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.
F.
ASME B 16.18 - Cast Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings.
G.
ASME B 16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder -Joint Pressure Fittings
H.
ASME B 16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
I.
ASME B 16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
J.
ASME B 16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings -
DWV.
K.
ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder -Joint Fittings for Solvent Drainage Systems.
L.
ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings.
M.
ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
N.
ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
O.
ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded and
Seamless, for Ordinary Uses.
P.
ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
Q.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
R.
ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.
S.
ASTM B43 - Seamless Red Brass Pipe.
.,
T.
ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube.
'
U.
ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
V.
ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper -Alloy Tube.
0014
W.
ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).
X.
ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
"
Y.
ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
Z.
AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.
03860201
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
AA. CISPI 310 -Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
BB. CAN-3 B281 - Aluminum Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Components.
CC. NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide
manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. _
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Record actual locations of valves.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9 or NCPWB Standard Procedure
Specifications.
D. Maintain one copy of relevant document on site. —.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with
minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years
documented experience.
1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform Work in accordance with State, Municipality, and Standard Plumbing Codes.
B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.
C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of
installation of backflow prevention devices.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.
C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until
installation.
E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections
of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.
�. 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install underground piping when bedding are wet or frozen.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Provide two repacking kits for each size valve.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED UNDER AND WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED OUTSIDE 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2, Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.3 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2729.
1. Fittings: PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.
2.4 WATER PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.5 WATER PIPING, BURIED UNDER AND WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn, annealed.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze or ASTM B 16.22 wrought copper and bronze.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.6 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn.
B. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast bronze, or ASME B 16.22, wrought copper and bronze.
C. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.
2.7 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with AWWA C105 polyethylene .
jacket or double layer, half- lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
2. Joints: ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 1, welded.
2.8 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASME B 16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type.
.2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME
Sec
2.9 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED BEYOND 5 FEET OF BUILDING
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black.
1. Fittings: ASTM A234, forged steel welding type, with AWWA C105 polyethylene
jacket or double layer, half- lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape.
2. Joints: ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.2, ANSI B31.9, ASME Sec 1, welded.
B. Polyethylene Pipe: Type III, Grade 3, ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type.
2. Joints: Fusion welded.
2.10 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS
A. Pipe Size 2 Inches and Under:
l . Ferrous pipe: 150 psig malleable iron threaded unions.
2. Copper tube and pipe: 150 psig bronze unions with soldered joints.
B. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder end,
water impervious isolation barrier.
2.11 GATE VALVES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Grinnel.
2. Milwaukee.
3. Nibco.
B. Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, non -rising stem, handwheel, inside
screw, double wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends.
C. Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, double wedge, flanged
ends.
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 4
68/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
ry-
2.12
GLOBE VALVES
6
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Grinnel.
2. Milwaukee.
r-
3. Nibco.
B.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, inside screw,
renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with back seating capacity (repackable
under pressure).
C.
Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, handwheel, OS&Y, plug -type disc, flanged
ends, renewable seat and disc.
2.13
BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
AIR
1. Grinnel.
4 '
2. Milwaukee.
3. Nibco.
s^
B.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze two piece body, stainless steel ball, teflon seats and
stuffing box ring, lever handle and balancing stops, solder or threaded ends with union.
C.
Over 2 Inches: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals,
lever handle flanged.
2.14
SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Grinnel.
2. Milwaukee.
3. Nibco,
B.
Up to and including 2 Inches: Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends.
r—;
C.
Over 2 Inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends.
2.15
SPRING
LOADED CHECK VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Grinnel.
2. Milwaukee.
3. Nibco,
B.
Iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel spring, renewable composition disc, screwed, wafer,
or flanged ends.
2.16
STRAINERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Grinnel.
2. Milwaukee.
3. Nibco.
B.
Size 2 inch and Under: Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern
with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
03860201
PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 5
�..
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Size 2-1/2 inch to 4 inch: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, Y pattern with
3/64 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
D. Size 5 inch and Larger: Flanged iron body for 175 psig working pressure, basket pattern with �-
1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.
2.17 PIPING ROOF SUPPORTS
A. Piping shall be supported by factory fabricated roof supports, MIRO Pillow Block Model 24-R
or approved equivalent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify excavations under provisions of Section 01039. —'
B. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.
C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.
D. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.
E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or
connected equipment.
G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. Coordinate size and location of
access doors with Section 15050.
I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean,
and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
J. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.
Refer to Section 09900.
K. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. `
L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
M. Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves sized 2 inches and smaller, minimum
of one. Provide each plug valve sized 2-1/2 inches and larger with a wrench with set screw.
N. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof hood.
O. Piping shall be supported at 6 feet on center with factory fabricated roof supports. Flash
supports into roof per roofing manufacturer recommendations. --
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r-
3.4 SITE UTILITIES
•-+ A. Before beginning excavation the Contractor shall:
1. Uncover and determine the elevation at beginning and end terminals of each line.
2. Compute and verify depth of all lines and grade of sewer lines and submit figures in
.. writing.
3. Stake route of each line.
4. Arrange utility connections with proper authorities.
5. Locate and identify any conflicting underground structures and adjust grade or routing
to accommodate installation of the lines.
B. Lay pipe to the lines and profiles required by conditions at the site and the drawings. Keep
pipe trenches free of water and dry during the bedding, laying and jointing operations. Install
fittings and valves at the required locations, with joints centered and with valve stems vertical.
Handle pipe carefully to avoid damage to dimensioned ends. Remove pipe with damaged ends
which cannot be suitably repaired. Keep interior of piping and accessories clean.
C. Proximity of Water and Sewer Lines: Unless otherwise required by drawings, lay parallel
water lines and sewer lines in separate trenches at least 10 feet apart. Insofar as possible place
water line at a higher elevation than the sewer. Where water lines and sewer lines cross each
other, the water line shall be at least 3 feet above the sewer, or if this is not possible, amount
of clearance between the lines may be reduced to 12" out to out clearance provided the sewer
line is cast iron for at least 10 feet on each side of the water line.
*` D. The Contractor shall perform any excavations of every description and of whatever substances
encountered, to the depths indicated on the drawings and/or required for the installation of his
work.
�^^ E. Piling of Excavated Materials: All excavated material shall be pile in a manner that will not
endanger the work and that will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Hydrants under
pressure, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, fire and police call boxes, or other utility
controls shall be left unobstructed and accessible until the work is completed. Gutters shall
be kept clear or other satisfactory provisions made for street drainage, and natural water
courses shall not be obstructed. Segregate topsoil for replacement. Unused material shall be
,- removed from the site.
F. Trenching Methods: Trench digging machinery may be used to make trench excavations
except where operation of same would cause damage to existing structures, or plants either
above or below ground; in such instances hand method shall be employed.
G. Barricades and Safety Provisions: To protect persons from injury and to avoid property
damage, adequate barricades, construction signs, warning lights and guards as required shall
be placed and maintained during progress of the construction work. All material, piles,
E equipment, pipe and open trenches that may serve as hazards to vehicular or pedestrian traffic
shall be protected by barricades or fences and warning lights.
H. Protection of Property and Structures: Temporary support, adequate protection, and
maintenance of all underground and surface structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions
encountered in the progress of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense
and under the direction of the Architect. Any structures that have been disturbed shall be
restored upon completion of the work.
I. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until the utilities
systems as installed conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavation materials approved for backfilling, consisting of
earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials free from
large clods of earth or stones deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed 6" layers, until
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 7
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
the pipe has a cover of not less than one foot for water mains and two feet where possible for
other lines.
J. The remainder of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trench, moistened and
tamped in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, and large boulders shall
not be used as backfill material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and will
be a requirement when so directed. Any trenches improperly backfilled or where settlement
occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and
mounded over, and smoothed off.
K. Open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved shall be backfilled as specified
above, except that the entire depth of the trench shall be backfilled in 6" layers, each layer
moistened and compacted to a density at least equal to that of the surrounding earth in such
manner as to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together with the adjoining
earth to provide the required bearing value, so that paving of the area can proceed
immediately after backfilling is completed. Along all other portions of the tenches, the ground
shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left in a
uniform and neat condition.
L. Contractor shall label all new underground utility lines as follows:
1. Non-metallic:
a. Non-metallic pipe installed below ground shall have installed in the same trench
a detectable plastic tape that conforms in to the APWA color coding as follows:
1) Blue — Water
2) Green — Sewer and Sanitary Systems
3) Yellow — Gas
Such tape shall consist of one layer of aluminum foil laminated between two
layers of inert plastic film. Tape shall be approved 2 1/8" wide. The tape shall
be imprinted and continuously traceable. The tape shall be durable for a
minimum of eight years after direct burial. Product shall be Terra Tape
Detectable or approved equal. Tape shall be installed per manufacturer's
instructions, but no less than 12" above the buried line.
2. Metallic:
a. Below ground metallic piping shall have identifying tape similar to that specified
for below ground non-metallic except that the aluminum foil for location is not
required.
M. Water Service: The Contractor shall secure water service from the city main as indicated on
the drawings. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the city for domestic water
service, including the tap, meter and meter box, and pay all charges levied by the city.
Beginning at the termination of the city work, the contractor shall provide and install all water
piping, fittings, valves, valve boxes, etc. shown on the drawings. Meter box shall conform to
municipal requirements.
N. Sanitary Sewer: The contractor shall arrange with the city for sewer service at the point shown
on the drawings. Pay any charges levied by the city for this connection.
O. Gas: Arrange with the gas utility company for natural gas service as shown on the drawings.
From the location of the new meter, extend service to the building. Provide service valves at _
each service point.
P. Fire Protection Water Service: The Contractor shall secure service from the city main at the
point shown. Arrange for the tap with the city and pay all charges levied by the city for the
service.
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 8
08/02
im
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
Q. Testing of Sewer Pipe: Prior to testing for leakage the trench shall be backfilled up to at least
the lower half of the pipe. If required, sufficient additional backfill shall be placed to prevent
pipe movement during testing, leaving the joints uncovered to permit inspection. Visible leaks
encountered shall be corrected. Test shall be made by filling the line to be tested with water
so that a head of at least 10 feet is provided above the top of the pipe at the upper end of the
pipe line to be tested. The filled line shall be allowed to stand not less than 4 hours.
R. For Testing of Water Lines: Test under hydrostatic pressure of 150 PSIG for 4 hours with no
leaks and no pressure drop.
S. For Testing of Gas: Before backfilling, test under air pressure at 15 PSIG for 24 hours. There
shall be no pressure drop, except for correction for temperature variation. If any pressure drop
occurs, soap test every joint, correct leaks and retest.
3.5 APPLICATION
A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.
B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Sweat solder adapters
to pipe.
D. Install gate, ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or
vertical risers.
E. Install globe, ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per one foot. Maintain gradients.
B. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
C. Slope condensate drain lines at 1/8 inch per one foot. Maintain gradients.
3.7 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A.
Refer to Section 15000 for additional information.
B.
Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Provide verification of
disinfection to Architect.
C.
Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda
r
ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
D.
Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to
obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
E.
Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum
15 percent of outlets.
F.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
G.
If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.
H.
Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
I.
Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from
water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.
f
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 9
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide new reduced pressure principle backflow preventer with by-pass valves pressure
reducing valve, and floor sink.
END OF SECTION 15410
03860201 PLUMBING PIPING 15410 - 10
08/02
ems+
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r�
k>
SECTION 15430
�^
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cleanouts.
B.
Water hammer arrestors.
C.
Backflow preventer.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
l
B.
ASME Al 12.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
C.
PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors.
D.
ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Section 15000: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate
assembly and support requirements.
1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, and water
hammer arrestors.
C.
Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly
views.
r-
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 DELIVERY,
STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B.
Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
03860201
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 1
..,
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.8 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Sections 15000 General Mechanical requirements.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Interior Finished Floor Areas (FCO):
1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top
assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed
depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas.
B. Interior Wall Areas (WCO):
1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and
round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw.
2.2 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. ANSI Al 12.26.1; stainless steel construction, bellows type sized in accordance with PDI WH-
201, precharged suitable for operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F and
maximum 250 psi working pressure.
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer
1. Manufacturers:
a. Wilkins/Zurn Model 975XL.
b. Watts Model 909.
C. Febco Model825.
d. Beeco Model 12.
e. Refer to Sections 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options
and substitutions.
2. Under 2 Inches: ANSFASSE 1013, and AWWA C506; bronze body with bronze
internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded
check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check
valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure;
non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
3. Over 2 Inches: ANSFASSE 1013, and AWWA C506, Cast iron body with bronze
internal parts and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded _
check valves; diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between check
valves; third check valve that opens under back pressure in case of diaphragm failure;
non -threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and four test cocks.
03860201 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with
mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage
system.
C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.
D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.
E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water
supply piping to each fixture or group of fixtures.
END OF SECTION 15430
r
�1
03860201 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 15430 - 3
08/02
r
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15440
-- PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1- GENERAL
x 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
p, A.
Water closets.
B.
Lavatories.
C.
Sinks.
''— D.
Urinal.
E.
Floor drains.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ARI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self -Contained Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking
Water Coolers.
B. ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
C. ASME Al 12.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
D. ASME Al 12.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
E. ASME Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
F. ASME Al 12.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).
G. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
H. ASME Al 12.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes,
trim, and finishes.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation methods and procedures.
1.5 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B. Maintenance Data: Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
03860201 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in
place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for electric water cooler.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Supply two sets of faucet washers, flush valve service kits, lavatory supply fittings and toilet
seats of each respective type of fixture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLUSH VALVE TYPE WATER CLOSET — "WC- I"
A. Bowl: Eljer 111-4805, 1.5GPF water saver, elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard height, with
bolt covers.
B. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 16" riser.
C. Seat: Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
2.2 FLUSH VALVE TYPE WATER CLOSET, HANDICAPPED — "WC-2"
A. Bowl: Eljer 111-4815, 1.5GPF water saver elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped 16-3/4"
height, with bolt covers. ADA compliant.
B. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 111, 11-1/2" riser.
C. Seat: Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front.
2.3 SIPHON JET URINAL — "U-1"
A. Fixture: Eljer 161-1150 vitreous china, siphon jet flushing action, with chair and 3/4" top spud.
Mount at standard height.
B. Flush Valve: Sloan Royal 180
2.4 LAVATORIES — "L-1"
A. Vitreous China Counter Mount Basin: Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22/l/2" x 18-1/2" self
rim, with 4" drillings.
B. Faucet: 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator, and 803-0552 perforated grid striner.
03860201 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
s C. P-trap: 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
D. Stops & Risers: 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops.
2.5 SINKS — "KS- I"
A. Fixture: Elkay LR-3319, 33" x 19-1/2" double compartment, 18 gage type 304 self rimming
stainless steel with 4 holes.
B. Supply: Eljer 717-1280, Chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with aerator, hose and
spray,3/8" tubing inlets.
C. Strainer: Two Eljer 803-0580 strainers and crumb cups with tailpieces.
D. P-trap: Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
E. Stops, risers: Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops.
2.6 SINKS — "S-l"
A. Fixture: Just Model SL-ADA- 192 1 -A-GR, 6" depth on bowl, counter mounted handicapped
p accessible sink.
B. Supply: Just Model J-1174-KS
C. Drain: Just Model J-ADA-35 with drain insulator kit and P-Trap with integral cleanout.
4
2.7 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER — "EWC-1"
A. Fixture: Elkay EBFA-8 with stainless steel receptor and vinyl clad cabinet.
B. P-trap: Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon.
C. Stop: Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop.
2.8 HOSE BIBB — "HB-1"
A. Fixture: Nibco Fig. 63 angle sillcock, with vacuum breaker.
2.9 WASHING MACHINE ROUGH -IN BOX — "WB-1"
A. Fixture: Guy Gray recessed stainless steel box with 1-1/2" drain outlet with two angle pattern
hose bibbs.
2.10 SHOWER HEAD — "SH-1" ("R-1" SIMILAR)
A. Fixture: Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and
chrome plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe shower head, universal ball joint, 2-
1/2 GPM volume control. Shower head shall be mounted at 6'-0" AFF.
2.11 SHOWER HEAD — "SH-2"
A. Fixture: Powers Type 413 pressure equalizing shower control with check valves, stops, and
chrome plated metal lever. Powers No. 141-376 deluxe shower head, universal ball joint, 2-
1/2 GPM volume control. Shower head shall be mounted at 5'-6" AFF.
03860201 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.12 EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANT — "EWH"
A. Fixture: Wade W-8620, non -freeze wall hydrant with integral vacuum breaker.
2.13 DRAINS
A. ANSI Al 12.21.1; lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes,
reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel -bronze strainer and deep seal p-trap.
B. Provide all drains as scheduled. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable.
C. All floor drains, shall have deep seal p-trap.
1. Shower Drain — "SD-1"
a. Fixture: Wade No. W-1102 with 5" NB top, cast iron body. Round strainer.
2. Floor Drain — "FD-1"
a. Fixture: Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron body. Round strainer.
3. Floor Sink — "FS-1"
a. Fixture: Wade No. 9013 with sediment bucket. Round strainer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures.
B. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
C. Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provision for the installation of counter
top lavatories and sinks.
3.2 PREPARATION -
A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture
rough -in schedule for particular fixtures.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning.
B. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops, reducers,
and escutcheons.
C. Install components level and plumb.
D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall carriers and bolts.
E. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to
match fixture.
F. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold
fixture in place.
G. Install floor drains where shown and coordinate slope of floor to drain.
3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before
rough -in and installation.
03860201 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 4
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r
3.5 ADJUSTING
- A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work.
B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or
overflow.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work.
B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.
B. Do not permit use of fixtures.
t
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. Fixture Heights: Install fixtures to heights above finished floor as indicated on architectural
drawings and plumbing fixture schedule, to be in compliance with ADA requirements.
B. Fixture Rough -In, refer to plumbing schedule on drawings for sizes.
END OF SECTION 15440
03860201 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15440 - 5
,,., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15625
r
LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS
...
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Low -intensity infrared unit heaters.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASHRAE 103 - Heating Seasonal Efficiency of Central Furnaces and Boilers, Methods of
Testing.
B.
NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
C.
NFPA 54 (AGA Z223.1) - National Fuel Gas Code.
D.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
F.
NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
G.
NFPA 211 - Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances.
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
ms,
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide manufacturer's literature and data indicating rated capacities, weights,
accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.
C.
Shop Drawings:
D.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate rigging, assembly, and installation instructions.
1.4 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
C.
Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been filled out in Owners
name and registered with manufacturer.
p'
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories
r
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
03860201 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 15625 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Provide ten year manufacturers warranty for all tubes and five year warranty on the burner.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS
A. Units: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, tube,
tube shield, heat exchanger, burner, controls, and accessories:
1. Heating: Natural gas fired.
B. Gas Burner:
1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply,
2. Gas valve, two stage provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining
pressure regulation, safety pilot, manual set (On -Off), pilot filtration, automatic electric
valve.
3. Electronic pilot ignition, with electric spark igniter.
4. Automatic vent damper with synchronous spring return damper motor.
5. Non -corrosive combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor.
C. Gas Burner Safety Controls:
1. Thermocouple sensor: Prevents opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven and
stops gas flow on ignition failure.
2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents operation.
3. Vent safety shutoff sensor: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents
operation, manual reset.
4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting, de -energizes burner on
excessive bonnet temperature, automatic resets.
D. Operating Controls
1. Room Thermostat: Manufacturer supplied thermostat, cycles burner to maintain room
temperature setting.
2. On/Off Switch: Manufacturer supplied On/Off switch.
E. Performance:
1. Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than requirements of ASHRAE 90A;
seasonal efficiency to ASHRAE 103.
2. Refer to Low -Intensity Infrared Unit Heater Schedule on drawings. Gas heating
capacities are not derated for altitude.
2.2 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS
A. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, and outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in
compliance with UL 441. "
B. Mechanically Actuated Vent Dampers: Same size as draft hood collar, constructed of stainless
steel or galvanized steel, with corrosion -resistant components, in compliance with ANSI
Z21.66.
03860201 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 15625 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
A-.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting
work.
B. Verify that space is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on shop
drawings.
C. Verify that proper power supply is available.
D. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. Connections shall be made the
flexible braided stainless steel connection with 6" dirt leg and shutoff valve.
E. Contractor shall coordinate location with over -head door tracks and vehicle exhaust system,
to avoid all conflicts.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.
B. Provide vent connections to NFPA 211.
C. Install gas -fired units in accordance with NFPA 54.
D. Provide operating controls.
E. Provide connection to electrical power systems.
F. Install radiant heating from the structure as shown on the drawings, coordinate installation
with structural members.
END OF SECTION
03860201 LOW -INTENSITY INFRARED UNIT HEATERS 15625 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15781
PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged roof top unit with energy recycler.
B. Unit controls.
C. Roof mounting curb and base.
D. Maintenance service.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ARI 210 - Unitary Air -Conditioning Equipment.
B.
ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
C.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
--
1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
..•,
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies
required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and
connection requirements, and duct connections.
C.
Product Data: Provide capacity and dimensions of manufactured products and assemblies
required for this project. Indicate electrical service with electrical characteristics and
connection requirements, and duct connections.
D.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Submittals for information.
E.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate assembly, support details, connection
requirements, and include start-up instructions.
F.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout, 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Data and 15000
General Mechanical Requirements: Submittals for project closeout.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating
instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
03860201 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 1
,.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting curbs are in place,
ready for immediate installation of units.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Provide a five-year warranty to include coverage for refrigeration compressors and gas -fired
heat exchangers.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged roof top units for one year from Date of
Substantial Completion.
C. Provide maintenance service with a two -month interval as maximum time period between
calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.
D. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data,
including minimum of six filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt replacement, and
controls check-out, adjustments, and recalibration.
E. Submit copy of service call work order or report, and include description of work performed.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Provide two complete set of each type of filters.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Carrier.
B. Lennox.
C. Trane.
D. York.
E. Refer to Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: For Product options and
substitutions
F. Note: Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units, energy recycler, and system controls must
be from the same manufacturer. No exceptions allowed.
2.2 AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. General: Roof mounted units having gas burner and electric refrigeration.
B. Description: Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet
and frame, supply fan, heat exchanger and burner, controls, air filters, refrigerant cooling coil
and compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan.
03860201 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Electrical Characteristics: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
1. Refer to Division 16000.
r* D. DISCONNECT SWITCH: IS TO BE SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY DIVISION 16
CONTRACTOR. MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO COORDINATE ALL UNIT
REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR.
k-
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removable access panels
with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Structural members shall be
minimum 18 gage, with access doors or removable panels of minimum 20 gage.
B. Insulation: One inch thick neoprene coated glass fiber with edges protected from erosion.
C. Heat Exchangers: Stainless steel, of welded construction.
D. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable
variable pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted high efficiency motor or direct
drive as indicated. Isolate complete fan assembly.
E. Air Filters: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
F. Roof Mounting Curb: 14 inches high galvanized steel, channel frame with gaskets, nailer
strips.
2.4 BURNER
A. Gas Burner: Atmospheric, induced draft, or forced draft type burner with adjustable
combustion air supply, pressure regulator, gas valves, manual shut-off, intermittent spark or
glow coil ignition, flame sensing device, and automatic 100 percent shut-off pilot.
B. Gas Burner Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishment of flame, prevent
opening of gas valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, energize
blower motor, and after air flow proven and slight delay, allow gas valve to open.
C. High Limit Control: Temperature sensor with fixed stop at maximum permissible setting,
de -energize burner on excessive bonnet temperature and energize burner when temperature
drops to lower safe value.
D. Supply Fan Control: Temperature sensor sensing bonnet temperatures and independent of
burner controls, with provisions for continuous fan operation.
2.5 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection.
B. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity and less,
and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5 tons cooling
capacity and larger.
2.6 COMPRESSOR
A. Provide hermetic or semi -hermetic compressors, 3600 rpm maximum, resiliently mounted with
positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high and low pressure safety controls, motor overload
protection, suction and discharge service valves and gage ports, and filter drier.
B. Five-minute timed off circuit to delay compressor start.
03860201 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 3
,..., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Outdoor thermostat to energize compressor above 57 degrees F ambient.
D. Provide step capacity control by hot gas by-pass, cycling compressors, cylinder unloading or
cycling multi -speed compressors.
2.7 CONDENSER COIL
A. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows and coil guard.
B. Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload
protection, wired to operate with compressor. Provide high efficiency fan motors.
C. Provide refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans.
D. Unit shall have metal hail guard. Guard shall be PVC coated steel wire coil with a maximum
3/8" spacing grid.
2.8 MIXED AIR CASING
A. Dampers: Provide manual outside and return air dampers for fixed outside air quantity.
B. Gaskets: Provide tight fitting dampers with edge gaskets maximum leakage 5 percent at 2
inches pressure differential.
C. Damper Operator: 24 volt with gear train sealed in oil with spring return on units 7.5 ton
cooling capacity and larger.
D. Mixed Air Controls: Maintain selected supply air temperature and return dampers to minimum
position on call for heating and when ambient air enthalpy exceeds return air enthalpy.
2.9 ENERGY RECYCLER
A. Factory assembled and factory mounted single piece heating and cooling accessory for use
with RTU-1 and RTU-2. Contained within the unit enclosure shall be all factory wiring,
piping, controls, and refrigerant charge (R-22).
B. Unit shall be mounted on extension rails from the rooftop unit.
C. Provide all standard features with unit. Energy Recycler shall be controlled by RTU
thermostat.
2.10 OPERATING CONTROL
A. Provide low voltage, programmable room thermostat to control burner operation, compressor
and condenser fan, economize cycle and supply fan to maintain temperature setting.
1. Include system selector switch (off -heat -auto -cool) and fan control switch (auto -on).
2. Provide double acting thermostat with minimum 1 stage heating and 1 stage cooling.
3. Locate thermostat in room as shown.
B. Provide low limit thermostat in supply air to close outside air damper and stop supply fan.
C. Thermostat and controls to be provided by roof top unit manufacturer. No exceptions.
2.11 PERFORMANCE
A. Gas Heating: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
B. Cooling Capacity: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
C. Supply Air: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
D. Scheduled Performance: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
E. Supply and return air: Corrected to 3250 feet altitude.
0386020`1 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to
beginning work.
B. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on shop
drawings.
C. Verify that proper power supply is available.
D. Verify that outside air intake is minimum 10'-0" from all exhaust and/or plumbing vents.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A.
C. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb providing watertight enclosure to protect
ductwork and utility services. Install roof mounting curb and rooftop unit level.
D. Connect thermostat to rooftop unit.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Provide initial start-up and shut -down during first year of operation, including routine
servicing and check-out.
3.4 SCHEDULES: Refer to schedules on drawings for information.
END OF SECTION 15781
03860201 PACKAGED ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 15781 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15870
POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Roof mounted exhausters.
B.
Ceiling mounted exhausters.
C.
Vehicle exhaust system.
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control and 15000 General Mechanical Requirements:
Requirements for references and standards.
B.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
C.
AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
D.
AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
E.
AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
F.
AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
G.
NEMA MG 1 -Motors and Generators.
H.
UL 705 - Power Ventilators.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
N„
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
-
B.
Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified
operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and
electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions.
7 1.5
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Procedures for submittals.
'^
B.
Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare
parts list, and wiring diagrams.
C.
Warranty: Submit manufacturers warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters
Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements.
B. Supply two sets of belts for each fan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF MOUNTED EXHAUSTERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Greenheck
2.
Loren Cook
3.
Penn Vantilator
4.
Substitutions: Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation fans are not
acceptable for this application.
B.
Product Requirements:
1.
Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating
Seal.
2.
Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound
Rating Seal.
3.
Fabrication: Conform to AMA 99.
4.
UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in —
accordance with UL 705.
C.
Construction:
1.
Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; —
resilient mounted motor; %2 inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire bird screen;
square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb gaskets.
2.
Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed;
variable and adjustable pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with
sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings.
D.
Accessories:
1.
Roof curb: 12 inch high, self -flashing aluminum with continuously welded seams,
built-in cant strips, one inch insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer
strip. _
2.
Disconnect Switch: Factory -wired and mounted, non -fusible, in housing for thermal
overload protected motor.
3.
Back -draft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt
edged with offset hinge pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.
E.
Electrical characteristics and components:
1.
Refer to Division 16 Specifications and Schedules.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
2.2 CEILING EXHAUST FAN
A. Manufacturers:
1. Loren Cook.
2. Greenheck.
3. Penn Ventilator.
4. Substitutions: Acme Manufacturing is not permitted as an alternate.
B. Construction
1. Centrifugal Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven with galvanized steel housing, resilient
mounted motor, gravity back -draft damper in discharge.
2. Disconnect Switch: Cord and plug in housing for thermal overload protected motor
and wall mounted multiple speed switch and solid state speed controller.
3. Grille: Molded white plastic.
4. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed;
variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required rpm is obtained
with sheaves set at mid -position; fan shaft with self -aligning pre -lubricated ball
bearings.
C. Electrical characteristics and components. Refer to Division 16 Specifications and
Schedules.
2.3 VEHICLE EXHAUST SYSTEM:
A. System to provide vehicle exhaust for two fire trucks. As per requested by owner, vehicle
exhaust manufacturer shall be Plymovent Vehicle Exhaust Ventilation Systems.
B. Manufacturer/Contractor to determine exhaust requirements for owner supplied fire
trucks. _Contractor shall verify the information with the owner. Contractor shall provide
this data to Engineer with the submittals for the entire vehicle exhaust system.
C. Scope of System Operation: The vehicle exhaust removal system shall source capture
100% of the exhaust emissions directly at the tail pipe of the vehicle and exhaust those
emissions to a specified area safely outside the building. When the vehicle returns to the
station, simply sleeve the nozzle over the tail pipe, pull up on the hose handle, and connect
the electromagnet assembly to the anchor plate mounted to the vehicle. The nozzle remains
in place over the tail pipe by spring tension created between the dimensional relationship
from the tail pipe to the anchor plate. Upon vehicle exit, the electromagnet and anchor
plate connection serves as the lead pulling component for the hose and nozzle which
moves with the vehicle in either direction of travel, forward or reverse. As the tail pipe
passes the exit threshold, the electromagnet is automatically de -energized by a limit switch
that contacts a disconnection plate allowing the nozzle and hose to smoothly separate from
the vehicle. After release, the balancer safely retracts the hose assembly in a stored
position ready to receive the vehicle for connection to the exhaust extraction system upon
reentry. No positive locking device nor moving parts shall be permitted to be connected to
the tail pipe. Bending over to connect the exhaust system and expose the operator to
harmful exhaust fumes is not permitted. Upon disconnection, the hose assembly shall not
be permitted to swing wide. Possibly endangering personnel and the hose shall remain at
the door ready for connection.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Fan Auto -Start: As the emergency apparatus approaches the facility, the Fan Auto -Start
system automatically starts the exhaust fan, thus the fan is at full rpm prior to entry or
connection. This is accomplished by an FCC approved radio transmitter mounted in the
vehicle sending a signal to a receiver to start the fan. This permits the operator to connect
the exhaust system to the vehicle without being exposed to noxious exhaust fumes. The
fan remains in the "on" position for the duration that the vehicle is running. The fan does
not shut down until after the vehicle has been turned off and can be preset from
45 seconds — 10 minutes with an adjustable timer. Upon emergency dispatch of the
vehicle, the exhaust fan shall automatically start prior to the engine being energized. The
fan will automatically shut down after the apparatus has left the building and the timer
engages. The control console shall be a NEMA-1 enclosure with a dual safety lock cover.
Internal components are UL approved; manufactured by General Electric.
E. Optional Fan Activation: The exhaust fan shall be operated in conjunction with an
automatic off delay timer, 0-10 minute variable setting, wired to the open relay of the door
opener or a central tone system. This allows for automatic operation of the exhaust fan
when opening the vehicle exit or entry door. Alternatively, the fan shall also have the
capability to be operated from a 0-20 minute manual override timer to be located in the
vehicle bay area at a convenient access location.
F. Guide Track: The horizontal guide track supports and stores the overhead hose and is
mounted overhead and to the side of the vehicle. Mounted to the horizontal guide track is a
6: diameter flexible hose with individual inner trolleys which ride inside the guide track
and permit the flexible hose to expand and contract while the vehicle is moving. The
horizontal guide track shall be made of 12 gauge low carbon strip steel, cold formed into a
channel measuring 1.5625" square, with one side having a continuous open slot measuring
0.4375" wide, giving an overall throat depth of 1.5". Guide tracks shall be provided such
that no incremental length shall be greater than 20 feet without a 4 bolt flange -to -flange
connection arrangement for field assembly to the length as shown or indicated on the
drawings. Guide tracks shall have a non -toxic alkyd enamel rust preventive finish. Guide
tracks shall be supported by structural vertical supports, i.e. schedule 170 unistrut and/or
'/4" angle iron, connected to the ceiling/wall of the facility.
G. Guide Track Clamping Brackets: Each horizontal guide track shall be provided with an
adjustable self aligning clamping bracket to support and connect the guide track to the
installation brackets. Clamping brackets shall be of 0.1875" electro-plated galvanized steel
bar and formed in configuration which wraps tightly around and is bolted to the guide
track. Clamping brackets shall be 1.625" wide x 4.125" high, and assembled to the guide
track at a distance no greater than 9'6" on center.
H. Horizontal Extraction Hose: The horizontal extraction hose is suspended from the
horizontal guide track which stores the hose up and out of the way to ensure a safer
approach to the apparatus during a run. The horizontal extraction hose shall be 6" in
diameter and of suitable flexibility and length to prevent premature wear on the hose
material from being fully stretched on a regular basis. Therefore, the hose must be able to
withstand 100,000 runs without tearing, perforating or collapsing (under normal use with
proper installation and care). The material for the hose shall be Trevira bavric covered
with HYPALON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The hose shall be fire resistant
according to DIN 4102 B 1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340
degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent
usage basis. The helix shall be external and made of galvanized steel or aluminum. The
helix shall have high flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone, and weather
resistance. The hose compression ratio shall not be less than 6:1. The helix shall be
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
'
arranged to have eyelets clamped and pressed approximately every 12". The eyelets are to
be used for suspending the hose from individual nylon trolleys, maintenance free, which
will be inserted in the horizontal guide track upon assembly at the job site. Hose trolleys
shall have an overall diameter and width to allow a tolerance of no greater than 0.046"
clearance between cylinder ends and inner wall of the guide tack. Once installed in the
guide track, the clearance between the top of the horizontal hose and the bottom of the
guide track shall less than or equal to 2" at any given point, whether the hose is extended
or compressed. This concept shall prevent any continuous hanging or drooping loops of
�,..
hose which could obstruct or hinder movement of people or vehicles in the work place. At
the end of the flexible hose shall be a minimum 6-1/4" diameter round galvanized steel
connector as a coupler for flexible to solid ductwork. The connector shall be arranged to
fasten to the end of the guide track and be adjustable upon assembly for alignment to solid
duct work.
I. Upper Vertical Extraction Hose: The upper vertical extraction hose shall be 6: in diameter,
and of suitable flexibility to have a compression ratio of 6:1. The hose material shall
Trevira fabric covered with HYPALYON (CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polythylene). The
hose shall be fire resistant according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of
withstanding temperatures of 340 degrees Fahrenheit continuously and up to 370 degreed
Fahrenheit on an intermittent usage basis. The external helix shall be made of galvanized
steel or aluminum, not exposed to the internal air stream, to maintain a smooth bore
interior hose for minimum static pressure losses and maximum efficiency. The helix shall
have high flexibility and be able to withstand oil, chemical, ozone and weather resistance.
J. Balancer: The balancer shall be provided to add or release tension to the vertical hose and
nozzle assembly away from the vehicle as it leaves the building, when the electromagnet
disengages. The balancer also permits the vertical hose and nozzle assembly to be
suspended safely off the floor in the storage position when not in use. The balancer shall
be of a cone shape drum design with centrifugal brake and reverse spring characteristics,
!^
mounted on a 12 gauge steel formed bracket. The balancer is to be equipped with 27 feet
of cord which shall feed from the balancer cone, penetrate a steel elbow (which joins the
horizontal and vertical hoses) and is fastened internally at the electromagnet coupler, so
'^
the cord is internal to the upper vertical extraction hose. The centrifugal brake shall ensure
that the cord is would onto the drum at a low speed. The reverse spring characteristic shall
have the full spring power to the balancer when the cord is wound onto the drum. The
,,..,
spring power shall be gradually and continually reduced the farther the cord is pulled
(unwound) off the balancer cone. At 26.4'of cord extension, lifting power shall be 27 ft.
lbs. Of torque. The withdrawal shall be 50% greater than the lifting power. The cone
shaped drum and cord assembly shall be exposed for ease of adjustment to tension if
required. Mounted to the Balancer formed bracket shall be 6: x 90 degrees, 1.5 radius, 24
gauge coated steel elbow which is to join the horizontal extraction hose to the vertical
extraction hose with 6: to 5: reducer hose clamps and covers as provided. Attached to the
backside of the balancer formed bracket is an all steel trolley which inserts into the
horizontal guide track upon field assembly. The trolley framework shall be welded and be
constructed of 25: hardened steel and fitted with no less than six steel ball bearing rollers
"~
which freely roll in the guide track.
K. Microswitch: Mounted to the balancer formed bracket shall be a 24V microswitch which,
acting as a limit switch, is factory pre -wired to energize and de -energize the electromagnet
upon contact with a disconnection plate positioned on the horizontal guide track.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 1'5870 - 5
�., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
L. Diconnected Plate: Affixed to the end of the guide track nearest the exit door, shall be a
galvanized steel disconnection plate. The disconnection plate shall serve as the contact
point for the microswitch which, upon contact with the disconnection plate, shall de -
energize the electromagnet to separate the hose assemble from the vehicle The separation
of the entire hose assembly from the vehicle is one step process whereby no stress or strain
is transferred from the vehicle to the exhaust equipment. Numerous mechanical functions
to achieve nozzle separation such as valve activation, pneumatic deflation, and pulling
forces to remove the nozzle from the tail pipe are not permitted. The disconnection plate
shall be an adjustable bolted attachment and shall be positioned upon installation to create
a nozzle release point between 1' to 2' inside the door threshold as the vehicle exits the
building.
M. End Stop: The guide track shall be equipped with an end stop which is designed to stop the
travel of the entire hose assembly. The stopping action itself must be spring cushioned to
prevent the hose and nozzle assembly from coming to an abrupt and immediate halt. A
coiled spring end stop is inserted internally at the end of the guide track nearest to the exit
door. The spring must be safety bolted in place at the opposite end of the contact point of
the balancer trolley.
N. Electromagnet Assembly: An electromagnet assembly shall be used as the means of
keeping the nozzle and hose assembly attached to the vehicle, whether at rest or as it
moves to the point of exit. The electromagnet disc, a manual override switch, and an
anchor plate. The electromagnet disc assembly shall consist of a 2.75" diameter by
1.5625" wide cup which is externally mounted to the side of a 6: diameter galvanized steel
sleeve. The steel sleeve shall serve as both the mounting point of the electromagnet as well
as the coupler of the upper vertical hose and lower hose assembly with nozzle. The steel
sleeve shall be 5: in diameter, 24 gauge galvanized steel and have a rolled bead at each end
to secure the hoses via hose clamps. The electromagnet disc assembly shall be slightly
recessed within a hard resilient plastic cup, measuring 2.75" in diameter by 1.5625" deep
by 0.0625" thick. The plastic cup also serves as a guide for ease of connection to the
anchor plate mounted on the vehicle. The disc consists of an outer 0.125" thick metal ring
encased in bakalyte which in turn surrounds a 1.25" diameter solid metal.disc. These metal
components shall serve as the energized contact points to the anchor plate on the vehicle.
The entire width of the cup assembly shall be protected by a 0.0625" thick molded rubber
collar, formed to be of a diameter greater than 3.25", creating an anti -scratching cover.
The formed collar shall also be of a smooth and rounded configuration to prevent hooking
or catching on external devices of the vehicle.
O. Manual Override Switch: A manual override switch shall be easily accessible to
disconnect the hose assembly while washing the vehicle or accessing storage
compartments. The manual override switch shall be mounted externally, located 90
degrees to the right side of the electromagnet disc assembly and facing the operator. The
purpose of the switch shall be to manually de -energize the electromagnet, allowing the
hose and nozzle assembly to come away unrestrained from the vehicle when in the parked
position within the building. The switch shall be a normally closed, single pole, single
throw (NC-SPST), spring loaded, momentary ON with a black matte rocking actuator. The
switch shall be UL Recognized, CSA Approved and rated for 6A, 250VAC. The switch
shall be surrounded an mounted in a closed cell neoprene jacket, 1.25" wide. The jacket is
epoxy coated to the outside of the collar and wraps 90 degrees to the electromagnet, but
protrudes no greater than 0.875" externally off the side wall. Power is fed to the switches
as an integral function of the vertical base, which in turn feeds the electromagnet.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
P. Anchor Plate: The anchor plate shall be mounted on the vehicle to allow the operator, in
an upright position, to connect the electromagnet. The anchor plate shall have an outer
r*
circular holder made of hard resilient plastic, which measures 4.365" in diameter and has
an outer rim thickness of 0.625". The inside diameter of the rim shall be 3.3125" which
allows adequate clearance for operator ease of connection to the electromagnet. Recessed
in the center of the holder shall be a finished steel disc measuring 2.4375: in diameter and
0.21875" thick, and held in place with a set screw. The backside of the circular holder
shall be flat, smooth, and with no protrusions. There shall also be two pass through hoes
,.,
on the backside for field installation of the anchor plate to the vehicle. The backside of the
metal plate shall have two tapped holes for receiving two machine screws upon field
assembly to the vehicle. The anchor plate shall be positioned on the vehicle in relation to
,e
the vertical and horizontal centerlines of the tail pipe outlet. The horizontal distance shall
be f 3" beyond the vertical centerline toward the front of the vehicle. The vertical range
shall be 24: (+4" — 1 ") from the horizontal centerline. Deviations to the location of the
anchor plate beyond the dimensional parameters previously described are to be approved
solely by an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the exhaust removal system.
Q. Lower Vertical Hose: The lower vertical hose shall be 6" in diameter and be formed to
easily connect the nozzle to the tail pipe. The hose diameter shall exceed the tail pipe
diameter to ensure source capture of 100% of all exhaust fume volume emissions. The
typical engine and truck pipe diameter is 5". A 4" diameter hose, which is smaller than the
exhaust discharge point, shall not be permitted as it does not have the volume capacity to
handle all fumes emitted. The hose material shall be Trevira fabric covered with
GYPALON(CSM, Chloro-sulfonated polyethylene). The hose shall be fire resistant
according to DIN 4102 B1. The hose shall be capable of withstanding temperatures of 340
degrees Fahrenheit continuously, and up to 370 degrees Fahrenheit on an intermittent
usage basis. The entire hose assembly shall be capable of handling pump/load tests as
required on a daily basis. The nozzle permits an ambient air stream to immediately reduce
exhaust emission temperatures by at least 50% at the point of capture. The reduced air
stream temperatures prolong component life by not permitting thermal breakdown of
materials. The galvanized steel helix shall be completely rubber encapsulated.
�—
R. Nozzle: The flexibility between the electromagnet collar assembly and the nozzle shall be
such that the operator never has to touch the nozzle for connection, but can maneuver the
nozzle to the tail pipe while the operator grips the hose handle. As the operator
,r..,
simultaneously positions the electromagnet to the anchor plate, tension will e
automatically applied to the nozzle face, created by an internal leaf spring assembly, which
will hold the nozzle face firmly in place over the tail pipe. The positioning of the
electromagnet on the vehicle, combined with the tension created at the nozzle, shall not
allow the nozzle to come away from the tail pipe until the electromagnet is either
automatically or manually de -energized. Manually detaching the electromagnet from the
anchor plate, while still energized, shall not be allowed. The nozzle shall be constructed of
both metal and rubber, with no internal movable parts related to the connection of the
nozzle to the tail pipe. The inlet diameter at the nozzle is oversized to allow maximum
airflow capacity for large engines and/or pump tests. The nozzle permits ambient air into
the heated air stream when the vehicle is running and immediately reduces the exhaust
temperature and eliminates thermal breakdown of materials. The inlet boot of the nozzle is
to be made of EPDM rubber, and bonded to a sturdy 24 gauge steel conical reducer. When
at rest and away form the vehicle, the nozzle and the lower hose shall constantly maintain
a form which causes the inlet plane of the nozzle to be facing upward from the floor, on an
approximate 30 degree angle. The purpose of this configuration shall be to allow the
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 7
,.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
operator a clear visual perspective of the nozzle inlet as it is being mounted the tail pipe
upon vehicle connection. This upward configuration of the nozzle shall be accomplished
by means of an internally fixed specially formed leaf spring affixed to the conical reducer.
The design of the nozzle shall allow for maximum flexibility to accept a variety of tailpipe
configurations. Tail pipe extensions may be required to bring the pipe to the side of the
chassis. Tail pipe adapters or mechanical pipe modifications are not permitted. For the
nozzle assembly, no positive locking devices or a concept of a positive locking device,
pneumatics, internal or external air hoses, wires, airbags, valves or precautionary devices
for pneumatic bursting pressure shall be permitted or allowed.
S. Installation: The exhaust removal system shall be installed as indicated and recommended
by the manufacturer. Welding and brazing shall conform to ASME-17. Slip joints shall be
sealed. Riser duct shall be supported to the structure as indicated on the drawings. Main
duct shall be attached to building structural members.
T. Exhaust System Suspension: Installation height of guide track shall be between 10' to 16'
range or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The guide track shall be installed
approximately 14" form the side of the vehicle and >>12" away from the side edge of the
exit door. The guide track for the exhaust system shall include corrosion resistant brackets
for ease of mounting to structural channel, trusses, or angle iron. Brackets shall be a
minimum of 0.125" thickness. Mounting bolts to be no less than 0.375" diameter
(structural grade 8) for connection to steel frame. Bolts required for masonry installation
shall be 0.5" x 3.5" expansion bolts, or 0.375" x 4: sleeve anchors for wall mount masonry
connection.
U. Testing: Each exhaust system and inlet shall be balanced to produce the indicated air
quantities within 10 percent at the conditions shown. Control devices shall be set to
control at the points indicated or directed. Any fans with bearing shall be lubricated, and
the speed, direction and rotation of each fan shall be checked and verified as running
correctly. The running current of each motor shall be checked and verified as correct.
Upon completion and prior acceptance of the installation, the exhaust system shall be test
at the operating conditions to demonstrate satisfactory functional and operating efficiency.
Operating tests shall cover a period of not less than 2 hours for each system, and all tests
will, if requested, be conducted in the presence of the owner. If tests do not demonstrate
satisfactory operation of the exhaust system, deficiencies shall be corrected and tested. All
instruments, facilities, and labor required to properly conduct the tests shall be provided by
the Contractor.
V. Training: The Contractor, or authorized personnel, shall provide training to the Owner (or
appointed representatives of the Owner) in the daily use of and maintenance of the vehicle
exhaust removal system installed and specified herein. The Owner shall be notified at least
7 days prior to the date scheduled for the training course.
W. Vehicle Exhaust System Manufacturer: Plymovent Exhaust System.
Example Exhaust System:
1. Fan model: M3613T
2. Fan Electrical Data: 208v/36
3. Fan HP: 5.0
4. Fan SP: 7.7"
5. Fan CFM: 1000 (total), 500 per drop
6. Rail length:30'-0"
Install system as per manufacturer's directions.
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 8
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3-EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Section 15000 General Mechanical Requirements: Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, any filters are in place, and bearings are
lubricated.
END OF SECTION
03860201 POWER VENTILATORS AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 15870 - 9
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15890
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal ductwork.
B.
Duct cleaning.
1.2 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel
B.
ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
C.
ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
D.
ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.
r
E.
ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless and Heat -Resisting Steel Plate,
Sheet, and Strip.
F.
ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the
n
Hot -Dip Process.
G.
ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by Hot -Dip Process, Lock Forming
Quality.
H.
ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High -Strength, Low -Alloy, Hot -Rolled and
Cold -Rolled.
I.
ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip,
Commercial Quality.
J.
AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.
K.
NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
L.
NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
M.
SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
N.
SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
O.
UL 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size round
ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of equivalent
rectangular and round ducts.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.
k
■.w
03860201
DUCTWORK 15890 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Sections 15000.
B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type.
Show additional fittings used.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible.
B. Maintain one copy of document on site.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant
manufacturers.
B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming
quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.
B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366.
C. Insulated Flexible Ducts:
1. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass
insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film.
2. Pressure Rating: 10 inches W.G. positive and 1.0 inches W.G. negative.
3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.
4. Temperature Range: -100 F to 1600 F.
5. Maximum length of flex runouts: 3'-0".
D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.
E. Sealant:
1. Non -hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials; liquid
used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic.
F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or
continuously threaded.
03860201 DUCTWORK 15890 - 2
08/02
- LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
r-
2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION
A. Fabricate and support in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,
reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide [air foil]
turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning vanes of perforated metal
with glass fiber insulation.
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;
maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence
downstream.
D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages
indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed
or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.
E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree
conical tee connections may be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible.
C. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions. No lined supply air are permitted.
D. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers.
Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can
with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in
insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring.
E. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
F. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with
crimp in direction of air flow.
G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.
H. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not
use flexible duct to change direction.
I. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with Y-0" maximum length of flexible duct held in
place with strap or clamp.
J. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
K. During construction, provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open
ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.
03860201 DUCTWORK 15890 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of 15000.
B. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To
obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed
by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.
C. Clean duct systems with high power vacuum machines. Protect equipment, which may be
harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning. Provide adequate access into
ductwork for cleaning purposes.
3.3 SCHEDULES
A. DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
MATERIAL
Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coil
Steel
General Exhaust
Steel
Return and Relief
Steel
B. DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE
AIR SYSTEM
PRESSURE CLASS
Supply and Return System with Cooling Coils)
1 inch
General Exhaust
1 inch
Return and Relief
1-inch
END OF SECTION
03860201 DUCTWORK 15890 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 15910
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Air turning devices/extractors.
B. Backdraft dampers.
C. Duct access doors.
D. Duct test holes.
E. Flexible duct connections.
F. Volume control dampers.
G. Diffusers.
H. Registers/grilles.
I. Goosenecks.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
B. NFPA 92A - Smoke Control Systems.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.
E. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire -Protection Service.
F. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.
G. UL 555S - Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems.
H. ARI 650 — Air Outlets and Inlets.
I. ASHRAE 70 — Method of Testing for Rating the Airflow Performance of Outlets and Inlets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers,
duct access doors and duct test holes.
C. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers, duct
access doors, and hardware used. Include electrical characteristics and connection
requirements.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Sections 15000.
B. Record actual locations of access doors.
03860201 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories
Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Sections 01600 and
15000.
B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish under provisions of Sections 01700 and 15000.
B. Provide two of each size and type of fusible link.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS
A. Multi -blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or
aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap, ceiling mounted rotary operator knob
or worm drive mechanism with 18 inch long removable key operator.
2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.
A. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches or Smaller, Furnished with Air Moving
Equipment: Air moving equipment manufacturers standard construction.
B. Multi -Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage thick galvanized
steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt
or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle -free manner with 90 degree stop, steel
ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying
differential static pressure.
2.3 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Fabrication: Rigid and close -fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick
fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation
with sheet metal cover. r
1. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with sash locks.
2. Up to 18 Inches Square: Provide two hinges and two sash locks.
3. Larger Sizes: Provide an additional hinge. —
03860201 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
4. Sash Lock:
5. Compression Latch:
6. Hinge:
C. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
2.4 DUCT TEST HOLES
A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene
plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist -on metal caps.
B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide
extended neck fittings to clear insulation.
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.
1. Fabric: UL listed fire -retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,
minimum density 30 oz per sq. yd.
2. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches wide.
3. Metal: 3 inch wide, 24 gage thick galvanized steel.
2.6 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, and as indicated.
B. Splitter Dampers:
1. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches size in either direction, and two gages heavier
for sizes over 24 inch.
2. Blade: Fabricate of double thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with
continuous hinge or rod.
3. Operator: Minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action,
flanged bushing with set screw.
C. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes
8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel
frame with suitable hardware.
D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On
multiple blade dampers, provide oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings.
E. Quadrants:
1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers.
2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or
adapters.
3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches, provide regulator at both ends.
2.7 GOOSENECKS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible, of minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. Provide birdscreen over intake/relief.
03860201 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 3._.
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow --
SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to Section 15890
for duct construction and pressure class.
B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where -
indicated.
C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as
indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder
access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.
D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.
E. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans
and motorized equipment.
F. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches
are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
G. Use splitter dampers only where indicated.
H. Provide balancing dampers on high velocity systems where indicated.
I. Check location of outlets and inlets, make necessary adjustments in position to conform with
architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
J. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.
K. Provide balancing dampers on duct take -off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite
whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.
L. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black.
END OF SECTION
03860201 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15910 - 4
08/02 `—
P"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
i
SECTION 15990
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.
B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.
B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building
Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.
D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems.
E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of
Contract.
C. Field Reports: Submit under provisions of Section 15000.
D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting,
and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.
E. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing,
and equipment data required.
F. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final
copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.
G. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with
air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat
locations.
H. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance forms.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field
Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance.
B. Maintain one copy of document on site.
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 0-1 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified
in this Section with minimum three years documented experience certified by AABC or
NEBB.
B. Perform Work under supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer.
1.6 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence work under the provisions of Section 15000.
B. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of work
before Substantial Completion of Project.
PART2-PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following
conditions:
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.
2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to
final filters.
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.
.-A
6. Fans are rotating correctly.
7. Volume dampers are in place and open.
8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.
9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.
10. Air outlets are installed and connected.
11. Duct system leakage is minimized.
B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services,
which prevent system balance.
C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 2
08/02 -!-i
rA
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
eMr
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems
and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design
. to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.
B. Permanently mark settings of dampers and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be
restored. Set and lock memory stops.
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such
disruption has been rectified.
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing
doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or
areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.
F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit report.
3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
r�
A.
Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and
exhaust air quantities at site altitude.
' B.
Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area
of duct.
C.
Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.
D.
Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts
and noise.
E.
Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not
"*
create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices
such as dampers and splitters.
F.
Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required.
Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.
G.
Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or
inlet.
H.
Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure
drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.
I.
Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design
conditions.
J.
Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check
leakage.
K.
Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide
required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches positive static
pressure near the building entries.
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
3.6 SCHEDULES
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
1. All Fans
2. Air Filters
3. Air Inlets and Outlets `
4. Packaged Rooftop A/C Units
5. Pumps
6. Low Intensity Infrared Heaters (IRH)
B. Report Forms
1. Title Page:
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
C. Telephone and fax numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency
d. Project name
e. Project location
f. Project Architect
g. Project Engineer
h. Project Contractor
i. Project altitude
j. Report date
2. Summary Comments:
a. Design versus final performance
b. Notable characteristics of system
C. Description of systems operation sequence
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building
pressurization
e. Nomenclature used throughout report
f. Test conditions
3. Instrument List:
a. Instrument "
b. Manufacturer
C. Model number
d. Serial number
e. Range
f. Calibration date
4. Electric Motors:
a. Manufacturer
b. Nameplate Data
C. Model/Frame
d. HP/BHP
e. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load
f. RPM
g. Service factor
h. Starter size, rating, heater elements
i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
5. V-Belt Drive:
a. Identification/location
b. Required driven RPM
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 4
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C.
Driven sheave, diameter and RPM
d.
Belt, size and quantity
e.
Motor sheave diameter and RPM
f.
Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual
6. Air Cooled Condenser:
ell
a.
Identification/number
q
b.
Location
C.
Manufacturer
d.
Nameplate Data
e.
Model number
f.
Serial number
g.
Entering DB air temperature, design and actual
h.
Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual
i.
Number of compressors
7. Air Moving Equipment:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
C.
Nameplate data
d.
Model number
e.
Serial number
f.
Arrangement/Class/Discharge
g.
Air flow, specified and actual
h.
Return air flow, specified and actual
i.
Outside air flow, specified and actual
Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual
k.
Inlet pressure
1.
Discharge pressure
in.
Sheave Make/Size/Bore
n.
Number of Belts/Make/Size
M
o.
Fan RPM
8. Return Air/Outside Air Data:
a.
Identification/location
b.
Design air flow
C.
Actual air flow
d.
Design return air flow
e.
Actual return air flow
f.
Design outside air flow
g.
Actual outside air flow
h.
Return air temperature
i.
Outside air temperature
j.
Required mixed air temperature
k.
Actual mixed air temperature
1.
Design outside/return air ratio
in.
Actual outside/return air ratio
9. Exhaust Fan Data:
a.
Location
b.
Manufacturer
C.
Nameplate data
d.
Model number
es*
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990,5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
e. Serial number
f Air flow, specified and actual
g. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual --
h. Inlet pressure
i. Discharge pressure
j. Sheave Make/Size/Bore
k. Number of Belts/Make/Size
1. Fan RPM
10. Duct Traverse:
a. System zone/branch
b. Duct size
C. Area
d. Design velocity
e. Design air flow
f. Test velocity
g. Test air flow
h. Duct static pressure
i. Air temperature,
j. Air correction factor
11. Duct Leak Test:
a. Description of ductwork under test
b. Duct design operating pressure
C. Duct design test static pressure
d. Duct capacity, air flow
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor
f. Test apparatus
1) Blower
2) Orifice, tube size
3) Orifice size
4) Calibrated
g. Test static pressure
h. Test orifice differential pressure
i. Leakage
12. Air Distribution Test Sheet: —
a. Air terminal number
b. Room number/location
C. Terminal type
d. Terminal size
e. Area factor
f. Design velocity r
g. Design air flow
h. Test (final) velocity
i. Test (final) air flow _
j. Percent of design air flow
END OF SECTION 15990
03860201 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 15990 - 6
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
0
SECTION 16000
BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable provisions of the following:
B. National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)
D. Terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction
pertaining to the work required.
E. All control wiring and associated conduit and boxes that are not specifically indicated in
Division 15 shall be provided under Division 16 sections of the specifications.
F. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials,
labor, transportation, tools, permits, and fees for the complete installation of all electrical work
required in the Contract Drawings.
G. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for
providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in
order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not.
H. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the existing conditions of the site and advise the
Engineer of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding.
I. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required for the project.
All costs of such permits or fees shall be included in the bid.
J. All equipment and material shall be installed in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's
recommendations and standards.
K. Install sleeves, sealant pans, and roof penetrations as required for the installation of the
electrical work. All such work is subject to the approval of the Engineer.
L. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the utility service provider to verify all
locations, routing, equipment and labor that will be fumished as a part of this contract. All fees
associated with the utility service provider's work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. All submittals shall comply with the requirements as specified in other sections.
03860201
08/02
BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES
16000-1
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on
information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical --
requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make any
required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as
required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The �.
complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective
section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless
specified otherwise.
B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in
the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.
C. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the function intended
at the altitude of the project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in
accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel experienced in such work and
shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. The
Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is
to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting
work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In
the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of
skill on the part of workmen. Surfaces requiring coatings will be completed prior to installation
of any electrical work on these surfaces.
B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. The installation requirements shall be carefully
coordinated with structural, architectural and mechanical conditions and shall be adjusted to -i
avoid conflict.
C. All work shall be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases unless specifically noted to be exposed
or otherwise approved. - D. The locations of electrical equipment is approximate and are not intended to convey the exact
details and mounting of location of outlets, equipment and other items. Exact locations are to
be field determined by actual measurements.
E. Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials
1. Disposal: Remove surplus waste material, including trash and debris, and legally dispose
of it off Owner's property unless otherwise directed by Owner. r;
2. Repair: Any damage to structures shall be repaired to previous condition by Contractor
at no additional expense to Owner.
03860201 BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES 16000-2
08/02 —
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS
A.
Thoroughly test all control circuits, fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating
condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All
equipment, appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions.
B.
After the interior wiring system installation is complete conduct operating tests for approval.
When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation, to assure that
all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes
and standards listed in these specifications.
C.
After motor operation has been verified make voltage readings at all panelboards and starters.
Based on these readings, make final adjustments of primary taps on all transformers in the
building as directed, or coordinate with the utility proper building voltage.
D.
Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to
prove acceptability.
E.
Furnish all instruments and labor for testing.
F.
All material installed shall be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing
laboratory such as UL and/or ETL. All material shall bear the UL or ETL label where available.
3.3 SUBMITTAL AND APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
A.
All requirements for submittals shall comply with the applicable provisions included in other
I
specification sections.
B.
Unless identified as a sole source item, the listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers,
etc., on the drawings is intended to establish a standard of quality of the product. It is the
responsibility of the contractor to review all items he intends to submit. Refer to other sections
F s
for substitutions.
END OF SECTION 16000
es,
.s.
03860201
BASIC ELECTRICAL UPGRADES 16000-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Metal conduit.
B.
Flexible metal conduit.
C.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
D.
Electrical metallic tubing.
E.
Two piece surface raceway.
F.
Fittings and conduit bodies.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 07270 - Fire Stopping.
B.
Section 16130 - Boxes.
C.
Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding.
D.
Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
E.
Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
C.
ANSI/NENLk FB I - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
D.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E.
NECA "Standard of Installation."
F.
NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
1.4
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Minimum Conduit Size: 3/4" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install all cables in conduit to include:
1. Power Cables
2. Fire Alarm Cables
3. Communication Cables
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal
conduit, nonmetallic conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.
03860201
08/02
CONDUIT
t
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. —~
B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS --
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.
C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide
appropriate covering.
D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.
B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in.
C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as
required to complete wiring system.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Size: 114" unless otherwise specified.
B. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Use rigid steel or liquid tight flexible conduit.
C. Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing for concealed and exposed locations.
D. Below Slab: Non metallic PVC conduit is acceptable within limitations specified.
E. Below Grade: Use only PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, wrapped rigid steel, or non metallic
PVC conduit within limitations specified.
2.2 METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers: --
1. Allied
2. Wheatland
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings.
03860201 CONDUIT 16111 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
i.
2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Greenfield
2. Electri-Flex
3. Allied Tube
4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted.
C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 with fittings approved for steel flex.
D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment, connections to recessed
lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings. Utilization of 3/8" in lieu of the minimum %2"
is acceptable under the limitations of the National Electrical Code.
2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ultatite
2. Electri-flex
3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior locations.
2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied
2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSUNEMA FB 1; all steel, compression or set screw type with
insulated throats.
D. Applications: Do not use below grade or in exterior locations. Use only in interior locations.
2.6 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Levy
2. Robroy Industries
3. Substitutions; Under provisions of Section 01600.
B. Description: NEMA RN-1, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick.
C. General: Protective layer may be factory applied or galvanized rigid steel conduit may be
applied with two layers of corrosion resistant tape.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coatings to
match conduit.
2.7 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT
A. Carlon or equal
B. Description: NEMA TC2 and TC3 and rated for direct burial, sunlight resistant schedule to
03860201 CONDUIT 16111 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.
D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, and split hangers.
E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel.
F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.
G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary
supports
H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.
I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Fasten two-piece surface raceway with anchors as required by manufacturer.
M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.
N. Maintain 12-inch (300-mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures
exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees Q.
O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends.
P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
Q. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet
locations and to cast boxes.
R. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies
to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal
conduit larger than 2-inch size.
S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
T. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses,
control and expansion joints.
U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.
V. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
W. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170.
X. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.
Y. Ducts shall be cleaned with a flexible mandrel assembly.
Z. All conduits passing vertically through slabs on grade shall be rigid steel or IMC. Rigid steel
and IMC conduits shall be applied with protective coatings as indicated herein.
AA. Underground branch circuit extensions to parking lot lighting fixtures may be direct buried
PVC conduit. All other PVC conduit applications for service entrance shall be concrete encased
in accordance with the drawings.
BB. All feeder and service entrance conduits shall be fitted with bushings provided with grounding
lugs.
03860201 CONDUIT 16111 4
08/02
r"
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
--+ A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods under the provisions of Section 07270.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with
pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation.
END OF SECTION
,r
eel
03860201 CONDUIT 16111 - 5
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
."
SECTION 16123
-=
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
PART
1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES:
A. Building wire and cable.
B. Wiring connectors and connections.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification.
1.3
REFERENCES:
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards.
B. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
C. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment
and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association).
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW:
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION:
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
1.6
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT:
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS:
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
03860201 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Conform to NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
1.9 FIELD SAMPLES:
A. Provide under provisions of Section 01400.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings.
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
C. Conductor sizes are based on copper.
D. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
1.11 COORDINATION:
A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing
and lengths required.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE:
A. Manufacturers:
1. Southwire.
2. American Cable.
3. Houston Wire and Cable.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. Conductor: Copper.
D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
E. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN and XHHW.
2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS:
A. Split Bolt Connectors:
1. Ilsco.
2. Buchanan.
3. Burndy.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:
1. Ilsco.
2. Buchanan.
3. Burndy.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
03860201 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 2
08/02 <=-
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Spring Wire Connectors:
1. Ideal.
r'* 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
D. Compression Connectors:
1. Ilsco.
�.; 2. Buchanan.
3. Burndy.
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
4"
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting
work.
B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.
C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.2 PREPARATION:
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 WIRING METHODS:
A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation,
in raceway.
D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN
insulation, in raceway.
E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation,
in raceway.
F. Use wiring methods indicated.
3.4 INSTALLATION:
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions.
B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.
C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation."
D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.
F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits.
H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.
I. Install all conductors in conduit.
J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.
03860201 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.
L. Protect exposed cable from damage.
M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support
cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
O. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacityof conductors with no perceptible
temperature rise.
R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape
uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating
of conductor.
S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps,
8 AWG and smaller.
T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps,
10 AWG and smaller.
U. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each
conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
V. The number of conductors in each conduit run shall be limited to the requirements as indicated
on the drawings and indicated in Article 310 of the 2002 National Electrical Code.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Field inspection, testing and adjusting.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.
C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1.
END OF SECTION
A
4-
03860201 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 4
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1-GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.
B. Pull and junction boxes.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 07270 - Firestopping.
B. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas.
1.3 REFERENCES:
A. NECA - Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA FB I - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
C.
NEMA OS I - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maiinium.).
E.
NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT:
A.
Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project
record documents.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B.
Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET BOXES:
A.
Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B.
Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include
half -inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required.
C.
Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer.
D.
Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140.
r.
ink
03860201
BOXES 16130-1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction
box:
C. Cast Box Material: Galvanized cast iron.
D. Cast Box Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
A. Verify locations of outlets in all locations prior to rough -in.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling,
equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements.
C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section
for outlet device.
D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust
box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose.
E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140.
F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance.
G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling
access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials
and methods specified in Section 07270.
J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and
backsplashes with Architectural drawings and other trades.
K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan.
L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation.
Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.
P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for
surface finish thickness.
Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.
U. Support boxes independently of conduit.
V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
03860201 BOXES 16130 — 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
r-•
X.
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and interior wet locations.
Y.
Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal
r..
box in other locations.
a
Z.
Coordinate with other trades for box rough in, such that control devices are grouped
(i.e., thermostats, wall switches, volume controls, etc.).
AA.
Refer to Section 16195 for identification requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING:
A.
Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B.
Install knockout closures in unused box openings.
s.
3.4 CLEANING:
A.
Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
N
B.
Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
3.5 REPAIR:
P•
A.
Repair any areas or surfaces damaged during conduit installation.
B.
Paint (resurface) to original condition.
END OF SECTION 16130
w
03860201 BOXES 16130 3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 16140
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
.�.
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Wall switches.
B. Receptacles.
C. Device plates and decorative box covers.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16130 - Boxes.
1.3
REFERENCES
A. NECA - Standard of Installation.
B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.
C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements.
D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and
configurations.
C. Manufacturers with similar catalog numbers will not be considered as a basis for an equivalent
product.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
--
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
,.,
B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the
purpose specified and indicated.
03860201 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell HBL1221-I. --
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600.
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, 20 amp, Heavy -Duty, AC only general -use snap switch.
C. Body and Handle: nylon ivory handles.
D. Utilize equivalent series of manufacturer's numbers above for three-way, four-way and two -
pole applications.
2.2 RECEPTACLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell HBL 5262-I r-
B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty general use specification grade receptacle, with triple
wipe contacts and grounding contacts integral with backstrap (no rivets).
C. Device Body: Ivory plastic.
D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated.
E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20.
F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet
regulatory requirements. Hubbell GF5262-I or equivalent.
2.3 WALL PLATES —
A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel.
B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover on exterior devices.
C. Surface Mounted Plates: Galvanized steel plates
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height.
B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.
C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to
wiring devices.
D. Verify installation location of all boxes to be installed in millwork with Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.
B. Clean debris from outlet boxes.
03860201 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
t•.`
F
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."
B.
Install devices plumb and level.
C.
Install switches with OFF position down.
D.
Install receptacles with grounding pole on top.
E.
Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.
F.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
G.
Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal.
H.
Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
I.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above
accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
J.
Install blank cover plate to match other wall plates on all unused boxes.
3.4
INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A.
Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights
specified and indicated on drawings.
B.
Install all wall switches, thermostats, and fire alarm pull stations at 42 inches above finished
floor.
C.
Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor.
D.
Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter unless otherwise directed
by .Architect.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each wiring device for defects.
B.
Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.
C.
Verify that each receptacle device is energized.
D.
Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.
E.
Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.
3.6
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.
END OF SECTION 16140
03860201 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3
08/02
M
r"I
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16170
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL:
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grounding electrodes and conductors.
B. Equipment grounding conductors.
C. Bonding.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:
A. Section 16670 - Transient Voltage Surge Suppression.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. NPFA 99 - Health Care Facilities.
1.4 GROUNDING FOR ELECTRODE SYSTEM
A. Metal underground water pipe.
B. Rod electrode.
C. Performance Requirements Maximum: Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms.
D. Submittals: Manufacturer's Instructions: Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors.
1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:
A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Accurately record actual locations of
grounding electrodes.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
03860201 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Rod Electrode: A. Rod electrode shall be constructed of Copper or Copper -clad steel. The diameter shall be 3/4
inch. The length shall be 10 feet.
2.2 Below grade Connections and Related Material:
A. All material shall be copper and below grade connections shall be exothermic or compression
type equal to Burndy HyGround (12 ton minimum).
2.3 Wire:
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 Examination: -
A. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
B. Refer to the contract drawings for additional requirements.
3.2 Installation:
A. Install Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install rod electrodes at
locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance
to ground. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in
foundation footing. Bond steel together. Utilize exothermic connections to electrodes, building
steel, underground water pipe and foundation electrode. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory
Requirements.
3.3 Field Quality Control
A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper
installation.
B. Perform three- (3) point fall -of -potential test per IEEE No. 81, Section 9.03 to determine the
ground resistance between the grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, --
system neutral and/or derived neutral points. Utilize test equipment designed for this purpose
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 16170
03860201 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16180
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical connections to equipment specified under other sections.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 16000 - Basic Electrical Methods.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
NEMA WD 1 - General Purpose Wiring Devices.
...
B.
NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device Configurations.
C.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions,
configurations, and construction.
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated
by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B.
Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
1.6 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment
furnished under other sections.
C.
Determine connection locations and requirements.
D.
Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for
qr-
equipment.
E.
Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment.
03860201 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 CORDS AND CAPS
A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.
B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.
C. Cord Construction: ANSI/NFPA 70, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment
grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations.
D. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit
overcurrent protection.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit
with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.
C. Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures
encountered in heat producing equipment.
D. Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is indicated. Provide cord and
cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated.
E. Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
F. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated.
G. Modify equipment control wiring with terminal block jumpers as indicated.
H. Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated.
1. It shall be the responsibility of the Division 16 Contractor to coordinate with other trades to
determine the extent of the electrical requirements for specific equipment.
J. Provide a disconnect and overcurrent protection for all equipment.
K. Verify receptacle configurations and rough -in requirements for all kitchen equipment.
L. Provide for interconnecting conduit, boxes and devices for equipment as required.
END OF SECTION 16180
03860201 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS 16180 - 2
08/02 —�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16190
r~� SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
'~ A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and equipment supports.
B. Anchors and fasteners.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.
B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and shown.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
:^ 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.
B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of
equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.
C. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and
preset inserts.
2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips and steel ramset fasteners.
3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
4. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.
R
5. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".
C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.
D. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.
E. Fabricate supports from structural steel as indicated on drawings. Rigidly weld members or use —
hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use lock
washers under all nuts. -
F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one
inch off wall.
H. Install conduit supports a maximum spacing specified in the NEC.
END OF SECTION 16190
03860201 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section.
1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Nameplates and labels.
B. Wire and cable markers.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
A. Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black
background.
B. Locations:
1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.
2. Communication cabinets, and computer cabinets.
3. Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels.
C. Letter Size:
1. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.
2. Use 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.
3. Use 3/8 inch letters for identifying Main Disconnect equipment.
2.2 WIRE AND CONDUIT MARKERS
A. Description: Brady B-321 Heat -Shrink Polyolefin markers. Typed label to identify each
termination end point of the conductor. DC conductors shall identify polarity.
B. Locations: At each pull box and junction box provide permanent labeling of the cover of each.
All fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red.
C. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.
03860201 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1
.• 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.
B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets.
C. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at
3 inches below finished grade. Identify all conduit at exposed locations into all boxes, cabinets,
etc.
D. Identify all conductors at every termination indicating endpoints of termination and tag
identification as required.
END OF SECTION 16195
03860201 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16421
�-.
ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART1-GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Service racks.
B. Metering transformer cabinets.
C. Meter bases.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.
p
B. Service Entrance: As indicated on drawings.
M
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Electric Meter Cabinet, if required.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
is
A. Submit prepared drawings for transformer installation.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with Utility Company written requirements.
1.7
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
�--
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.8
PRE -INSTALLATION MEETING
�.
A. Convene prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and
details with Utility Company representative.
1.9
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Utility Company drawings.
03860201 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 16421- 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 METERING AND METER BASE
A. Manufacturers: As specified by Utility.
B. Coordinate with the Utility Co. for all requirements and include all fees by the Power Co. in
the project.
PART 3 - EXECUTION:
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Arrange with Utility Company to obtain permanent electric service to the Project.
END OF SECTION
03860201 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 16421- 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 16441
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
r^
PART
1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible switches.
B. Non -fusible switches.
C. Fuses.
1.2
REFERENCES
A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
B. , NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
D. UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
_
E. NEMA AB 1 — Molded Case Circuit Breakers
F. NECA — Standard of Installation
k•
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
.�
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with
minimum three years documented experience.
r
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. Square D
`~
B. General Electric
C. Eaton
D. Siemens
03860201 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-1
h^
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A. Fusible or Non -fusible as indicated.
B. Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with
externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON
position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses.
D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1.
E. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
F. Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4.
G. NEMA ratings of enclosures as specified on drawings take precedence over location
specification.
H. Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting.
2.3 DOUBLE THROW SWITCHES
A. Non- fusible switch assemblies in compliance with the description above the enclosed switches.
2.4 FUSES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bussman
2. Littlefuse
3. Gould Shawmut
B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
C. Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages.
D. Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent.
E. General Purpose Loads: Class RKl, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. —
F. Motor Loads: Class RKS, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation
B. Install fuses in all fusible disconnects.
C. Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NEMA class fuse and
size installed.
D. Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National
Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are furnished
with equipment.
END OF SECTION 16441
03860201 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441-2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16470
,-- PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. Related Sections
1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
•- 1. Branch circuit panelboards.
B. References
1. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation."
2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
�,. 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.
6. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support
point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit
breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
,.., A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate
actual branch circuit arrangement.
,r 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
b A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data
listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
03860201 PANELBOARDS 16470 -1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. --
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum five years experience.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable
for purpose specified and indicated.
1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.
1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of each
panelboard key if required.
PART2-PRODUCTS _
2.1 PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. General Electric
2. Square-D
3. Westinghouse
B. Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type
C. Panelboard Bus: Copper with rating as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each
panelboard.
D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated.
Series rated systems will be allowed. Minimum calculated values are labeled on each
panelboard and are indicated as "AIC:
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt on, circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breaker UL listed as type HACR for
air conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications. Breakers over 225
amps shall be provided adjustable instantaneous magnetic and thermal trips.
F. Enclosed: NEMA PB — 1, Type 1.
G. Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings, fastened with concealed
trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in manufacturer's
standard gray enamel.
03860201 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. Install panelboards plumb. Provide
supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft maximum to top of
panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit
directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes
required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on
directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure
steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to
balance the phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for
multi -wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage,
proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of
connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION
03860201 PANELBOARDS 16470-3
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
r
SECTION 16481
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION
INCLUDES
A.
Manual motor starters.
B.
Magnetic motor starters.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16190 - Supporting Devices.
B.
Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B.
UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type.
C.
UL 198E - Class R Fuses.
D.
NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association.
E.
NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
F.
NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
G.
NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
H.
A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of
switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure
details.
C.
Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include
instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting
of Product.
., 1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation.
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
F,
03860201
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 1
,.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose
specified and indicated.
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Westinghouse.
B. Square - D.
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 MANUAL CONTROLLERS
A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated,
full -voltage controller with overload element, red pilot light and push button operator.
B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A
manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with
thermal overload unit, red pilot light and toggle operator. C. Motor Starting Switch: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated,
full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, without thermal overload
unit, with red pilot light and toggle operator.
D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type as indicated.
2.3 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller
for induction motors rated in horsepower.
B. Coil operating voltage: As indicated.
C. Overload Relay: Solid State type.
D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type as indicated.
2.4 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES
A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each normally open contacts in addition to seal -in contact.
B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, standard duty type.
C. Pilot Device Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Form Z, rated A150.
D. Pushbuttons: Unguarded type.
E. Indicating Lights: Incandescent type.
F. Selector Switches: Rotary type.
G. Relays: NEMA ICS 2.
H. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and
bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure.
03860201 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 2
08/02
r-�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
2.5 DISCONNECTS
A. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable
handle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190.
C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle.
D. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor
characteristics.
E. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.
F. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served,
nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2.
03860201
08/02
END OF SECTION 16481
ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS
16481 - 3
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories.
B. Exit signs.
C. Ballasts.
D. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply.
E. Lamps.
F. Luminaire accessories.
1.2
REFERENCES
,...
A. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications.
B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements.
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard
product of the manufacturer.
B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
�-
1.4
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience.
1.6
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
�.,
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
1.7
EXTRA PRODUCTS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
03860201 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 — 1
,,.,
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PART2-PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMINAIRES
A. Furnish Products as scheduled.
2.2 EXIT SIGNS
A. Furnish products as scheduled.
2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Advance.
2. Motorola.
3. Magnatek.
B. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast, suitable for lamps
specified.
C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage.
D. Source Quality Control: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast
Manufacturers, Inc.
E. All ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, with a sound rating of Class A and shall contain no
PCBs.
F. Ballasts shall comply with 47 CFR 18 for electromagnetic interference and shall not interfere
with the operation of other electrical equipment. G. Unless otherwise indicated (i.e. dual switches) the minimum number of ballasts per fixture shall
be used.
H. Light output regulation shall be +/- 10%.
I. Power factor shall not be less than 0.95.
J. A 60 Hz filter shall be provided.
2.4 LAMPS
A. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers: _
1. Sylvania.
2. General Electric.
3. Philips.
B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Provide 3500 degrees Kelvin lamps for all fluorescent
fixtures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install suspended luminaries using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant _
length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan.
03860201 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 — 2
08/02 --
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines
and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
D. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from
building structure.
E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory
requirements for fire rating in locations where fire rated ceilings are present.
G. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place.
H. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated
on Drawings or as scheduled.
I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for
temperature conditions within luminaire.
K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment -grounding conductor.
L. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and
operation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed.
B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials.
B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion.
03860201
08/02
END OF SECTION 16510
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
16510 — 3
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
W
SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this
section.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items
specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide dimensions and
materials of each component, and include indication of listing in accordance with UL 96.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Indicate layout
of air terminals, grounding electroctrodes, and bonding connections to structure and other
metal objects. Include terminal, electrode, and conductor sizes, and connection and
termination details.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit for review Manufacturer's Certification. Certify that
Products meet or exceed specified requirements. Include copy of manufacturer's certified
drawings in project record documents. Submit certificate of compliance from Underwriter's
Laboratories indicating approval of lightning protection systems.
1.3 SCOPE
A. Description: The work shall the design and installation of a complete Master Labeled
Lightning Protection System. Work includes layout, design, securing approval of all
authorities having jurisdiction, and the furnishing and installation of all components. The
installation shall be in strict compliance with the applicable requirements of NFPA 780.
Materials shall be listed by UL and labeled for the duty required.
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
e
A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code)
07 and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances.
B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as
suitable for purpose specified and shown.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
v-r A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings.
B. Verify exact placement of equipment and coordinate with architectural elements to determine
the location of system components.
t
03860201 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-1
,,,., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections.
B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of air terminals, grounding electrodes,
bonding connections, and routing of system conductors in project record documents
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Perform Work in accordance with NFPA-780 Perform Work in accordance with UL
96A and provide Master Label.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Installer: Authorized installer of manufacturer with minimum three years documented
experience and certified by the Lightning Protection Institute
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate with all disciplines to determine what building materials, roofing structure etc. that
will be included in the design.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. General: Lightning protection equipment shall be as manufactured by Robins Lightning
Protection, Thompson Lightning Protection or approved equivalent.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Air Terminals: Air terminals shall be made from a solid copper rod drawn to a sharp point, _
threaded to fit the base and tipped with a bright nickel plating. Rods shall be ''/2 " in diameter
and 24" long. Bases shall be suitable for flat surface adhesive mounting and shall be
constructed of heavy cast bronze of aluminum.
B. Grounding Rods: 1/4" round by 10' long copperclad steel.
C. Main Conductors: Main roof cable and down conductor cable shall consist of a minimum of
32 strands of 17 gage bare copper wire in a smooth or basket weave configuration having a _
diameter of 7/16 inch, 65,500 circular mil cross section, and a weight of 204 pounds per 1000
feet.
D. Secondary Conductor: Secondary bonding cable shall consist of a minimum of 14 strands of
17 gage bare copper wire in a smooth weave configuration, having a diameter of `/4 inch,
28,600 circular mil cross section, and a weight of 90 pounds per 1000 feet.
E. Connectors and Splicers: Fasteners for roof cable shall be installed not more than 36" apart
and shall be adhesive cable holders. Provide and install clamps and connectors as required for _
complete installation. All such devices shall be copper.
03860201 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-2
08/02 --
r�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO.6
F. Ground Rods: around rods shall by 3/a" x 10', Copperclad steel and shall adhere to the
requirements of Section 16170.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examination: Examine surfaces conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the lightning protection
system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. General: Install lightning protection system as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Install in accordance with NFPA 780 and UL 96A.
C. Connections: Connect conductors using exothermic welding process. Protect adjacent
construction elements and finishes from damage.
D. Bonding: Bond exterior metal bodies on building to lightning protection system.
E. Wiring: All wiring and down conductors shall be concealed within the building construction.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. UL Label: The installation shall be strict accordance with the latest requirements of the
�• Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Installation Requirements for Master Labeled Lightning
Protection Systems. Obtain the services of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. to provide
inspection and labeling of the lightning protection system in accordance with UL 96A
END OF SECTION 16670
03860201 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEMS 16670-3
,., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
SECTION 16721
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manual fire alarm stations.
B.
Automatic detectors.
C.
Fire alarm -signaling appliances.
D.
Auxiliary fire alarm equipment.
1.2
RELATED
SECTIONS
A.
16111 — Conduit
B.
16123 - Building Wire and Cable
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B.
NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code.
C.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
D.
State of Texas Accessibility Standards
E.
Federal American's with Disability's Act.
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Fire Alarm System: System is comprised of a new manual and automatic local fire alarm system
with connections for off site reporting.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
B.
Shop Drawings: Provide a system layout and wiring diagram showing each device and the
wiring connections that are required.
C.
Test Reports: Provide testing reports for certification that the system has been tested and
inspected.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate the application conditions and limitations of
use stipulated by the Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling,
protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products.
E.
Battery calculations.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified
in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
03860201 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 1
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years documented experience, and certified by State of Texas as fire alarm
installer.
D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm acceptable to the
authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for one year from Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Notifier.
B. Firelite.
C. Pyrotronics.
D. Silent Knight
2.2 FIRE ALARMIVOICE EVACUATION CONTROL PANEL
A. Control Panel: The control panel shall be a four -zone, non -coded, Silent Knight 5204 or
approved equal. The system shall be microprocessor controlled and shall communicate with
intelligent detectors, addressable modules, annunciators and other system controlled devices.
B. The system shall include alarm and trouble relays.
C. The control panel shall feature a full operator interface control and annunciation panel. All
programming shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm
monitoring functions of the Control panel.
D. The following minimum features shall be included in the Control Panel:
1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life.
2. Sensitivity Test compliant with NFPA 72.
3. System status reports for display.
4. Programmable from the on -board touch pad.
5. Periodic detector tests conducted automatically by system software.
6. March time and temporal coding options.
7. Walk test option.
8. Alarm signals shall not be lost following a power outage until the signal is processed.
9. Real time clock for logging events.
E. The system display shall provide all system control and indication of the system parameters.
The display shall include operator functions for SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, AND
ACKNOWLEDGE.
F. Provide necessary converter to operate four Class A initiating circuits.
G. The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for flush mounting. The door
shall be key locked and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all
indicators.
H. All alarm circuits shall be configured for Class A.
03860201 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 — 2
08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
PON
I. The system power supply and battery charger shall operate on 120 volts, 60 Hz. and shall
provide for all of the power needs of the system.
•— J. Any proposed control panel substitutions shall also comply with all other system features that
are included with the system specified by manufacturer name and number indicated as a part
of this specification.
K. Provide for any necessary interface devices as required to operate SLC and NAC circuits to
accommodate the required distances.
L. Annunciators shall be provided with controls functions for acknowledge, silence reset and test
control.
2.3 INITIATING DEVICES
A. Manual Station: Semi -Flush mounted, addressable type, double action manual station with key
operated test -reset lock, and shall be so designed so they cannot be restored to normal position
except by the use of a key. Station shall have the word "FIRE" on the front of the unit in raised
letters. Stations shall be red in color. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox.
B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors: The detectors shall use the photoelectric
(light -scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control
panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. Detectors shall
include a twist -lock base with a tamper proof feature. The detectors shall provide a test means
whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel.
Such a test may be initiated by the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch).
C. Thermal Detectors: Provide, fixed temperature 135 degrees F detectors where indicated. At
locations where high temperature detectors are shown, provide 194 degrees F units.
D. Modules: Monitor and control modules shall be provided for the system as required for the
operations as indicated. Control modules for Notification Appliance Circuits shall supervise
the circuits and shall be wired as Style Z in accordance with NFPA.
2.4 SIGNALING APPLIANCES
A. Audible/Visual Devices: The devices shall be combination speaker/light units. The audible
portion of the device shall have a sound output level of at least 85 dBA measured at 10 feet
from the device. This visual portion of the devices shall meet the requirements of the
American's with Disability's Act and the Texas Accessibility Standards. Minimum candela
level for the strobe light intensity shall be 75 and the flash rate shall be a minimum of 1 Hz and
a maximum of 3 Hz. The maximum flash duration shall be two -tenths of one second. All visual
devices shall be synchronized.
B. All Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 72,
Class A, style Z wiring.
2.5 AUXILIARY DEVICES
A. Connection to shut down all mechanical equipment provided with duct -mounted smoke
detectors and all mechanical equipment that has associated smoke dampers upon initiation of
general alarm.
B. Provide 120V power, control transformers and control wiring as required for connection to any
,�. equipment associated with the shut down and control of mechanical equipment.
C. Provide for all control wiring and connections for interface with tamper and flow switches
associated with the suppression system. Coordinate with fire protection suppression contractor
for all locations.
03860201 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS " 16721 — 3
,.., 08/02
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
D. Carbon monoxide detectors shall be 120 V, UL Listed devices and shall be provided with alarm
Contacts that shall be monitored by the control panel. Provide a dedicated 120V source for all
carbon monoxide detectors.
2.6 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE
A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123.
B. Fire alarm circuit conductors have insulation color or coded as follows:
C. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, and white.
D. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red.
E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative).
F. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit.
G. All fire alarm wiring shall be UL listed for use as a fire protective signaling system.
H. All wiring shall comply with the recommendations by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide for the service of a competent, factory -trained engineer or technician authorized by the
manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of
the adjustments and tests for the system. All software modifications shall be supervised by this
technician. All testing shall comply with NFPA.
B. Before energizing the wiring, check for correct connections and tests for shorts and grounds.
C. Install manual station with operating handle 42" inches above floor. Install audible and visual
signal devices at 80" above floor.
D. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA
E. At a minimum provide the following systems tests:
1. Open and short signal line circuits and verify that a trouble signal actuates and alarm
receipt is present.
2. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates and
alarm receipt is present.
3. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals and alarm receipt is present.
4. Check presence and audibility of tone at all notification devices.
5. Check the installation, supervision and operation of all initiating devices.
6. Check proper operation of door release, damper operation and mechanical unit
shutdown.
7. All alarm inputs and optional features shall be verified.
F. All smoke detectors shall be firmly supported to the ceiling. On lay -in ceiling, secure detectors
with suitable ceiling grid bridges that fasten securely to two grid runners.
03860201 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 — 4
08/02
r�
LUBBOCK FIRE STATION NO. 6
v
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
,•- A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections,
and system testing.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.
END OF SECTION 16721
03860201 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 — 5
�., 08/02
h